JP2019135011A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of cooling heat generated when light-emitting means is operated.SOLUTION: The game machine includes air blow holes 512, 522 formed on an upper base 510 and a lower base 520 of a rotary unit 500 in which an irradiation unit 530 including a plurality of LEDs 532 is disposed. With rotational displacement of the rotary unit 500, air outside the rotary unit 500 can be inserted inside the rotary unit 500 from the air blow hole 511 of the upper base 510 and the air blow hole 521 of the lower base 520. This configuration can cool heat generated when the LEDs 532 of the irradiation unit 530 disposed inside the rotary unit 500 are operated.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 35

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

  In gaming machines such as pachinko machines, gaming machines having a plurality of light emitting means (LEDs) and having a rotation display device that displays an afterimage by an afterimage effect by blinking the light emitting means according to the rotation position are known. (Patent Documents 1 and 2).

Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2015-100385 Japanese Patent Laying-Open No. 2015-053968

  However, the gaming machine described above has a problem that it is difficult to cool the light emitting means when the light emitting means is accommodated in the main body member.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of cooling the heat generated when the light emitting means operates.

  In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 includes a rotating display device that has a plurality of light emitting means and performs afterimage display by an afterimage effect by blinking the light emitting means according to the rotational position. The rotary display device includes a substrate on which the plurality of light emitting means are arranged, a main body member that accommodates the substrate, and a base member that pivotally supports the main body member, The main body member includes a transmission part that transmits light of the light emitting means and a plurality of through holes that are formed through the side wall facing in the rotation direction.

  A gaming machine according to a second aspect is the gaming machine according to the first aspect, wherein the main body member is formed in a container shape having an open back side.

  A gaming machine according to a third aspect is the gaming machine according to the second aspect, wherein the main body member is formed in a rectangular shape in a front view that is a long shape along a diametrical direction in a rotation plane of the main body member. Is formed in a curved shape that recedes to the back side toward the end in the longitudinal direction.

  According to the gaming machine of the first aspect, the heat generated when the light emitting means operates can be cooled.

  According to the gaming machine of the second aspect, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine of the first aspect, the heat generated when the light emitting means operates can be cooled.

  According to the gaming machine of the third aspect, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine according to the second aspect, heat generated when the light emitting means operates can be cooled.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in a 1st embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is a front perspective view of an operation unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of a vertical displacement unit. It is a rear view of a vertical displacement unit. It is a front perspective view of a vertical displacement unit. It is a back perspective view of an up-and-down displacement unit. It is a front perspective view of a vertical displacement unit. It is a back perspective view of an up-and-down displacement unit. (A) is a front view of a vertical displacement unit, (b) is a rear view of the vertical displacement unit. (A) is a front view of a vertical displacement unit, (b) is a rear view of the vertical displacement unit. (A) is a front view of a vertical displacement unit, (b) is a rear view of the vertical displacement unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a control unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a roller member. (A) is a side view of a restriction unit, (b) is a rear view of the restriction unit, and (c) is a cross-sectional view of the restriction unit taken along line XXc-XXc in FIG. 20 (b). It is a front view of the up-and-down displacement unit in the 1st position. (A) is an enlarged view of the vertical displacement unit in the XXII part of FIG. 21, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the vertical displacement unit along the line XXIIb-XXIIb of FIG. 22 (a). (A) to (c) is a partially enlarged front view of the vertical displacement unit. (A) is sectional drawing of the vertical displacement unit in the XXIVa-XXIVa line of Fig.23 (a), (b) is sectional drawing of the vertical displacement unit in the XXIVb-XXIVb line of Fig.23 (b), (C) is sectional drawing of the vertical displacement unit in the XXIVc-XXIVc line | wire of FIG.23 (c). It is a disassembled front perspective view of a decorative member. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a decorative member. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a rotation unit. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a rotation unit. (A) is a top view of the rotation unit, (b) is a front view of the rotation unit in the XXIXb direction view of FIG. 29 (a), and (c) is XXIXc-XXIXc of FIG. 29 (a). It is sectional drawing of the rotation unit in a line. (A) is a top view of an intermediate member, (b) is sectional drawing of the intermediate member in the XXXb-XXXb line | wire of Fig.30 (a). (A) is a front view of a front cover, (b) is the elements on larger scale of the front cover in the XXXIB-XXXIb line | wire of Fig.31 (a). (A) is a top view of a reflector, (b) is the elements on larger scale of the reflector in the XXXIIb-XXXIIb line | wire of Fig.32 (a). (A) is a top view of a rotation unit, FIG.33 (b) is sectional drawing of the rotation unit in the XXXIIIb-XXXIIIb line | wire of (a). (A) And (b) is the elements on larger scale of the rotation unit in the XXXIV section of Drawing 33 (b). (A) And (b) is a front view of a rotation unit. (A) And (b) is a top view of a rotation unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a center frame. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a center frame. (A) is a front view of a center frame, (b) is sectional drawing of the center frame in the XXXIXb-XXXIXb line | wire of Fig.39 (a). (A) is sectional drawing of the center frame in the XLa-XLa line | wire of Fig.39 (a), (b) is sectional drawing of the center frame in the XLb-XLb line | wire of Fig.39 (a). (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of a rotation unit and a center frame. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a distribution apparatus. It is a partial expanded front view of a distribution apparatus. It is sectional drawing of the distribution apparatus in the XLIV-XLIV line | wire of FIG. (A) is sectional drawing of the distribution apparatus in the XLVa-XLVa line of FIG. 43, (b) is sectional drawing of the distribution apparatus in the XLVb-XLVb line of FIG. 45 (a), (c) is a figure. It is sectional drawing of the distribution apparatus in 43 XLVc-XLVc line, (d) is sectional drawing of the distribution apparatus in the XLVd-XLVd line of FIG. (A) is sectional drawing of a distribution apparatus, (b) is sectional drawing of a distribution apparatus. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a light emission decoration unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of the control unit in 2nd Embodiment. (A) is a side view of the regulation unit, (b) is a rear view of the regulation unit, and (c) is a cross-sectional view of the regulation unit along the XLIXc-XLIXc line in FIG. 49 (b). (A) to (c) are cross-sectional views of the vertical displacement unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of the distribution apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. It is a partial expanded front view of a distribution apparatus. (A) is sectional drawing of the distribution apparatus in the LIIIa-LIIIa line of FIG. 52, (b) is sectional drawing of the distribution apparatus in the LIIIb-LIIIb line of FIG.52 (b). (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of a distribution apparatus. (A) is a front view of the distribution apparatus in 4th Embodiment, (b) is sectional drawing of the distribution apparatus in the LVb-LVb line | wire of FIG. 55 (a), (c) is FIG. It is sectional drawing of the distribution apparatus in the LVc-LVc line | wire of b). It is sectional drawing of the center frame 600 as a modification.

  Embodiments of the present invention will be described below with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIGS. 1 to 47, as a first embodiment, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 1 will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 1 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 1, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 1.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 1 includes an outer frame 2 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer shape 2 that is formed in substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 2. And an inner frame 4 supported to be openable and closable. In order to support the inner frame 4, the outer frame 2 is provided with metal hinges 18 at two positions on the left and right of the front view (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinges 18 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 4 is supported so as to be openable and closable to the front front side.

  A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63, 64, and the like is detachably mounted on the inner frame 4 from the back side. A ball ball game is played when a ball (game ball) flows down the front of the game board 13. The inner frame 4 has a ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that launches a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launch unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 4, a front door 5 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower dish unit 15 that covers the lower side thereof are provided. In order to support the front door 5 and the lower tray unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to two places on the left and right sides of the front view (see FIG. 1), and the front door is provided with the side on which the hinges 19 are provided as an opening / closing axis. 5 and the lower pan unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front front side. The locking of the inner frame 4 and the locking of the front door 5 are respectively released by inserting a dedicated key into the key hole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front door 5 is an assembly of decorative resin parts, electrical parts, and the like, and a window portion 5c that is formed in an approximately elliptical shape is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two sheet glasses 8 is disposed on the back side of the front door 5, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 1 through the glass unit 16.

  On the front door 5, an upper plate 17 that stores balls is formed in a substantially box shape that protrudes forward and has an open upper surface, and prize balls and rental balls are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the sphere thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 4). A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player when, for example, changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or changing the contents of the effect of super reach. The

  The front door 5 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front door (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means play a role of enhancing the effect of the game during the game by changing or controlling the light emission mode by turning on or blinking according to the change of the gaming state at the time of big hit or predetermined reach. On the periphery of the window portion 5c, there are provided electric decoration portions 29 to 33 incorporating light emitting means such as LEDs. In the pachinko machine 1, these lighting parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and the lighting parts 29 to 33 are turned on by lighting or blinking of the built-in LEDs at the time of jackpots or reach effects. Alternatively, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is being hit or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left part of the front door 5 as viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), a light-emitting means such as an LED is incorporated, and a display lamp 34 is provided that can display when a prize ball is being paid out and when an error occurs.

  Further, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front door 5 can be visually recognized on the lower side of the right-side electric decoration part 32, and an adhering space K1 (see FIG. 2) can be viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 1. In addition, in the pachinko machine 1, a plated member 36 made of ABS resin that is chrome-plated is attached to the area around the electric decoration parts 29 to 33 in order to bring out more gorgeousness.

  A ball rental operation unit 40 is disposed below the window 5c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated in a state where a bill or a card is inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 1, Loans are made. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the remaining amount information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED is lit to display the remaining amount as the remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as there is a remaining amount on the card or the like. Is done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted into the card unit. In addition, in a pachinko machine in which a ball is lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without using a card unit, a so-called cash machine does not require the ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 It is also possible to add a decorative seal or the like to the installation portion of the parts so that the component configuration is common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower plate unit 15 located on the lower side of the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing a ball that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape having an open upper surface. Yes. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 that is operated by a player to drive a ball into the front surface of the game board 13 is disposed.

  Inside the operation handle 51, a touch sensor 51a for permitting driving of the ball launch unit 112a, a launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball during the pressing operation, and a rotation of the operation handle 51. A variable resistor (not shown) that detects the amount of movement (rotation position) based on a change in electrical resistance is incorporated. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the amount of rotation operation. The resistance value of the variable resistor A ball is fired with a strength corresponding to (shooting strength), and the ball is driven into the front surface of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the player's operation. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are turned off.

  In the lower part of the front of the lower plate 50, a ball removal lever 52 is provided for operating when the balls stored in the lower plate 50 are discharged downward. The ball removal lever 52 is always urged in the right direction. By sliding the ball release lever 52 in the left direction against the urge, the bottom opening formed in the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. A ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removal lever 52 is normally performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as “a thousand box”) for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. As described above, the operation handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 includes a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, a large number of nails (not shown) for ball guidance, a windmill, rails 76 and 77, and a general prize. The opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, the variable winning device 65, the first through gates 66 and 67, the variable display device unit 80, and the like are assembled, and the peripheral portion thereof is the inner frame 4 (FIG. 1). (See below). The base plate 60 is made of wood on which thin plate materials are laminated, and is formed so that various structures disposed on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side cannot be seen by the player. The general winning port 63, the first winning port 64, the second winning port 640, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are disposed in a through hole formed in the base plate 60 by router processing. It is fixed from the front side with a tapping screw or the like.

  The front center portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 4 through the window portion 5c (see FIG. 1) of the front door 5. The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below mainly with reference to FIG.

  An outer rail 77 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and the strip-shaped metal plate is located at an inner position of the outer rail 77 in the same manner as the outer rail 77. The arc-shaped inner rail 76 formed in the above is planted. The outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rail 76 and the outer rail 77, and the front and rear are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is an area formed on the front surface of the game board 13 and defined by two rails 76 and 77 and a resin outer edge member 73 that connects the rails (a winning opening is provided and fired). Area where the falling sphere flows).

  The two rails 76 and 77 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the front end portion of the inner rail 76 (the upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide path again. Is done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 77 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the sphere, and the ball launched at a predetermined momentum or more hits the return rubber 69 and gains momentum. Is bounced back to the center while being attenuated.

  A first symbol display device 37A, 37B including a plurality of LEDs serving as light emitting means and a 7-segment display is disposed in the lower left portion of the game area when viewed from the front (lower left portion in FIG. 2). The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the gaming state of the pachinko machine 1. In the present embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37 </ b> A and 37 </ b> B are configured to be selectively used depending on whether the ball has won the first prize opening 64 or the second prize opening 640. Specifically, when the ball wins the first winning opening 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, while when the ball wins the second winning opening 640, the first symbol display device 37A operates. The symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

  In addition, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B indicate, by means of LEDs, whether the pachinko machine 1 is in a certain change, in a short time, or in a normal state by a lighting state, or whether a pachinko machine 1 is changing or not by a lighting state. , Indicating whether the stop symbol is a symbol corresponding to a probable jackpot, a symbol corresponding to a normal jackpot, or a symbol that is out of place by a lighting state, indicating the number of held balls by a lighting state, and a 7-segment display device, Displays numbers and errors. The plurality of LEDs are configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of the respective LEDs are different, and the combination of the emission colors may suggest various gaming states of the pachinko machine 1 with a small number of LEDs. it can.

  In the present pachinko machine 1, a lottery is performed when there is a winning in either the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 640. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 1 determines whether or not it is a big hit (big hit lottery), and also determines the big hit type if it is determined to be a big hit. As the jackpot type determined here, 15R probability variation jackpot, 4R probability variation jackpot, and 15R normal jackpot are prepared. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B not only indicate whether or not the lottery result is a jackpot as a stop symbol after the end of the variation, but if it is a jackpot, a symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is displayed. .

  Here, the “15R probability variation jackpot” is a probability variation jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to a high probability state after a jackpot of 15 rounds, and “4R probability variation jackpot” is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of four. It is a probabilistic jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after. In addition, “15R normal jackpot” is a jackpot that shifts to a low probability state after the maximum number of rounds of 15 rounds and hits a short time during a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations). is there.

  In addition, the “high probability state” means a state in which the jackpot probability thereafter increases as an added value after the jackpot ends, that is, when the probability change is in progress (probability change), in other words, a game that easily shifts to the special game state. It is a state of. The high probability state (during probability change) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the hit probability of the second symbol, which will be described later, is increased and the ball is likely to win the second winning opening 640. The “low probability state” refers to a time when the probability of jackpot change is not occurring, and a state where the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state where the jackpot probability is lower than that at the time of probability change. The short time state (short time medium) of the “low probability state” means that the jackpot probability is a normal state, and the jackpot probability remains as it is, and only the hit probability of the second symbol is increased, and the second prize opening 640 is obtained. It means the state of the game where the ball is easy to win. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 1 is in a normal state, it is a game state in which neither the probability change nor the time is short (the state where neither the big hit probability nor the second symbol hit probability has been increased).

  During probability change and short time, not only does the probability of winning the second symbol increase, but also the time for opening the first electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is changed, which is longer than normal. Time is set. When the first electric combination 640a is in the opened state (open state), the second prize opening 640 is compared with the case where the first electric combination 640a is in the closed state (closed state). The ball is ready to win. Therefore, during the probability change or the short time, it becomes easy for the ball to win the second winning opening 640, and the number of jackpot lotteries can be increased.

  In addition, during the probability change or during the short time, instead of changing the opening time of the first electric accessory 640a attached to the second prize opening 640, or in addition to changing the opening time, Thus, the number of times the first electric accessory 640a is opened may be changed to be larger than normal. In addition, the probability of winning the second symbol is not changed during the probability change or in the short time, and the first electric accessory is determined at the time when the first electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is opened and once. It is good also as what changes at least one of the frequency | count that 640a opens. In addition, during the time of probability change or during a short time, the first electric combination 640a and the second electric combination 82 are opened at the time when the first electric combination 640a attached to the second prize opening 640 is opened or once. The number of hits may not be performed, and only the probability of hitting the second symbol may be changed so as to increase compared to the normal rate.

  The game area is provided with a plurality of general winning ports 63 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as winning balls when the balls win. In addition, a variable display device unit 80 is disposed in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is synchronized with the variable display on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, triggered by any one of the first winning port 64 and the second winning port 640 (starting winning) as a trigger. The 3rd symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply abbreviated as “display device”) for displaying the symbols in a variable manner, and the 2nd symbol in a variable manner with the passage of the first through gates 66 and 67 as a trigger. And a second symbol display device (not shown) composed of LEDs.

  The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a center frame 600 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81. The third symbol display device 81 can be visually recognized from the opening opened in the center of the center frame 600.

  The third symbol display device 81 is constituted by a large 9-inch liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4). One symbol row is displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbol). These third symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol column, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It is like that. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the game state is displayed on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B in accordance with the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4). The decorative display according to the display of the symbol display devices 37A and 37B is performed. Instead of the display device, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using, for example, a reel.

  Each time the sphere passes through the first through gates 66 and 67, the second symbol display device displays the symbol “◯” and the symbol “X” as a display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) for a predetermined time. The variable display is alternately turned on. In the pachinko machine 1, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the first through gates 66 and 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if the winning symbol is a winning symbol, the symbol “◯” is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation of the second symbol is displayed. Further, if the winning lottery results, the symbol of “x” is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation of the third symbol is displayed.

  In the pachinko machine 1, when the variable display on the second symbol display device stops at a predetermined symbol (in this embodiment, a symbol “◯”), the first electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is It is configured to be activated (opened) for a predetermined time.

  The time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set to be shorter during the probability change or during the shorter time than when the game state is normal. As a result, during the probability change and during the time reduction, since the variation display of the second symbol is performed in a short time, the winning lottery can be performed more than during normal. Therefore, since the chances for winning in the winning lottery increase, the player can be given many opportunities for the first electric accessory 640a of the second winning opening 640 to be in an open state. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the ball to win the second winning opening 640 during the probability change and during the short time.

  In addition, during the probability change or in the short time, the second winning a prize opening during the probability change or in the short time can also be achieved by other methods such as increasing the probability of winning during the time of the change or increasing the number of times the first electric accessory 640a is released per time. When it is in a state in which a ball is likely to enter the 640 and the third winning opening, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, when the time required for displaying the variation of the second symbol is set shorter than normal during probability change or short time, the winning probability may be constant regardless of the gaming state, The opening time and the number of opening times of the first electric accessory 640a may be constant regardless of the gaming state.

  The first through gates 66 and 67 are assembled to the game board in areas on both sides of the variable display device unit 80. The first through gates 66 and 67 are configured such that, of the balls launched on the game board, a part of the balls flowing down the game board can pass therethrough. When the ball passes through the first through gates 66 and 67, the second symbol winning lottery is performed. After winning the lottery, the 2nd symbol display device displays a variation, and if the winning lottery results, the symbol “○” is displayed as the variable display stop symbol, and the winning lottery result may be off For example, the symbol “x” is displayed as the stop symbol of the variable display.

  The total number of passes of the first through gates 66 and 67 of the sphere is reserved up to a total of four times, and the number of the reserved balls is displayed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B described above and the second symbol hold lamp (see FIG. (Not shown) is also lit. Four second symbol holding lamps are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

  In addition, the variable display of the second symbol is performed by switching on and off of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol. A part of the symbol display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. In addition, the maximum number of balls held for the passage of the first through gates 66 and 67 is not limited to 4 times, but is set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Also good. Further, the number of through gates to be assembled is not limited to two, and may be three or more. Further, the assembly position of the through gate is not limited to the left and right sides of the variable display device unit 80, and may be, for example, below the variable display device unit 80. In addition, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second symbol hold lamp may not perform lighting display.

  Below the variable display unit 80, a first winning port 64 through which a ball can win is disposed. When a ball wins the first winning port 64, a first winning port switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller 110 is caused by the first winning port switch being turned on. A jackpot lottery is made (see FIG. 4), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37A.

  On the other hand, a second winning port 640 through which a ball can win is disposed below the first winning port 64 in front view. When a ball wins the second winning port 640, a second winning port switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller 110 ( (See FIG. 4), the jackpot lottery is made, and the display corresponding to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37B.

  In addition, each of the first winning port 64 and the second winning port 640 is also one of the winning ports through which five balls are paid out as winning balls when a ball is won. In the present embodiment, the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball wins the first prize opening 64 and the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball wins the second prize slot 640 are configured to be the same. The number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball wins the first prize opening 64 is different from the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball wins to the second prize opening 640, for example, the ball to the first prize opening 64 The number of prize balls to be paid out when a prize is won may be three, and the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball wins the second prize opening 640 may be five.

  The first winning combination 640a is attached to the second winning opening 640. The first electric combination 640a is configured to be openable and closable. Normally, the first electric combination 640a is in a closed state (reduced state), and the ball is unlikely to win the second winning opening 640. Yes. On the other hand, when the symbol “◯” is displayed on the second symbol display device as a result of the variable symbol display of the second symbol that is triggered by the passage of the ball to the first through gates 66 and 67, the first electric accessory 640a is in the open state (enlarged state), and the ball is in a state where it is easy to win the second winning opening 640.

  As described above, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher than that during normal change during the probability change and the short time, and the time required for the variation display of the second symbol is short. "Is easily displayed, and the number of times that the first electric accessory 640a is opened (enlarged) is increased. Furthermore, during the time of probability change or time reduction, the time during which the first electric accessory 640a is opened also becomes longer than during normal time. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the ball to win the second winning opening 640 when the probability is changing or when the time is short.

  Here, the probability of winning a big hit is the same in both the low probability state and the high probability state when the ball wins the first winning port 64 and when the ball wins the second winning port 640. However, the probability that a 15R probability variation jackpot is selected as the jackpot type selected when the jackpot is won is higher when the ball wins the second winning slot 640 than when the ball wins the first winning slot 64. Is set. On the other hand, the first winning port 64 does not have the first electric accessory 640a as in the second winning port 640, and the ball is in a state where the ball can always be won.

  Therefore, during normal times, the electric winnings associated with the second winning opening 640 are often in a closed state, and it is difficult to win the second winning opening 640. The person who aimed to win a lot of opportunities to win a lottery by winning the first winning opening 64 by launching the ball so that the ball passes to the left of the variable display unit 80, It is advantageous for the player.

  On the other hand, during probability change and time reduction, by passing the ball through the first through gates 66 and 67, the first electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is easily opened, and the second winning opening 640 is opened. Since it is easy to win, the ball is fired toward the second winning port 640 so that the ball passes the right side of the variable display unit 80, and the first through gates 66 and 67 are passed through the first winning gate 640. It is advantageous for the player to open the electric accessory 640a and aim to win the 15R probability variation by winning the second winning opening 640.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment launches a ball to the player according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 1 (whether it is being prone to change, shorting, or normal). Can be changed. Thus, the player can be changed in the way the ball is hit, so that the game can be enjoyed.

  A variable winning device 65 is arranged below the first winning port 64, and a horizontally long specific winning port (large opening) 65a is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 1, when the jackpot lottery performed due to the winning of either the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 640 becomes a jackpot, the jackpot is stopped after a predetermined time (variation time) has elapsed. The first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is turned on so as to be a symbol, and a stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of a jackpot. Thereafter, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. In this special gaming state, the special winning opening 65a that is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed or ten balls have been won).

  The specific winning opening 65a is closed when a predetermined time elapses, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to 15 times (15 rounds), for example. The state in which the opening / closing operation is performed is a form of a special gaming state advantageous to the player, and the player is given out a larger amount of prize balls than usual in order to give a gaming value (game value). Is done.

  Specifically, the variable winning device 65 is a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate covering the specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening opening solenoid (not shown) for driving to open / close forward with the lower side of the opening / closing plate as an axis. And. The special winning opening 65a is normally closed so that the ball cannot win or is difficult to win. In the case of a big hit, the large opening opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate to the lower front side to temporarily form an open state in which the ball is likely to win the specific winning opening 65a. It operates to repeat the state and the state alternately.

  Note that the special gaming state is not limited to the above-described form. When the game area is provided with a large opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a, and the LED corresponding to the jackpot is turned on in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time, A special game in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning port 65a is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times when the ball wins into the specific winning port 65a while the specific winning port 65a is opened. You may make it form as a state. Further, the number of the specific winning opening 65a is not limited to one, and one or a plurality (for example, three) of two or more may be arranged, and the arrangement position is not limited to the right side of the first winning opening 64. The left side of the variable display unit 80 may be used.

  In the lower right corner of the game board 13, there is provided an adhering space K1 for adhering a certificate paper, an identification label, etc., and the certificate paper or the like affixed to the adhering space K1 is a small window of the front door 5. 35 (see FIG. 1).

  The game board 13 is provided with a first out port 71. Balls that flow down the game area and have not won any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a, 640, 82 are guided to the unillustrated ball discharge path through the first outlet 71. The The first out port 71 is disposed below the first winning port 64.

  A number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (acts) such as a windmill are arranged.

  As shown in FIG. 3, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control apparatus 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control apparatus 113), and a display control board (display control apparatus 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control apparatus 111), a firing control board (launching control apparatus 112), a power supply board (power supply apparatus 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

  The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 and a dispensing unit 93 that form a protective cover. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is mounted as necessary.

  The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other, and each control device and each board are accommodated.

  In addition, the substrate box 100 (main control device 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and launch control device 112) connect the box base and the box cover so that they cannot be opened by a sealing unit (not shown) (caulking structure). Consolidated). In addition, a seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover so as to cover the box base and the box cover. This seal seal is made of a brittle material. If the seal is to be peeled off in order to open the substrate boxes 100, 102, or if the substrate boxes 100, 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are removed. Cut to the side. Therefore, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal.

  The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 that is located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opens upward, a tank rail 131 that is connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and is gently inclined toward the downstream side, and downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 that is vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 that is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and that pays out a ball by a predetermined electrical configuration of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). ing. The tank 130 is successively replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and a required number of balls are paid out by the payout device 133 as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

  The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated, for example, to eliminate ball clogging (return to a normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as ball clogging in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 1 to the initial state.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 1.

  The main controller 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are incorporated. In the main controller 110, the main processing of the pachinko machine 1 such as jackpot lottery, setting of display in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display results in the second symbol display device are performed by the MPU 201. Execute.

  Various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller only in one direction.

  The RAM 203 stores various areas, counters, flags, a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and a return address of a control program executed by the MPU 201, various flags, counters, I / O, and the like. And a work area (work area) in which values are stored. Note that the RAM 203 is configured so that the backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 and the data can be held (backed up) even after the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer and the value of each register when the power is shut off (including when the power failure occurs, the same applies hereinafter) are stored in RAM 203. On the other hand, at the time of power-on (including power-on due to power failure cancellation, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 1 is restored to the state before power-off based on information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is shut off by a main process (not shown), and restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed in a start-up process (not shown) when the power is turned on. Note that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. Is input immediately, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 has a payout control device 111, an audio lamp control device 113, first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, a second symbol display device, a second symbol holding lamp, and a lower side of the opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 made up of a large opening solenoid for opening and closing the front side and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the MPU 201 via the input / output port 205. Send.

  The input / output port 205 includes a switch group (not shown), various switches 208 including a sensor group including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotation position detection sensor R, and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply device 115. Are connected, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to perform payout control of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, includes a ROM 212 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211, the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and various flags and counters. And a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to hold (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the power failure signal SG1 is also input to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the firing control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting a prize ball that has been paid out. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but is not connected to the main control device 110.

  The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launch strength of the ball according to the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 is obtained when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch a ball. . The ball launching unit 112a includes a launching solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on the condition that the launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball is off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited corresponding to the amount of rotation (rotation position) of the handle 51, and a ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The audio lamp control device 113 outputs audio in an audio output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing in a lamp display device (such as the illumination units 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34), and fluctuating effects (variation). The display mode setting of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114, such as display) and a notice effect, is controlled. The MPU 221 that is an arithmetic unit includes a ROM 222 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 including an address bus and a data bus. Main controller 110, display controller 114, audio output device 226, lamp display device 227, other device 228, frame button 22 and the like are connected to input / output port 225, respectively. Other devices 228 include drive motors 441 and 457.

  The sound lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and uses the determined display mode as a command. The display control device 114 is notified by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). The sound lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the player operates the frame button 22, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, or the super reach is performed. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the production contents at the time. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 so that the rear image corresponding to the changed stage is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to the command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113.

  Further, the sound lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) representing the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. The voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice corresponding to the display content from the voice output device 226 in accordance with the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display command received from the display control device 114, The lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled in accordance with the display contents.

  The display control device 114 is connected to the sound lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on a command received from the sound lamp control device 113, the third symbol display device 81 has a variation effect of the third symbol, etc. The display is controlled. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the sound lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice from the voice output device 226 in accordance with the display content indicated by the display command, thereby matching the display of the third symbol display device 81 with the voice output from the voice output device 226. be able to.

  The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 1, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 through a power supply path (not shown). As its outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in the voltage of AC 24 volts supplied from the outside, and drives various switches such as various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, motors, etc. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and the 12 volt voltage, the 5 volt voltage, and the backup voltage are supplied to the control devices 110 to 114 as necessary voltages.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power interruption, power interruption) occurs when this voltage falls below 22 volts. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. Based on the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. Note that the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is a drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, main controller 110 and payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

  The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data, and the payout control device 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. Transmit to device 111.

  Next, a schematic configuration of the operation unit 200 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 5 is a front perspective view of the operation unit 200, and FIG. 6 is an exploded front perspective view of the operation unit 200. 7 and 8 are front views of the operation unit 200. FIG.

  In FIG. 7, the displacement members 430 disposed at the left and right ends of the vertical displacement unit 400 are displaced to the retracted positions, respectively. In FIG. 8, the displacement members 430 disposed at the left and right ends of the vertical displacement unit 400 are illustrated. The state in which the members 430 are respectively displaced to the overhang positions is illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 5 to FIG. 8, the operation unit 200 includes a back case 300 formed in a box shape, and in the internal space of the back case 300, a vertical displacement unit 400 is disposed above and a light emitting decoration is disposed below. Each unit 800 is disposed.

  The back case 300 includes a bottom wall 301 having a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and an outer wall 302 standing from the outer edges of the four sides of the bottom wall 301 toward the front. It is formed in a box shape with one side (front side) open. The bottom wall 301 is formed with an opening 301a having a rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) disposed on the back of the bottom wall 301 is visually recognized through the opening 301a. It is possible.

  The vertical displacement unit 400 includes a rear base 420 formed in a substantially rectangular shape in front view disposed on the bottom wall portion 301 of the rear case 300, a displacement member 430 and a decorative member disposed on the rear base 420 so as to be displaceable. 450, and the displacement member 430 and the decorative member 450 are retracted to the upper side of the rear case 300 and the overhang projecting to the front side of the rear case opening 301a (that is, the third symbol display device 81). It can be displaced between positions (see FIGS. 7 and 8).

  In this case, the decorative member 450 is provided with a rotating unit 500, and the rotating unit 500 is rotated and the LED of the irradiation unit 530 disposed in the rotating unit 500 is caused to emit light, thereby causing a pattern with an afterimage of light. And symbols can be displayed. Details of this structure will be described later.

  The light emitting decoration unit 800 mainly includes a base body 810 and a light emitting device 820 disposed on the front side of the base body 810, and emits light emitted from a plurality of LEDs 821 disposed inside the light emitting device 820. By changing the mode (for example, the number of LEDs 821 to be irradiated), an effect by light emission is performed. Details will be described later.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 9 to 47, detailed configurations of the vertical displacement unit 400, the rotation unit 500, the center frame 600, the distribution device 700, and the light emitting decoration unit 800 will be described. First, the vertical displacement unit 400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 9 to 24.

  First, the overall configuration of the vertical displacement unit 400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 9 to 14. FIG. 9 is a front view of the vertical displacement unit 400, and FIG. 10 is a rear view of the vertical displacement unit 400. 11 and 13 are front perspective views of the vertical displacement unit 400, and FIGS. 12 and 14 are rear perspective views of the vertical displacement unit 400.

  As shown in FIGS. 9 to 14, the vertical displacement unit 400 includes a front base 410 that is substantially L-shaped in front view, a back base 420 that is superimposed on the back side of the front base 410, and the front side of the front base 410. , A displacement member 430 that is rotated by the driving force of the drive motor 441, and is connected to one end side of the displacement member 430 so that the displacement member 430 is displaced in the vertical direction (the vertical direction in FIG. 9). ), A front cover 460 disposed in front of one end of the front base 410, and a decorative member disposed in a gap between the front cover 460 and the front base 410 facing each other. A guide bar P1 that guides the sliding of the decorative member 450, a side wall member 470 that is disposed at the left and right ends of the decorative member 450 and restricts the displacement of the decorative member 450, and the front surface of the front base 410 A rotation regulating member 480 which is disposed are formed mainly includes.

  In the vertical displacement unit 400, a pair of all members excluding the decorative member 450 is disposed symmetrically, and the decorative member 450 is interposed between the pair of opposing members. In addition, the detailed description of the members disposed in a pair describes only the members disposed on the left side in the front view (left side in FIG. 9), and the members disposed on the right side in the front view (right side in FIG. 9) The same reference numerals as those in the left side of the front view are attached, and the description thereof is omitted.

  The front base 410 is formed from a substantially L-shaped plate-like body in front view, and includes a first piece 410X that forms a long side of a substantially L shape and a first side that forms a short side of a substantially L shape. It is mainly provided with two pieces 410Y.

  The extending direction of the first piece 410X is arranged in parallel with the vertical direction (the vertical direction in FIG. 9). Further, the first piece 410X includes a standing portion 412 that stands on the front side of the left and right outer end portion (left end portion), an upper groove 413 that is recessed in a circular arc shape in the upper portion, and a cross section in the lower portion. And a lower concave groove 414 formed in an arc shape.

  The standing portion 412 is a wall that abuts on a sliding portion 451 of a decoration member 450 described later and restricts the rearward displacement of the decoration member 450, and extends from the upper part to the lower part of the left edge of the first piece 410X. It is formed.

  The upper concave groove 413 and the lower concave groove 414 are grooves into which a guide rod P1 described later is fitted, and are recessed in a semicircular arc shape having an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the guide rod P1. Further, the upper concave groove 413 and the lower concave groove 414 are formed so that the axes formed in a semicircular cross section are positioned on the same straight line, and the lower concave groove 414 from the upper end portion of the upper concave groove 413. The distance between the opposite ends to the lower end of the guide bar P1 is set to be larger than the axial dimension of the guide rod P1. Thereby, both ends of the guide rod P1 can be fitted into the upper concave groove 413 and the lower concave groove 414.

  The second piece 410Y is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and has an opening 411 penetrating in the front-rear direction at the center thereof, an engaging portion 415 protruding to the back side, and a shaft support portion 416 protruding to a columnar shape on the back side. Formed mainly for the purpose.

  The opening 411 is an opening for inserting the shaft portion of the drive motor 441 attached to the front side of the front base 410 to the back side of the front base 410, and the transmission gear fitted to the shaft portion of the drive motor 441. The inner diameter is larger than the outer shape of 442. Thus, when the drive motor 441 fails due to deterioration or the like, the drive motor 441 can be removed from the front base 410 and the transmission gear 442 can be removed from the vertical displacement unit 400 from the opening 411. As a result, after the transmission gear 442 is attached to the shaft portion of the new drive motor 441, the transmission gear 442 can be disposed through the opening 411, so that the shaft portion of the drive motor 441 is connected to the front base 410 and the rear base 420. As compared with the case where the drive motor 441 is disposed on the front base 410 while being inserted through the shaft hole of the transmission gear 443 disposed between the two, the operation can be simplified and the number of man-hours for component replacement can be reduced. be able to. In this case, since the shaft hole of the transmission gear 443 can be reliably fitted to the shaft portion of the drive motor 441, the reliability when the parts are replaced can be improved.

  The engaging portion 415 is a protrusion for locking one end of a torsion spring SP1 to be described later, and protrudes from the back side of the second piece 410Y, and its protruding tip is bent toward the center in the left-right direction of the vertical displacement unit 400. The cross section is formed in a substantially L shape. Accordingly, the rotation of the torsion spring SP1 around the axis can be restricted by the protruding portion toward the back side, and the displacement of the torsion spring SP1 toward the back side can be restricted by the bent portion at the tip.

  The shaft support portion 416 is a cylindrical bar member made of a metal material, and one end side is fitted to the back side of the front base 410.

  The drive motor 441 is a motor that applies a driving force to the vertical displacement unit 400 and is disposed on the front base 410 as described above, and the transmission gear 442 disposed between the front base 410 and the rear base 420. , 443 can be transmitted with a driving force.

  As described above, the transmission gear 442 is a gear in which a shaft hole is externally fitted to the shaft portion of the drive motor 441 and is connected to the drive motor 441, and is arranged in mesh with the transmission gear 443.

  The transmission gear 443 is a gear that is rotatably disposed between the front base 410 and the rear base 420 with the shaft hole fitted into the protrusion 417 of the front base 410, and transmits as described above. The gear 442 is arranged in mesh with the gear 442. Therefore, the driving force of the drive motor 441 can be transmitted to the transmission gear 443 via the transmission gear 442.

  The transmission gear 443 includes a protrusion 443a that protrudes from the side surface on the back side. The protrusion 443a is a rod member made of a metal material and formed in a cylindrical shape, and is disposed on the outer peripheral edge of the transmission gear 443. Therefore, as described above, when the driving force is applied to the driving motor 441 and the transmission gear 443 is rotated, the protrusion 443a is displaced in an arc shape around the axis of the transmission gear 443.

  The back surface base 420 is a plate member that is formed in an outer shape substantially the same as the front view shape of the second piece 410Y of the front surface base 410, and includes a standing portion 421 that is erected on the front side on the outer edge portion.

  The standing portion 421 is a wall for forming a gap between the front base 410 and the back base 420 facing each other, and the standing distance is larger than the longitudinal dimension of the displacement member 430 and the transmission gear 443 combined. The size is set to a large size, and the front end surface is disposed in contact with the back side of the front base 410. As a result, it is possible to form a gap in which the transmission gears 442 and 443 and a displacement member 430 described later are disposed between the front base 410 and the back base 420.

  The displacement member 430 is formed in a substantially L shape when viewed from the front, and is formed in a substantially box shape whose outer edge protrudes toward the back side. Further, the displacement member 430 includes a through-hole 433 that is circularly formed through the bent portion in the front-rear direction, a decoration-side sliding hole 432 that is formed through one side of the long side in the front-rear direction, and a short side. The other side is mainly provided with a driving side sliding hole 431 formed penetrating in the front-rear direction, and a displacement side engaging portion 434 protruding from the protruding portion of the outer edge portion on one side of the long side.

  The through hole 433 is a hole into which the shaft support 416 of the front base 410 is inserted, and is formed with an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the shaft support 416. Therefore, after the through hole 433 is inserted through the shaft support portion 416 of the front base 410, the front base 410 and the rear base 420 are combined, so that the displacement member 430 can be displaced with respect to the front base 410. Can be arranged.

  The drive-side sliding hole 431 is a long hole through which the protrusion 443a of the transmission gear 443 is inserted, and the width dimension in the short direction is set larger than the outer diameter of the protrusion 443a. Further, the drive-side sliding hole 431 is formed in the same direction as the extending direction (longitudinal direction) on the short side of the displacement member 430, and the transmission gear 443 is driven by the drive motor 441 as described above. , The projection 443a of the transmission gear 443 slides inside the drive side sliding hole 431 in accordance with the displacement, thereby rotating the displacement member 430 around the through hole 433. That is, by driving the drive motor 441, the displacement member 430 can be displaced about the through hole 433.

  The decoration-side sliding hole 432 is a long hole that is disposed in a decoration member 450 to be described later and into which a support portion 452a formed in a columnar shape is inserted, and the width dimension in the short direction is the outer diameter of the support portion 452a. Is formed larger. Further, the decoration-side sliding hole 432 is formed in the same direction as the extending direction (longitudinal direction) on the long side of the displacement member 430 in the longitudinal direction. As described above, when the displacement member 430 is rotated about the through-hole 433, the decoration-side sliding hole 432 has an arcuate displacement locus centered on the through-hole 433.

  The displacement side engaging portion 434 is a protrusion that engages the other end side of the torsion spring SP <b> 1 described later, and is formed to protrude from the inner peripheral surface of the outer edge portion protruding from the rear surface side of the displacement member 430. Moreover, the displacement side engaging part 434 is formed in the side surface inside the bending of the displacement member 430 bent in the substantially L shape in the front view. Thereby, the displacement side engaging part 434 can engage the other end side of the torsion spring SP <b> 1 on the inner side of the rear surface side of the displacement member 430.

  The torsion spring SP1 has a torsional portion disposed around the through hole 433 (the shaft support portion 416 of the front base 410) of the displacement member 430, and rotates to the left around the rotation axis of the displacement member 430 (vertical displacement unit). The displacement member 430 that forms the right side of the front view 400 has a biasing force applied to the displacement member 430 around the rotation axis. The one end side is the engagement portion 415 of the front base 410 and the other end side is the displacement member. 430 is respectively engaged with the displacement side engaging portion 434. Accordingly, the displacement member 430 rotates counterclockwise around the axis of the through-hole 433 (the shaft support portion 416 of the front base 410) with respect to the front base 410 (the displacement member 430 constituting the right side of the vertical displacement unit 400 in the front view rotates clockwise). ) Is always energized in the direction.

  As described above, the decorative member 450 is a member interposed between a pair of opposing vertical displacement units 400 configured as a pair of left and right, and a front base in which the size in the left-right direction is symmetrically disposed. 410 is set to be the same as the distance between the outer ends in the left-right direction.

  The decorative member 450 is formed in a U-shape in front view with the lower side open, and includes a front base 452 constituting the central portion thereof, sliding portions 451 connected to both left and right ends of the front base 452, and a front base The back surface base 453 that covers the back surface of the front surface 452 and the rotation unit 500 that is rotatably disposed on the front surface side of the front surface base 452 are mainly provided.

  The front base 452 is formed of a plate-like body having a horizontally long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and is formed in a U-shaped cross section with upper and lower end surfaces bent to the back side. The front base 452 includes a support portion 452a that protrudes from the back side, an engagement portion 452b that protrudes from the both ends in the left-right direction to the front side, a contact surface 452h that is formed smoothly on the front side of both ends in the left-right direction, And an inclined surface 452g formed at the lower end of the contact surface 452h.

  As described above, the support portion 452a is a rod member that is inserted into the decoration-side sliding hole 432 of the displacement member 430, and is formed in a cylindrical rod-shaped body. Thus, when the displacement member 430 is displaced by the driving force of the motor 441 and the decoration side sliding hole 432 of the displacement member 430 is rotationally displaced about the through hole 433, the displacement member 430 is inserted into the decoration side sliding hole 432. The support portion 452 a is displaced with the displacement of the decoration side sliding hole 432. As a result, the decorative member 450 can be displaced by displacing the support portion 452a.

  The engaging portion 452b is a protrusion with which the other end of an urging spring SP2 to be described later is engaged, and protrudes in a hook shape from the front side of both end portions of the front base 452.

  The contact surface 452h is a smooth surface that contacts a roller 492a of a regulation unit 490, which will be described later, and is formed as a smooth surface on which the roller 492a can roll. The inclined surface 452g is a surface that is inclined downward from the front side to the back side at the lower end portion of the contact surface 452h. Thereby, the regulation unit 490 and the decorative member 450 described later can be easily brought into contact with each other. A detailed description of the contact between the restriction unit 490 and the decorative member 450 will be described later.

  The sliding portion 451 is a rod-shaped body having a rectangular cross section extending in the up-down direction, and is arranged to be connected to both left and right end portions of the front base 452. Moreover, the sliding part 451 is provided with the through-hole 451a opened to the up-down direction. The through hole 451a is an opening through which the guide rod P1 is inserted, and is formed in a circular shape having an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the guide rod P1.

  As a result, when the displacement member 430 is displaced by the driving force of the drive motor 441 and the decorative member 450 is displaced as described above, the direction of the displacement is changed by the sliding portions 451 disposed at both ends of the front base 452. Be regulated. As a result, the decorative member 450 is displaced along the axial direction (vertical direction) of the guide bar P1. In other words, the decorative member 450 can be slid and displaced in the vertical direction when a driving force is applied from the driving motor 441.

  The back surface base 453 is a plate member that covers the back side of the front base 452 at a substantially central position in the left-right direction, and is formed to have substantially the same size as the central portion of the front base 452 in front view. Thereby, the gears 454 to 456 can be rotatably arranged in the internal space between the front base 452 and the back base 453. A drive motor 457 that outputs a rotational driving force and a control signal to the rotation unit 500 is attached to the rear surface of the rear base 453. A detailed description of the gears 454 to 456 and the drive motor 457 will be described later.

  The front cover 460 is a member that is disposed to face the front side of the first piece 410X of the front base 410 and covers the front side of the first piece 410X. The front cover 460 is substantially the same as the outer shape of the first piece 410X in front view. It is formed in the same shape. The front cover 460 includes a standing wall 461 that stands on the back side from the outer edge thereof, and is formed in a box-like body that opens on the back side.

  The standing wall 461 includes an upper groove forming member 462 that protrudes upward from the side surface that forms the upper side, and a lower groove forming member 463 that protrudes downward from the side surface that forms the lower side.

  The upper groove forming member 462 is formed at a position facing the upper concave groove 413 of the front base 410, and a concave groove 462a is formed in a semicircular arc shape on the back side. On the other hand, the lower groove forming member 463 is formed at a position facing the lower groove 414 of the front base 410, and a groove 463a that is recessed in a semicircular arc shape is formed on the back surface side.

  The concave grooves 462a and 463a are grooves into which the guide rod P1 is fitted, and are recessed in a semicircular arc shape having an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the guide rod P1. The grooves 462a and 463a are formed on the same straight line with a semi-circular arc-shaped shaft, and the distance between the opposite ends from the upper end of the groove 462a to the lower end of the groove 463a is It is set to be larger than the axial dimension of the guide bar P1. Thereby, the both ends of the guide rod P1 can be internally fitted in the concave grooves 462a and 463a.

  Therefore, when the front cover 460 is disposed in front of the front base 410, the guide rod P can be sandwiched between the upper concave groove 413 and the concave groove 462a and the lower concave groove 414 and the concave groove 463a. The guide bar P1 can be disposed on the front base 410 in a state in which it cannot be dropped off. As a result, the sliding portion 451 of the decorative member 450 through which the guide rod P1 is inserted can be held against the front base 410 so as not to drop off.

  In addition, the distance between the front wall 461 of the front cover 460 formed on the outer side of the vertical displacement unit 400 and the upright portion 412 formed on the first piece 410X of the front base 410 in the front-rear direction. Is set to be substantially the same as or slightly larger than the thickness dimension in the front-rear direction of the sliding portion 451 of the decorative member 450, and the end portion on the outer side in the left-right direction of the sliding portion 451 is disposed between the opposing dimensions. Thereby, as described above, when the decorative member 450 is displaced in the vertical direction, the decorative member 450 can be prevented from rattling in the front-rear direction.

  The side wall member 470 is a member disposed at both ends of the vertical displacement unit 400 on the center side in the left-right direction, and is formed from a substantially L-shaped plate-like body bent to the back side in a side view. In addition, a wall surface that is bent outward in the left-right direction is formed on the end surface on the front side of the side wall member 470, and a regulation unit 490 described later is attached to the wall surface.

  Further, the side wall member 470 is provided with a pattern on the side surface in the center in the left-right direction (the left-right direction in FIG. 9) with respect to the vertical displacement unit 400 by unevenness, color, and the like. The pattern of the side wall member 470 is disposed so as to be visible through the central opening of FIG. Thereby, the vertical displacement unit 400 (for example, front cover 460 etc.) arrange | positioned in the left-right direction outer side from the side wall member 470 can be made invisible to a player.

  The rotation restricting member 480 is formed from a plate-like body that is horizontally long when viewed from the front, and an annular roller 481 having a shaft in the front-rear direction on the back side is rotatably attached. Further, the rotation restricting member 480 has an outer shape that is substantially half of the outer shape of the second piece 410Y of the front base 410 in a front view, and is disposed with a predetermined gap in front of the front base 410.

  The rotation restricting member 480 is a member that returns a later-described rotating unit 500 to an initial position, and the initial position of the rotating unit 500 can be defined by the roller 481 and the upper surface base 510 coming into contact with each other.

  The biasing spring SP2 is a coil spring that connects the front base 410 and the decorative member 450 and biases the decorative member 450 upward. One end is engaged with the engaging portion 418 of the front base 410, and the other. The end is engaged with the engaging portion 412 b of the decorative member 450. Thereby, the decorative member 450 is always urged upward with respect to the front base 410. Therefore, when the decorative member 450 is displaced from the second position to the first position due to the displacement described later, the decorative member 450 can be easily displaced to the second position. The biasing spring SP2 is bent along the outer peripheral surface of the roller 419 at the center. Thereby, it is possible to secure the length of the urging spring SP2 and to prevent the urging force from increasing excessively.

  Next, the operation of the vertical displacement unit 400 configured as described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 15 to 17.

  15A to 17A are front views of the vertical displacement unit 400. FIG. 15A shows a state where the vertical displacement unit 400 is arranged at the raised position, and FIG. 16A shows a position between the raised position and the lowered position. FIG. 17 (a) corresponds to the state of being arranged at the lowered position.

  15B corresponds to the rear view of the vertical displacement unit 400 in FIG. 15A, FIG. 16B corresponds to FIG. 16A, and FIG. 17B corresponds to FIG. 17A. . 15 (b), 16 (b) and 17 (b) show a state in which the back base 420 is removed for easy understanding.

  As shown in FIGS. 15A and 15B, in a state where the vertical displacement unit 400 is disposed at the raised position (hereinafter, this state is referred to as “second position”), the displacement member 430 is one of the members. The side (the long side on which the decoration side sliding hole 432 is formed) is swung upward, and the decoration member 450 is positioned at the top. The support portion 452 a of the decoration member 450 is positioned inside the decoration side sliding hole 432 of the displacement member 430 and close to the radially outer end from the axis of the through hole 433.

  In this state, the rotational direction on one side of the displacement member 430 (the short side where the drive-side sliding hole 431 is formed) is substantially the same as the direction of the straight line connecting the rotational shaft of the transmission gear 443 and the protrusion 443a. Match. That is, the extending direction of the drive side sliding hole 431 of the displacement member 430 and the direction of the straight line connecting the rotation shaft of the transmission gear 443 and the projection 443a are orthogonal (the displacement member 430 and the transmission gear 443 are dead points). In a state in which Therefore, the displacement member 430 can no longer rotate about the through hole 433, and the displacement member 430 can be prevented from being rotationally displaced by the weight of the decorative member 450 connected to the displacement member 430.

  When the pair of drive motors 441 are driven to rotate from the state shown in FIG. 15A and FIG. 15B, and each transmission gear 443 is rotated, the projection 443 a of the transmission gear 443 is moved to the displacement member 430. The left and right displacement members 430 are respectively pushed downward by sliding along the drive side sliding hole 431.

  Accordingly, the left and right displacement members 430 are rotated about the axis of the through hole 433, and the decorative member 450 is displaced downward as shown in FIGS. 16 (a) and 16 (b). From this state, when the transmission gears 443 are further rotated by the rotational drive of the pair of drive motors 441, the left and right displacement members 430 are further pushed downward, as shown in FIGS. 17 (a) and 17 (b). As shown, the decorative member 450 is disposed at a lowered position (hereinafter, this state is referred to as “first position”).

  As shown in FIGS. 17A and 17B, in the state where the vertical displacement unit 400 is disposed at the first position, the left and right displacement members 430 are formed on one side thereof (the drive-side sliding hole 431 is formed). In this state, the decorative member 450 is located at the lowermost position and is projected from the front side of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2). .

  Further, in this case (when the vertical displacement unit 400 is disposed at the lowered position), the decoration-side sliding hole 432 of the displacement member 430 is inclined downward toward the central portion in the left-right direction of the vertical displacement unit 400, and the through hole 433. The side surface of the support portion 452a of the decorative member 450 is brought into contact with the radially outer end side. As a result, the weight of the decorative member 450 can be applied to the support portion 452a by the force that displaces in the direction of gravity and the force in the direction from the left-right direction of the vertical displacement unit 400 toward the center. As a result, the decorative member 450 can be prevented from rattling in the vertical and horizontal directions due to the displacement operation of the rotating unit 500 of the decorative member 450 described later.

  Further, the rotational direction of the other side of the displacement member 430 (the short side where the driving side sliding hole 431 is formed) is substantially coincident with the direction of the straight line connecting the rotational shaft of the transmission gear 443 and the protrusion 443a. That is, the extending direction of the drive side sliding hole 431 of the displacement member 430 and the direction of the straight line connecting the rotation shaft of the transmission gear 443 and the projection 443a are orthogonal (the displacement member 430 and the transmission gear 443 are dead points). In a state of forming a). Therefore, the displacement member 430 cannot rotate about the through-hole 433, and when the decorative member 450 rattles in the vertical direction due to the displacement operation of the rotation unit 500 described later, the displacement member 430 is displaced by the rattling. The displacement of the member 430 can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to suppress ltpp that the decorative member 450 rattles.

  In addition, restriction units 490 are disposed in front of both ends of the decorative member 450. Thereby, the displacement of the decorative member 450 in the front-rear direction can be restricted. A detailed description of the restriction unit 490 will be described later.

  Next, the restriction unit 490 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  First, the overall configuration of the restriction unit 490 will be described with reference to FIGS. 18 is an exploded front perspective view of the regulation unit 490, and FIG. 19 is an exploded front perspective view of the roller member 492. As shown in FIG. 20A is a side view of the restriction unit 490, FIG. 20B is a rear view of the restriction unit 490, and FIG. 20C is a cross-sectional view taken along line XXc-XXc in FIG. It is sectional drawing of the control unit 490. FIG.

  As shown in FIGS. 18 to 20, the regulation unit 490 includes a case member 491 formed in a box shape whose back side is open, a roller member 492 disposed inside the case member 491, and the case member 491. And an outer edge member 493 disposed on the opened outer edge (on the opening side).

  The case member 491 has a protruding portion 491a protruding from the side surface on the front side, a notch portion 491b cut out in a semicircular shape on both side surfaces in the left-right direction, and a bulge from the inner side surface facing the opening to the back side. And a bulging portion 491c.

  The projecting portion 491a is a projection for fastening the case member 491 to the side wall member 470 described above. A fastening hole is formed in the front side, and a screw is fastened to the fastening hole from the front side via the side wall member 470. By doing so, the restriction unit 490 can be disposed on the side wall member 470.

  The notch portions 491b are formed by being cut out in a semicircular shape by arranging two in the vertical direction on the side surfaces of the case member 491 on both sides in the left-right direction. The notch 491b is a notch for inserting the collar 492c of the roller member 492 therein, and the inner diameter thereof is set larger than the outer diameter of the collar 492c of the roller member 492.

  The bulging portion 491c is formed to bulge from the lower side of the center in the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 20 (c)) of the side surface (the back surface of the front wall) facing the open side of the case member 491. Further, the bulging portion 491c includes a predetermined gap between the roller member 492 and the roller 492a.

  The roller member 492 includes a roller 492a formed from an elastic member in an annular shape when viewed from the axial straight section, a shaft portion 492b inserted into the roller 492a, a shaft portion 492b, and both sides of the roller 492a. And a pair of retaining rings E1 that are fitted onto a shaft portion 492b outside the collar 492c.

  The shaft portion 492b is a member that is inserted into the inner periphery of the roller 492a. The shaft portion 492b is formed in a cylindrical shape that is substantially the same as the inner diameter of the inner periphery of the roller 492a, and the axial dimension is between the lateral side surfaces of the case member 491. It is set larger than the width dimension. Moreover, the recessed part 492b1 recessed in an axial direction is formed in the axial direction both ends of the axial part 492b. The concave portion 492b1 is formed over the entire circumference of the shaft portion 492b, and has an outer diameter in the axial direction smaller than an inner diameter of a retaining ring E1 described later.

  The collar 492c is formed in an annular shape when viewed from the front, and is formed in a substantially stepped cross section. The collar 492c includes a small-diameter cylindrical portion 492c1 and a large-diameter cylindrical portion 492c2 having a larger outer diameter than the small-diameter cylindrical portion 492c1. In addition, the inner diameter of the collar 492c (the inner diameter of the small-diameter cylindrical portion 492c1 and the large-diameter cylindrical portion 492c2) is formed smaller than the outer diameter of the shaft portion 492b, and the shaft portion 492b can be inserted into the inside.

  The small-diameter cylindrical portion 492c1 is a portion that is fitted into the notch 491b of the case member 491. As described above, the outer diameter of the small-diameter cylindrical portion 492c1 is larger than the inner diameter of the notch 491b of the case member 491. Is done.

  The large-diameter cylindrical portion 492c2 is a member for restricting the displacement in the left-right direction when the roller member 492 is disposed on the case member 491. The outer diameter of the large-diameter cylindrical portion 492c2 is the notch of the case member 491. It is set larger than the inner diameter of the portion 491b. Further, the distance dimension between the axially outer side surfaces of the pair of large-diameter cylindrical portions 492c2 disposed at both axial ends of the roller 492a is based on the distance dimension between the opposing left and right side surfaces on the inner side where the case member 491 opens. Is also formed small.

  The retaining ring E1 is an E-ring (E-type retaining ring), and is fitted around the recessed portion 492b1 with an opening being widened in the recessed portion 492b1 of the shaft portion 492b. That is, the inner diameter of the inner periphery of the retaining ring E1 is set to be substantially the same as the outer diameter of the recess 492b1.

  The roller member 492 configured as described above is assembled as follows. First, after retaining ring E1 is fitted into recess 492b1 on one end side of shaft part 492b, small diameter cylindrical part 492c1 is placed on one side (the side on which retaining ring E1 is fitted externally) from one end to collar 492c. ), The shaft portion 492b is inserted. Next, after the roller 492a is inserted into the shaft portion 492b from the other end, the shaft portion in a state where the first collar 492c is directed to the large diameter cylindrical portion 492c2 (side where the retaining ring E1 is externally fitted). 492b is inserted. Thereafter, one retaining ring E1 is externally fitted into the recess 492b1 on the other side of the shaft portion 492b.

  As a result, the displacement of the roller 492a and the pair of collars 492c, which are pivotally supported by the shaft portion 492b between the opposing ends of the pair of retaining rings E1, are restricted by the retaining ring E1. As a result, the roller 492a and the pair of collars 492c can be prevented from being detached from the shaft portion 492b.

  The outer edge member 493 is a member that is formed in a frame-like body having a vertically long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and is disposed on the back side (open side) of the case member 491. The outer edge member 493 is formed so that the inner peripheral shape in the front view is substantially the same as the inner peripheral shape of the opening in the rear view of the case member 491. Further, on the side surface of the outer edge member 493 on the front side (case member 491 side), a standing portion 493a is formed to stand on the front side around the inner edge portion.

  The standing portion 493a is formed with a recessed portion 493a1 that is recessed on the back side. The recessed portion 493a1 is formed at a position facing the notch 491b of the case member 491. Therefore, the roller member 492 can be disposed on the case member 491 by sandwiching the collar 492c of the roller member 492 between the notch portion 491b and the recessed portion 493a1 of the case member 491.

  The roller member 492 configured as described above is assembled as follows. First, two collars 492c disposed at both ends in the axial direction of the roller member 492 are vertically arranged in the notch 491b of the case member 491 so as to support the collar 492c. Next, the outer edge member 493 is fastened and fixed to the case member 491 from the back side of the case member 491 in a state where the standing portion 493a side is the front side (facing the case member 491 side). Thereby, the roller member 492 is rotatably arranged with respect to the case member 491, and can be prevented from falling from the case member 491.

  Next, the operation of the restriction unit 490 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 21 is a front view of the vertical displacement unit 400 in the first position. 22A is an enlarged view of the vertical displacement unit 400 in the XXII portion of FIG. 21, and FIG. 22B is a cross-sectional view of the vertical displacement unit 400 along the line XXIIb-XXIIb of FIG. . In FIG. 22A, the outer shapes of the roller 492a and the decorative member 450 are shown by broken lines.

  23A to 23C are partially enlarged front views of the vertical displacement unit 400, and FIG. 24A is a cross-sectional view of the vertical displacement unit 400 taken along the line XXIVa-XXIVa in FIG. 24B is a cross-sectional view of the vertical displacement unit 400 taken along the line XXIVb-XXIVb in FIG. 23B, and FIG. 24C is a vertical view taken along the line XXIVc-XXIVc in FIG. 4 is a cross-sectional view of a displacement unit 400. FIG. 23A to 23C illustrate the transition state of the vertical displacement unit 400, and the outer shapes of the roller 492a and the decorative member 450 are illustrated by broken lines.

  As shown in FIGS. 21 and 22, when the vertical displacement unit 400 is located at the first position, the decorative member 450 is located below. In this case, as described above, both ends of the decorative member 450 are located on the back side of the restriction unit 490.

  In this case, when the decorative member 450 is disposed at the first position and the rotation unit 500 described later is rotated, the decorative member 450 may rattle with respect to the front base 410 along with the rotational displacement. In view of this, there are some which provide engagement means for engaging the decorative member 450 and the front base 410 to suppress rattling. The engaging means is disposed on one of the decorative member 450 or the front base 410 and is urged by the urging means. The engaging means is formed to be engageable with the engaging member, and the decorative member 450 or the front base. And the engaged member disposed on the other side of 410, and using the displacement of the decorative member 450 relative to the front base 410 (displacement toward the first position), the engagement member is resisted against the urging force of the urging means. When the decorative member 450 is disposed in the first position, the engaging member is advanced by the urging force of the urging means and engaged with the engaged member. Thereby, the relative displacement of the main body member with respect to the front base 410 is restricted by the engagement of the engaging means, and rattling of the main body member with respect to the base member due to the displacement of the displacement member is suppressed.

  However, in such a conventional engaging means, in order to place the engaging means in the engaged state (the main body member is disposed at the first position), the engaging member is against the urging force of the urging means. Not only does it need to be retracted, but it also resists the urging force of the urging means when releasing the engaged state of the engaging means (displace the decorative member 450 from the first position to the second position). Therefore, there is a problem in that the engaging member needs to be retracted, and a driving force necessary to displace the decorative member 450 relative to the front base 410 increases.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, the contact surface 452h of the front base 452 of the decorative member 450 is in contact with the roller 492a of the restriction unit 490, so that the relative displacement of the front base 410 is restricted. Thus, rattling of the decorative member 450 with respect to the front base 410 due to the rotational displacement of the rotating unit 500 can be suppressed.

  In this case, since the displacement direction when the decoration member 450 is arranged at the first position and the rotation direction of the roller member 492 of the restriction unit 490 are set substantially parallel, the decoration member 450 is displaced to the first position. When doing so, the roller member 492 of the restriction unit 490 can be rotated in accordance with the displacement, so that the driving force required to displace the decorative member 450 relative to the front base 410 can be suppressed.

  In addition, since the roller 492a is formed of an elastic body that can be elastically deformed as described above, when the roller 492a of the restriction unit 490 comes into contact with the contact surface 452h of the front base 452, the outer periphery of the roller 492a. By elastically deforming the surface side, the front base 452 can easily hold the roller 492a. Thereby, it is difficult to rotate the roller 492a, and rattling of the decorative member 450 with respect to the front base 410 can be suppressed.

  The elastic body is preferably a viscoelastic body exemplified by rubber or urethane. In this case, due to the vibration control effect, a vibration damping function or a vibration insulating function for attenuating and insulating vibration input from the decorative member 450 to the front base 410 as the rotating unit 500 is displaced can be achieved. This is because wear and failure of various devices arranged on the 410 side, loosening of the fastening portion, and the like can be suppressed. In particular, when the rotating unit 500 is periodically displaced (for example, when it is rotated at a relatively high speed in order to function as a versatile writer), vibration with a relatively small amplitude and high frequency is generated from the decorative member 450. Since it is inputted to the front base 410, it is particularly effective to employ a viscoelastic body.

  Further, when the decorative member 450 and the regulation unit 490 (roller 492a) come into contact with each other, the product accuracy and assembly error of the vertical displacement unit 400 can be absorbed by the amount of elastic deformation of the roller 492a. Therefore, it is not necessary to increase the accuracy when molding the part, and the manufacturing cost of the part can be reduced. As a result, the manufacturing cost of the product can be reduced.

  Further, since the impact sound generated when the decorative member 450 and the regulating unit 490 (roller 492a) come into contact with each other can be absorbed by the elastic deformation of the roller 492a, the player can be prevented from hearing the sound when the decorative member 450 is displaced. It is possible to suppress damage to the player's interest. In addition, since the rotation axis direction of the roller 492a is orthogonal to the displacement direction of the decorative member 450, the roller 492a can be rotated in accordance with the displacement of the decorative member 450, and the decorative member 450 and the roller 492a contact each other. When they are displaced in contact with each other, it is possible to suppress the sound of rubbing each other's members. In other words, if the protrusion is brought into contact with the displacement member to prevent the displacement member from being stopped or rattling, the members are rubbed against each other when the displacement member is displaced in contact with the protrusion. Sound is generated.

  In contrast, in this embodiment, after the roller 492a and the decorative member 450 are brought into contact with each other, the roller 492a can be rotated along the displacement direction of the decorative member 450. Can be suppressed, and generation of a noise generated by rubbing between the decorative member 450 and the roller 492a can be suppressed.

  Further, since the regulation of the decoration member 450 with respect to the front base 410 is possible by the regulation unit 490 of the side wall member 470 fastened and fixed to the front base 410, the regulation unit 490 that is relatively heavy is disposed on the decoration member 450. When it is not necessary, the decorative member 450 can be reduced in weight to suppress the driving force necessary for the displacement of the decorative member 450, and when the rattling of the decorative member 450 with respect to the front base 410 due to the displacement of the rotating unit 500 is suppressed. In addition, since the decorative member 450 serving as a vibration source can be reduced in weight, rattling can be easily suppressed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 23 and FIG. 24, a contact state between the decorative member 450 and the restriction unit 490 when the decorative member 450 is displaced from the second position to the first position will be described.

  As shown in FIGS. 23A and 24A, when the decorative member 450 is positioned above the restriction unit 490, the outer peripheral surface of the roller 492a is in contact with the decorative member 450 and the case member 491. Arranged without touching.

  The decorative member 450 is displaced downward from the state shown in FIGS. 23 (a) and 24 (a), and the lower end surface of the decorative member 450 is the case as shown in FIGS. 23 (b) and 24 (b). When the member 491 is displaced to a substantially vertical position substantially the same as the vertical position of the member 491, the outer peripheral surface of the roller 492a disposed above the restriction unit 490 and the front surface of the decorative member 450 are in contact with each other. It is assumed that Thereby, it can suppress that the decoration member 450 rattles back and forth, right and left.

  That is, the roller 492a disposed on the upper side is pushed by the decorative member 450 and rotated while being displaced in the radial direction, and is in contact with the decorative member 450 in the front-rear direction (FIG. 24B, left-right direction). Therefore, it is suppressed that the decoration member 450 rattles in the front-back direction. Further, the roller 492a can rotate in one direction around the axis of the shaft portion 492b and cannot rotate in the direction in which the decorative member 450 moves to the left and right, so that the decorative member 450 is prevented from rattling in the left and right direction. be able to.

  On the other hand, since the roller 492a can rotate around the axis of the shaft portion 492b, the decorative member 450 is displaced in the vertical direction at the first position even when the roller 492a and the rotation unit 500 are in contact with each other. Can be made.

  Further, as described above, since the inclined surface 452g is formed at the lower end of the contact surface 452h of the front base 452, the inclined surface 452g is used when the decorative member 450 is disposed at the first position. The roller 492a can be guided to the front side of the contact surface 452h. Thereby, the driving force required when the decorative member 450 is disposed at the first position can be suppressed.

  When the decorative member 450 is further displaced downward from the state shown in FIGS. 23B and 24B and is positioned at the first position, the outer peripheral surfaces of the two rollers 492a disposed in the restriction unit 490 And the front surface of the decorative member 450 can be brought into contact with each other.

  Here, when the rotating member (roller 492a) that rotates along the displacement direction of the decorative member 450 suppresses rattling of the decorative member 450 that is displaced up and down, the rotating member (roller 492a) It is difficult to regulate the decorative member 450 along the displacement direction so that the decorative member 450 is not displaced with respect to shakiness in the vertical direction.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, the rotational direction of the other side of the displacement member 430 (the short side where the drive-side sliding hole 431 is formed) is the rotational axis of the transmission gear 443 and the protrusion 443a. Is substantially coincident with the direction of the straight line connecting the two, so that the decorative member 450 can be prevented from rattling in the vertical direction at the first position. That is, in the present embodiment, only the vertical displacement that displaces the decorative member 450 to the first position can be allowed by the restriction unit 490, and at the second position, the transmission gear 443 and the displacement member 430 are By forming the dead point, it is possible to prevent the decorative member 450 from rattling in the vertical direction. As a result, since the relative displacement of the decorative member 450 with respect to the front base 410 can be restricted, rattling of the decorative member 450 with respect to the front base 410 due to the displacement of the rotating unit 500 can be suppressed.

  In addition, the roller 492a disposed below the roller 492a disposed side by side in the vertical direction is in a state of contacting not only the decorative member 450 but also the bulging portion 491c of the case member 491.

  That is, when the roller 492a disposed on the lower side comes into contact with the decorative member 450, the rubber component of the roller 492a is pushed out (elastically deformed) to the front side (right side in FIG. 24C). Thus, the outer peripheral surface on the front side is brought into contact with the side surface of the bulging portion 491c of the case member 491, and the roller 492a is sandwiched between the contact surface 452h of the decorative member 450 and the bulging portion 491c of the case member 491. be able to. Thereby, the resistance when the roller 492a rotates around the shaft portion 492b is increased, and the roller 492a can be made difficult to rotate. Therefore, the resistance when the decorative member 450 is displaced in the vertical direction can be increased. As a result, since the relative displacement of the decorative member 450 with respect to the front base 410 can be restricted, rattling of the decorative member 450 with respect to the front base 410 due to the displacement of the rotating unit 500 can be suppressed.

  Here, as a state in which the roller 492a is sandwiched between the contact surface 452h of the decorative member 450 and the bulging portion 491c of the case member 491, the shaft portion 492b of the roller 492a is moved in the front-rear direction (FIG. 24C, left-right direction). It may be possible to form a state in which the roller 492a is sandwiched between the contact surface 452h of the decorative member and the bulging portion 491c of the case member 491. In this case, however, the shaft portion 492b of the roller 492a has a diameter. A structure that can be displaced in the direction is required.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the roller 492a is formed of an elastic body, and the roller 492a is formed between the contact surface 452h of the decorative member 450 and the bulging portion 491c of the case member 491 by utilizing the elastic deformation. Therefore, it is not necessary to form the shaft portion 492b of the roller 492a so as to be displaceable in the radial direction, and the shaft portion 492b can be formed as a shaft fixed to the front base 410. Thereby, the structure can be simplified, and the durability can be improved and the product cost can be reduced.

  Further, since the roller 492a is elastically displaced and is sandwiched between the contact surface 452h of the decorative member 450 and the bulging portion 491c of the case member 491, the decorative member 450 with respect to the front base 410 is displaced by the displacement of the rotating unit 500. When the roller 492a is sandwiched between the decorative member 450 and the bulging portion 491c of the case member 491 due to rattling, the elastic recovery force of the roller 492a is used to make the decorative member 450 and the case member 491 The bulging portion 491c can easily hold the roller 492a more firmly. This makes it difficult for the roller 492a to rotate, and the relative backlash of the decorative member 450 with respect to the front base 410 can be suppressed, so that the backlash of the decorative member 450 with respect to the front base 410 accompanying the rotational displacement of the rotary unit 500 can be suppressed. Can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, since the displacement resistance can be increased as the decorative member 450 is displaced from the upper position to the lower end position, when the decorative member 450 is stopped at the first position, other parts are damaged by the stopping operation. This can be suppressed.

  That is, in this embodiment, since the rotation unit is provided in the center of the decorative member 450, when the component is displaced in the direction of gravity and stopped, the kinetic energy at the time of displacement is added to each component in addition to the weight of the decorative member 450. Acting, parts are easily damaged.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when being displaced to the first position, the stopping operation can be assisted, so that the stopping operation in a direction that is more easily damaged can be assisted. As a result, it is possible to effectively prevent the parts from being damaged and improve the reliability of the product.

  Furthermore, since two rollers 492a are arranged in the vertical direction along the displacement direction of the decorative member 450, the contact surfaces 452h of the decorative member 450 are in contact with each other at a predetermined interval. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the decorative member 450 from being tilted, and it is possible to suppress rattling with respect to the upper surface base 510 of the rotation unit 500. As a result, rattling of the decorative member 450 with respect to the front base 410 accompanying the rotational displacement of the rotating unit 500 can be effectively suppressed.

  Further, the rotation plane of the rotation unit 500 described later is set to be substantially the same as the contact surface 452h of the front base 452 (that is, the surface with which the roller 492a contacts). That is, the rotation plane of the rotation unit 500 is arranged in parallel with each of the contact surface 452h of the front base 452 and the rotation axis of the roller 492a. Accordingly, the front base of the decorative member 450 accompanying the rotational displacement of the rotary unit 500 is suppressed while suppressing the driving force required when the decorative member 450 is arranged at the first position and when the decorative member 450 is displaced from the first position to the second position. The backlash with respect to 410 can be suppressed effectively.

  More specifically, since the displacement form of the rotation unit 500 is rotation, the decorative member 450 rotates due to the precession movement of the rotation unit 500 (movement that the rotation axis of the rotation unit 500 swings like a circle). The unit 500 is vibrated in a mode (mode) that tilts the plane of rotation of the unit 500. Therefore, the rotation plane of the rotation unit 500 is substantially parallel to the contact surface 452h of the front base 452 and the rotation axis of the rotation unit 500, so that the contact surface 452h (that is, the roller 492a of the front base 452 is Can be pressed against the outer peripheral surface of the roller 492a from the direction orthogonal to the rotation axis of the roller 492a. As a result, when the decorative member 450 is disposed at the first position and when the decorative member 450 is displaced from the first position to the second position, the roller 492a is rotated to suppress the driving force necessary for the displacement of the decorative member 450. However, the contact of the contact surface 452h of the front base 452 with the outer peripheral surface of the roller 492a can effectively suppress rattling of the decorative member 450 with respect to the front base 410 due to the displacement (rotation) of the rotation unit 500. .

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 25 to 36, the rotating unit 500 disposed on the decorative member 450 will be described.

  First, the entire configuration of the decorative member 450 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 25 and 26. FIG. 25 is an exploded front perspective view of the decorative member 450, and FIG. 26 is an exploded rear perspective view of the decorative member 450.

  As shown in FIGS. 25 and 26, the decorative member 450 includes gears 454 to 456 disposed between the front base 452 and the back base 453 facing each other, and a drive motor attached to the back side of the back base 453. 457 and a signal transmission mechanism 458 attached to the back side of the front base 452 are mainly provided.

  The front base 452 is formed with a recess 452c that is recessed in the back side at the center thereof. The recess 452c is formed in an annular shape when viewed from the front, and has an insertion hole 452f formed through the shaft portion in the front-rear direction and openings 452d and 452e opened in the left-right direction on the side surfaces of both ends in the left-right direction. The

  The back surface base 453 is formed from a horizontally long rectangular plate-like body in front view smaller than the front view shape of the front base 452, and has an opening 453b that opens in the front-rear direction at the center and a circular shape on the right side in front view. The insertion hole 453a that opens and the shaft support portions 453c and 453d that protrude in a columnar shape on the front side are mainly provided.

  The insertion hole 453a is an opening through which a shaft portion of a drive motor 457, which will be described later, is inserted. The insertion hole 453a is opened at a position facing the shaft portion of the drive motor 457 and has an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the shaft portion of the drive motor 457. Opened in a circular shape. The opening 453b is an opening through which a signal transmission mechanism 458 described later is inserted, and is formed in an inner hole shape larger than the shape of the signal transmission mechanism 458 when viewed from the front.

  The shaft support portions 453c and 453d are shaft portions that are inserted into shaft portions of gears 455 and 456, which will be described later, and are set in a columnar shape having an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of each gear 455 and 456.

  The drive motor 457 is a motor in which an encoder for position detection is incorporated, and can detect the rotation angle and rotation speed of the motor. The drive motor 457 is attached to the back surface of the back surface base 453 as described above, and the shaft portion of the drive motor 457 is inserted through the insertion hole 453a of the back surface base 453, and from the front side of the back surface base 453, screws, bolts, etc. It is fastened and fixed with.

  The gear 454 meshes with the gear 455 and is fixedly disposed on the shaft portion of the drive motor 457 inserted through the insertion hole 453a of the rear base 453. Further, the gear 454 is formed to have a thickness in the front-rear direction smaller than that between the back base 453 and the front base 452 facing each other, and when the back base 453 is disposed on the front base 452, the front base 452 and the back base 453 are arranged. It is possible to rotate without abutting against the side surface. When a rotational driving force is applied from the driving motor 457, the gear 454 is rotated, and the rotational driving force can be transmitted to the gear 455 meshed with the gear 454.

  The gear 455 is engaged with a back surface base 571 (see FIG. 26) of the rotation unit 500 to be described later, and the shaft hole is inserted through a shaft support portion 453c protruding forward of the back surface base 453, and rotates about the shaft support portion 453c. It is possible to arrange. Further, the gear 455 is formed to have a thickness in the front-rear direction smaller than that between the back base 453 and the front base 452, and when the back base 453 is disposed on the front base 452, the front base 452 and the back base 453 are disposed. It is possible to rotate without abutting against the side surface. When a rotational driving force is applied from the driving motor 457, the rotational driving force is transmitted from the gear 454 to the gear 455, and the rear base 571 is rotated. As a result, the rotation unit 500 is rotated.

  A part of the gear 455 is inserted through the first opening 452d of the front base 452, and meshed with the rear base 571 of the rotating unit 500 disposed in front of the front base 452.

  A gear 456 is engaged with the rear base 571 of the rotation unit 500. The gear 456 is a member in which a protrusion for detecting an initial position (reference position) is protruded on the side surface (end surface in the axial direction), and the shaft hole is externally fitted to the shaft support portion 453d of the back surface base 453 so that the back surface. It is disposed on the base 453. Further, a part of the gear 456 is inserted into the second opening 452 e and meshed with the back surface base 571. Further, the gear 456 is formed to have a thickness smaller in the front-rear direction than between the rear base 453 and the front base 452, and when the rear base 453 is disposed on the front base 452, the front base 452 and the rear base 453 are arranged. It is possible to rotate without abutting against the side surface. When a rotational driving force is applied from the driving motor 457 and the gear 454, the gear 455, and the rotating unit 500 (rear base 571) are rotated, the rotational driving force is transmitted from the rear base 571 and the gear 456 is rotated. . As a result, the initial position of the rotation unit 500 can be detected.

  In this case, the number of gear teeth engraved on the outer peripheral surface of the gear 456 and the number of gear teeth of the gear 571a1 engraved on the outer peripheral surface of the back base 571 of the rotary unit 500 are set to be the same. Thus, the gear 456 can be rotated once for each rotation of the rotation unit 500. Thereby, initial position detection (reference position) can be easily performed.

  The signal transmission mechanism 458 is a slip ring that transmits electric power and signals to the irradiation unit 530 of the rotating rotation unit 500, and is configured so that the shaft portion 458a protruding from the front can rotate. The shaft portion 458a is formed in a substantially D-shaped cross section, and a passage is opened inside the shaft portion 458a, and electric wiring is inserted through the passage.

  When the signal transmission mechanism 458 is attached to the back side of the front base 452 through the opening 453b of the back base 453, the electric wiring in which the shaft portion 458a of the signal transmission mechanism 458 is inserted into the shaft portion 458a. At the same time, the front base 452 protrudes from the front.

  Next, the overall configuration of the rotation unit 500 will be described with reference to FIGS. 27 is an exploded front perspective view of the rotating unit 500, and FIG. 28 is an exploded rear perspective view of the rotating unit 500. FIG. 29A is a top view of the rotation unit 500, FIG. 29B is a front view of the rotation unit 500 in the XXIXb direction view of FIG. 29A, and FIG. It is sectional drawing of the rotation unit 500 in the XXIXc-XXIXc line | wire of 29 (a). The rotation unit 500 will be described in a state at an initial position (reference position).

  As shown in FIGS. 27 to 29, the rotation unit 500 includes an upper surface base 510 that forms an upper side surface, a lower surface base 520 that forms a lower side surface, and an irradiation unit 530 disposed below the upper surface base 510. An intermediate member 540 disposed below the irradiation unit 530, a reflector 560 disposed below the intermediate member 540, a front cover 550 disposed in front of the reflector 560, and an upper surface A rotation transmission unit 570 disposed on the back side of the base 510 and the lower surface base 520 is mainly provided.

  The rotation transmission unit 570 is a unit for transmitting the rotation of the drive motor 457 to the upper surface base 510 and the lower surface base 520, and includes a rear surface base 571 disposed on the rear surface side and a front surface base 572 disposed on the front surface side. And a bearing BR sandwiched between the front base 572 and the rear base 571 facing each other, and a fastening member 573 disposed inside the bearing BR.

  The back surface base 571 is formed in an annular shape in front view, and a bulging portion 571a that bulges out in an annular shape in back view is formed on the back side from the inner peripheral edge thereof. A gear 571a1 is formed on the outer side surface of the bulging portion 571a. The gear 571a1 meshes with the gear 455 as described above. As a result, by applying a driving force to the driving motor 457, the driving force of the rotation is transmitted to the back base 571 (gear 571a1) via the gears 454 and 455, and the rotating unit 500 is rotated.

  The front base 572 is formed in an annular shape when viewed from the front, and is provided with an outer standing portion 572a that is erected from the outer peripheral edge portion, and an inner standing portion 572b that is erected in a U-shape when viewed from the inner circumferential circle portion. And comprising.

  The outer standing portion 572a is a wall portion for forming a gap between the front surface of the back surface base 571 and the back surface of the front surface base 572, and sandwiching the bearing BR and the fastening member 573 between the opposed surfaces. The height is set substantially the same as the axial width dimension of BR, and the inner shape is set substantially the same as the outer diameter of the bearing BR.

  Further, the side surface on the standing tip side of the outer standing portion 572a is brought into contact with the front surface of the back surface base 571, and the screw inserted from the back surface side of the back surface base 571 is fastened and fixed. As a result, the back base 571 and the front base 572 are fastened and fixed.

  The inner standing portion 572b is a member that prevents the wiring connecting the inside of the rotation unit 500 and the shaft portion 458a of the signal transmission mechanism 458 from being twisted when the shaft portion 458a of the signal transmission mechanism 458 described above is rotated. The inner shape of the shaft 458a of the signal transmission mechanism 458 is substantially the same as or slightly larger than the outer shape of the shaft portion 458a.

  Therefore, when the rotation unit 500 is disposed on the front base 452, the inner standing portion 572 b can be externally fitted to the shaft portion 458 a of the signal transmission mechanism 458. Therefore, when the rotation unit 500 is rotated, the planar portions of the inner standing portion 572b and the shaft portion 458a of the signal transmission mechanism 458 mesh with each other, and the shaft portion 458a of the signal transmission mechanism 458 can be rotated. As a result, the wiring connecting the rotation unit 500 and the signal transmission mechanism 458 can be prevented from being twisted.

  The bearing BR is a member that suppresses transmission of the rotation to the front base 452 when the rotary unit 500 is rotated with respect to the front base 452, and is an annular metal member having a different inner diameter and outer diameter. Are combined, and a spherical or cylindrical metal body is fitted between the two members.

  The outer diameter of the bearing BR is set to be substantially the same as the inner diameter of the outer standing portion 572a of the front base 572. As a result, the bearing BR can be fixedly disposed on the outer standing portion 572a of the front base 572. In this case, the inner diameter of the back surface base 571 is set smaller than the outer diameter of the bearing BR. Therefore, when the bearing BR is sandwiched between the front base 572 and the rear base 571, the bearing BR is prevented from being detached from the rotation transmission unit 570.

  The fastening member 573 is a member that fastens the rotary unit 500 to the front base 452. The fastening member 573 is formed in an annular shape when viewed from the front, and includes a protruding wall portion 573a that protrudes from the outer peripheral surface on the front side.

  The outer diameter of the fastening member 573 is formed substantially the same as the inner diameter of the bearing BR. On the other hand, the inner diameter of the fastening member 573 is formed larger than the outer shape of the inner standing portion 572b of the front base 572. Accordingly, the fastening member 573 is disposed in the rotation transmission unit 570 in such a manner that the outer edge portion thereof is fitted into the inner edge portion of the bearing BR and the inner edge portion 572b of the front base is inserted into the inner edge portion. .

  The protruding wall portion 573a is a protruding portion for suppressing the fastening member 573 from being detached from the assembled rotation transmission unit 570, and is formed to protrude from the outer peripheral surface of the fastening member 573 over the entire circumference with a fixed protruding dimension. The outer diameter is set larger than the inner diameter of the bearing BR. Therefore, the fastening member 573 can be prevented from being detached from the assembled rotation transmission unit 570 by fitting the fastening member 573 into the bearing BR from the front side of the bearing BR.

  More specifically, it is possible to restrict the fastening member 573 from moving rearward with respect to the bearing BR by fitting the fastening member 573 into the bearing BR from the front of the bearing BR. On the other hand, the movement of the fastening member 573 toward the front side is such that the bearing BR is disposed between the front base 572 and the back base 571 so that the front side surface of the fastening member 573 and the back side of the front base 572 are moved. The side surface of this is abutted and regulated. As a result, it is possible to prevent the fastening member 573 from coming off from the assembled rotation transmission unit 570.

  In addition, since the fastening member 573 that externally fits the bearing BR is fastened to the front base 452, it is possible to suppress transmission of the rotational motion when the rotary unit 500 is rotated to the front base 452.

  That is, when the rotation unit 500 is rotated, only the annular metal body disposed outside the bearing BR is rotated, and the rotation is performed on the annular metal body disposed inside. By not transmitting, it is possible to suppress the fastening member 573 from rotating. As a result, the rotation unit 500 can be rotated with respect to the decorative member 450.

  The top surface base 510 is formed in an arc shape that curves to the back side (upper side in FIG. 29A) when viewed from above, and the front edge portion curves downward (to the back side in FIG. 29A). It is formed in a curved shape. In addition, the upper surface base 510 includes a decorative portion 511 that bulges in a semicircular shape when viewed from the front in the left-right direction (FIG. 29B, left-right direction), and a blower hole 512 that penetrates in the up-down direction (plate pressure direction). The pressing portion 513 protruding in a columnar shape is mainly provided on the lower side.

  The decorative portion 511 is a portion that is fastened to the upper side of the front base 572 of the rotation transmission unit 570 described above, and a fastening hole that is fastened to the front base 572 is formed on the back side. The semicircular radius is formed larger than the radius of the outer diameter of the front base 572. Thereby, it is fastened with the front base 572 of the rotation transmission unit 570, and when viewed from the front, the upper side of the front base 572 can be made invisible.

  The ventilation hole 512 is a through-hole penetrating in the vertical direction (FIG. 29C, vertical direction), and is formed in a long hole shape that is opened long in the front-rear direction (FIG. 29A, vertical direction). A plurality of air holes 512 are formed in the left-right direction along the arc shape of the upper surface base 510.

  When the upper surface base 510 is combined with the lower surface base 520, the pressing unit 513 forms a gap between the irradiation unit 530 sandwiched between the upper surface base 510 and the upper surface base 510, and restricts the movement of the irradiation unit 530. The protrusion height is set to the height up to the side surface on the upper surface side of the irradiation unit 530 (see FIG. 29C). In addition, a plurality of pressing portions 513 are formed so as to protrude from the rear edge of the upper surface base 510.

  The lower surface base 520 is formed in substantially the same shape as the upper surface base 510 and is disposed symmetrically with the upper surface base 510 about the axis of the rotation transmission unit 570. In addition, since the decoration part 521 and the ventilation hole 522 which are formed in the lower surface base have the same shape as the decoration part 511 and the ventilation hole 512 which are formed in the upper surface base 510, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The decorative portion 521 of the lower surface base 520 is a portion fastened to the lower side of the front base 572 of the rotation transmission unit 570, and is fastened to the front base 572 of the rotation transmission unit 570 so that the front base when viewed from the front. The lower side of 572 can be made invisible. Therefore, by combining the upper surface base 510 and the lower surface base 520, it is possible to prevent the player from losing the interest of the player by visually observing the mechanism when the rotating unit 500 is rotated.

  The irradiation unit 530 is mainly provided with a base member 531 and an LED 532 disposed on the lower surface side of the base member 531.

  The base member 531 is formed of a plate-like body having an outer shape as viewed from above, which is slightly smaller than the shape of the upper surface base 510 as viewed from above. Thereby, when the upper surface base 510 and the lower surface base 520 are disposed in combination in the vertical direction, the base member 531 can be made invisible from the vertical direction.

  In addition, the base member 531 is formed with a through-hole 531a penetrating in the vertical direction at the front edge. The through-hole 531a is a member that suppresses displacement of the base member 531 and will be described in detail later. The base member 531 is connected to the wiring of the shaft portion 458b of the signal transmission mechanism 458 described above. Thereby, light can be irradiated from LED532 mentioned later via IC and a capacitor incorporated in the base member 531.

  The LED 532 is formed as a surface-mount type LED, and has a rectangular outer shape (outer shape of a cavity molded from a resin ceramic) in front view, and an irradiation surface (epoxy or silicon sealed in the cavity) that emits light. Etc.) is formed in a circular shape in front view. In addition, a plurality of LEDs 532 are arranged on the lower surface side of the base member 531, and a plurality of LEDs 532 are arranged in the left-right direction along the arc shape of the base member 531 when viewed from above. Thereby, LED532 can irradiate light to the reflecting plate 560 mentioned later.

  The intermediate member 540 is formed of a plate-like body whose outer shape in a top view is substantially the same as the top view shape of the upper surface base 510. Thereby, when the upper surface base 510 and the lower surface base 520 are disposed in combination in the vertical direction, the intermediate member 540 can be disposed between the opposing surfaces.

  The front cover 550 is formed of a transparent light-transmitting material and has an arc shape when viewed from above. The front cover 550 is disposed on the intermediate member 540 side.

  The reflection plate 560 is formed of a plate-like body having a silver decoration (plating) on the outer surface and having an outer shape in a top view substantially the same as a top view shape of the upper surface base 510. In addition, the reflection plate 560 includes a recessed portion 564 in which a front side surface is notched rearward.

  The concave notch 564 is arranged such that the front cover 550 is inserted into the cutout portion so that the front surface of the front cover 550 is positioned substantially the same as the front surfaces of the upper surface base 510, the lower surface base 520, and the intermediate member 540. Can be set. That is, the width dimension of the front cover 550 in the front-rear direction is set to the distance dimension from the front surface of the recessed portion 564 of the reflector 560 to the front surfaces of the upper surface base 510, the lower surface base 520, and the intermediate member 540. Thereby, it can suppress that the front cover 550 protrudes from the rotation unit 500, and is arrange | positioned. As a result, the rotary unit 500 can be assembled as an integrated unit with few irregularities, and when the rotary unit 500 is visually recognized, it is difficult to understand the outer shape of each part, and it is possible to suppress the player's interest from being impaired. .

  Next, the intermediate member 540 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 30A is a top view of the intermediate member 540, and FIG. 30B is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the intermediate member 540 taken along the line XXXb-XXXb in FIG. 30A.

  As shown in FIG. 30A and FIG. 30B, the intermediate member 540 has a first outer edge portion erected upward from the outer edge portion (a direction in which the upper surface base 510 is disposed) when viewed from above. 541 and the second outer edge portion 542, an irradiation hole 543 penetratingly formed in the vertical direction, an irradiation restricting portion 544 protruding from the periphery of the irradiation hole 543, and a protrusion protruding from the front edge It is mainly provided with a portion 545 and a groove 546 that is recessed in the outer peripheral edge of the irradiation restricting portion 544.

  The first outer edge portion 541 is formed on the outer edge portion on the front side of the intermediate member 540. The inner diameter dimension of the curved shape in the top view on the front side (lower side in FIG. 30A) of the first outer edge portion 541 is substantially the same as the outer diameter dimension of the curved shape on the front side in the top view of the base member 531 of the irradiation unit 530. Set the same. The standing dimension of the first outer edge portion 541 is set larger than the thickness dimension (vertical dimension) of the base member 531. Therefore, when the rotation unit 500 is assembled, the irradiation unit 530 can be shielded by the first outer edge portion 541 so that it cannot be seen from the front side.

  The second outer edge portion 542 is formed on the outer edge portion on the back side of the intermediate member 540. The shape of the second outer edge portion 542 in the top view on the back side (upper side in FIG. 30A) is formed substantially the same as the shape on the back side in the top view of the base member 531 of the irradiation unit 530. The standing dimension of the second outer edge portion 542 is set lower than that of the first outer edge portion 541. Therefore, when the rotating unit 500 is assembled, the lower side surface of the irradiation unit 530 is disposed in a state of being in contact with the standing front end surface of the second outer edge portion 542. Therefore, the introduced outside air can be smoothly discharged to the back surface.

  The irradiation hole 543 is a hole for individually dividing the light emitted from the plurality of LEDs 532 provided in the irradiation unit 530, and is opened at a position facing the LED 532 provided in the irradiation unit 530. . Thereby, it can suppress that the light of adjacent LED532 irradiates other range. Further, the inner diameter of the irradiation hole 543 on the irradiation unit 530 side is set to be substantially the same as the outer diameter of the irradiation surface of the LED 532, and their mutual axes are arranged coaxially. Thereby, the light emitted from the LED 532 can be efficiently incident on the reflection portion 563 of the reflection plate 560 described later via the irradiation hole 543.

  Further, the irradiation hole 543 has an inner diameter that increases from the upper surface side (the LED 532 side) toward the lower surface side. Thereby, the light emitted from the LED 532 can be efficiently incident on the reflecting portion 563 of the reflecting plate 560 through the irradiation hole 543.

  The irradiation restricting portion 544 is provided to protrude around the irradiation hole 543 described above. Thereby, since the gap between the LED 532 and the upper surface of the intermediate member 540 facing each other can be reduced, the light of the LED 532 can be easily incident on the irradiation hole 543 and can be prevented from leaking out of the irradiation hole 543. As a result, the intensity of the afterimage display light due to the afterimage effect can be increased.

  Further, the projection dimension of the irradiation restricting portion 544 is set to be substantially the same as the standing dimension of the second outer edge portion 542, and when the rotating unit 500 is assembled, the projection leading end surface of the irradiation restricting portion 544 and the irradiation unit 530 are set. The LED 532 is brought into contact with the LED 532. Thereby, since it can suppress that the light of adjacent LED enters into the irradiation hole 543, the outer diameter of the afterimage display by an afterimage effect can be clarified. In addition, since the inner diameter of the irradiation hole 543 on the irradiation unit 530 side is set to be substantially the same as the outer diameter of the irradiation surface of the LED 532, the area of the irradiation restricting portion 544 that contacts the LED 532 can be secured, so that the light of each LED 532 is emitted. Leakage to the outside of the irradiation hole 543 can be suppressed. As a result, the intensity of the afterimage display light due to the afterimage effect can be increased.

  Furthermore, since the irradiation restriction part 544 is connected to the adjacent irradiation restriction part 544 and the outer peripheral surfaces thereof, the rigidity of the intermediate member 540 can be increased. In this case, the irradiation restricting portion 544 has a circular outer peripheral surface, and the adjacent irradiation restricting portions 544 are connected to each other's outer peripheral surfaces. That is, the group in which the plurality of irradiation restricting portions 544 are connected is formed with an uneven outer shape (a shape in which a plurality of outwardly protruding arcs are connected), so that a space (surface area) is ensured and the heat dissipation effect is enhanced. However, the rigidity of the intermediate member 540 can be increased by utilizing the contour of the outer shape.

  The projecting portion 545 is a projection that restricts the irradiation unit 530 from moving back and forth and from side to side, and is formed at a position where the projection unit 530 is inserted into the through hole 531 a of the base member 531 when the rotation unit 500 is assembled. The projecting portion 545 is formed in a shape in which cylinders having different outer diameter shapes are vertically combined, and a large-diameter portion 545a on the base side and a small-diameter portion 545b on the distal end side having a smaller diameter than the large-diameter portion 545a. Formed from.

  The large-diameter portion 545 a is a protrusion for forming a predetermined gap between the intermediate member 540 and the base member 531 when the irradiation unit 530 is disposed on the intermediate member 540, and penetrates the base member 531. The outer shape is set to be larger than the inner diameter of the hole 531a, and the protruding dimension is set to be substantially the same as the standing dimension of the second outer edge portion 542.

  Thereby, when the irradiation unit 530 is disposed on the intermediate member 540, the facing distance between the intermediate member 540 on the front side and the base member 531 of the irradiation unit 530 is defined. On the other hand, the facing distance between the intermediate member 540 on the back side and the base member 531 of the irradiation unit 530 is defined by the second outer edge portion 542. In addition, since the protruding distance of the large-diameter portion 545a and the standing distance of the second outer edge portion 542 are set to be substantially the same, the vertical side surface of the base member 531 of the irradiation unit 530 is changed to the vertical side surface of the intermediate member 540. It can arrange | position in parallel with respect to.

  The small diameter portion 545b is a protrusion for positioning the irradiation unit 530 with respect to the intermediate member 540 when the irradiation unit 530 is disposed on the intermediate member 540, and is approximately the same as the inner diameter of the through hole 531a of the base member 531. Set to the same or slightly smaller outer diameter. Therefore, when the irradiation unit 530 is disposed on the intermediate member 540, the through-hole 531a of the base member 531 is externally fitted to the small diameter portion 545b of the intermediate member 540, whereby the irradiation unit 530 with respect to the intermediate member 540 is moved in the front-rear and left-right directions. Can be specified.

  The groove portion 546 is a groove that extends along the base of the irradiation restricting portion 544 and is recessed in a U-shaped cross section. Since the area of contact between the side surface of the intermediate member 540 and the outside air is increased by the recessed portion of the groove portion 546, the heat dissipation of the intermediate member 540 is improved. Moreover, the heat dissipation effect can be enhanced while ensuring the rigidity of the intermediate member 540. That is, by forming the groove-shaped groove portion 546 extending along the base of the irradiation restricting portion 544, while minimizing the region recessed in the intermediate member 540, while ensuring the rigidity of the intermediate member 540, By the operation of the LED 532, the space can be expanded to a portion where the generated heat is particularly concentrated, and the heat dissipation effect can be enhanced.

  The groove width of the groove portion 546 is set to be smaller than the distance dimension from the outer peripheral edge portion of the irradiation restricting portion 544 to the irradiation hole 543, and the recessed depth of the groove portion 546 is more than half the plate thickness of the intermediate member 540. Set small.

  Next, the front cover 550 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 31A is a front view of the front cover 550, and FIG. 31B is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the front cover 550 taken along the line XXXIB-XXXIb in FIG. In addition, in FIG.31 (b), the spreading | diffusion part 551 is typically illustrated.

  As shown in FIGS. 31 (a) and 31 (b), the front cover 550 has a diffusion portion 551 on the side surface on the inner edge side (upper side in FIG. 31 (b)) on the lower side (left side in FIG. 31 (b)). Formed in preparation.

  The diffuser 551 is a roughened portion, and can diffuse the light irradiated to the diffuser 551 by irregularly reflecting the rough surface. The rough surface processing is a processing mode in which irregularities are formed on the surface.

  Next, the reflector 560 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 32A is a top view of the reflecting plate 560, and FIG. 32B is a partially enlarged sectional view of the reflecting plate 560 taken along the line XXXIIb-XXXIIb in FIG. In addition, in FIG.32 (b), the reflection part 563 is typically illustrated.

  32A and 32B, the reflector 560 is surrounded by a partition wall 561 standing on the upper surface side (the front side of FIG. 32A) and the partition wall 561. The reflective portion 563 formed on the upper surface of the region and the standing wall 562 standing along the edge on the back surface side are mainly provided.

  The partition wall 561 is erected in a U shape with the front side (the lower side in FIG. 32 (a)) open in a top view, and a plurality of partition walls 561 are provided in the left-right direction along the front edge of the reflector 560. The pieces are formed side by side. Further, the adjacent standing walls 562 are combined into a wall portion extending in the front direction to serve as one wall portion. Thereby, the space which arranges the partition wall 561 in parallel can be made small. As a result, the number of partition walls 561 can be maximized.

  The reflection portion 563 is formed by roughening the upper surface of a region surrounded by the front edge of the reflection plate 560 and the partition wall 561 in a top view by laser processing or the like. The reflecting portion 563 has a horizontal portion 563a formed from side surfaces parallel to the upper surface and the lower surface of the reflecting plate 560, and the thickness of the reflecting plate 560 increases as the reflecting portion 563 is connected to the horizontal portion 563a and separated from the horizontal portion 563a. And an inclined surface 563b inclined in the direction.

  The horizontal portion 563a is formed on a side surface other than the front edge portion among the side surfaces parallel to the upper surface and the lower surface of the reflecting plate 560. That is, the horizontal portion 563a (reflecting portion 563) is not formed on the edge portion on the front side, and roughening is not performed. Thereby, the reflection part 563 can be formed while holding the front edge of the reflection plate 560. As a result, it is not necessary to separately form a holding portion for roughening the surface of the reflector 560, and the manufacturing cost can be reduced.

  The inclined surface 563b is a portion that mainly reflects light emitted from the LED 532 of the irradiation unit 530 disposed on the upper surface side to the front side, and is inclined by 45 degrees toward the front side with respect to the irradiation surface of the LED 532. Formed on the surface.

  The connecting position between the horizontal portion 563 a and the inclined surface 563 b is set to a position where the connecting straight line passes through the axis of the irradiation surface of the LED 532. Thereby, the light irradiated toward the back side among the light irradiated from LED532 can be effectively reflected to the front side by the inclined surface 563b. On the other hand, the light irradiated to the front side among the light irradiated from LED532 can be reflected to the front side by the horizontal part 563a.

  As described above, the standing wall 562 is erected along the edge on the back side of the reflector 560, and the erected height is set to the same height as that of the partition wall 561. . Thereby, when the rotation unit 500 is assembled (the intermediate member 540 is disposed above the reflection plate 560), a space can be formed between the standing wall 562 and the partition wall 561. That is, an air layer can be formed between the reflector 560 and the intermediate member 540. As a result, it is possible to suppress heat from being stored inside the reflector 560 and the intermediate member 540, and the rotation unit 500 stores heat so that the base member 531 of the irradiation unit 530 disposed in the rotation unit 500 It is possible to suppress damage.

  As described above, the configured rotating unit 500 is assembled as follows. First, the fastening member 573 is fitted on the inner circle portion of the bearing BR from the front side, and the inner circle portion of the fastening member 573 is fitted on the inner standing portion 572b of the front base 572. After integrating the front base 572, the bearing BR, and the fastening member 573, the rear base 571 is disposed on the rear side thereof, and the front base 572 and the rear base 571 are fastened to assemble the rotation transmission unit 570 as a unit.

  The lower surface base 520 is disposed below the reflecting plate 560 at the front portion of the rotating unit 500 (the portion excluding the rotation transmission unit 570), and the lower surface base 520 and the reflecting plate 560 are fastened. After the lower surface base 520 and the reflection plate 560 are fastened and fixed, the intermediate member 540 is superimposed on the upper surface side of the reflection plate 560 with the front cover 550 sandwiched between the front surface side and the front surface cover 550. The irradiation unit 530 is disposed on the upper surface of the intermediate member 540 in a state in which the through hole 531a is externally fitted to the small-diameter portion 545b of the projecting portion 545 of the intermediate member 540. In this state, the upper surface base 510 is disposed from above and fastened to the intermediate member 540, whereby the front portion of the rotation unit 500 (the portion excluding the rotation transmission unit 570) is assembled as a unit.

  Next, the rotation transmission unit 570 is disposed behind the front portion of the rotation unit 500, and the rotation unit 500 and the rotation transmission unit 570 are fastened to assemble the rotation unit 500 as one unit.

  Next, with reference to FIG.33 and FIG.34, the light irradiated from LED532 of the irradiation unit 530 is demonstrated. 33A is a top view of the rotation unit 500, and FIG. 33B is a cross-sectional view of the rotation unit 500 taken along the line XXXIIIb-XXXIIIb in FIG. 33A. 34A and 34B are partially enlarged cross-sectional views of the rotation unit 500 in the XXXIV part of FIG. 33B.

  FIG. 33A shows a state where the upper surface base 510 and the irradiation unit 530 are removed from the rotation unit 500. Further, in FIGS. 34A and 34B, the light emitted from the LED 532 is illustrated by a two-dot chain line.

  As shown in FIG. 33A and FIG. 33B, below the irradiation hole 543 of the intermediate member 540, a reflection portion 563 that is partitioned as one region by being surrounded by the partition wall 561 is disposed. . As described above, since each LED 532 is disposed above each irradiation hole 543, the light irradiated from each LED 532 can be irradiated to the reflecting portions 563 at different positions. That is, since the light emitted from each LED 532 can be emitted in a state of being partitioned by each reflecting portion 563, the separation of the light of each LED 532 can be clarified. As a result, the light emitted from each LED 532 can be emitted only from the corresponding reflecting portion 563, and the external appearance of the afterimage display by the afterimage effect can be clarified.

  Further, the structure in which the light of the LED 532 is incident on the reflecting portion 563 of the corresponding reflecting plate 560 through the irradiation hole 543 of the intermediate member 540 is formed from the two members of the reflecting plate 560 and the intermediate member 540. The structure can be simplified as compared with the case where the body is composed of one member. Therefore, the product cost can be reduced.

  As shown in FIG. 34 (a), the light emitted from the LED 532 of the irradiation unit 530 to the inclined surface 563b of the reflecting plate 560 is irregularly reflected by the rough surface of the inclined surface 563b, and the front side (below FIG. 34 (a)). Side), is transmitted through the front cover 550, and is emitted to the front side of the gaming machine. That is, the light emitted from the LED 532 can be emitted to the front (front side) of the rotation unit 500. Therefore, even when the surface of the base member 531 is set so that the surface on which the LED 532 is mounted is substantially parallel to the rotation axis of the rotary unit 500, the player can visually recognize the light (flashing) of the LED 532 and display an afterimage by the afterimage effect. be able to.

  Moreover, the light irradiated from LED532 can be efficiently radiate | emitted to the player side by the inclined surface 563b of the reflecting plate 560. FIG. Therefore, stronger light can be emitted to the front side of the rotary unit 500. Therefore, it is possible to increase the intensity of the afterimage display light due to the afterimage effect.

  Among the light emitted from the LED 532 to the inclined surface 563b of the reflecting portion 563, there is light that is irregularly reflected by the rough surface of the inclined surface 563b and reflected by the surfaces facing the intermediate member 540 and the reflecting plate 560. . The light reflected by the opposing surfaces of the intermediate member 540 and the reflecting plate 560 is reflected again by the surfaces (the opposing surfaces of the intermediate member 540 and the reflecting plate 560), and is irradiated on the front cover 550.

  In this case, as described above, the intermediate member 540 is formed in white having a light absorption rate lower than that of black, so that the light reflected by the intermediate member 540 can be easily reflected again. On the other hand, as described above, the reflecting plate 560 has a silver decoration on the outer surface, and can easily reflect light reflected by the reflecting plate 560 again.

  Therefore, the light irradiated from the LED 532 to the reflecting portion 563 can be emitted from the front side (to the player side) of the rotating unit 500 in a state where the light is irregularly reflected by the rough surface and is uniformly dispersed. That is, it can suppress that the light radiate | emitted from opening of the reflection part 563 is visually recognized in the state biased to a part of the opening.

  As shown in FIG. 34 (b), the light emitted from the LED 532 of the irradiation unit 530 to the horizontal portion 563a of the reflector 560 is irregularly reflected by the rough surface of the horizontal portion 563a, and the front side (below FIG. 34 (b)). Reflected to the side). Therefore, the light emitted from the LED 532 can be emitted through the front cover 550 to the front side.

  In addition, since the rough surface of the horizontal part 563a is not formed at the front side end of the reflection plate 560, light can be easily emitted toward the front side (player side) of the rotary unit 500. In addition, the intensity of the afterimage display light due to the afterimage effect can be increased. That is, when the rough surface processing is performed on the front surface side end portion of the rotating unit 500 among the inner surfaces of the reflecting plate 560, light is irregularly reflected by the rough surface, and the front surface side (player side) of the rotating unit 500 is reflected. ), The front-side end of the reflector 560 is not formed, and at least a smooth surface that is flatter than the rough surface processed into the reflector 563 is diffusely reflected. Can be suppressed, and the light traveling toward the front side (player side) of the rotary unit 500 can be increased.

  Further, the partition wall 561 has a front side (recessed portion 564) formed at an end portion on the front side of the horizontal portion 563a (a portion where the rough surface processing of the reflection portion 563 is not formed (smooth surface)). Since the surface of the horizontal portion 563a is not formed with the roughened surface, the cross-sectional area of the inner surface of the portion of the horizontal portion 563a that is not formed is increased toward the end on the front side of the rotary unit 500. Increased (expanded diameter). Therefore, the light emitted toward the front side of the rotation unit 500 can be spread. That is, the area visually recognized as the light emitting region can be expanded more than the area of the light emitting surface of the LED 532. Therefore, the LED 532 can be downsized.

  Further, the front side of the reflecting plate 560 (the rotating unit 500) is formed so as to bend toward the rear side toward the end with the central portion (rotating axis) in the left-right direction as the center. The front end (recessed portion 564) in each region partitioned by the partition wall 561 is formed at the end portion on the side where the notched portion 564 is formed, as the end portion is radially separated from the rotation axis of the rotating unit 500. The length of the end of the side) is increased. Thereby, the visually recognized brightness (light brightness) of each of the plurality of reflecting portions 563 can be made uniform.

  That is, in the rotation unit 500, the displacement speed (circumferential speed) increases from the rotation axis (rotation center) toward the outer side in the radial direction. Therefore, when the LEDs 532 arranged in a row emit light with the same brightness, the rotation axis The light from the LED 532 closer to is more bright (brighter) than the light from the LED 532 farther from the rotation axis (outward in the radial direction).

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the front side (recessed notch) in each region partitioned by the partition wall 561 as the end portion on the front side of the reflecting plate 560 is separated from the rotation axis of the rotary unit 500 in the radial direction. Since the length dimension of the end portion on the side where the portion 564 is formed is increased, the reflection portion 563 (LED 532) that is spaced radially outward from the rotation axis of the rotation unit 500 increases the irregular reflection due to the rough surface. (I.e., by reducing the proportion of light directly visible to the player from the LED 532), it can be viewed as light with high brightness. As a result, it is possible to suppress the difference in brightness as viewed with eyes at the radial positions, and to make the brightness (light brightness) uniform.

  Further, the length dimension of the horizontal portion 563a of the reflecting plate 560 in the direction parallel to the axial direction of the rotating unit 500 is increased as the distance from the rotating shaft of the rotating unit 500 in the radial direction increases. Each visually recognized brightness (light brightness) can be made uniform.

  The light irradiating the front cover 550 can diffuse the traveling direction of the light by the diffusion portion 551 formed on the inner peripheral surface of the front cover 550. That is, due to the rough surface of the diffusion portion 551 of the front cover 550, the traveling direction of the light irradiated to the diffusion portion 551 can be bent in a plurality of different directions. As a result, the light emitted toward the front side of the rotating unit 500 can be spread. That is, the area visually recognized as the light emitting region can be expanded more than the area of the light emitting surface of the LED 532. Therefore, the LED 532 can be downsized.

  Also, here, if the light of the LED 532 is directly visible to the player (without allowing the light-transmissive material member to pass through), the light of the LED 532 has high directivity to the front, so the player is dazzling. There was a fear.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, since the surface which diffuses the light irradiated from LED532 is formed in two places, the reflecting plate 560 and the front cover 550, the directivity of the light irradiated from LED532 can be weakened. Thereby, it can suppress that a player visually recognizes the irradiated light and feels dazzling.

  Here, what has a plurality of light emitting means (LEDs 532) and performs display by an afterimage effect by blinking the light emitting means according to the rotational position is known. However, in the conventional light emitting means, the posture of the base (base member 531) is such that the surface on which the light emitting means is mounted is orthogonal to the rotation axis (that is, the irradiation direction of the light emitting means is directed to the front side (player side). Therefore, the outer shape in front view (viewed in the direction of the rotation axis) is increased. For this reason, there is a problem in that the visibility on the back side of the rotary unit 500 is hindered in a state where the rotation of the rotary display device (the rotary unit 500) is stopped.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the rotating unit 500 is configured such that the base member 531 on which the plurality of LEDs 532 are arranged is in a posture in which the surface on which the LEDs 532 are mounted is substantially parallel to the rotating shaft of the rotating unit 500. Since it is disposed between 510 and the lower surface base 520, the outer shapes of the upper surface base 510 and the lower surface base 520 in a front view (viewed in the rotation axis direction) can be suppressed. As a result, in the state where the rotation of the rotation unit 500 is stopped, it is possible to improve the visibility on the back side of the upper surface base 510 and the lower surface base 520.

  Next, the rotation of the rotation unit 500 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 35A and FIG. 35B are front views of the rotation unit 500. 36A and 36B are top views of the rotation unit 500. FIG.

  35 (a) to 36 (b), the flow of air generated by the rotating unit 500 is illustrated by a two-dot chain line, and the code of the airflow K is given. Further, the air holes 512 and 522 of the upper surface base 510 and the lower surface base 520 are illustrated by broken lines.

  Further, in the present embodiment, only the description when the rotation unit 500 is rotated counterclockwise in the front view is used. Since there is, explanation is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 35A and FIG. 35B, when the rotating unit 500 is rotated by the driving force of the driving motor 457 described above, external air enters through the air holes 512 and 522 by the rotation. An air flow K is generated inside the rotation unit 500.

  In this case, since the air holes 512 and 522 are opened in a tangential direction with respect to the rotation direction of the rotary unit 500, when the rotary unit 500 rotates, the air holes 512 and 522 pass through the air holes 512 and 522. External air can easily enter the inside of the rotary unit 500.

  More specifically, when the rotating unit 500 is rotated in the left direction when viewed from the front, at the initial position, the blow hole 512 of the upper surface base 510 formed on the right side of the front view and the blow hole of the lower surface base 520 formed on the left side of the front view. 522 is displaced in a direction in which air is taken into (inserted through) the air holes 512 and 522. As a result, when the rotating unit 500 rotates, air outside the rotating unit 500 can easily enter the rotating unit 500. Therefore, the heat generated when the LED 532 operates can be cooled.

  In addition, since the ventilation hole 512 of the upper surface base 510 and the ventilation hole 522 of the lower surface base 520 are formed to be pointed with respect to the rotation axis, when the rotation unit 500 rotates in the right direction when viewed from the front, the rotation at the initial position is performed. External air can be easily taken into the rotary unit 500 by the blower holes 512 of the upper surface base 510 formed on the left side of the unit 500 in front view and the blower holes 522 of the lower surface base 520 formed on the right side of front view. That is, even when the rotation unit 500 rotates in the right direction, the same effects as those described above (when the rotation unit 500 rotates to the left in front view) are obtained.

  Here, when the base (base member 531) on which the LED (LED 532) is mounted is arranged inside the rotating body (rotating unit 500), the LED emits light while rotating the rotating body. If the heat generated during the operation of the IC / capacitor cannot be sufficiently cooled, the soldering of the LED soldered to the substrate and the IC / capacitor for controlling the LED may melt, leading to poor contact.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the air holes 512 and 522 are opened in a tangential direction with respect to the rotation direction of the rotation unit 500, the outside air is taken into the rotation unit 500 by the rotation of the rotation unit 500. be able to. Therefore, the heat generated when the LED operates can be cooled.

  The air taken into the rotary unit 500 from the blow holes 512 and 522 mainly collides with the irradiation unit 530 or the reflection plate 560 and is dispersed. The airflow K dispersed on the back side of the rotating unit 500 (FIG. 35A, the back side of the paper surface) is moved to the outside of the rotating unit 500 from the back side opening (gap between the opposing surfaces) of the upper surface base 510 and the lower surface base 520. It is blown and released into the atmosphere.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 36 (a), the airflow K dispersed on the front side of the rotating unit 500 (FIG. 35 (a) on the front side of the paper surface) is radial from the rotating shaft by the centrifugal force of rotation of the rotating unit 500. The air is blown to the outside, and is blown to the outside of the rotating unit 500 to be released into the atmosphere (see FIG. 35A).

  That is, the rotating unit 500 is formed in a container-like shape with the back side opened by combining the upper surface base 510 and the lower surface base 520, so that the outside air taken in from the blow holes 512 and 522 is efficiently taken from the back side. Can be exhausted automatically, so that the heat generation can be cooled when the LED 532 operates. Further, by exhausting from the back side of the upper surface base 510 and the lower surface base 520 in this way, it is possible to suppress the exhaust from affecting the sphere flowing down the game area (or rolling the stage).

  Further, in the present embodiment, the upper surface base 510 and the lower surface base 520 have a rectangular shape when viewed from the front (that is, viewed in the direction of the rotation axis) that is elongated along the diameter direction in the rotation plane of the upper surface base 510 and the lower surface base 520. Therefore, the centrifugal force accompanying the rotation of the upper surface base 510 and the lower surface base 520 is utilized to move the air inside the upper surface base 510 and the lower surface base 520 to the longitudinal direction end side (radially outward during rotation). It can be made to flow and exhaust from the back side. Therefore, along with the flow of air, outside air can be taken into the upper surface base 510 and the lower surface base 520 from the back surface side in the vicinity of the rotation transmission unit 570.

  That is, in the vicinity of the rotation transmission unit 570, since the rotation speed is low, the efficiency of taking in the outside air from the air blowing holes 512 and 522 on the side wall is poor (or cannot be taken in), but air circulation using the centrifugal force (rotation transmission unit 570). The outside air is taken in from the back side in the vicinity, and the taken outside air is made to flow to the longitudinal end side (radially outward during rotation) by centrifugal force, and the air exhausted from the back side on the radially outward side) Can be formed. As a result, the heat generated when the LED 532 operates can be cooled. In particular, cooling of the LED 532 disposed in the vicinity of the rotation transmission unit 570 can be achieved.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 36B, when the air inside the rotation unit 500 is pushed outward in the radial direction by the rotation of the rotation unit 500, the internal pressure on the center side of the rotation unit 500 is reduced. External air is taken in through a gap on the back side between the rotation transmission unit 570 of 500 and the upper surface base 510 and the lower surface base 520. As a result, cooling of the LED 532 disposed in the vicinity of the rotation transmission unit 570 can be achieved more reliably.

  In this case, the front wall that forms the front side of the upper surface base 510 and the lower surface base 520 (the front edge portion of the upper surface base 510 is downward (FIG. 29A, the back side of the paper surface) (the lower edge of the lower surface base 520 is upward). The curved portion) has a shape parallel to the rotation planes of the upper surface base 510 and the lower surface base 520 (that is, the shape of the upper surface base 510 and the lower surface base 520 viewed in the direction perpendicular to the rotation axis is a rectangular parallelepiped shape). The angle of the portion where the air that has flowed to the longitudinal end portion (radially outward at the time of rotation) due to centrifugal force changes direction toward the back side becomes substantially a right angle, so that vortices are likely to be formed at this portion. . Therefore, the air flow is hindered, and smooth exhaust from the back side becomes difficult.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, the front side of the upper surface base 510 and the lower surface base 520 (the front edge of the upper surface base 510 is downward (FIG. 29 (a) the back side of the paper surface) (the lower edge of the lower surface base 520 is upward)). The shape of the curved portion is curved outward from the central portion in the left-right direction, so that the air flowing toward the longitudinal end side (radially outward during rotation) by the centrifugal force is gradually increased. The angle of the portion where the air that has flowed to the longitudinal end (radially outward) changes direction toward the back side can be made larger than a substantially right angle. The flow of air can be made smooth by suppressing the formation of vortices. Therefore, exhaust from the back side can be performed more smoothly. As a result, cooling of the LED 532 disposed in the vicinity of the rotation transmission unit 570 can be achieved more reliably.

  Further, the distance dimension between the opposite sides of the upper surface base 510 and the lower surface base 520 on the back surface side (FIG. 35 (a) vertical dimension) is the distance dimension on the back surface side in the vicinity of the rotation transmission unit 570. Since the distance is larger than the distance on the back side, the air inside the upper surface base 510 and the lower surface base 520 flows to the longitudinal end side (radially outward during rotation) by utilizing the centrifugal force accompanying rotation. By exhausting from the rear side on the radially outer side, the intake can be efficiently performed when the outside air is taken in from the rear side in the vicinity of the rotation transmission unit 570.

  In addition, the open portion on the back side in the vicinity of the rotation transmission unit 570 (the inner periphery of the decorative portion 511 of the upper surface base 510 and the decorative portion 521 of the lower surface base 520) is formed in a circular shape concentric with the rotation shaft. As the lower surface base 520 rotates, the outside air on the back side in the vicinity of the rotation transmission unit 570 can be prevented from being disturbed (flow in the rotational direction is formed). As a result, outside air can be efficiently taken in from the back side in the vicinity of the rotation transmission unit 570.

  Further, since the outer peripheral surface of the outer standing portion 572a of the front base 572 is formed so as to be narrowed from the back side to the front side, the rotating unit 500 has the decorative portion 511 of the upper surface base 510 and the decorative portion of the lower surface base 520. It is possible to suppress the generation of vortices in the airflow K when air is taken in from the gap between 521 and the rotation transmission unit 570. Therefore, the flow of the airflow K flowing through the central portion in the left-right direction of the rotation unit 500 can be made smooth, and when outside air is taken in from the back side in the vicinity of the rotation transmission unit 570, the intake can be efficiently performed. .

  Next, the center frame 600 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  First, the overall configuration of the center frame 600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 37 and 38. FIG. 37 is an exploded front perspective view of the center frame 600, and FIG. 38 is an exploded rear perspective view of the center frame 600.

  As shown in FIGS. 37 and 38, the center frame 600 includes a frame 610 formed in an annular shape when viewed from the front, a center cover 620 disposed so as to cover an inner peripheral portion of the frame 610, The sensor 630 attached to the frame 610 is mainly provided.

  The frame body 610 includes a stage 611 protruding from the lower part of the inner peripheral edge in the front view to the center cover 620 side (rear side), a wall 612 protruding radially outward from the outer peripheral side surface, and the rear side. A fastening hole 613 that is recessed in a circular shape toward the front side and an opening 614 that opens on the front side of the irradiation surface 631 of the sensor 630 that is disposed on the back side. The

  The frame 610 is a member that is disposed in the center of the game board 13 so as to surround the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2), and is visible to the player through the glass 8. Patterns and pictures are drawn on the front side.

  The stage 611 is formed by bending from the inner edge on the lower side of the frame body 610 to the back side. The top surface has a first recessed portion 611a at the front end and a second recess at the back end. The installation portions 611b are recessed.

  The stage 611 rolls the sphere on the upper surface thereof, and drops the sphere from the upper surface of the stage 611 using the inclination of either the first recessed portion 611a or the second recessed portion 612b, thereby causing the first It is possible to form a state in which a ball can easily win a prize at the winning opening 64. Accordingly, a plurality of flow paths of the spheres flowing down the game area can be formed, so that the player can be provided with interest.

  The first recessed portion 611a is a groove for dropping a ball rolling on the upper portion of the stage 611 to the front side of the game board 13 (the front side of the base plate 60), and has a recessed depth toward the front side. Is deeply formed. The second recessed portion 611b is a groove for sending a sphere to an opening formed in the back surface portion at the center in the left-right direction of the stage 611, and the recessed depth is formed deeper toward the back surface side.

  The wall portion 612 is a portion that is positioned in the front-rear direction with respect to the base plate 60 when the assembled center frame 600 is disposed on the base plate 60 (see FIG. 2). The outer shape is larger than the inner shape of the opening penetrating in the direction. As a result, when the center frame 600 is inserted into the opening of the base plate 60 from the front side, the side surface on the back side of the wall portion 612 contacts the side surface on the front side of the base plate 60, so The center frame 600 can be positioned.

  The fastening holes 613 are a plurality of holes provided on the back side of the frame 610, and are formed at positions facing through holes 623a of the center cover 620, which will be described later. The opening 614 is an opening for irradiating the sensor light emitted from the sensor 630 described later to the front side, and is formed at a position facing the irradiation surface 631 irradiated with the sensor light of the sensor 630.

  The center cover 620 is formed of a resin material of a light transmissive material, is formed in a substantially circular shape when viewed from the front, and is disposed on the inner peripheral side of the frame body 610, and left and right edges of the cover member 621 Side wall part 622 erected on the front side from the front side, and a mounting part 623 projecting outward from the erected tip surface of the side wall part 622 and the lower edge of the cover member 621. The

  The cover member 621 is formed in a plate-like body having a constant thickness that curves toward the back side (from the front side becomes a convex curved surface) as it goes outward from the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. The upper peripheral edge (hereinafter referred to as “first portion 621a”) of the central portion in the left-right direction is formed in front of the left and right ends and the peripheral edge of the lower end (hereinafter referred to as “second portion”).

  Since the cover member 621 is formed of a plate-like body having a constant thickness, it can be prevented from acting as a convex lens, and the visibility of the third symbol display device 81 disposed on the back side can be ensured.

  Further, since the cover member 621 is formed of a plate-like body having a constant thickness, the cover member 621 and the third symbol display device 81 are opposed to each other by the amount that the central portion in the left-right direction is curved toward the front side when viewed from the front. A space can be formed between them. Thereby, the space which the decoration member 450 of the vertical displacement unit 400 mentioned above displaces and produces can be ensured.

  The side wall portion 622 is a wall portion so that the center cover 620 can be attached to the frame body 610, and the cover member 621 is curved to the back side as described above. Where the distance between the front face of 620 increases and the side wall 622 increases, the distance between the back face of the frame 610 and the front face of the center cover 620 can be reduced (eliminated).

  That is, the standing dimension on the front side of the side wall 622 is set to the distance between the rear surface of the frame body 610 and the front surface of the center cover 620 when the center cover 620 is disposed on the frame body 610. Thus, when the frame body 610 and the center cover 620 are combined, it is possible to prevent the first portion 621a of the cover member 621 from being projected too far to the front side of the frame body 610.

  The attachment portion 623 is a protruding portion for attaching the center cover 620 to the frame body 610, and a plurality of through holes 623a that are formed to penetrate in the front-rear direction are formed. As described above, the fastening hole 613 is formed in the back surface of the frame body 610 at a position facing the through hole 623a, and a screw or the like (not shown) is inserted through the through hole 623a and fastened to the fastening hole 613. Thus, the frame body 610 and the center cover 620 are fastened and fixed.

  The sensor 630 is a motion sensor for detecting a player's motion, and is a light emitting unit that emits light such as infrared rays, and a light receiving unit that receives reflected light that is reflected from the light emitted from the light emitting unit. And an irradiation surface 631 having the following.

  The sensor 630 is disposed at a height of about 2/3 from the bottom when the frame 610 is divided into three equal parts in the vertical direction, and is disposed on the right side of the frame 610. The sensor 630 is disposed in a state where the irradiation surface 631 is inclined toward the center front side of the center frame 600. Thereby, the light irradiated from the irradiation surface 631 of the sensor 630 is emitted from the front side central portion of the game board 13 to the player side through the glass 8.

  Next, sensor light emitted from the sensor 630 will be described with reference to FIGS. 39 and 40.

  39A is a front view of the center frame 600, and FIG. 39B is a cross-sectional view of the center frame 600 taken along the line XXXIXb-XXXIXb of FIG. 39A. 40A is a cross-sectional view of the center frame 600 taken along the line XLa-XLa of FIG. 39A, and FIG. 40B is a cross-sectional view of the center frame 600 taken along the line XLb-XLb of FIG. FIG.

  In FIGS. 39A and 40B, the light irradiation area of the sensor 630 irradiated in front of the center frame 600 is illustrated by two-dot chain lines, and is illustrated as irradiation areas R1 and R2. Further, in FIG. 39B, the sensor 630 is illustrated by a broken line. 40 (b) and 40 (b), the sensor 630 and the light emitted from the sensor 630 are illustrated by two-dot chain lines, and are disposed in front of the center frame 600 (in front of the game board 13). The glass 8 to be formed is shown by a two-dot chain line.

  As shown in FIGS. 39 and 40, the sensor 630 is disposed in front of the second portion 621 b of the cover member 621. Accordingly, the light emitted from the sensor 630 is not emitted to the front side of the gaming machine via the cover member 621 (transmitted), and the light emitted from the sensor 630 is blocked by the cover member 621. This can be suppressed. In addition, the sensor 630 has a decorative portion of the frame 610 disposed on the front side. Thereby, it is possible to make it difficult to visually recognize the sensor 630 from the player side (front side).

  The light emitted from the sensor 630 is emitted directly from the irradiation surface 631 of the sensor 630 to the irradiation region R1 that is emitted from the front side of the glass 8 and the front surface of the cover member 621 of the center cover 620. The reflected light is reflected and emitted to the region of the irradiation region R2 that is emitted from the front side of the glass 8.

  Here, a motion sensor is exposed in a gaming machine in which a motion sensor (sensor 630) is disposed in the gaming machine and detects the player's operation on the front side of the liquid crystal device (the third symbol display device 81). There was a problem of detracting from interest.

  Therefore, the sensor 630 is disposed on the back side of the decorative member (frame body 610). In this case, if the sensor 630 is retracted from the inner edge side (opening 614 of the frame body 610) to the back side (outside) of the decorative member, the sensor 630 can be more difficult to see, but the light emitting unit and the light receiving unit (irradiation surface 631) are in front. The detection range becomes narrower. On the other hand, if the sensor 630 is positioned close to the inner edge side (opening of the frame body 610) of the decorative member, the light emitting part and the light receiving part can be easily directed to the front, so that the detection range can be widened in the front-rear direction. It becomes easy to be visually recognized. That is, there is a problem that it is difficult to secure a range in which an object can be detected while making the sensor 630 difficult to be visually recognized by the player.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, a part of the light irradiated from the irradiation surface 631 of the sensor 630 is irradiated to the cover member 621 of the center cover 620, so that the curved shape of the cover member 621 causes the front side ( Reflected by the player side). Accordingly, the sensor 630 can be retracted to the back of the opening 614 of the frame body 610, and a range in which an object can be detected can be ensured while being difficult to be visually recognized by the player. Since the cover member 621 is made of a light transmissive material, the visibility of the symbols displayed on the liquid crystal display device can be ensured.

  Further, since the front surface side of the cover member 621 is a convex curved surface, when the light emitted from the sensor 630 is reflected on the front surface of the cover member 621, the angle of reflection (reflection angle) is close to the sensor 630. The angle of reflection (reflection angle) can be made more obtuse at a position far from the sensor 630, and the range in which an object can be detected can be easily expanded accordingly.

  Furthermore, the light irradiated to the irradiation region R2 (light reflected by the cover member 621) is reflected to the cover member 621 side when the object is irradiated and reflected. In this case, the traveling direction of the reflected light differs depending on the surface shape of the object to be reflected, but the light reflected in a plurality of directions is reflected on the front surface of the cover member 621, so that the light reflected in the different directions progresses. The direction can be a traveling direction toward the sensor 630 side. That is, by increasing the amount of light reflected to the sensor 630 side, the light receiving detection operation of the sensor 630 can be reliably performed.

  The first portion 621a of the cover member 621 is positioned on the front side of the wall portion 612 of the frame body 610, and the second portion 621b is positioned on the back side of the wall portion 612 of the frame body 610 (FIG. 39 ( b)). That is, the first portion 621a is disposed substantially at the same position as the back surface of the base plate 60 or at a position closer to the front side than the back surface of the base plate 60 (see FIG. 2), and the second portion 621b is the back surface of the base plate 60. It is arrange | positioned in the position which becomes the back side rather than.

  Thereby, the distance dimension between the cover member 621 of the center cover 620 and the third symbol display device 81 at the upper part of the center frame 600 can be secured. As a result, the dimension in the front-rear direction when the decorative member 450 of the vertical displacement unit 400 described above is displaced in the vertical direction can be secured, and the decorative member 450 can be displaced. Further, the curvature of the cover member 621 can be increased in a limited space between the rear space where the decorative member 450 is displaced and the front space where the glass 8 is disposed.

  Further, since the first portion 621a is disposed substantially at the same position as the back surface of the base plate 60 or at the front side of the back surface of the base plate 60 (see FIG. 2), the decorative member 450 ( It can suppress more reliably that the rotation unit 500) interferes with the 1st part 621a, and the size of a displacement member can be aimed at by that much.

  Further, since the second portion 621b is disposed at a position closer to the back side than the back side of the base plate 60, the curvature of the cover member 621 can be increased, and the front side of the cover member 621 is used as a light reflecting surface. Easy to do. That is, it is possible to secure a range in which an object can be detected while disposing the sensor 630 on the back side so that it is difficult for the player to visually recognize it.

  In addition, since the first portion 621a is located above the cover member 621, in a store where the gaming machine 10 is installed, the illumination of the fluorescent lamp of the store is reflected by the cover member 621 and the front side (player side) Can be suppressed from being irradiated.

  That is, if the upper part of the cover member 621 is curved to the back side, the light of the fluorescent lamp of the store irradiated from obliquely above becomes a shape that easily reflects to the front side. Since the normal line direction is formed as a curved surface that is directed at least below the horizontal direction, the light incident on the front surface of the cover member 621 can be reflected downward. That is, when light from a fluorescent lamp or other gaming machine installed on the ceiling in the store is incident on the front surface of the cover member 621, the light can be prevented from being reflected toward the player. As a result, it can be suppressed that the player feels dazzled and the visibility of the third symbol display device 81 deteriorates.

  Next, the relationship between the center frame 600 and the rotation unit 500 of the vertical displacement unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG.

  41A and 41B are sectional views of the rotation unit 500 and the center frame 600. FIG. 41A shows the initial position (reference position) (position where the extending direction is horizontally oriented) of the rotating unit 500, and FIG. 41B shows the rotating unit 500 centered on the rotation axis. The state rotated 90 degrees is illustrated.

  41 (a) and 41 (b), the decorative member 450 of the vertical displacement unit 400 is displaced, and the front side of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) and the back side of the center frame 600 are displayed. When positioned at the position, a predetermined gap is formed between the rotating unit 500 of the decorative member 450 and the cover member 621 of the center frame 600. Thereby, the rotation unit 500 can rotate without colliding with the cover member 621.

  In this case, if the rotating member (rotating unit 500) is a rotating object in front of the third symbol display device 81, a wind flow is generated by the rotation of the rotating member, and a sphere flowing down due to the wind is generated. There was a problem of moving.

  In particular, in the present embodiment, since the rotation unit 500 is positioned above the stage 611 on which the ball rolls, the ball rolling on the top of the stage 611 is easily affected by the wind due to the rotation of the rotation unit 500.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the attachment portion 623 connected from the second portion 621b of the cover member 621 is fastened to the fastening hole 613 that is recessed below the stage 611 of the frame 610 (that is, Since the lower end portion of the center cover 620 is connected to the lower end of the frame body 610), the flow area of the sphere and the displacement area of the rotary unit 500 can be partitioned. Therefore, the wind generated by the rotation of the rotary unit 500 can be blocked by the cover member 621 (second portion 621b). As a result, it is possible to suppress the flow of the sphere from being affected by the action of the wind. Further, even when wind is generated by the rotation of the rotary unit 500 and dust or dust is blown off by the wind, the second portion 621b (cover member 621) can block the wind, so that the blown-off dust or dust is detected by the sensor. It is possible to suppress a rise in the light emission / light reception route and a decrease in detection accuracy.

  Here, it is conventionally known that the stage 611 of the center frame 600 is provided with a back wall so that a ball rolling on the stage 611 does not fall to the back side. However, in such a conventional product, the wind generated by the rotation of the rotary unit 500 wraps around from the standing front end on the back side standing from the stage 611 to the front side, or the glass 8 on the front side of the game board 13. And the ball that rolls on the stage 611 is affected. On the other hand, in order to prevent the sphere rolling on the stage 611 from being affected by wind, the back wall is curved to the front side so as to cover the periphery of the stage sphere (that is, a closed passage is formed). ), It is difficult for the player to visually recognize the ball that rolls on the upper part of the stage 611, and the interest of the player is impaired.

  On the other hand, since the second portion 621b of the cover member 621 is connected to the range including the stage 611 of the frame 610, the second portion 621b (cover member 621) generates wind generated by the rotation of the rotation unit 500. Can be blocked by. As a result, since it is not necessary to cover the periphery of the stage 611, it is possible to make the ball rolling on the upper portion of the stage 611 easily visible to the player, and to suppress the influence of the flow of the ball due to the action of the wind.

  Here, if the displacement region where the displacement member (vertical displacement unit 400) is displaced and the flow-down region where the sphere flows down are partitioned by the partition plate (center cover 620), the back surface disposed on the back side of the game board 13 Since the case 300 is provided with many members that generate heat, such as a drive motor 441 that drives the 3rd symbol display device 81 and the vertical displacement unit 400, the heat is placed inside the displacement area (the back side of the game board 13). ) There is a problem that the board for controlling the gaming machine 1 and the third symbol display device 81 are damaged.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the first portion 621a of the cover member 621 is not connected to the frame body 610 but is disposed at a predetermined interval from the inner peripheral edge of the frame body 610. The back side and the front side of the game board 13 and the cover member 621 can be communicated with each other through a predetermined interval. Accordingly, it is possible to suppress the heat generated from the vertical displacement unit 400 from being trapped on the back side of the game board 13 and the cover member 621. As a result, cold air on the front side of the game board 13 (rather than the rear side) can be sent to the back side of the game board 13, so that the base for controlling the gaming machine 1 and the third symbol display device 81 are damaged. Can be suppressed.

  In addition, since the predetermined interval between the first portion 621a and the inner periphery of the frame 610 is formed at the upper part of the center frame 600, the warm air is passed through the predetermined distance from the front side of the game board 13 It can be easily washed. That is, since the heated air on the back side of the game board 13 is raised by the heat, the predetermined distance between the first portion 621a formed above and the inner peripheral edge of the frame 610 is moved to the front side. Easy to flow. As a result, it is possible to suppress heat from being accumulated on the back side of the game board 13 and the cover member 621.

  In this case, when the rotation unit 500 is rotated and wind is generated, the wind flows out from the predetermined interval between the first portion 621a and the inner periphery of the frame body 610 and flows down the front of the game board 13. May affect the sphere.

  In contrast, the wind generated by the rotation of the rotary unit 500 can flow toward the upper area of the game area (the upper area of the opening of the game board 13). It is possible to prevent the flow of water from being affected. That is, the sphere that flows down the upper area of the game area is an initial sphere that is launched from the ball launch unit 112a and flows into the game area, and its speed is relatively high. For example, the stage of the center frame 600 Compared to a ball rolling on 611, it is less susceptible to wind. In other words, it is possible to flow the wind toward an area where the sphere is not easily affected by the wind. Therefore, the rotation speed of the rotating member can be increased correspondingly, and the production effect can be improved.

  Next, the distribution device 700 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  First, the overall configuration of the distribution device 700 will be described with reference to FIGS. 42 to 45. 42 is an exploded front perspective view of the sorting apparatus 700, and FIG. 43 is a partially enlarged front view of the sorting apparatus 700. FIG. 44 is a cross-sectional view of the sorting apparatus 700 taken along line XLIV-XLIV in FIG. 45 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the distribution device 700 along the XLVa-XLVa line in FIG. 43, and FIG. 45 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the distribution device 700 along the XLVb-XLVb line in FIG. 45 (a). 45 (c) is a cross-sectional view of the distribution device 700 along the XLVc-XLVc line in FIG. 43, and FIG. 45 (d) is a cross-sectional view of the distribution device 700 along the XLVd-XLVd line in FIG.

  In FIG. 43, outer shapes of the inner peripheral surface of the sorting member 760, the seesaw member 762, the communication hole 751, and the recovery hole 752 are shown by broken lines. In FIG. 45D, the path of the sphere paid out from the opening 744 is shown by a two-dot chain line.

  As shown in FIGS. 42 to 45, the distribution device 700 is disposed on the lower side of the center frame 600 of the game board 13 and is disposed on the front side (the front side in FIG. 43) with respect to the base plate 60. A side forming portion 710 and a back side forming portion 720 disposed on the back side (the back side in FIG. 43) with respect to the base plate 60 are mainly provided.

  The front side forming part 710 is mainly formed with a winning member 730 attached to the front side of the base plate 60 and a bending member 740 disposed on the front side of the winning member 730.

  The back side forming part 720 is mainly formed with an interposed member 750 attached to the back side of the base plate 60 and a distribution member 760 disposed on the back side of the interposed member 750. .

  The winning member 730 is formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and includes the above-described first winning port 64 located at the upper center in the left-right direction, and the first electric accessory 640a positioned below the first winning port 64. A through hole 731 which is located on both sides in the left-right direction of the first electric accessory 640a and is formed to penetrate in the front-rear direction; and a lower insertion hole 732 which is located below the through-hole 731 and is formed to penetrate in the front-rear direction. Are mainly provided.

  The through-hole 731 is a member into which an upper protrusion 741 of a bending member 740 described later is inserted, and is formed in a substantially rectangular shape in front view that opens slightly larger than the outer shape of the upper protrusion 741 in a rear view. . A projecting wall 731a is formed on the lower surface of the through hole 731 so as to project upward from the back surface to the front surface.

  The projecting wall 731a is provided with two symmetrical center lines in the left-right direction of the through-hole 731 when viewed from the front, and the projecting distance is set smaller from the back side toward the front side. Therefore, a sphere that passes (rolls) through the inside of the through-hole 731 by an interposition member 750 and a distribution member 760, which will be described later, is guided to the center position in the left-right direction of the two protruding walls 731a, and is also front-facing from the back side. Rolled to the side.

  The lower insertion hole 732 is a hole that communicates with the recovery hole 752 of the interposed member 750 disposed on the back surface side, and is formed at a position facing the recovery hole 752 of the interposed member 750. Further, the lower insertion hole 732 is opened in a substantially D shape in front view with the lower surface side curved, and protrudes upward from the lower surface at a first projecting portion 732a projecting downward from the upper surface at the center position in the left-right direction in front view. Second projecting portion 732b.

  The first projecting portion 732a has a projecting distance that increases from the front side (the right side in FIG. 45 (a)) to the back side (the left side in FIG. 45 (a)). The second projecting portion 732b is formed such that the projecting distance decreases from the front side toward the back side. In addition, the distance between the first protrusion 732a and the second protrusion 732b is slightly larger than the diameter of the sphere. Therefore, when the sphere passes through the inside of the lower insertion hole 732, the sphere can be rolled to the back side by the inclination of the second protrusion 732b from the front side to the back side. On the other hand, when the sphere bounces up and down when being inserted through the lower insertion hole 732, the first protrusion 732a can suppress upward displacement.

  On the back surface of the lower insertion hole 732, a sensor SE that detects the passage of a sphere is disposed. The sensor SE is a member that is formed in a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and a through hole having a diameter slightly larger than the diameter of the sphere is formed on a side surface of the sensor SE. Can be detected. The sensor SE is disposed such that the axis of the through hole is located coaxially with the arc axis on the lower surface side of the lower insertion hole 732. Thereby, since it can be set as the state which inclines a little downward as the opening direction of a through-hole goes to a back side, it can suppress that the ball | bowl which passes the inside of the through-hole of sensor SE stays inside a through-hole.

  The bending member 740 is a member disposed on the front side of the through hole 731 and the lower insertion hole 732 of the winning member 730 described above, and is substantially at the center in the left-right direction of the base plate 60 (see FIG. 2) in front view. Are arranged symmetrically, and the outer shape is formed symmetrically.

  In addition, the bending member 740 is disposed at a position where a gap of a size through which a sphere can pass is formed between the bending member 740 and the inner rail 61 (see FIG. 2) that forms the game area in a front view. Thereby, it is suppressed that the ball flowing down the game area below the bending member 740 is sandwiched between the bending member 740 and the inner rail 61 and stays in the game area.

  The bending member 740 is formed from a plate-like body having a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and includes an upper protrusion 741 protruding from the back surface thereof, a lower protrusion 743 protruding from below the upper protrusion 741, and an upper protrusion 741. And an opening 744 formed between the lower protrusions 743 facing each other.

  The upper projecting portion 741 is formed in a substantially U shape with the lower side opened in a rear view, and its outer shape is set slightly smaller than the inner shape of the through hole 731 of the winning member 730. Accordingly, when the bending member 740 is disposed on the winning member 730, the upper protruding portion 741 can be inserted and disposed inside the through hole 731. Therefore, when the bending member 740 is disposed on the winning member 730, the upper protruding portion 741 can be inserted and positioned, so that the assembling process can be simplified.

  Further, since the upper protruding portion 741 is formed in a substantially U shape with the lower side opened in a rear view, when the ball passes through the through hole 731 of the winning member 730 and rolls to the bending member 740 side, A connecting portion between the winning member 730 and the bending member 740 is not formed on the rolling surface (lower surface) on which the ball moves. Therefore, since the rolling of the sphere can be made constant, it is possible to suppress the sphere from stopping inside the through hole 731. That is, when the connecting portion between the winning member 730 and the bending member 740 is formed on the rolling surface of the sphere, resistance increases when the sphere rolls on the connecting portion, and the sphere jumps in steps. By eliminating the connecting portion on the rolling surface, it is possible to stabilize the rolling of the sphere and suppress clogging of the sphere.

  In this case, even if the upper protrusion 741 is formed in an annular shape when viewed from the back and the sphere passes through the inside of the ring, the winning member 730 and the bending member are similarly formed on the rolling surface on which the sphere rolls. Although the connecting portion with 740 is not formed, the part shape of the bending member 740 is complicated because the upper protrusion 741 is formed in an annular shape, which increases the manufacturing cost. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the upper protrusion 741 has a substantially U shape when viewed from the back, the shape of the component can be simplified and an increase in manufacturing cost can be suppressed.

  The lower protrusion 743 is formed on the lower side of the upper protrusion 741 and has a substantially U-shape in rear view with the upper side opened. That is, when viewed from the back, the open portions of the upper protruding portion 741 and the lower protruding portion 743 are formed so as to face each other in the vertical direction.

  The lower protruding portion 743 is a path (hereinafter referred to as “second pitching path KR2”) for feeding a ball that is sent from the through hole 731 of the winning member 730 to the bending member 740 side to the lower insertion hole 732 of the winning member 730. And is formed at a position facing the lower insertion hole 732 in the front-rear direction.

  The protrusion distance of the lower protrusion 743 to the back side is set to a dimension larger than the diameter of the sphere. Further, the bending member 740 is arranged on the winning member 730 in a state where the protruding front end surface of the lower protruding portion 743 is in contact with the winning member 730. Therefore, the distance dimension between the facing of the bending member 740 and the winning member 730 is made larger than the diameter of the sphere, and the ball passing path (hereinafter referred to as the ball) is sent in the vertical direction between the bending member 740 and the winning member 730. (Referred to as “first pitching route KR1”).

  The bending member 740 is formed with a guide portion 742 that protrudes from the upper inner surface of the upper protruding portion 741 to the lower inner surface of the lower protruding portion 743. The guide part 742 protrudes in a substantially U shape whose rear side is opened in a side view.

  The guide portion 742 is a projecting wall that sends a ball that is sent from the through hole 731 of the winning member 730 to the bending member 740 (first pitching route KR1) in the vertical direction and then sends it to the lower insertion hole 732 of the winning member 730. The vertical height of the lower inner edge is formed to be slightly smaller than the height of the lower inner edge of the lower insertion hole 732 arranged on the back surface.

  The guide part 742 is formed with two symmetrical center lines in the left-right direction in the front view of the through hole 731 arranged on the back side. Thereby, since it contacts and guides (turns back to the back side) with two guide parts 742, it can control that a ball shifts in the horizontal direction.

  Note that the protruding front end surfaces of the guide portions 742 arranged side by side are formed so as to be inclined toward the base side as they come closer to the opposing surfaces (see FIG. 45B). Thereby, it is possible to effectively suppress the displacement of the sphere, which is in contact with the two guide portions 742 and guided (turned back to the back side), in the left-right direction.

  The upper protruding portion 741 is formed with a side wall 741a that protrudes to the inside of the left and right side surfaces in the rear view. A plurality of (three in this embodiment) side walls 741a are arranged in parallel in the vertical direction with a predetermined interval. As a result, when the ball to be sent inside the upper protrusion 741 in the normal state rolls in the left-right direction, it can be brought into contact with the tip surface of the side wall 741a to stabilize the sent ball. On the other hand, when two spheres flow continuously inside the upper protrusion 741 and the sphere flowing behind collides with the sphere flowing forward, the previous sphere enters between the side walls 741a, so that It is possible to secure a distance to escape in the direction and to prevent the sphere from clogging inside the upper protrusion 741. That is, the side wall 741a can stabilize the ball that is sent inside the upper protrusion 741.

  The opening 744 is a predetermined gap formed between the upper protrusion 741 and the lower protrusion 743 facing each other, and is formed on both sides in the left-right direction in the rear view. In addition, the opening 744 is formed in a substantially U shape that opens on the back side in a side view.

  The upper end of the opening 744 is set to substantially the same height in the vertical direction as the lower surface of the through hole 731 of the winning member 730, and the height of the lower end is a substantially intermediate position in the vertical direction of the lower insertion hole 732 of the winning member 730. Set to the height of. Thereby, when a sphere is continuously sent into the bending member 740, it is possible to prevent the previous sphere from escaping to the opening 744 and clogging of the sphere into the bending member 740. That is, the opening 744 is formed to open on the side surface in the left-right direction of the connecting portion between the first pitching path KR1 and the second pitching path KR2.

  The distribution member 760 is formed in a box-like body that is formed in a horizontally long rectangle when viewed from the front and whose front side is open. In addition, the sorting member 760 is bent at a substantially central position in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, and is formed so as to be inclined downward from the substantially center position in the left-right direction toward the outside in the left-right direction. Further, both end portions of the distribution member 760 in the left-right direction are set at positions facing the through holes 731 of the winning member 730 described above.

  The distribution member 760 includes a pair of inclined surfaces 761 inclined downward from the center position in the left-right direction in the front view toward the left and right sides, a seesaw member 762 disposed at the center of each inclined surface 761, and above the seesaw member 762. It is mainly provided with a ball outlet 763.

  The ball sending port 763 is a member for forming an opening on the front side of the distribution member 760, and is formed at a position facing the first winning port 64 of the winning member 730. As a result, when the distribution member 760 is disposed on the interposition member 750 described later, a space A can be formed between the ball feeding port 763 and the interposition member 750.

  The space A is formed in a space larger than the outer diameter of the sphere (that is, a gap through which the sphere can pass), and the first prize opening of the winning member 730 through a through hole formed in the base plate 60. It connects with 64 internal space (refer FIG. 44). As a result, it is possible to send a ball to the first prize opening 64 to the inside of the space A and to send the inside of the space A.

  The seesaw member 762 is formed in an annular shape, and has three projections 762a projecting outward from the outer edge portion at an interval of 90 degrees around the axis, and a shaft inserted into the annular shape inside Part 762b.

  The shaft portion 762 b is a shaft support portion for rotating the seesaw member 762 around the axis, and is formed in a columnar shape and is inserted inside the annular shape of the seesaw member 762. In this state, the shaft portion 762b is sandwiched between the interposed member 750 and the distribution member 760, so that the seesaw member 762 is disposed so as to be rotatable about the shaft portion 762b.

  The protrusion 762a is a protrusion for alternately distributing the spheres to the left and right inclined surfaces 761 when the sphere is sent from the space A described above. A ball is sent to the opposite side. That is, the ball sent from the space A by the central protrusion 762a can be sent in the left-right direction. The protrusions 762a provided at both ends regulate the displacement of the seesaw member 762 and displace the direction in which the tip of the center protrusion 762a is positioned by the weight applied when the sphere passes (the seesaw member 762 is displaced). The rotation of the seesaw member 762 is restricted when the tip surface of the protrusion 762a and the inclined surface 761 come into contact with each other. On the other hand, when the sphere is guided by the central projection 762a, the guided sphere collides with the projection 762a and is pushed downward. As a result, the protrusion 762a on the opposite side is displaced upward, and the tip of the protrusion 762a displaced downward comes into contact with the inclined surface 761 to restrict the displacement.

  The inclined surface 761 is a rolling surface of a path (hereinafter referred to as “third pitching path KR3”) in which the balls distributed to the left and right by the seesaw member 762 roll and are sent. It is formed so as to incline downward from the center position in the left-right direction. As a result, the balls distributed right and left by the seesaw member 762 of the distribution member 760 roll on the inclined surface 761 and are sent (rolled) to the lower end of the inclined surface 761.

  The end of the inclined surface 761 on the descending side is formed so as to incline in the direction approaching the interposed member 750 so that the thickness of the back side increases toward the end. Thereby, the ball that rolls on the inclined surface 761 and is sent to the end thereof can be sent to the communication hole 751 of the interposed member 750 disposed in front of the sorting member 760.

  The interposition member 750 is formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, the variable winning device 65 described above at the center lower portion in the left-right direction in the front view, a communication hole 751 penetrating in the front-rear direction on both left and right sides, and its communication The recovery hole 752 opened to the lower side of the hole 751 is mainly provided and formed.

  The communication hole 751 is formed on the front side of the left and right ends of the distribution member 760 and is formed on the back side of the through hole 731 of the winning member 730. Therefore, the space at both left and right end portions of the distribution member 760 and the internal space of the through hole 731 of the winning member 730 are connected via the communication hole 751. Therefore, a path (hereinafter referred to as “fourth pitching path KR4”) in which the ball rolling on the upper portion of the inclined surface 761 of the sorting member 760 is passed through the communication hole 751 and sent to the through hole 731 of the winning member 730. Can be formed.

  As described above, the collection hole 752 is an opening formed on the back side of the lower insertion hole 732 of the winning member 730. That is, the collection hole 752 is connected to the back side of the sensor SE, and a ball passing through the sensor SE is sent to the opening of the collection hole 752. The collection hole 752 is connected to a device that circulates a sphere installed in the store, and the sphere collected in the collection hole 752 is circulated by the circulation device and is again launched from the ball launch unit 112a as a game ball. .

  The sorting apparatus 700 configured as described above is sent as follows. A ball entering from the first winning port 64 is sent to the sorting member 760 and sent to the third pitching path KR3 in either the left or right direction by the seesaw member 762 of the sorting member 760. When the ball sent through the third pitching route KR3 is sent to the end of the third pitching route KR3, the ball is sent to the fourth pitching route KR4 inside the communication hole 751 of the interposed member 750 arranged on the front side. The ball is sent. A ball that is sent through the fourth pitching route KR4 is sent to the first pitching route KR1 on the back side of the bending member 740. A ball that is sent through the first pitching route KR1 is guided by the lower protrusion 743 of the bending member 740 and is sent to the second pitching route KR2. A ball sent through the second pitching route KR2 passes through the lower insertion hole 732 of the winning member 730 and passes through the inside of the sensor SE, and is then sent to the collection hole 752 of the interposed member 3750.

  Here, as described above, the through hole 731 and the lower insertion hole 732 of the winning member 730 are formed on the left and right sides of the first electric accessory 640a, and the bending members 740 are arranged in a pair on the left and right. The first electric combination 640a is positioned between the lower protrusions 743 of the bending member 740.

  In this case, when the downward inclination angle of the third ball-sending path KR3 is made small (the inclined surface is gentle), the flow speed of the sphere becomes low, and it becomes easy to cause a clogging of the ball at the lower protrusion 743. On the other hand, if the angle of the downward slope of the third pitch KR3 is increased (the downward slope is steep), the flow speed of the sphere can be increased, and it is difficult to generate a ball clogging in the lower insertion hole 732. The space in the height direction (vertical direction) necessary for the arrangement of the third ball feeding path KR3 (the distribution member 760) increases, and the arrangement of the first electric accessory 640a becomes difficult.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, since the opening 744 is formed in the side wall of the lower protrusion 743, it is difficult for the ball clogging in the lower protrusion 743 to occur, and accordingly, the third pitching path KR3. It is possible to reduce the angle of the downward inclination of (a gentle downward inclination). As a result, the space in the height direction required for the arrangement of the third pitching path KR3 (the distribution member 760) can be suppressed, and the arrangement of the first electric accessory 640a can be made possible. That is, the arrangement of the bending member 740 and the first electric accessory 640a is impossible with the conventional product, and is possible only by forming the opening 744 on the side wall of the lower protrusion 743 as described above. It is a thing.

  Here, in the present embodiment, an opening is formed in the center of the game board 13 (a center frame 600 is disposed), and the player can visually recognize the third symbol display device 81 through the opening. In recent years, the opening of the center of the game board 13 (the inner peripheral edge of the frame 610 of the center frame 600) has increased with the demand for an increase in the size of the 3rd symbol display device 81. The space between the edge and the lower edge of the game area (the lower inner edge of the inner rail 61) is narrowed. Therefore, in the conventional product, members corresponding to the third pitching path KR3 and the first electric accessory 640a are arranged in a space between the lower edge of the central opening of the game board 13 and the lower edge of the game area. It was difficult.

  In other words, as described above, when the angle of the downward slope of the third ball-sending path KR3 is reduced (the downward slope is gentle), the flow speed of the sphere is reduced, and it is easy to cause clogging of the ball at the lower protrusion 743. Become. On the other hand, if the angle of the downward slope of the third pitch KR3 is increased (the downward slope is steep), it is possible to increase the flow speed of the sphere and make it difficult to cause clogging in the lower protrusion 743. The space in the height direction necessary for the arrangement of the third ball feeding path KR3 is increased, and the arrangement of the first electric accessory 640a becomes difficult. Further, since the position of the lower projection 743 (bending member 740) in the vertical direction is lowered (lowered), the lower projection 743 (bending member 740) and the lower edge of the game area (inner rail 61) It is difficult to secure a gap through which the sphere can pass, and it is necessary to provide the first out ports 71 on both sides of the lower protrusion 743 (bending member 740).

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, since the opening is formed in the side wall of the lower protruding portion 743, it is difficult for the lower protruding portion 743 to be clogged with balls. The angle of the downward slope of the three-sending path KR3 can be reduced (the downward slope is gentle). As a result, the lower projecting portion 743 (bending member 740) can be raised (increased) in the height direction (vertical direction), so the lower projecting portion 743 (bending member 740) and the game area A gap through which the sphere can pass can be ensured between the lower edge of the inner rail 61 (the lower inner edge of the inner rail 61). Therefore, it is not necessary to provide the first out ports 71 on both sides of the lower protrusion 743 (bending member 740).

  That is, in the arrangement of the bending member 740 and the first electric accessory 640a, the arrangement in which a gap through which a sphere can pass is formed between the lower protruding portion 743 (the bending member 740) and the lower edge of the game area, This arrangement is not possible with the conventional product, and as described above, it is possible for the first time by forming an opening in the side wall of the lower protrusion 743.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 46, the pitching of the guide portion 742 of the bending member 740 will be described. 46 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the game board 13, and FIG. 46 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the game board 13. 46A corresponds to FIG. 45A, and FIG. 46B corresponds to FIG. 45B.

  As shown in FIG. 46, when two balls are sent from the through hole 731 of the winning member 730 to the bending member 740 in a state where there is almost no gap (that is, two balls are connected), the previous (preceding) A part of the sphere enters the opening 744 and is sent to the back side, and is guided to the lower insertion hole 732 of the winning member 730.

  Here, when a passage having a cross-sectional area slightly larger than the outer diameter of the sphere is formed and the passage is bent, the two spheres are substantially free of gaps in the passage (two spheres are connected in series). ) When a ball is sent, the following ball touches the preceding ball, and the following ball presses the preceding ball against the side wall, so that they cannot roll and the ball is clogged. It was.

  On the other hand, in the present application, since the opening 744 is formed in the connection portion between the first ball feeding path KR1 and the second ball feeding path KR2, when passing through the lower protrusion 743 in a state where a plurality of balls are connected, Even if the following sphere catches up with the preceding sphere, it is difficult to press the preceding sphere against the side wall, and the rolling of both can be easily continued. As a result, the occurrence of ball clogging can be suppressed.

  Further, since the opening 744 is formed at a position where the first pitching path KR1 and the second pitching path KR2 have a tolerance, it is possible to make it difficult to block the sphere at a bent portion where the sphere is likely to be blocked. In other words, in the region where the first pitching route KR1 and the second pitching route KR2 intersect, the ball that has flowed down (dropped) along the first pitching route KR1 changes direction and rolls in the extending direction of the second pitching route KR2. This is the position where the movement starts, and it is easy for the sphere following the preceding sphere to catch up. For this reason, when the sphere following the preceding sphere presses against the side wall, both cannot roll and the ball is likely to be clogged.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the opening 744 is formed at a position where the first pitching route KR1 and the second pitching route KR2 intersect, so that even if the following ball catches up with the leading ball, it leads. It is possible to make it difficult for the ball to escape between the openings 744 (a part of the preceding ball is accommodated in the opening 744) and to be pressed against the side wall, and to keep both rolling. As a result, the occurrence of ball clogging can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, as described above, the height of the lower end of the opening 744 is set to the height of the substantially intermediate position in the vertical direction of the lower insertion hole 732 of the winning member 730, so that the first ball path KR1 falls (flows down). When the ball to be reached reaches the bottom wall of the second pitching path KR2 (lower projecting portion 743), the ball can be easily received in the opening. Therefore, even when a succeeding sphere catches up with the preceding sphere, the preceding sphere can escape between the openings 744 and be hardly pressed against the side wall, and the rolling of both can be easily continued. As a result, the occurrence of ball clogging can be suppressed.

  Further, the lower protruding portion 743 is formed in a substantially U shape in a side view, and is installed at a position where the height of the lower end of the opening 744 is separated from the bottom wall of the lower protruding portion 743 by a predetermined distance. A side wall can be left (formed) between the lower end of the opening 744 and the second pitching path KR2 (lower projecting portion 743). Therefore, even when the opening is formed in such a size that the ball can pass, the ball unnecessarily flows out from the bending member 740 to the outside (the game area on the front side of the game board 13) through the opening. Can be suppressed.

  In this case, when the size of the opening 744 is set so that the sphere cannot pass, it is usually difficult to press the preceding sphere against the side wall using the opening 744. A form in which the sphere to be pushed presses the preceding sphere against the center of the opening 744 is formed, and the preceding sphere may be fitted into (inserted into) the opening 744 in some cases. In this case, the subsequent rolling of the sphere is inhibited by the sphere fitted in the opening 744, and a sphere clogging occurs.

  On the other hand, since the opening 744 is opened larger than the outer shape of the sphere (the sphere is formed in a size that allows the passage of the sphere), a form in which the following sphere presses the preceding sphere against the center of the opening 744 is formed. Even in the case, the preceding sphere can be discharged from the opening 744 to the outside of the bending member 740 (the game area on the front side of the game board 13), and the preceding sphere is fitted into (inserted into) the opening 744. You can avoid that. Thereby, the rolling of the succeeding ball can be continued, so that the occurrence of the clogging of the ball can be suppressed.

  In addition, the opening 744 is formed in such a size that the ball can pass through, and the opening 744 is disposed on the front side of the game board 13 (that is, the game area), so that the game area flows down. A sphere to be made can flow into the bending member 740 from the opening 744. Therefore, the interest of the game can be improved. For example, when a sensor for detecting a winning ball is disposed downstream of the lower protrusion 743, in addition to the sphere that has flowed into the bending member 740 from the upstream of the lower protrusion 743, the bending member from the opening 744 The ball that has flowed into 740 can also be detected as a winning ball. In particular, in this case, the opening 744 (a region where the first pitching path KR1 and the second pitching path KR2 intersect) is disposed on the front side of the game board 13, and therefore flows into the bending member 740 from the opening 744. The player can visually recognize the ball to be played. Therefore, from this point, the interest of the game can be enhanced.

  In a region where the first pitching route KR1 and the second pitching route KR2 are within tolerance, a lower portion of the guide portion 742 (that is, a portion inclined downward while being curved toward the recovery hole 752) is disposed. As a result, when the sphere that flows down (falls) along the first pitching path KR1 changes its direction and starts rolling in the extending direction of the second pitching path KR2, the sphere is inclined downward by the guide portion 742. Can be used to quickly roll. This facilitates the rolling of the preceding ball before the following ball catches up, and the preceding ball follows the back side (the ball is moved along the extending direction of the second pitching path KR2). Since it can suppress that it presses against the side wall of the back surface at the time of rolling, both rolling can be made easy to continue. As a result, the occurrence of ball clogging can be suppressed.

  Further, since the opening 744 is formed at a position on the front side (game area side) of the base plate 60 (see FIG. 2), a ball clogging occurs at the bent portion of the first pitching path KR1 and the second pitching path KR2. When doing so, the store operator can access the opening 744 from the front side by opening the glass 8. Therefore, it is possible to improve the workability of the work for eliminating the ball clogging.

  Furthermore, when dust or dirt accumulates at the bent portion of the first pitch route KR1 and the second pitch route KR2, the store operator opens the glass 8 to access the opening 744 from the front side. Thus, the bent portion can be cleaned through the opening 744. Therefore, it is possible to improve the cleanability when cleaning the first pitching route KR1 and the second pitching route KR2.

  Next, the light emitting decoration unit 800 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 47 is an exploded front perspective view of the light emitting decoration unit 800.

  As shown in FIG. 47, the light emitting decoration unit 800 includes a base body 810 having a horizontally long rectangular shape in front view disposed on the bottom wall portion 301 (see FIG. 6) of the back case 300, and a front side of the base body 810. The light emitting device 820 is mainly provided, and a cover member 830 that covers the front surface of the light emitting device 820 and is made of a light transmissive material.

  On the front side of the light emitting device 820, a plurality of light emitters (LEDs 821) are distributed over the entire surface. Therefore, the light emitted from the LED 821 is emitted from the entire surface of the cover member 830 to the front side of the gaming machine.

  Next, the restriction unit 2490 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 48 to 50. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as the said 1st Embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  First, the overall configuration of the restriction unit 2490 will be described with reference to FIGS. 48 and 49. FIG. 48 is an exploded front perspective view of the restriction unit 2490 in the second embodiment. FIG. 49A is a side view of the restriction unit 2490, FIG. 49B is a rear view of the restriction unit 2490, and FIG. 49C is a line XLIXc-XLIXc in FIG. 49B. It is sectional drawing of the control unit 2490. FIG.

  As shown in FIGS. 48 and 49, in the restriction unit 2490 in the second embodiment, the roller member 492 is pivotally supported by the rotating member 2494, and the position of the roller member 492 can be adjusted by the rotation of the rotating member 2494. The

  The restriction unit 2490 includes a case member 2491 formed in a box-like body, an outer edge member 2493 disposed on an outer edge portion on the opening side of the case member 2491, and the case member 2491 and the outer edge member 2493 facing each other. The rotating member 2494 that is pinched and rotatably supported by a shaft, and a roller member 492 that is supported by the rotating member 2494 are mainly provided.

  The case member 2491 is formed in a box shape having an opening on the back side, and has a width dimension in the left-right direction (FIG. 49B, left-right direction) larger than that of the case member 491 in the first embodiment. Further, the case member 2491 is mainly provided with a projecting portion 491a projecting from the side surface on the front side and a notch portion 2491b cut out in a semicircular shape on both side surfaces in the left-right direction.

  The notch portion 2491b is formed by being cut out in a semicircular shape at a substantially central position in the vertical direction (FIG. 49 (b) vertical direction) on both side surfaces of the case member 2491 in the horizontal direction (FIG. 49 (b) horizontal direction). The The notch portion 2491b is a notch for rotatably supporting a shaft portion 2494b of a rotating member 2494, which will be described later, and has an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the rotating member 2494.

  The outer edge member 2493 is a member that is formed in a vertically long rectangular frame-like body when viewed from the front, and is disposed on the back side (open side) of the case member 2491. The outer edge member 2493 has an inner shape that is substantially the same as the opening of the case member 2491. Further, on the side surface of the outer edge member 2493 on the front side (case member 491 side), a standing portion 2493a is formed around the inner edge portion so as to stand on the front side.

  The standing portion 2493a is formed with a recessed portion 2493a1 that is recessed on the back side. The recessed portion 2493a1 is formed at a position facing the notch portion 2491b of the case member 2492. Therefore, the rotating member 2494 described later can be disposed in a rotatable state on the case member 2491 by sandwiching the rotating member 2494 described later between the notch portion 2491b and the recessed portion 2493a1 of the case member 2491.

  The rotating member 2494 is formed from a plate-like body having an oval shape when viewed from the side, and the longitudinal dimension is set smaller than the vertical dimension of the inner portion of the case member 2491. The rotating member 2494 has a shaft portion 2494b that protrudes in a columnar shape outward in the left-right direction with respect to the case member 2491 at the center in the longitudinal direction, a shaft support hole 2494a that is formed through both sides of the shaft portion 2494b, and a shaft And a restricting portion 2494c that bulges radially outward from the protruding tip of the portion 2494b.

  The shaft portion 2494b protrudes longer than the plate thickness of the case member 2491 formed in the box-like body, and a restricting portion 2494c that bulges in the radial direction is formed at the protruding tip portion. Thus, the rotating member 2494 can be rotated with respect to the case member 2491 by fitting the shaft portion 2494b into the notch portion 2491b of the case member 2491 and disposing the recessed portion 2493a1 of the outer edge member 2493 from the back side. In addition, the rotating member 2494 can be restricted from being displaced in the left-right direction with respect to the case member 2491 by the restricting portion 2494c.

  The shaft support hole 2494a is an opening through which the shaft portion 492b of the roller member 492 is inserted. The shaft support hole 2494a is formed in a circular shape and has an inner diameter dimension larger than the outer diameter of the shaft portion 492b. Thus, the roller member 492 can be rotated by inserting the shaft portion 492b of the roller member 492 with the retaining ring E1 removed into the shaft support hole 2494a and then fitting the retaining ring E1 into the shaft portion 492b. Can be disposed on the rotating member 2494.

  The restriction unit 2490 configured as described above is assembled as follows.

  First, the shaft portion 492 b of the roller member 492 is inserted into the shaft support hole 2494 a of the pair of rotating members 2494, and the roller member 492 is pivotally supported by the rotating member 2494. As a result, two roller members 492 can be arranged side by side between the pair of rotating members 2494 arranged in a pair.

  Next, a torsion spring (not shown) is disposed on the shaft portion 2494b of the rotating member 2494, and after being fitted into the notch portion 2491b of the case member 2491, an outer edge member 2493 is disposed from the back side, thereby rotating. The member 2494 can be disposed so as to be rotatable with respect to the case member 2491 about the shaft portion 2494b. Accordingly, the position of the roller member 492 disposed on the rotating member 2494 can be displaced by rotating and rotating the rotating member 2494. In addition, the torsion spring disposed on the shaft portion 2494b biases the roller member 492 disposed above the roller member 492 disposed side by side to the front side (left side in FIG. 49C). It can be.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 50, a contact state between the decorative member 450 and the regulation unit 2490 when the decorative member 450 is displaced from the second position to the first position will be described. 50A to 50C are cross-sectional views of the vertical displacement unit 400. FIG. 50A corresponds to FIG. 24A, FIG. 50 corresponds to FIG. 24B, and FIG. 21C corresponds to FIG. 18C.

  As shown in FIG. 50A, when the decorative member 450 is positioned above the restriction unit 2490, the rotating member 2494 is provided by a torsion spring (not shown) disposed on the shaft portion 2494b of the rotating member 2494. Is rotated, and the roller member 492 disposed on the upper side of the roller member 492 disposed on the lower side is positioned on the front side.

  Accordingly, the decorative member 450 is displaced downward from the state shown in FIG. 21A, and the lower end surface of the decorative member 450 shown in FIG. 50B is substantially the same as the substantially vertical middle position of the case member 2491. When the roller 492a of the roller member 492 disposed on the upper side is displaced to a position in the vertical direction, the pressure at which the roller 492a abuts on the decoration member 450 and suppresses the decoration member 450 is higher than that of the restriction unit 2490 of the first embodiment. Can be small. In this case, the rotation member 2494 is in contact with a projection (not shown) formed inside the case member 2491, and the roller member 492 disposed on the upper side does not displace to the front side (the rotation member 2494 The upper side is not rotationally displaced to the front side).

  Accordingly, when the decorative member 450 is further displaced downward from the state shown in FIG. 21B and is displaced to the first position shown in FIG. 50C, a driving force is applied to the decorative member 450. It is possible to suppress an increase in energy consumption of the driving motor 441.

  When the decorative member 450 shown in FIG. 50C is displaced to the first position, the roller 492a disposed on the lower side comes into contact with the decorative member 450. As a result, the lower roller member 492 is pressed to the rear side and displaced to the rear side, and the upper roller 492a is displaced to the front side. Thereby, the pressing force with respect to the decoration member 450 of the roller 492a arrange | positioned above can be raised. As a result, when the decorative member 450 is disposed at the first position, the decorative member 450 can be firmly held by the pressing force of the roller member 492 disposed above and below. On the other hand, when the decorative member 450 is positioned in the middle of the displacement, the pressing force acting on the decorative member 450 can be reduced so that the decorative member 450 can be easily displaced. That is, with the displacement of the decorative member 450, the pressing force applied to the decorative member 450 from the restriction unit 2490 can be changed.

  Next, a distribution device 700 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  First, the overall configuration of the distribution device 3700 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 51 is an exploded front perspective view of a sorting apparatus 3700 according to the third embodiment. FIG. 52 is a partially enlarged front view of the sorting apparatus 3700. FIG. 53A is a cross-sectional view of the distribution device 3700 along the line LIIIa-LIIIa in FIG. 52, and FIG. 53B is a cross-sectional view of the distribution device 3700 along the line LIIIb-LIIIb in FIG. .

  As shown in FIGS. 51 to 53, in the distribution device 3700 in the third embodiment, the opening of the second winning prize opening 640 is connected to the distribution device 3700.

  The distribution device 3700 is disposed below the center frame 600 of the game board 13 and is disposed on the front side with respect to the base plate 60 and on the back side with respect to the base plate 60. And a front side forming portion 3710 to be formed.

  The front side forming portion 3710 is mainly formed with a winning member 3730 attached to the base plate 60 and a bending member 3740 disposed on the front side of the winning member 3730.

  The back surface forming portion 3720 includes an interposed member 3750 attached to the base plate 60, a distribution member 760 disposed on the back side of the interposed member 3750, and an interposed member positioned below the distribution member 760. And a second pitching path 3770 disposed on the back side of 3750.

  The prize-winning member 3730 is formed in a horizontally long rectangle when viewed from the front, and includes the first prize-winning port 64 described above at the upper center in the left-right direction, the first electric accessory 640a below the first prize-winning slot 64, and the first electric motor. A through hole 731 that is formed in the front-rear direction on both sides of the accessory 640a in the front-rear direction, a second through-hole 3733 that is formed in the front-rear direction below the through-hole 731, and a lower side of the second through-hole 3733 And a lower insertion hole 732 that is formed to penetrate in the front-rear direction.

  The second through-hole 3733 is an opening through which a sphere passes, and is formed in a substantially rectangular shape in front view that opens slightly larger than the outer diameter of the sphere. In addition, the second through hole 3733 is formed below the second winning opening 640, and a second projecting wall 3733a is formed on the lower surface and protrudes upward as seen from the back side to the front side. .

  The second projecting wall 3733a is provided with two symmetrical center lines in the left-right direction of the second through hole 3733 in a front view, and the projecting distance is set to be smaller from the back side to the front side. Therefore, when the sphere passes through the second through hole 3733 by the interposition member 3750 and the second pitching path, which will be described later, the sphere can be guided to the center in the left-right direction of the two second projecting walls 3733a. It can be rolled from the back side to the front side.

  The bending member 3740 is a member disposed on the front side of the through hole 731, the second through hole 3733, and the lower insertion hole 732 of the winning member 3730 described above, and on the left and right sides of the second winning port 640 described above. The pair of outer shapes are symmetrically formed.

  The bending member 3740 is formed from a plate-like body having a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and includes an upper protruding portion 741 protruding from the back side, an intermediate protruding portion 3745 protruding from below the upper protruding portion 741, and an intermediate protruding portion thereof. And a lower protrusion 743 protruding from below from 3745.

  The intermediate projecting portion 3745 is a wall portion that is long in the vertical direction (the vertical direction in FIG. 53 (b)) in the rear view, and is formed at positions on the left and right sides of the second through hole 3733. The two through holes 3733 are formed at the same height as the substantially middle position in the vertical direction. On the other hand, the lower side surface of the intermediate protrusion 3745 is formed below the bottom surface of the second through hole 3733.

  Further, a second opening 3746 having a predetermined gap is formed between the intermediate projecting portion 3745 and the upper projecting portion 741. On the other hand, an opening 744 having a predetermined gap is formed between the intermediate projecting portion 3745 and the lower projecting portion 743 facing each other.

  The second opening 3746 opens in a substantially U shape with the back side opened in a side view, and has an inner shape larger than the outer shape of the sphere. That is, the second opening 3746 is set to a size through which a sphere can pass. The detailed description of the second opening 3746 will be described later.

  The second pitching path 3770 is formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape when viewed from the front and is formed in a substantially box shape having a constant thickness with the front side opened. The second pitching path 3770 is a pitching path for feeding a ball that enters the second winning opening 640 to the second through hole 3733 of the winning member 3730, and is disposed on the back side of the interposed member 3750. In addition, a ball feeding path for sending a ball can be formed between the inside of the second ball feeding path 3770 and the interposed member 3750.

  In addition, the second pitching path 3770 is disposed such that the left end is located on the back side of the second winning opening 640 of the winning member 3730 in the front view, and the right end is the second through hole of the winning member 3730. It is disposed on the back side of 3733. That is, the second pitching path 3770 is disposed on the interposed member 3750 in such a manner that the left end portion in front view is located above the right end portion and tilts downward toward the right end portion.

  Further, the second pitching path 3770 is connected to the second winning opening 640 at the left end portion in front view and is connected to the second connection hole 3753 of the interposed member 3750 at the right end portion. As a result, after the ball that has entered the second prize opening 640 is sent to the inside of the second pitching path 3770, the ball inside the second pitching path 3770 rolls from the left end to the right end. The ball is sent to the second connection hole 3753 of the installation member 3750.

  The interposition member 3750 is formed in a horizontally long rectangle when viewed from the front, and the above-described variable winning device 65 at the lower center in the left-right direction, and a communication hole 751 that is located on both the left and right sides of the variable winning device 65 and is formed to penetrate therethrough. A recovery hole 752 positioned below the communication hole 751 and penetratingly formed in the front-rear direction, and a second connection hole 3753 positioned between the right communication hole 751 and the recovery hole 752 and penetratingly formed in the front-rear direction. And formed.

  The second connection hole 3753 is formed so as to penetrate in a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and the inner shape thereof is set to be larger than the outer shape of the sphere, and is formed at a position on the back side of the second through hole 3733 of the winning member 730. . As a result, the ball that rolls on the inner side of the second pitching path 3770 described above passes through the inside of the second connection hole 3753 and is sent to the second through hole 3733 of the interposed member 750.

  The sorting apparatus 3700 configured as described above is sent as follows. A ball entering from the first winning port 64 is sent to the distribution member 760 and is alternately transferred to one of the inclined surfaces 761 in the left-right direction by the seesaw member 762 of the distribution member 760. When the ball that rolls on the inclined surface 761 is sent to the end of the inclined surface 761, it passes through the inside of the communication hole 751 of the interposed member 3750 arranged on the front side, and on the back side of the bending member 740. The ball is sent. The balls sent to the back side of the bending members 740 and 3740 are guided along the protruding front end surface of the guide portion 742 of the bending members 740 and 3740 and fall downward, and the lower insertion hole 732 of the winning member 3730 is inserted. After passing through the inside of the sensor SE, the ball is sent to the collection hole 752 of the interposed member 3750.

  A ball entering from the second winning opening 640 is sent to the second pitching path 3770 and is sent from the left end to the right end inside the second pitching path 3770. The ball sent to the right end portion of the second pitching path 3770 is passed through the second connection hole 3753 of the interposed member 3750 arranged on the front side, and passed through the second through hole 3733 of the winning member 3730. Later, after being guided along the protruding front end surface of the guide portion 742 of the bending member 3740 and falling downward, after passing through the inside of the lower insertion hole 732 of the winning member 3730 and passing through the inside of the sensor SE, The ball is sent to the collection hole 752 of the installation member 3750.

  Therefore, in the sorting device 3700, a ball entering from the second winning port 640 can be detected by the sensor SE arranged on the right side of the winning member 3730 as viewed from the front, so that a new ball feeding path from the second winning port 640 is newly provided. There is no need to dispose the sensor SE. In other words, the sensor SE that detects the ball entering from the first winning port 64 can also serve as the sensor SE that detects the ball entering the second winning port 640, thereby reducing the cost of the product. it can.

  Next, the second opening 3746 of the bending member 3740 will be described with reference to FIG. 54A and 54B are cross-sectional views of the distribution device 3700. FIG. 54 (a) corresponds to FIG. 53 (a), and FIG. 54 (b) corresponds to FIG. 53 (b).

  As shown in FIG. 54, a ball enters from the first winning opening 64 and is sent to the back side of the bending member 3740, and a ball enters from the second winning opening 640 and is sent to the bending member 3740. If the balls sent to the back side are sent to the back side of the bending member 3740 at substantially the same timing, the balls on the back side of the bending member 740 may come into contact with each other to clog the balls.

  That is, a ball (hereinafter referred to as a “lower ball”) sent from the second winning opening 640 and sent from the second through hole 3733 of the winning member 3730 to the bending member 3740 is sent from the first winning opening 64. The ball is sent to the rear side of the bending member 3740 from the through-hole 731 of the winning member 3730 and collides with a ball that falls from the upper side to the lower side of the bending member 3740 (hereinafter referred to as “upper ball”). By catching on the front side end of the second through hole 3733, there is a possibility that the ball cannot be moved and clogged.

  On the other hand, in the third embodiment, since the second opening 3746 is formed in the bending member 3740, the lower sphere can be discharged by discharging the upper sphere from the second opening 3746 or facing the second opening 3746. It is possible to eliminate the balanced state between the sphere and the upper sphere and to prevent the sphere from clogging in the pitching path of the bending member 3740.

  That is, when the upper sphere rides on the lower sphere and a balanced state is formed, the second opening 3746 is formed on the side surface in the left-right direction where the upper sphere is located, and the upper sphere Since either the left or right is leaned depending on the spherical shape, the upper sphere is sent into the left or right second opening 3744. Thereby, the balanced body of the lower sphere and the upper sphere can be eliminated. Therefore, it is possible to suppress clogging of the ball in the pitching path of the bending member 3740.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 55, a distribution device 4700 according to the fourth embodiment will be described. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 55A is a front view of a distribution device 4700 according to the fourth embodiment, and FIG. 55B is a cross-sectional view of the distribution device 4700 along the line LVb-LVb in FIG. 55A. FIG. 55C is a cross-sectional view of the sorting device 4700 along the line LVc-LVc in FIG. In FIGS. 55 (a) to 55 (c), a passing path through which a sphere passes is schematically illustrated by a broken line.

  As shown in FIGS. 55 (a) to 55 (c), in the distribution device 4700 according to the fourth embodiment, a winning opening is formed on the outer side of the opening 744 of the bending member 740 in the lateral direction (FIG. 55 (a) lateral direction). 4063 is disposed.

  The winning opening 4063 is an opening through which a ball flowing down the game area can pass and is disposed on the front side of the game board 13. The back side of the winning opening 4063 is connected to a third connecting hole 4752a of an interposed member 4750 described later, and the ball that has entered the winning opening 4063 is guided to the third communicating hole 54752a.

  The collection hole 752 of the interposed member 4750 is formed to be bent downward at the tip of the second pitching path KR2, and a path (sixth pitching path KR6) in which the sphere passes through and is sent downward is formed. The That is, the sixth pitching route KR6 and the second pitching route KR2 are connected.

  In the sixth pitching path KR6, third connection holes 4752a projecting on both the left and right sides are formed, and a sensor SE that detects the passage of a sphere is disposed below the third connection hole 4752a.

  The third connection hole 4752a is connected to an open portion on the back side of the winning opening 4063. As a result, the ball that has entered the winning opening 4063 is sent to the inside of the third connection hole 4752a and is sent to the sixth pitching path.

  In addition, a sensor SE2 different from the sensor SE disposed in the sixth pitching path KR6 is disposed on the passage of the third connection hole 4752a. Thereby, the sphere that has entered the third connection hole 4752a can be detected.

  Thereby, the ball discharged from the opening 744 of the bending member 740 can be awarded to the winning opening 4063. In other words, the ball guided by the bending member 740 passes not only through the sensor SE but also from the opening 744 into the game area, and the flowed ball enters the winning opening 4063 and moves the sensor SE2. The form which passes can be formed and an interest can be given to a game.

  The winning opening 4063 may be arranged at a position where all the balls that have flowed out from the opening 744 to the gaming area can be received, or a part of the winning opening 4063 depending on the state of the ball that has flowed out from the opening 744 into the gaming area. These spheres may be received and some of the spheres may be arranged at positions where they cannot be received.

  In addition, since the opening 744 is formed at a connection portion between the first ball-sending passage KR1 and the second ball-sending passage KR2, the first ball-sending route KR1 can be obtained by paying out a ball that is likely to be clogged from the opening to the game area. And the ball can be prevented from being clogged at the connecting portion between the second pitching path KR2.

  Further, since the bending member 740 in which the winning opening 4063 and the opening 744 are formed is disposed on the front side of the game board 13, the player can visually recognize the state in which the ball is paid out from the opening 744 and enters the winning opening 4063. Yes, it can be easily given to players.

  Since the third connecting hole 4752a is connected to the upper side of the sensor SE arranged in the sixth pitching path KR6, the ball entering from the winning opening 4063 only passes the sensor SE2 arranged in the third connecting hole 4752a. Without passing through the sensor SE arranged on the sixth pitching path KR6. Therefore, since the two sensors can be passed by the ball entering from the winning opening 4063, the player can be provided with interest.

  Further, since the balls sent to the bending member 740 are distributed to the right and left by the seesaw member 762 of the distributing member 760, the balls are continuously connected to the connecting portion between the first ball feeding path KR1 and the second ball feeding path KR2. And can be prevented from being thrown. Therefore, it can suppress that a ball | bowl is blocked in the connection part of the 1st pitching path | route KR1 and the 2nd pitching path | route KR2.

  The present invention has been described based on the above embodiment, but the present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications can be easily made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. It can be guessed.

  In each of the above embodiments, a gaming machine may be configured by replacing or combining part or all of one embodiment with part or all of another one or more embodiments.

  In the first embodiment, the case where one sensor 630 is disposed in the center frame 600 has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the two sensors 630 may be arranged symmetrically with respect to the center line 600 in the left-right direction. Three or more sensors 630 may be provided.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the sensor 630 is disposed on the frame body 610 of the center frame 600 has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the sensor 630 may be disposed on the front cover 460 of the vertical displacement unit 400. In this case, since the irradiation range of the sensor 630 can be widened, the detection area of the sensor 630 can be expanded.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the cover member 621 of the center cover 620 is formed as a curved surface having a convex front surface is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, it may be bent in a substantially V-shaped cross section at the front center. Moreover, you may form as a curved surface convex on the back side. In addition, a curved surface may be partially formed. It is sufficient that at least light emitted from the sensor 630 is reflected by the cover member 630 and an object in front of the game board 13 can be detected.

  In the first embodiment, the cover member 621 of the center cover 620 is used for both the role of allowing the player to visually recognize the third symbol display device 81 disposed on the back side and the light emitted from the sensor 630. Although described above, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the area of the cover member 621 is an area that allows the player to visually recognize the third symbol display device 81 and an area that reflects light emitted from the sensor 630. The area may be divided into This modification will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 56 is a cross-sectional view of a center frame 600 as a modified example. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as said each embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted. FIG. 56 corresponds to the cross-sectional view of FIG. 40B, and only the cross section of the center cover 620 is schematically illustrated. Further, in FIG. 56, the outer shape of the third symbol display device 81 arranged on the back side of the center frame 600 is illustrated by a two-dot chain line.

  As shown in FIG. 56, the cover member 621 of the center frame 600 has a second region R2 at both ends in the left-right direction (left-right direction in FIG. 56) and the center side of the second region R2 at the both ends (third symbol display device). 81) and the first region R1.

  1st area | region R1 is an area | region which makes the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 arrange | positioned at the back side of the cover member 621 visually recognizable from a player, and is formed from the amount of light-transmitting materials with comparatively high transparency. The second region R <b> 2 is a region that reflects light emitted from the sensor 630 to the front side (player side) of the gaming machine 13. Note that the boundary position between the first region R1 and the second region R2 only needs to be visible from the player located on the front side of the gaming machine 13, and therefore is substantially the same as the outer shape of the third symbol display device 81 in the front view. The same position is preferred. In this modification, the sensor 630 will be described in a state where it is disposed at both left and right ends for easy understanding.

  In this case, for example, a member having a high reflectance such as silver may be coated on the back side or the front side of the second region R2. Alternatively, a silver seal may be attached to the back side or the front side of the second region R2. In this case, the light emitted from the sensor 630 can be easily reflected, so that the object on the front side of the game board 13 can be detected more reliably.

  Alternatively, the second region R2 may be curved so as to protrude toward the back surface, or the second region R2 may be flat. In this case, since the light emitted from the sensor 630 is reflected by the second region R2 and can be emitted to the front side, the detection range of the sensor 630 can be expanded.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where the sensor 630 is disposed in front of the cover member 621 has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the sensor 630 is disposed behind the cover member 621. You may set up. In this case, the light emitted from the sensor 630 is transmitted through the cover member 621, so that an object on the front side of the game board 13 can be detected. Further, in this case, the cover member 620 has a convex curved shape on the front side, so that when the light emitted from the sensor 630 is incident on the cover member 630, the irradiation angle can be changed. That is, the irradiation range of the sensor 630 emitted to the front side of the game board 13 can be widened by transmitting the cover member 630 having a convex curved shape on the front side.

  In each of the embodiments described above, the case where the two inclined surfaces 761 (third pitching path KR3) of the sorting member 760 are formed with the same length has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and two inclined surfaces are provided. The length of 761 (third pitching route KR3) may be different from each other. In this case, it is possible to make the player entertained because the time until the respective balls distributed to the right and left by the seesaw member 762 of the distribution member 720 are detected by the sensor SE can be made different on the left and right paths.

  In the first and second embodiments, the case where the roller 492a is formed of an elastic body has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the roller 492a may be formed of a material having a lower elastic modulus than rubber or urethane, and an elastic member such as rubber or urethane may be externally fitted to the outer peripheral surface of the roller 492a. In this case, since the volume of the elastic body can be reduced, the manufacturing cost of the roller member 492 can be suppressed.

  Although the case where the thickness of the cover member 621 of the center frame 600 is formed constant has been described in the first embodiment, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the thickness of the cover member 621 may be changed. For example, the cross-sectional shape of the cover member 621 may be formed in a substantially D shape. In this case, since the cover member 621 becomes a convex lens, the third symbol display device 81 and the decorative member 450 arranged on the back side of the cover member 621 can be displayed in a large size.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the roller 492a is sandwiched between the contact surface 452h of the front base 452 and the bulging portion 491c of the case member 491 using the elastic deformation of the roller 492a has been described. The present invention is not limited to this, and the displacement of the roller 492a may be used. For example, the shaft portion 492b of the roller 492a is formed to be displaceable, and the roller 492a is displaced so as to be sandwiched between the contact surface 452h of the front base 452 and the bulging portion 491c of the case member 491. Good.

  In this case, the roller 492a can be sandwiched between the contact surface 452h of the front base 452 and the bulging portion 491c of the case member 491 without using elastic deformation of the roller 492a. It is not necessary to form with a material with a high elastic modulus, and for example, it can be formed with a resin having a lower elastic modulus than rubber or urethane, so that the manufacturing cost can be reduced accordingly.

  In the third embodiment, the case has been described in which the roller 492a disposed in the upper part comes into contact with the decorative member 450 prior to the roller 492a disposed in the lower part. The roller 492a to be in contact with the decorative member 450 may be abutted after the roller 492a disposed at the lower portion.

  For example, the roller 492a disposed on the upper portion of the restriction unit 490 at the initial position (position where the contact surface 452h of the front base 452 and the roller 492a are separated) is in the front-rear direction (see FIG. 50). (A) You may comprise so that a predetermined clearance may be provided in the left-right direction). In this case, when the decorative member 450 is displaced to the first position, the time until it comes into contact with the roller 492a is delayed as compared with the first and third embodiments. Therefore, the drive motor 441 that drives the decorative member 450 The time during which the load (resistance) increases can be shortened.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the irradiation restricting portion 544 and the LED 532 are arranged in contact with each other has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and a predetermined interval is provided between the irradiation restricting portion 544 and the LED. A gap may be formed. In this case, since both ends of the irradiation hole 543 can be opened, it is possible to suppress air from staying (stagnation) in the irradiation hole 543. That is, since an air flow can be created inside the irradiation hole 543, the heat generated by the operation of the LED 532 can be efficiently cooled.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the rough surface processing is formed in the uneven shape has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the rough surface processing may be a surface made only of projections (projections). The surface which consists only of a dent (dent) may be sufficient. Further, the rough surface processing may be extended as a strip or a groove. Furthermore, the concave and convex cross-sectional shapes may be any of a circle, a keystroke, a polygonal diameter, or a combination of these. That is, as long as a portion higher than the reference position and a portion lower than the reference position are formed, a plurality of portions (surfaces) that can reflect light are formed, and irregular reflection is possible, the shape of the unevenness is arbitrary.

  In each of the above embodiments, a smoke generating device (smoke generating means) for generating smoke is provided on the back side of the game board 13 (base plate 60), and the smoke generated from the smoke generating device is converted into a displacement region of the rotary unit 500. You may make it introduce | transduce into (rotation area | region). That is, an atmosphere filled with smoke may be formed in the space between the third symbol display device 81 and the center frame 600 (center cover 620). Thereby, the player can visually recognize the light emitted from the LED 532 while passing the smoke, and the blinking of the LED 532 can be highlighted. Further, only the blinking of the LED 532 can be visually recognized while hiding the rotating unit 500 or the member on the back side thereof with smoke (making it difficult to be visually recognized by the player). Therefore, the production effect by LED532 (light) can be heightened.

  In addition, with the conventional product, smoke is pushed out to the outer peripheral side with the rotation of the rotating unit, and it is difficult to fill the space with the smoke. Therefore, it was difficult to obtain the effect of smoke. On the other hand, according to the rotation unit 500 in each embodiment described above, the air holes 512 and 522 are opened in the upper surface base 510 and the lower surface base 520, and the back surface of the structure in which the upper surface base 510 and the lower surface base 520 are assembled. Since the side is opened, the outside air taken in from the blow holes 512 and 522 can be exhausted from the back side and circulated. Therefore, it is possible to fill the above-described space with smoke (ie, to stay around the rotation unit 500). As a result, the LED 532 can be blinked in an atmosphere filled with smoke, and the above-described effects can be achieved.

  You may implement this invention in the pachinko machine etc. of a different type from said each embodiment. For example, once a big hit, a pachinko machine that raises the expected value of the big hit until a big hit state occurs (for example, two times or three times) including that (for example, a two-time right item, a three-time right item) May also be implemented. Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, the present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine that has a special area such as a V-zone and has a special gaming state as a necessary condition for winning a ball in the special area. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, the game machine may be implemented as various game machines such as an alepatchi, a sparrow ball, a slot machine, a game machine in which a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated.

  In the slot machine, for example, a symbol is changed by operating a control lever in a state where a symbol effective line is determined by inserting coins, and a symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating a stop button. Is. Accordingly, the basic concept of the slot machine is that it is provided with a display device for confirming and displaying the identification information after variably displaying the identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and resulting from the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever). The variation display of the identification information is started, and the variation display of the identification information is stopped and fixedly displayed due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. It is a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that the combination of identification information at the time is a specific condition. In this case, the game medium is typically a coin, medal, etc. Take as an example.

  In addition, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device is provided that displays a symbol after a symbol string composed of a plurality of symbols is variably displayed, and has a handle for launching a ball. What is not. In this case, after throwing a predetermined amount of spheres based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the change of the symbol is started due to the operation of the operation lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or With the passage of time, the variation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player is generated on the condition that the determined symbol at the time of stoppage is a so-called jackpot symbol. In this case, a large amount of balls are paid out to the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only a ball can be handled as a gaming value in the gaming hall. Therefore, the gaming value seen in the current gaming hall in which pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed is used. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the location of the gaming machine can be solved.

  The concept of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention is shown below.

<About the concept of the invention using the center cover 620 as an example>
A game board having an opening in the center, a liquid crystal display device disposed so as to be visible through the opening of the game board, and the liquid crystal display device by emitting light and receiving reflected light from the light object And a sensor device that detects the presence of the object on the front side of the liquid crystal display device, the liquid crystal display device being disposed on the front side of the liquid crystal display device, at least the front surface being formed as a convex curved surface, and a light transmissive material A gaming machine A1 comprising a front member made of

  Here, a game board having an opening in the center, a liquid crystal display device disposed so as to be visible through the opening of the game board, and a light object and an object of the light (for example, a player's hand) A gaming machine including a sensor device (motion sensor) that detects the presence of an object on the front side of a liquid crystal display device by receiving reflected light is known (for example, JP-A-2014-208139). In this case, if the sensor device is exposed so as to be visible from the player, the player's interest is impaired. Therefore, the sensor device is disposed on the back side of the decorative member and is difficult to be visually recognized by the player. The sensor device emits light through the open part on the side of the decorative member and receives the reflected light from the object of the light to detect the presence of the object, and the sensor device opens the side of the decorative member. The farther it is arranged from the part (retracted to the back side), the harder it is to be seen by the player, but the range in which the object can be detected becomes narrower, and the sensor device is open on the side of the decorative member. The closer it is to the player, the wider the range in which the object can be detected, but the player can easily see it. That is, there is a problem that it is difficult to secure a range in which an object can be detected while making it difficult for the player to visually recognize the sensor device.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A1, since it is disposed on the front side of the liquid crystal display device and at least the front surface is formed as a convex curved surface and includes a front member made of a light transmissive material, the sensor device emits light. The reflected light can be reflected by the front member to reach the object, and the reflected light from the object can be reflected by the front member to reach the sensor device. Therefore, since the sensor device can be disposed away from the opening portion on the side of the decorative member (retracted to the back side), the sensor device is less visible to the player, A detectable range can be secured. Since the front member is made of a light transmissive material, it is possible to ensure the visibility of the symbols displayed on the liquid crystal display device.

  Further, since the front surface is a convex curved surface, when the light emitted from the sensor device is reflected by the front surface of the front member, the reflection angle (reflection angle) is set to a more acute angle near the sensor device. On the other hand, at a position far from the sensor device, the angle of reflection (each of the reflections) can be made more obtuse, and the range in which the object can be detected can be easily expanded accordingly. The same applies to the case where the reflected light from the object is reflected by the front surface of the front member.

  In the gaming machine A1, the gaming machine A2 is characterized in that a thickness dimension of at least a portion of the front member formed as the curved surface is set to a substantially constant value.

  According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A1, the front member is set to a substantially constant thickness dimension of at least a portion formed as a curved surface, so that the front member acts as a convex lens. And the visibility of the symbols displayed on the liquid crystal display device can be secured. Moreover, since a space can be formed on the back side of the front member, a space for displacing other members (displaceable members formed so as to be displaceable) can be secured accordingly.

  The gaming machine A2 includes a displacement member formed so as to be displaceable between the liquid crystal display device and the front member, and the front member has a first portion of the periphery of the front member on the front side of the second portion. A gaming machine A3, which is arranged at a position where

  According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A2, the front member is disposed at a position where the first part of the peripheral edge of the front member is on the front side of the second part. The first portion can be used as a passage when the displacement member is displaced between the back side of the board and the back side of the front member. On the other hand, since the 2nd part of the periphery of a front member is located in the back side rather than a 1st part, the curvature of a front member can be enlarged in the limited space by that much.

  The first part of the front member is disposed at a position that is substantially the same as the back of the game board or on the front side of the back of the game board, and the second part of the front member is more than the back of the game board. A gaming machine A4, which is disposed at a position on the back side.

  According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine A3, the first portion of the front member is disposed at a position that is substantially the same as the back of the game board or at the front side of the back of the game board. It can suppress more reliably that a displacement member interferes with a 1st part, and can enlarge the displacement member by that much. In addition, since the second portion of the front member is disposed at a position on the back side of the back of the game board, the curvature of the front member can be increased, and the front of the front member can be made light accordingly. Easy to use as a reflective surface. That is, it is possible to ensure a range in which an object can be detected while making it difficult for the player to visually recognize the sensor device.

  The gaming machine A3 or A4 includes a center frame disposed at an inner edge of the opening of the gaming board, and the displacement member is formed to be displaceable between the back side of the gaming board and the back side of the front member. A gaming machine A5, comprising: a main body member to be rotated; and a rotating member rotatably disposed on the main body member, wherein the second portion of the front member is coupled to the center frame.

  According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A3 or A4, the second portion is connected to the center frame, so that the displacement member (main body member) is displaced to the back side of the front member and the rotating member is rotated. The wind generated by this can be blocked by the second portion (front member). As a result, it is possible to suppress the flow of the sphere from being affected by the action of the wind. Further, even when wind is generated by the rotation of the rotating member and dust or dust is blown off by the wind, the second part (front member) can block it, so that the blown-off dust or dust is emitted from the sensor device. -It is possible to suppress a rise in the light receiving optical path and a decrease in detection accuracy.

  In the gaming machine A5, the center frame includes a stage on which a ball can roll, and the second portion of the front member is connected to a range including at least the stage of the center frame. A gaming machine A6.

  Here, in the center frame stage, it is conventionally known that a back wall is erected so that a ball rolling on the stage does not fall to the back side. However, in such a conventional product, the wind generated by the rotation of the rotating member wraps around from the standing front end of the back wall standing from the stage to the front side or is folded by the glass plate on the front side of the game board. Affects the ball rolling on the stage. On the other hand, in order to prevent the sphere rolling on the stage from being affected by the wind, the back wall is curved to the front side to cover the periphery of the stage sphere (that is, a closed passage is formed). Since it becomes difficult for the player to visually recognize the ball rolling on the stage, the interest of the game is impaired.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A5, the second portion of the front member is connected to a range including at least the stage of the center frame, so that the rotating member is rotated. The wind generated by this can be blocked by the second portion (front member). As a result, since it is not necessary to cover the periphery of the stage, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the ball that rolls on the stage, and it is possible to suppress the flow of the ball from being affected by the action of the wind.

  In the gaming machine A5 or A6, the first portion of the front member is disposed at a predetermined distance from an inner edge or a center frame in the opening of the gaming board.

  According to the gaming machine A7, in either the gaming machine A5 or A6, the first portion of the front member is disposed at a predetermined interval between the inner edge of the opening of the gaming board or the center frame. The back side and the front side of the game board and the front member can be communicated with each other through the predetermined interval. As a result, it is possible to suppress the heat generated from the displacement member (main body member or rotating member) from being trapped on the back side of the game board and the front member.

  In the gaming machine A7, the first portion of the front member is formed in a vertically upper region of the periphery of the front member.

  According to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A7, the first portion of the front member is formed in the vertical upper region of the periphery of the front member, so that the rotating member is rotated. Can flow toward the upper area of the game area (the upper area of the opening of the game board), and the influence of the wind can be suppressed from being affected by the action of the wind. That is, the sphere that flows down the upper area of the game area is an initial sphere that is launched from the launcher and flows into the game area, and its speed is relatively fast. Compared to a moving sphere, it is less susceptible to wind. In other words, it is possible to flow the wind toward an area where the sphere is not easily affected by the wind. Therefore, the rotation speed of the rotating member can be increased correspondingly, and the production effect can be improved.

  Here, when heat is generated from the displacement member (the main body member or the rotating member), the air warmed by the heat is raised, and the first portion of the front member is located on the upper side in the vertical direction of the periphery of the front member. A gap (predetermined interval) formed in the region, that is, the communication between the back side and the front side of the game board and the front member can be formed on the upper side. As a result, heat generated from the displacement member (main body member or rotating member) can be easily flowed to the front side of the game board and the front member through the gap, and heat is trapped on the back side of the game board and the front member. Can be suppressed.

  The gaming machine A9 according to any one of the gaming machines A1 to A8, wherein the front surface of the front member is formed as a curved surface whose normal direction is directed at least downward from the horizontal direction.

  Here, since the front member is disposed on the front side of the liquid crystal display device, the front member substantially faces the player's face (facing directly in front). Therefore, when the front surface of the front member is formed as a convex curved surface, the light from the fluorescent lamp and other gaming machines installed on the ceiling in the store is reflected toward the player, and the player feels dazzling, The visibility of the liquid crystal display device may be deteriorated (the light of a fluorescent lamp or other game machine is reflected on the front member, making it difficult to see the liquid crystal display device).

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A9, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines A1 to A8, the front surface of the front member is formed as a curved surface whose normal direction points at least below the horizontal direction. Light incident on the front surface of the front member can be reflected downward. In other words, when light from a fluorescent lamp or other gaming machine installed on the ceiling in the store is incident on the front of the front member, it can be suppressed that such light is reflected toward the player. It can be suppressed that the player feels dazzled and the visibility of the liquid crystal display device deteriorates.

  In the gaming machine A9, the first portion of the front member is formed in a vertically upper region of the periphery of the front member, and the front member has a thickness dimension of at least a portion formed as the curved surface. The gaming machine A10 is characterized in that the horizontal component increases as the front face is set to a constant value and is located upward in the vertical direction.

  According to the gaming machine A10, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A9, the first portion of the front member is formed in the vertical upper region of the periphery of the front member, and the front member is formed as at least a curved surface. The air is heated by the heat generated from the displacement member (main body member or rotating member) because the horizontal component increases as the front surface located in the vertical direction increases. Can be raised along the rear surface of the front member, and the raised air (heat) is communicated between the first portion of the front member (the gap between the game board and the rear side of the front member and the front side (predetermined). ))) To the front side of the game board and the front member. As a result, it is possible to suppress heat from being accumulated on the back side of the game board and the front member.

<Concept of Invention with Distribution Device 700 as an Example>
In a gaming machine that includes a passage member that forms a passage through which a ball can pass and in which a bent portion is formed in a part of the passage member, the passage member includes an opening that is formed in a side wall of the bent portion. A gaming machine B1 characterized by

  Here, a gaming machine including a passage member that forms a passage through which a ball can pass is known (for example, JP-A-2015-97764). In this case, a bent portion is also formed in a part of the passage member. By forming the bent portion, the pitching direction of the ball (position where the ball flows out from the passage to the game area) can be changed, so that the degree of freedom in layout can be increased. However, when the bent portion is formed in a part of the passage member as in the conventional gaming machine described above, the flow of the sphere in the bent portion tends to be stagnant. Therefore, when passing through the bent part in a state where a plurality of spheres are connected, the sphere following the preceding sphere catches up, and the sphere following the preceding sphere presses against the side wall so that both cannot roll. There was a problem that ball clogging may occur.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B1, the passage member has an opening formed in the side wall of the bent portion, so that when passing through the bent portion in a state where a plurality of spheres are connected, the passage member is behind the preceding sphere. Even if the moving ball catches up, it is difficult to press the preceding ball against the side wall, and the rolling of both can be easily continued. As a result, the occurrence of ball clogging can be suppressed.

  The bent portion is formed by a first portion of the passage member and a second portion that is connected to the downstream side of the first portion and has a direction in which the passing direction of the sphere is different. Means the range. In this case, each of the first portion and the second portion may be a linearly extending passage, a curvedly extending passage, or these. It may be a passage with a combination of

  In the gaming machine B1, the bent portion of the passage member includes a vertical passage that extends in a substantially vertical direction, and an extended passage that extends while being inclined downward from the vertical passage. A gaming machine B2 formed in a region where the passage and the extended passage intersect.

  According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B1, the bent portion of the passage member includes a vertical passage extending in a substantially vertical direction, and an extending passage extending while being inclined downward from the vertical passage. And the opening is formed in a region where the vertical passage and the extending passage intersect with each other.

  That is, the region where the vertical passage and the extension passage intersect is a position where the sphere flowing down (falling) down the vertical passage changes its direction and starts rolling in the extension direction of the extension passage. A ball following the ball is easy to catch up. For this reason, when the sphere following the preceding sphere presses against the side wall, both cannot roll and the ball is likely to be clogged. On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B2, since an opening is formed in a region where the vertical passage and the extension passage intersect, even if the following ball catches up with the preceding ball, the preceding ball is used as the side wall. It can be difficult to press, and it is easy to keep both rolling. As a result, the occurrence of ball clogging can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine B2, the opening is an area where the vertical passage and the extension passage intersect, and is formed on the left and right side walls when the ball rolls along the extension direction of the extension passage. A gaming machine B3 characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B2, the opening is an area where the vertical passage and the extending passage intersect, and the ball rolls along the extending direction of the extending passage. Therefore, even when a sphere following the preceding sphere catches up with the preceding sphere, it is difficult to press the preceding sphere against the left and right sidewalls, and the rolling of both can be continued easily. As a result, the occurrence of ball clogging can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine B3, an area where the vertical passage and the extending passage intersect, and a back side when a ball rolls along a bottom wall serving as a rolling surface and an extending direction of the extending passage. The gaming machine B4 is characterized in that an inclined surface that is inclined downward at an angle larger than the downward inclination of the extending passage is formed on the side wall of the extended passage.

  According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B3, the vertical passage and the extending passage intersect with each other along the bottom wall serving as a rolling surface and the extending direction of the extending passage. An inclined surface is formed on the side wall on the back side when the sphere rolls, and is inclined downward at an angle larger than the downward inclination of the extending passage, so that the sphere flowing down (falling) in the vertical passage changes direction. Thus, when starting rolling in the extending direction of the extending passage, such a sphere can be quickly rolled using the downward inclination of the inclined surface. This makes it easier to roll the preceding sphere before the following ball catches up, and the sphere rolls along the extending direction of the extension passage by the following ball. Since it can be suppressed from being pressed against the side wall on the back side), the rolling of both can be easily continued. As a result, the occurrence of ball clogging can be suppressed.

  In addition, the inclination of the inclined surface may be any of a linear inclination, a curved inclination, or a combination of these. Further, the downward slope angle of the inclined surface does not need to be larger than the downward inclination angle of the extending passage over the entire inclined surface, and the downward slope angle at least at a part of the inclined surface is extended. If the angle is larger than the downward inclination angle of the passage, it is sufficient.

  In any one of the gaming machines B2 to B4, a game board having a game area formed on the front side is provided, and an area where at least the vertical path and the extension path intersect among the bent portions of the path member is the game. A gaming machine B5, which is arranged on the front side of the board.

  According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines B2 to B4, at least a region of the bent portion of the passage member where the vertical passage and the extended passage intersect (that is, a portion where an opening is formed) ) Is arranged on the front side of the game board, so if a ball clog occurs at the bent part of the passage member, the ball clogged in the bent part on the front side of the game board by opening the glass plate Can be accessed from the opening. Therefore, it is possible to improve the workability of the work for eliminating the ball clogging.

  In any one of the gaming machines B2 to B5, the opening is a side wall in a region where the vertical passage and the extension passage intersect, and a height position corresponding to a radius of a sphere from a bottom wall serving as a rolling surface A gaming machine B6 that is formed in a range including

  According to the gaming machine B6, in any of the gaming machines B2 to B5, the opening is a side wall in a region where the vertical passage and the extension passage intersect, and corresponds to the radius of the sphere from the bottom wall serving as a rolling surface. Therefore, when the sphere that flows down (falls) down the vertical passage reaches the bottom wall of the extension passage, the sphere can be easily received in the opening. Therefore, even when a succeeding sphere catches up with the preceding sphere, it is difficult to press the preceding sphere against the side wall, and the rolling of both can be easily continued. As a result, the occurrence of ball clogging can be suppressed.

  In any one of the gaming machines B2 to B6, a game board having a game area formed on the front side is provided, and an area where at least the vertical path and the extension path intersect among the bent portions of the path member is the game. A gaming machine B7, which is disposed on the front side of the board, and wherein the opening is formed to have a size through which a ball can pass.

  According to the gaming machine B7, in any of the gaming machines B2 to B6, a region where at least the vertical passage intersects the extended passage (that is, a portion where the opening is formed) among the bent portions of the passage member is a game. Since the opening is formed on the front side of the board and has a size that allows the passage of the sphere, the occurrence of clogging of the sphere can be easily suppressed.

  That is, when the size of the opening is such that the sphere cannot pass, it is usually difficult to press the preceding sphere against the side wall using the opening. A form in which the preceding sphere is pressed against the center of the opening is formed, and the preceding sphere may be fitted into (inserted into) the opening. In this case, the subsequent rolling of the sphere is inhibited by the sphere fitted in the opening, and the clogging occurs.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B7, even when a form in which the following ball pushes the leading ball against the center of the opening is formed, the leading ball is moved from the opening to the outside of the passage member (on the front side of the game board). The game area can be discharged, and the preceding ball can be prevented from being fitted into the opening. Thereby, the rolling of the succeeding ball can be continued, so that the occurrence of the clogging of the ball can be suppressed.

  In addition, in this way, an opening is formed with a size that allows passage of the ball, and the opening is arranged on the front side of the game board (that is, the game area), so that the ball flowing down the game area can be reduced. It can be made to flow into the passage member from the opening. Therefore, the interest of the game can be improved. For example, when a sensor for detecting a winning ball is disposed downstream of the bent portion, in addition to the ball flowing from the upstream to the passage member from the bent portion, the ball flowing from the opening to the passage member is also used as the winning opening. Can be detected. In particular, in this case, the opening (a region where the vertical passage and the extended passage intersect) is disposed on the front side of the game board, so that the player can visually recognize the ball flowing into the passage member from the opening. be able to.

  In the gaming machine 7, a lower end of the inner edge of the opening is set at a position separated from the bottom wall of the extended passage by a predetermined distance.

  According to the gaming machine B8, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine B7, the lower end of the inner edge of the opening is set at a position separated from the bottom wall of the extending passage by a predetermined distance. A side wall can be left (formed) between the bottom wall and the bottom wall. Therefore, even when the opening is formed in such a size that the ball can pass through, it is possible to prevent the ball from flowing out from the passage member to the outside (game area) through the opening.

  In the gaming machines B1 to B8, the passage member is formed to be inclined downward toward the bent portion, is connected to the upstream side of the bent portion, and extends substantially linearly along the width direction of the game area. A pair of passage members arranged in such a posture that the upstream side of the inclined passage is positioned at the center in the width direction of the game area and the bent portion is positioned outside in the width direction of the game area. A gaming machine B9, wherein a winning device is positioned between the bent portions of the passage member.

  According to the gaming machine B9, the passage member is formed so as to be inclined downward toward the bent portion, and is connected to the upstream side of the bent portion and extends substantially linearly along the width direction of the gaming area. A pair of passage members are arranged in such a posture that the upstream side of the inclined passage is positioned at the center in the width direction of the game area and the bent portion is positioned on the outer side in the width direction of the game area, and the bent portions in the pair of passage members A winning device is positioned between the two.

  In this case, if the angle of the downward inclination of the inclined passage is made small (the downward inclination is gentle), the flow velocity of the sphere becomes low, and it becomes easy to generate a sphere clogging at the bent portion. On the other hand, when the downward inclination angle of the inclined passage is increased (the downward inclination is steep), it is possible to increase the flow speed of the sphere and to prevent the clogging of the bent portion. The necessary space in the height direction increases, making it difficult to arrange the winning device.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B9, since the opening is formed in the side wall of the bent portion, it is difficult for the ball clogging to occur in the bent portion. The downward slope can be made gentle). As a result, the space in the height direction necessary for the arrangement of the inclined passage can be suppressed, and the arrangement of the winning device can be made possible. That is, the arrangement of the passage member and the winning device described in the gaming machine B9 is impossible with the conventional product, and as described above, it is only possible by forming an opening in the side wall of the bent portion. .

  The gaming machine B9 is provided with a game board in which a game area is formed on the front side, and an area where at least the vertical path and the extension path intersect among the bent portions of the path member is on the front side of the game board. A gap that allows at least a ball to pass is formed between a portion of the bent portion of the passage member that is disposed on the front side of the game board and a lower edge of the game area. A gaming machine B10 characterized by this.

  Here, an opening is formed in the center of the game board, and the player can visually recognize the liquid crystal display device through the opening. In recent years, with an increase in the size of liquid crystal display devices, the opening at the center of the game board is also enlarged, so that the space between the lower edge of the opening at the center of the game board and the lower edge of the game area is narrowed. Therefore, in the conventional product, it is difficult to arrange the members corresponding to the passage member and the winning device described in the gaming machine 9 in the space between the lower edge of the opening at the center of the game board and the lower edge of the game area. there were. That is, as described above, when the downward inclination angle of the inclined passage is made small (the downward inclination is gentle), the flow speed of the sphere is lowered, and it becomes easy to generate a sphere clogging at the bent portion. On the other hand, when the downward inclination angle of the inclined passage is increased (the downward inclination is steep), it is possible to increase the flow speed of the sphere and to prevent the clogging of the bent portion. The necessary space in the height direction increases, making it difficult to arrange the winning device. In addition, since the position of the bent portion in the vertical direction is lowered (lowered), it becomes difficult to secure a gap through which the ball can pass between the bent portion and the lower edge of the game area. It is necessary to provide an outlet on each side.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B10, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine B9, since the opening is formed in the side wall of the bent portion, it is difficult to cause ball clogging in the bent portion. The angle of the downward inclination of the passage can be reduced (the downward inclination is gentle). As a result, it is possible to raise (increase) the position of the bent portion in the vertical direction, so that it is possible to secure a gap through which the sphere can pass between the bent portion and the lower edge of the game area. Therefore, it is not necessary to provide out openings on both sides of the bent portion. That is, in the arrangement of the passage member and the winning device described in the gaming machine B9, the arrangement described in the gaming machine B10 (an arrangement in which a gap through which a ball can pass is formed between the bent portion and the lower edge of the gaming area). This is an arrangement that is impossible with the conventional product, and as described above, can only be achieved by forming an opening in the side wall of the bent portion.

<About the concept of the invention taking the rotation unit 500 as an example>
A gaming machine having a rotating display device that has a plurality of light emitting means and performs afterimage display by an afterimage effect by blinking the light emitting means according to a rotation position, wherein the rotation display device includes the plurality of light emitting means. Are arranged, a main body member that accommodates the substrate, and a base member that rotatably supports the main body member, and the main body member transmits a light from the light emitting means, A gaming machine C1 comprising a plurality of through-holes formed through a side wall facing in the rotational direction.

  Here, there is known a gaming machine including a rotation display device that has a plurality of light emitting means (LEDs) and performs afterimage display by an afterimage effect by blinking the light emitting means according to the rotation position (for example, JP, 2015-100385, JP, 2015-053968, etc.).

  In this case, in the technique disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-100385, since the light emitting unit is exposed, the appearance is impaired. On the other hand, in the technique disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-053968, the light emitted from the light-emitting means is visually recognized through a translucent member (push button). Therefore, the light emitting means is not exposed. However, in this case, even if the member (reel) provided with the light emitting means is rotated, the rotation is not visually recognized, so there is no point in performing afterimage display by the afterimage effect. That is, the same display can be performed by arranging a plurality of light emitting means vertically and horizontally in a matrix and controlling the blinking of each light emitting means.

  Accordingly, the applicant of the present application has devised a rotary display device in which a substrate on which a plurality of light emitting means are arranged is housed in a main body member, and the main body member is rotatably supported on a base member (not yet filed at the time of filing this application). Known). According to this, since the light emitting means is accommodated in the main body member, the light emitting means is hardly visible and the appearance is not impaired. Moreover, since the afterimage display by blinking of the light emitting means is visually recognized in a state where the rotation of the main body member is visible, the interest is enhanced. However, in this case, since the light emitting means is accommodated in the main body member, a new problem has been found that it is difficult to cool the light emitting means. The light emitting means (LED) and the IC / capacitor that controls them are soldered to the board. If the heat generated when these light emitting means, IC / capacitors operate cannot be cooled sufficiently, the solder will melt. There is a risk of poor contact.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C1, the main body member includes a plurality of through holes formed through the side wall facing in the rotation direction, so that when the main body member is rotated, the main body member is removed from the plurality of through holes. Outside air can be taken into the interior of the. Therefore, the heat generated when the light emitting means operates can be cooled.

  In the gaming machine C1, the main body member is formed in a container-like shape with an open back side, the gaming machine C2.

  According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C1, the main body member is formed in a container shape with the back side open, so that the outside air taken in from the through hole in the side wall can be efficiently removed from the back side. Can be exhausted. Therefore, the heat generated when the light emitting means operates can be cooled. In addition, by exhausting from the back side of the main body member in this way, it is possible to suppress the exhaust from affecting the ball flowing down the game area (or rolling the stage).

  In the gaming machine C2, the main body member is formed in a rectangular shape when viewed from the front along the diametrical direction in the rotation plane of the main body member, and the front wall forming the front side is closer to the end in the longitudinal direction. A gaming machine C3 that is formed in a curved shape that recedes to the side.

  According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C2, the main body member is formed in a rectangular shape when viewed from the front (that is, viewed in the direction of the rotation axis) that is a long shape along the diameter direction on the rotation plane of the main body member. Therefore, using the centrifugal force accompanying the rotation of the main body member, the air inside the main body member can flow to the longitudinal end side (outward in the radial direction during rotation) and exhaust from the back side. Therefore, along with the flow of air, outside air can be taken into the main body member from the back side at and around the rotation shaft. That is, since the rotational speed is low at and around the rotating shaft, the efficiency of taking in outside air from the through hole in the side wall is poor (or cannot be taken in), but the circulation of air using centrifugal force (the rear surface at and around the rotating shaft) The outside air is taken in from the side, and the outside air taken in is made to flow to the longitudinal direction end side (radially outward at the time of rotation) by centrifugal force to form a flow of air exhausted from the back side on the radially outward side) be able to. As a result, the heat generated when the light emitting means operates can be cooled. In particular, it is possible to achieve cooling of the light emitting means disposed in the vicinity of the rotating shaft.

  In this case, when the front wall that forms the front side of the main body member has a shape parallel to the rotation plane of the main body member (that is, the main body member has a rectangular parallelepiped shape), the longitudinal end portion (when rotating) Since the angle of the portion where the air that has flowed to the outside in the radial direction changes direction toward the back side is substantially a right angle, vortices are likely to be formed at this portion. Therefore, the air flow is hindered, and smooth exhaust from the back side becomes difficult.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C3, the front wall that forms the front side is formed in a curved shape that recedes toward the back side toward the end in the longitudinal direction. The angle of the portion where the air flowing toward the outer side (radially outward) can gradually flow toward the back side and the direction of the air flowing toward the end in the longitudinal direction (outward in the radial direction) changes toward the rear side. Can be made larger than a substantially right angle, so that the formation of vortices in such a portion can be suppressed, and the flow of air can be made smooth. Therefore, exhaust from the back side can be performed more smoothly. As a result, the cooling of the light emitting means disposed in the vicinity of the rotation shaft can be achieved more reliably.

  In the gaming machine C2 or C3, the main body member has a rotating shaft and an open area on the back side in the vicinity of the rotating shaft larger than an open area on the back side on the longitudinal end side. Machine C4.

  According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C2 or C3, the main body member has an opening area on the back side in the vicinity of the rotating shaft and the rotating shaft is larger than an opening area on the back side on the longitudinal end side. Therefore, using the centrifugal force that accompanies the rotation, the air inside the main body member flows to the longitudinal end side (outward in the radial direction during rotation), and from the back side on the radially outward side. By exhausting, when the outside air is taken in from the rotating shaft and the back side in the vicinity thereof, the taking-in can be performed efficiently.

  In the gaming machine C4, the main body member has a rotating shaft and an open portion on the back side in the vicinity of the rotating shaft formed in a circular shape concentric with the rotating shaft.

  According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C4, the main body member has a rotating shaft and an open portion on the back side in the vicinity of the rotating shaft formed in a circular shape concentric with the rotating shaft. As a result of the rotation, it is possible to suppress disturbance of the outside air on the rear side of the rotating shaft and its vicinity (formation of a flow in the rotating direction). As a result, it is possible to efficiently take in outside air from the rotating shaft and the back side in the vicinity thereof.

  In any of the gaming machines C2 to C5, the base member includes a shaft member that rotatably supports the main body member, and the shaft member is reduced in diameter from the back surface side to the back surface side of the main body member. A gaming machine C6 characterized by this.

  According to the gaming machine C6, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines C2 to C5, the shaft member that rotatably supports the main body member on the base member has a diameter reduced from the back side to the back side of the main body member. Therefore, when the outside air is taken in from the rear side of the rotating shaft and the vicinity thereof with the rotation of the main body member, the flow of the outside air along the outer peripheral surface of the shaft member can be smoothed, and the flow resistance can be reduced. As a result, since it is possible to efficiently take in outside air from the back side in the vicinity of the rotation shaft, it is possible to more reliably achieve cooling of the light emitting means disposed in the vicinity of the rotation shaft.

  In any one of the gaming machines C1 to C6, the board is accommodated in the main body member in a posture in which a surface on which the light emitting means is mounted or a surface opposite to the surface faces the side wall of the main body member. Characteristic gaming machine C7.

  According to the gaming machine C7, in addition to the effects exerted by any of the gaming machines C1 to C6, the board has a posture in which the surface on which the light emitting means is mounted or the surface opposite to the surface faces the side wall of the body member. Since it is housed in the member, the outside air introduced from the through-hole formed through the side wall can be efficiently sprayed onto the light emitting means or the IC / capacitor to enhance the heat radiation effect. As a result, it is possible to effectively cool the heat generated when the light emitting means or the IC / capacitor operates. Further, the posture in which the substrate is accommodated in the main body member is the posture in which the front surface or the back surface of the substrate faces the side wall of the main body member, so that the width dimension in the front view of the main body member (dimension in the direction perpendicular to the longitudinal direction). ) Can be reduced. As a result, in a state where the main body member (rotary display device) is stopped, it is possible to ensure the visibility of the members and devices disposed on the back side.

  Any of the gaming machines C1 to C7, comprising a smoke generating means for generating smoke in a displacement region of the main body member of the rotary display device.

  According to the gaming machine C8, in addition to the effects exerted by any of the gaming machines C1 to C7, since the smoke generating means for generating smoke is provided in the displacement region of the main body member of the rotary display device, the flashing of the light emitting means is made to stand out. Can do. Moreover, only the blinking of the light emitting means can be visually recognized while hiding the rotary display device with smoke, and the effect effect by light can be enhanced.

  In the conventional rotary display device, smoke is pushed out to the outer peripheral side as the main body member rotates, and it is difficult to obtain the effect of smoke. Is formed and the outside air can be circulated, so that the smoke can remain around the body member. As a result, the light emitting means can be blinked in an atmosphere filled with smoke, and the above-described effects can be achieved.

  As a smoke generator, for example, a type in which aqueous or oily oil (liquid) is heated and vaporized to generate smoke (smoke), and liquid (aqueous or oily) is pressurized and diffused by a compressor in the air. Examples include a type in which fine particles are retained and a type in which carbon dioxide gas is ejected.

  In the gaming machine C8, a game board having an opening in the center, a liquid crystal display device disposed so as to be visible through the opening of the game board, and disposed on the front side of the liquid crystal display device and projecting to the front side And a front member made of a light-transmitting material, and at least a main body member of the rotary display member is positioned between the liquid crystal display device and the front member. Machine C9.

  According to the gaming machine C9, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine C8, a gaming board having an opening in the center, a liquid crystal display device disposed so as to be visible through the opening of the gaming board, and the front of the liquid crystal display device And a front member made of a light-transmitting material, and at least a main body member of the rotary display member is positioned between the liquid crystal display device and the front member. Therefore, the smoke generated from the smoke generating device can be easily retained (contained easily) in the displacement region of the main body member. Therefore, it is easy to make the light emitting means blink in an atmosphere filled with smoke and make the blinking stand out, or to make only the blinking of the light emitting means visible while hiding the rotary display device with smoke. As a result, it is possible to enhance the production effect by light. In particular, since the front member is convexly curved toward the front, smoke can be easily retained in the space on the back side of the front member. As a result, it is possible to easily enhance the light effect using the smoke described above.

<About the concept of the invention taking the rotation unit 500 as an example>
A base member; a main body member that is displaced between the first position and the second position with respect to the base member; and a displacement member that is displaceably disposed on the main body member, wherein the main body member is at least the In the gaming machine in which the displacement member is displaced in the state of being disposed at the first position, the rotation member that is rotatably supported on one of the base member or the body member and the body member are disposed at the first position. And a contact member disposed on the other of the base member and the main body member so that the main body member is disposed at the first position. The gaming machine D1 is characterized in that the displacement direction at the time and the rotation direction of the rotating member are set substantially parallel to each other.

  Here, a base member, a main body member that is displaced between the first position and the second position with respect to the base member, and a displacement member that is displaceably disposed on the main body member, the main body member includes: There is known a gaming machine in which a displacement member is formed so as to be displaceable in a state of being arranged at a first position (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-162990).

  In this case, when the main body member is disposed at the first position and the displacement member is displaced, the main body member may rattle against the base member as the displacement member is displaced. In view of this, there are some which provide engagement means for engaging the main body member and the base member to suppress the rattling. The engaging means is disposed on one of the main body member and the base member and is urged by the urging means, and is formed so as to be engageable with the engaging member and on the other of the main body member or the base member. An engagement member disposed, and utilizing the displacement of the main body member relative to the base member (displacement toward the first position), the engagement member is retracted against the urging force of the urging means, and the main body When the member is disposed at the first position, the engaging member is advanced by the urging force of the urging means and engaged with the engaged member. Thereby, the relative displacement of the main body member with respect to the base member is restricted by the engagement of the engaging means, and rattling of the main body member with respect to the base member accompanying the displacement of the displacement member is suppressed.

  However, in such a conventional engaging means, in order to place the engaging means in the engaged state (the main body member is disposed at the first position), the engaging member is resisted against the urging force of the urging means. Not only does it need to be retracted, it also resists the urging force of the urging means when releasing the engagement state of the engaging means (displace the main body member from the first position toward the second position). There is a problem in that it is necessary to retract the engaging member, and a driving force necessary for displacing the main body member with respect to the base member increases.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D1, the rotating member that is pivotally supported by one of the base member and the main body member, and the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member in contact with the main body member in the first position. And a contact member disposed on the other of the base member and the main body member, so that the contact of the contact member with the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member makes it possible to It is possible to suppress the rattling of the main body member with respect to the base member accompanying the displacement of the displacement member by restricting the general displacement. In this case, since the displacement direction when the main body member is arranged at the first position and the rotation direction of the rotating member are set substantially parallel to each other, the main body member is arranged at the first position and the second position from the first position. When displacing to the position, the rotating member can be rotated along with the displacement, so that it is possible to suppress the driving force required when displacing the main body member with respect to the base member.

  In the gaming machine D1, the rotating member is formed of an elastic body that is elastically deformable at least on the outer peripheral surface side.

  According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine D1, the rotating member is formed of an elastic body that can be elastically deformed at least on the outer peripheral surface side, so that the abutting member contacts the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member. In this case, the outer peripheral surface side of the rotating member can be elastically deformed, and the rotating member can be easily held by the contact member. Thereby, it is difficult to rotate the rotating member and the relative displacement of the main body member with respect to the base member can be restricted, so that rattling of the main body member with respect to the base member accompanying the displacement of the displacement member can be suppressed.

  The elastic body is preferably a viscoelastic body exemplified by rubber or urethane. In this case, the vibration damping function can perform a vibration damping function or a vibration insulating function for attenuating and insulating vibration input from the main body member to the base member as the displacement member is displaced. This is because wear and failure of various devices installed, loosening of the fastening portion, and the like can be suppressed. In particular, when the displacement member is periodically displaced (for example, when it is rotated at a relatively high speed in order to function as a versatile writer), vibration with a relatively small amplitude and high frequency is generated from the main body member to the base member. Therefore, it is particularly effective to employ a viscoelastic body.

  In the gaming machine D1 or D2, the rotating member is formed so as to be displaceable in a radial direction, and one of the base member and the main body member has the main body member disposed at the first position. A gaming machine D3 comprising a facing member that is opposed to the abutting member and is opposed to the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member so as to be able to abut.

  According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D1 or D2, the rotating member is formed to be displaceable in the radial direction, and one of the base member and the main body member has the main body member disposed at the first position. In this state, since the counter member is disposed so as to face the abutting member with the rotating member interposed therebetween, and opposed to the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member so as to come into contact with the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member, When the abutting member is brought into contact with the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member due to rattling, the outer peripheral surface on the opposite side of the rotating member can be brought into contact with the opposing member. That is, the rotating member can be sandwiched between the contact member and the opposing member. Thereby, it is difficult to rotate the rotating member and the relative displacement of the main body member with respect to the base member can be restricted, so that rattling of the main body member with respect to the base member due to the displacement of the displacement member can be suppressed.

  In addition, as a form which can displace the rotating member in the radial direction, for example, a form in which a shaft that rotatably supports the rotating member is formed to be displaceable in a radial direction, and a shaft that rotatably supports the rotating member. The outer diameter of the shaft is smaller than the inner diameter of the insertion hole of the rotating member that receives the shaft, and the outer diameter of the shaft fixed to the rotating member is smaller than one of the insertion holes of the main body member or the base member that receives the shaft. The form etc. which are made are illustrated.

  The gaming machine D3 includes a shaft fixed to one of the base member or the main body member, and the rotating member is formed from an elastic body in a cross-sectional annular shape having a shaft support hole through which the shaft is inserted on the inner peripheral side. The gaming machine D4 is characterized in that the radial displacement of the rotating member is formed by elastic deformation of the elastic body.

  According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine D3, the radial displacement of the rotating member is formed by elastic deformation of the elastic body, so that the base of the main body member accompanying the displacement of the displacement member When the rotating member is sandwiched between the abutting member and the opposing member due to rattling with respect to the member, the contact member and the opposing member are rotated using the elastic recovery force of the rotating member (elastic body). It is possible to easily hold the member more firmly. Thereby, it is difficult to rotate the rotating member and the relative displacement of the main body member with respect to the base member can be restricted, so that rattling of the main body member with respect to the base member accompanying the displacement of the displacement member can be suppressed.

  In addition, as described above, the radial displacement of the rotating member is performed using the elastic deformation of the elastic body, so that the shaft inserted through the shaft support hole of the rotating member can be moved in the radial direction. There is no need to form the shaft, and the shaft can be formed as a shaft fixed to one of the base member and the main body member. Thereby, the structure can be simplified, and the durability can be improved and the product cost can be reduced.

  In any one of the gaming machines D1 to D4, one of the base member and the main body member is provided with a pair of the rotating members, and the pair of rotating members is used when the main body member is disposed at the first position. A gaming machine D5, wherein the gaming machines D5 are arranged side by side at a predetermined interval in the displacement direction.

  According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines D1 to D4, a pair of rotating members are disposed on one of the base member or the main body member, and the main body member of the pair of rotating members is the first one. Since they are arranged side by side with a predetermined interval in the displacement direction when they are arranged at one position, the main body accompanying the displacement of the displacement member while suppressing the driving force required to displace the main body member relative to the base member Shaking of the member with respect to the base member can be effectively suppressed.

  That is, when the contact member is brought into contact with the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member, the relative displacement of the main body member with respect to the base member is restricted, and only one rotating member is contacted with the contact member. If the rotating member rotates, the abutting member may tilt, and the tilting of the abutting member accompanying the rotation of the rotating member is a cause of rattling of the main body member with respect to the base member due to the displacement of the displacing member. Become.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D5, the pair of rotating members are arranged side by side with a predetermined interval, so that the abutting member contacts the pair of rotating members at two positions with a predetermined interval. Therefore, it can contact | abut without rotating a rotation member, and it can suppress that a contact member inclines. As a result, rattling of the main body member with respect to the base member due to the displacement of the displacement member can be effectively suppressed.

  In any one of the gaming machines D1 to D5, the contact member is on the side that receives the rotating member when the main body member is disposed at the first position on the contact surface with which the rotating member is contacted. The gaming machine D6 is characterized in that an inclined surface that is inclined downward as the distance from the contact surface is formed at the end.

  According to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effect exerted by any of the gaming machines D1 to D5, the contact member is arranged when the main body member of the contact surface with which the rotating member is contacted is disposed at the first position. Since an inclined surface that is inclined downward as the distance from the abutment surface is formed at the end portion on the side that receives the rotating member, when the main body member is disposed at the first position, the inclined surface is used, The rotating member can be guided to the contact surface of the contact member. Thereby, the driving force required when arranging the main body member at the first position can be suppressed.

  In any one of the gaming machines D1 to D6, the rotating member is disposed on the base member, and the abutting member is disposed on the main body member.

  According to the gaming machine D7, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines D1 to D6, the rotating member is disposed on the base member and the abutting member is disposed on the main body member, so that the weight is relatively high. Since it is not necessary to dispose a bulky rotating member, the main body member can be reduced in weight, and the driving force required for the displacement of the main body member can be suppressed. Moreover, when suppressing the shakiness with respect to the base member of the main body member accompanying the displacement of the displacement member, the shading can be easily suppressed by reducing the weight of the main body member on the vibration source side.

  In any one of the gaming machines D1 to D7, the displacement member is rotatably disposed on the main body member, and a rotation surface of the displacement member is in contact with the rotation member of the contact member And a rotation axis of the rotating member, respectively, and a gaming machine D8.

  According to the gaming machine D8, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines D1 to D7, the displacement member is rotatably disposed on the main body member, and the rotation plane of the displacement member is the rotation member of the contact member. The driving force required for disposing the main body member at the first position and displacing from the first position to the second position is substantially parallel to the contact surface to be contacted and the rotation axis of the rotating member. It is possible to effectively suppress rattling of the main body member with respect to the base member due to displacement (rotation) of the displacement member.

  That is, since the displacement form of the displacement member is rotation, the main body member tilts the rotation plane of the displacement member due to the precession of the displacement member (movement in which the rotation shaft of the displacement member swings like a circle). It is vibrated in the mode (mode) to be made. Therefore, the rotation plane of the displacement member is substantially parallel to the contact surface of the contact member and the rotation axis of the rotation member, so that the contact surface of the contact member is orthogonal to the rotation axis of the rotation member. It can be pressed against the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member from the direction. As a result, when the main body member is arranged at the first position and when the main body member is displaced from the first position to the second position, the rotation member is rotated, thereby suppressing the driving force necessary for the displacement of the main body member. By the contact of the contact member with the outer peripheral surface of the rotation member, it is possible to effectively suppress rattling of the main body member with respect to the base member accompanying the displacement (rotation) of the displacement member.

  In any one of the gaming machines D1 to D8, the driving device includes a driving unit that generates a driving force, and a transmission unit that transmits the driving force to the main body member and displaces between the first position and the second position, The transmission means includes a rotating member that is rotated about the first axis by the driving force of the driving means, and a crank member having a pin portion that is eccentric from the first axis of the rotating body and protrudes from the rotating body; The pin portion of the crank member has a guide groove for sliding, and the pin portion slides along the guide groove so that the second shaft is rotated about the center of rotation and the main body member is moved along with the rotation. In a state where the main body member is disposed at the first position, a straight line connecting the first shaft of the crank member and the axis of the pin portion is connected to the second shaft of the arm member. Pin of the crank member Gaming machine D9, characterized in that it is substantially orthogonal to the straight line connecting the axis of.

  According to the gaming machine D9, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines D1 to D8, the shakiness of the main body member can be effectively suppressed.

  Here, in the present invention, the displacement direction when the main body member is arranged at the first position and the rotation direction of the rotating member are set to be substantially parallel. Therefore, if the shaky direction of the main body member at the first position is a direction from the first position to the second position or vice versa, the rotating member is likely to rotate with respect to such a direction. The effect of suppressing rattling by the rotating member is hardly exhibited.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D9, in a state where the main body member is disposed at the first position, a straight line connecting the first shaft of the crank member and the axis of the pin portion is connected to the second shaft of the arm member and the crank. Since it is substantially orthogonal to a straight line connecting the axis of the pin portion of the member, even if the main body member attempts to rotate the arm member by the displacement, a force component in the direction of rotating the crank member is not formed ( That is, a dead point) can be formed. That is, shakiness of the main body member in the direction from the first position to the second position or vice versa can be suppressed. Thereby, even if the direction of rattling of the main body member is the direction from the first position to the second position or vice versa (that is, the direction in which the rotating member is easy to rotate), the crank member and the arm member are dead points. By forming, rattling of the main body member can be effectively suppressed.

<About the concept of the invention taking the restriction unit 490 as an example>
A gaming machine having a rotating display device that has a plurality of light emitting means and performs afterimage display by an afterimage effect by blinking the light emitting means according to a rotation position, wherein the rotation display device includes the plurality of light emitting means. Are arranged, a main body member that accommodates the substrate, and a base member that rotatably supports the main body member, and the substrate has a surface on which the light emitting means is mounted on the surface of the main body member. The gaming machine E1 is housed in the main body member in a posture substantially parallel to the rotation axis.

  Here, there is known a gaming machine including a rotation display device that has a plurality of light emitting means (LEDs) and performs afterimage display by an afterimage effect by blinking the light emitting means according to the rotation position (for example, JP, 2015-100385, JP, 2015-053968, etc.). However, in the above-described conventional technology, the posture of the substrate is a posture in which the surface on which the light emitting unit is mounted is orthogonal to the rotation axis (that is, a rotation plane in which the irradiation direction of the light emitting unit is directed to the front side (player side)). Therefore, the outer shape in the front view (viewed in the rotation axis direction) is increased. For this reason, there is a problem in that the visibility on the back side of the rotary display device is hindered in a state where the rotation of the rotary display device is stopped.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E1, the rotary display device includes a substrate on which a plurality of light emitting means are arranged, a main body member that accommodates the substrate, and a base member that rotatably supports the main body member. And the substrate is housed in the main body member in a posture in which the surface on which the light emitting means is mounted is substantially parallel to the rotation axis of the main body member, and thus suppresses the outer shape of the main body member in a front view (viewed in the rotation axis direction) be able to. As a result, in the state where the rotation of the rotary display device (main body member) is stopped, the visibility on the back side of the main body member can be improved.

  In the gaming machine E1, the rotary display device includes a facing member disposed to face a surface of the substrate on which the light emitting means is mounted.

  According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine E1, the rotary display device includes a facing member disposed to face the surface on which the light emitting means of the substrate is mounted, so that the light emitted from the light emitting means is opposed. It can be reflected by the member and emitted to the front side (player side) of the rotary display device. Therefore, even when the substrate is positioned so that the surface on which the light emitting means is mounted is substantially parallel to the rotation axis, the player can visually recognize the light (flashing) of the light emitting means and display an afterimage by the afterimage effect. Can do.

  In the gaming machine E2, the facing member includes a plurality of recesses that are recessed in a surface facing the substrate and extend in a groove shape substantially parallel to the rotation axis of the main body member. The gaming machine E3, wherein the plurality of light emitting means are faced each other.

  According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine E2, the opposing member is recessed on the surface facing the substrate and extends in a groove shape substantially parallel to the rotation axis of the main body member. Since the plurality of light emitting means face each of the plurality of concave portions, the light emitted from the plurality of light emitting means respectively passes through the plurality of concave portions of the opposing member, and the front side of the rotary display device (game) To the person side). That is, since the light emitted from each light emitting means can be emitted in a state of being partitioned by the respective concave portions, it is possible to clearly define the light separation of each light emitting means. As a result, the outline of the afterimage display by the afterimage effect can be clarified.

  In the gaming machine E3, the concave portion of the facing member includes an end partition wall that partitions an end portion opposite to the front side of the rotary display device.

  According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E3, the concave portion of the facing member includes the end partition wall that partitions the end opposite to the front side of the rotary display device, so that light is emitted from the light emitting means. The light applied to the concave portion of the opposing member can be reflected by the end partition wall and emitted to the front side (player side) of the rotary display device. Therefore, the intensity of afterimage display light due to the afterimage effect can be increased.

  In the gaming machine E4, the end partition wall of the recess is inclined in a direction away from the light emitting means toward the front side of the rotary display device, and the light emitting means is at a position facing the end partition wall of the recess. A gaming machine E5 that is arranged.

  According to the gaming machine E5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E4, the end partition wall of the recess is inclined in a direction away from the light emitting means toward the front side of the rotary display device. Since it is disposed at a position facing the wall, the light emitted from the light emitting means can be applied to the end partition wall, so that stronger light can be emitted to the front side (player side) of the rotary display device. it can. Therefore, the intensity of afterimage display light due to the afterimage effect can be increased.

  In any one of the gaming machines E3 to E5, a gaming machine E6 is characterized in that a part of the inner surface of the concave portion of the facing member is formed as an uneven surface.

  According to the gaming machine E6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines E3 to E5, the concave portion of the opposing member is formed with a part of its inner surface as an uneven surface, so that the light emitted from the light emitting means is The light can be emitted to the front side (player side) of the rotary display device in a state of being irregularly reflected by the uneven surface and uniformly dispersed. That is, it can suppress that the light radiate | emitted from the opening of a recessed part is visually recognized in the state biased to a part of the opening.

  In addition, the unevenness | corrugation of an uneven surface may be a surface which consists only of a convex (protrusion), and may be a surface which consists only of a concave (dent). The convex or concave may be extended as a strip or a groove. Further, the convex and concave cross-sectional shapes may be any of a circle, an ellipse, a polygon, and a combination of these. That is, as long as a portion higher than the reference position and a portion lower than the reference position are formed, a plurality of portions (surfaces) capable of reflecting light are formed, and irregular reflection is possible, the shape of the unevenness is arbitrary.

  In the gaming machine E6, the uneven surface is not formed in a predetermined range from an end portion on the front side of the rotary display device among the inner surfaces of the concave portions of the opposing member, and the inner surface of the predetermined range is The gaming machine E7 is formed as a smoother surface than the uneven surface.

  According to the gaming machine E7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E6, the uneven surface is not formed in a predetermined range from the front side end of the rotary display device among the inner surfaces of the recesses of the opposing member, Since the inner surface of the predetermined range is formed as a smoother surface than the concavo-convex surface, light can be easily emitted toward the front side (player side) of the rotary display device, and afterimage display by the afterimage effect can be achieved. The intensity of light can be increased. That is, when a concavo-convex surface is formed within a predetermined range from the front side end of the concave portion of the opposing member, light is irregularly reflected by the concavo-convex surface, and the front side of the rotary display device ( The amount of light emitted toward the player side) is reduced, and the inner surface of the predetermined range is made smoother than the concavo-convex surface, thereby suppressing irregular reflection and the front side of the rotary display device. The light toward (player side) can be increased.

  In the gaming machine E7, the predetermined range in which the uneven surface is not formed has a cross-sectional area of the inner surface that increases toward the front end of the rotary display device. E8.

  According to the gaming machine E8, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine E7, the predetermined area where the uneven surface is not formed increases the cross-sectional area of the inner surface toward the front end of the rotary display device. Therefore, the light emitted toward the front side (player side) of the rotary display device can be widened. That is, the area visually recognized as the light emitting region can be larger than the area of the light emitting surface (irradiation surface) of the light emitting means. Therefore, the light emitting means can be reduced in size.

  In any one of the gaming machines E6 to E8, the concave portions of the facing members are arranged in a row, and the concave and convex surfaces arranged radially away from the rotation axis of the main body member, The gaming machine E9 is characterized in that the length of the main body member in the direction along the rotation axis is increased.

  According to the gaming machine E9, in addition to the effects exerted by any of the gaming machines E6 to E8, the concave portion of the opposing member is closer to the concave and convex surface disposed radially outward from the rotation axis of the main body member. Since the length dimension in the direction along the rotation axis of the member is increased, the lightness (light brightness) of each of the plurality of recesses can be made uniform.

  That is, in the rotary display device, the displacement speed (peripheral speed) increases from the rotation axis (rotation center) to the outer side in the radial direction. Therefore, when the light emitting means arranged in a row emit light with the same brightness, The light emitted from the light emitting means closer to the axis appears to be brighter (brighter) than the light emitted from the light emitting means farther from the rotation axis (outward in the radial direction).

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E9, the concave and convex surfaces disposed away from the rotation axis of the main body member in the radial direction increase the length dimension along the rotation axis of the main body member. The concave portion (light emitting means) that is spaced radially outward from the rotation axis of the main body member increases the irregular reflection by the uneven surface (that is, reduces the proportion of light directly visible to the player from the light emitting means). It can be visually recognized as light with high brightness. As a result, it is possible to suppress the difference in brightness as viewed with eyes at the radial positions, and to make the brightness (light brightness) uniform.

  In any one of the gaming machines E3 to E9, a cover member that is covered with a front end portion of the rotary display device in the concave portion of the facing member and that is formed of a light transmissive material is provided. The gaming machine E10 is characterized in that an uneven surface is formed at least in a region facing the end of the recess.

  According to the gaming machine E10, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines E3 to E9, a cover that is formed on the front end of the rotary display device in the concave portion of the opposing member and is formed from a light transmissive material. The cover member is provided with a concavo-convex surface at least in a region facing the end of the concave portion, and after irregularly reflecting light by the concavo-convex surface, the front side (player side) of the rotary display device ). That is, since the emitted light can be broadened, the area visually recognized as the light emitting region can be made larger than the area of the light emitting surface (irradiated surface) of the light emitting means. Therefore, the light emitting means can be reduced in size.

  In any one of the gaming machines E3 to E10, a plate-like interposed member is provided between the substrate and the opposing member, and the interposed member includes the plurality of light emitting means, the plurality of recessed portions, and the like. A gaming machine E11, comprising a through-hole formed at a position to pass through.

  According to the gaming machine E11, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines E3 to E10, the gaming machine E11 includes a plate-like interposed member interposed between the substrate and the opposing member, and the interposed member includes a plurality of interposed members. Since a through-hole is formed at a position where the light emitting means and the plurality of concave portions are passed through, the light of each light emitting means is reliably incident on the corresponding concave portion, and is prevented from entering (leaking) adjacent concave portions. it can. As a result, the light emitted from each light emitting means can be emitted only from the corresponding concave portion, and the outer shape of the afterimage display by the afterimage effect can be clarified.

  In addition, according to the gaming machine E11, the structure that allows the light of the light emitting means to enter the corresponding recess through the through hole is formed from the two members of the opposing member and the interposed member. The structure can be simplified as compared with the case where it is constituted by members. Therefore, the product cost can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine E11, the intervention member includes a seat portion that contacts the light emitting means, and the through hole is formed in the seat portion.

  According to the gaming machine E12, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine E11, the interposed member includes a seat portion that comes into contact with the light emitting means, and the through hole is formed in the seat portion. Can be easily incident on the through hole, and leakage from the through hole can be suppressed. As a result, the intensity of the afterimage display light due to the afterimage effect can be increased. Further, since the seat portion is brought into contact with the light emitting means, it is possible to suppress the light of the adjacent light emitting means from being incident on the through-hole, so that the outer shape of the afterimage display by the afterimage effect can be clarified.

  In the gaming machine E12, the irradiation surface of the light emitting means is formed in a circular shape when viewed from the front, and the through hole is formed in a cross-sectional circle having an inner diameter substantially the same as the outer diameter of the irradiation surface. Are arranged concentrically, a gaming machine E13.

  According to the gaming machine E13, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E12, the irradiation surface of the light emitting means is formed in a circular shape when viewed from the front, and the through hole is formed in a circular cross section having an inner diameter substantially the same as the outer diameter of the irradiation surface. Since the irradiation surface and the through hole are formed concentrically, the light emitted from the light emitting means can be efficiently incident on the recess through the through hole.

  In the gaming machine E13, the inner diameter of the through hole is increased from the substrate side toward the opposing member.

  According to the gaming machine E14, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E13, the inner diameter of the through hole is increased from the substrate side toward the opposing member, so that the light emitted from the light emitting means is passed through the through hole. It can be made to enter efficiently into a crevice via. Moreover, since the area contact | abutted to the light emission means can be ensured, it can suppress that the light of each light emission means leaks out of a through-hole. As a result, the intensity of the afterimage display light due to the afterimage effect can be increased.

  In any one of the gaming machines E12 to E14, the seat portion is formed so as to protrude from a surface of the interposed member facing the substrate.

  According to the gaming machine E15, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines E12 to E14, the seat portion is formed to protrude from the surface of the interposed member that faces the substrate. A space can be formed between the member and the heat generated by the operation of the light emitting means can be radiated.

  In the gaming machine E15, the interposition member includes a groove-like groove portion that is recessed in a surface facing the substrate and extends along a base portion of the seat portion.

  According to the gaming machine E16, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E15, the opposing member includes a groove-like groove that is recessed in the surface facing the substrate and extends along the base of the seat. The heat dissipation effect can be enhanced while ensuring the rigidity of the interposed member. That is, by forming a groove-like groove portion extending along the base portion of the seat portion, the region recessed in the interposed member is minimized, and the rigidity of the interposed member is ensured while the light emitting means is secured. The space can be expanded to a portion where heat generated by the operation is particularly concentrated, and the heat dissipation effect can be enhanced.

  In the gaming machine E15 or E16, the seat is connected to the adjacent seat and the outer peripheral surfaces of each other.

  According to the gaming machine E17, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E15 or E16, the seat portion is connected to the adjacent seat portion and the outer peripheral surfaces of each other, so that the rigidity of the interposed member can be increased.

  In this case, the outer peripheral surface of the seat part may be circular, and the adjacent seat part and the outer peripheral surfaces may be connected to each other. As a result, since the outer shape of the group in which the plurality of seats are connected is formed in an uneven shape, the rigidity of the interposed member is increased by using the unevenness of the outer shape while securing a space and enhancing the heat dissipation effect. Can increase.

<Concept of Invention with Distribution Device 4700 as an Example>
In a gaming machine comprising: a passage member that forms a passage through which a ball can pass; and first privilege granting means that is disposed downstream of the passage member and that grants a predetermined privilege as the ball passes. An opening is formed in the side wall of the passage member on the upstream side of the first privilege granting unit so that a ball can pass through the opening, and a ball that has flowed out of the opening into the game area is formed so as to pass therethrough. A gaming machine F1, comprising: a second privilege granting means for granting a predetermined privilege as the game passes.

  Here, a gaming machine including a passage member that forms a passage through which a ball can pass is known (for example, JP-A-2015-97764). A sensor device that detects the passage of the sphere of the passage member is disposed on the downstream side of the passage member. When the passage of the sphere is detected by the sensor device, a predetermined privilege is given. However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the passage member only has a function of guiding the sphere toward the downstream side (sensor device), and the space required for the arrangement is increased, while the game is provided with interest. There was a problem that it was difficult to do.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine F1, when the ball guided by the passage member passes through the first privilege granting means, a predetermined privilege is given by the first privilege granting means. In this case, an opening is formed in the side wall of the passage member on the upstream side of the first privilege granting unit so that the ball can pass through, and a ball that has flowed out from the opening to the game area is formed to be able to pass through. And a second privilege granting means for granting a predetermined privilege as the ball passes, so that a form in which the ball flows out from the opening to the game area can be formed in the middle of guiding the passage member. Can pass a 2nd privilege provision means, a 2nd privilege provision means can provide a predetermined | prescribed privilege. Thereby, not only the form in which the ball guided by the passage member passes through the first privilege giving means, but also the form that flows out from the opening to the game area, and further, the outflowed ball passes through the second privilege giving means. Forms can be formed and entertainment can be given to games.

  The second privilege granting means may be disposed at a position where all of the balls that have flowed out from the opening to the gaming area can be received, or depending on the state of the balls that have flowed out from the opening into the gaming area. Some spheres may be received and some spheres may not be received.

  Further, the privilege granted by the first privilege granting unit and the privilege granted by the second privilege granting unit may be the same privilege or different privileges.

  In the gaming machine F1, the passage member includes a bent portion formed in a part of the passage member, and the opening is formed in a side wall of the bent portion.

  Here, by forming the bent portion in a part of the passage member, the direction in which the sphere is sent can be changed, so that the degree of freedom in layout can be increased. However, if a bent portion is formed in a part of the passage member, the flow of the sphere in the bent portion is likely to stagnate. Therefore, when passing through the bent part in a state where a plurality of spheres are connected, the sphere following the preceding sphere catches up, and the sphere following the preceding sphere presses against the side wall so that both cannot roll. There was a problem that ball clogging occurred.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine F2, since the passage member has an opening formed in the side wall of the bent portion, when passing through the bent portion in a state where a plurality of spheres are connected, the passage member is behind the preceding sphere. Even if the moving ball catches up, it is difficult to press the preceding ball against the side wall, and the rolling of both can be easily continued. As a result, the occurrence of ball clogging can be suppressed.

  The bent portion is formed by a first portion of the passage member and a second portion that is connected to the downstream side of the first portion and has a direction in which the passing direction of the sphere is different. Means the range. In this case, each of the first portion and the second portion may be a linearly extending passage, a curvedly extending passage, or these. It may be a passage with a combination of

  The gaming machine F2 includes a game board in which a game area is formed on the front side, and at least a portion of the bent portion of the passage member in which the opening is formed is disposed on the front side of the game board. Characteristic gaming machine F3.

  According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F2, at least a portion of the bent portion of the passage member where the opening is formed is disposed on the front side of the game board. When a ball clogging occurs, by opening the glass plate, the ball clogged in the bent portion can be accessed from the opening on the front side of the game board. Therefore, it is possible to improve the workability of the work for eliminating the ball clogging. Further, when the game ball flows out from the opening of the passage member to the game area, it is possible to make the player visually recognize the outflow mode, so that the interest of the game can be enhanced.

  In gaming machine F3, gaming machine F4 is characterized in that at least the entrance for the second privilege grant means is arranged on the front side of the gaming board.

  According to the gaming machine F4, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine F3, at least the entrance of the second privilege means is arranged on the front side of the gaming board, so that the gaming ball flows out from the opening of the passage member to the gaming area. In doing so, the player can visually recognize the manner in which the spilled ball enters the entrance of the second privilege granting means, so that the interest of the game can be enhanced.

  In any one of the gaming machines F1 to F4, the second privilege granting means is connected to the passage member, and a connection passage is provided for guiding the ball that has passed through the second privilege granting means to the passage member. The gaming machine F5 is connected to the passage member on the upstream side of the first privilege granting means.

  According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines F1 to F4, the second privilege granting means is connected to the passage member, and a connection passage is provided for guiding the ball that has passed through the second privilege granting means to the passage member. The connecting passage is connected to the passage member on the upstream side of the first privilege giving means, so that the ball flows out from the opening to the game area while the passage member is being guided, When the 2 privilege grant means passes, the ball can be guided to the passage member through the connection passage, and the first privilege grant means can be passed. Therefore, in addition to the grant of the privilege by the 2nd privilege grant means, the grant of the privilege by a 1st privilege grant means can also be performed, and the interest of a game can be raised.

  In any one of the gaming machines F1 to F5, there is provided a distribution unit that alternately distributes the balls that have entered the ball into one and the other, and the passage members are provided in a pair, and one of the pair of passage members is the vibration member. A gaming machine F6 connected to one of the distribution means and the other connected to the other of the distribution means.

  According to the gaming machine F6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines F1 to F5, the gaming machine F6 includes sorting means that alternately distributes the balls that have entered the ball to one and the other, and a pair of passage members are provided, Since one of the passage members is connected to one of the distribution means and the other is connected to the other of the distribution means, it is possible to make the balls enter the passage member one by one. That is, since it is possible to suppress a plurality of balls from entering the passage member in a row, clogging of the balls in the passage member can be suppressed.

  One of the gaming machines A1 to A10, B1 to B10, C1 to C9, D1 to D9, E1 to E17, and F1 to F6, the gaming machine is a slot machine. Above all, the basic configuration of the slot machine is “equipped with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and for operating the starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. The game machine is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the confirmed identification information is specific identification information. In this case, examples of the game media include coins and medals.

  One of the gaming machines A1 to A10, B1 to B10, C1 to C9, D1 to D9, E1 to E17, and F1 to F6, the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Above all, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and a ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in an operation port disposed at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning (or passing through the operating port), the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is determined and stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) disposed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner so that a ball can be won, and a value corresponding to the number of winnings is obtained. Examples include those to which values (including data written on magnetic cards as well as premium balls) are given.

  In any of the gaming machines A1 to A10, B1 to B10, C1 to C9, D1 to D9, E1 to E17, and F1 to F6, the gaming machine is a fusion of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Characteristic gaming machine K3. Among them, the basic configuration of the merged gaming machine includes “a variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to the operation of the identification information, the change of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. Special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stoppage is specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium, and the identification information The game machine is configured such that a predetermined number of balls are required at the start of the dynamic display, and a large number of balls are paid out when the special gaming state occurs.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
13 game board 81 3rd symbol display device (liquid crystal display device)
416 Shaft support (second shaft)
417 Protrusion (first axis)
430 Displacement member (arm member)
431 Drive side sliding hole (sliding groove)
441 Drive motor (drive means)
443 Transmission gear (crank member)
443a Protrusion (pin part)
450 Decoration member (displacement member)
452 Front base (main body member)
452h Contact surface (contact member)
491c bulging part (opposing member)
492 Roller member (Rotating member)
492b Shaft (shaft)
500 Rotating unit (Rotating display device)
510 Upper surface base (part of body member)
512, 522 Ventilation hole (through hole)
520 Lower surface base (part of body member)
531 Base material (base)
532 LED (light emitting means)
540 Intermediate plate (intermediate member)
543 Irradiation hole (through hole)
544 Irradiation Restriction Department (seat)
546 Groove 550 Front cover (transmission part, cover member)
560 Reflector (opposing member)
563a Inclined surface (opposing member)
570 Rotation transmission unit (base member, shaft member)
610 frame (center frame)
621 Cover member (front member)
621a First part 621b Second part 630 Sensor (sensor device)
640a Second winning device (winning device)
740 Passage member (bending member)
742 Guide part (inclined surface)
743 Lower protrusion (bent part)
744 opening KR1 first pitching path (vertical passage)
KR2 Second pitching path (extended path)
KR3 3rd pitching route (part of inclined passage)
KR4 4th pitching route (part of inclined passage)

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

  In gaming machines such as pachinko machines, gaming machines having a plurality of light emitting means (LEDs) and having a rotation display device that displays an afterimage by an afterimage effect by blinking the light emitting means according to the rotation position are known. (Patent Documents 1 and 2).

Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2015-100385 Japanese Patent Laying-Open No. 2015-053968

  However, the gaming machine described above has a problem that it is difficult to cool the light emitting means when the light emitting means is accommodated in the main body member.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of cooling the heat generated when the light emitting means operates.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 includes a rotating display device that has a plurality of light emitting means and performs afterimage display by an afterimage effect by blinking the light emitting means according to the rotational position. The rotary display device includes a substrate on which the plurality of light emitting means are arranged, a main body member that accommodates the substrate, and a base member that pivotally supports the main body member, The main body member forms a side surface facing the rotation direction of the main body member, and a pair of side wall portions that accommodates the substrate between the opposite sides, and a transmission that is disposed on the front side of the main body member and transmits light of the light emitting means. and parts, and a plurality of through holes are formed through the side wall portion includes a rear side opposite to the transmissive portion is formed in an open shape, front view shape of said body member, said pair of side walls Before the dimension in the first direction where the parts face each other Dimension of the second direction perpendicular to the first direction is larger, the front side of the body member, Ru is formed so as to be positioned on the back side as the second axial end side.

  According to the gaming machine of the first aspect, the heat generated when the light emitting means operates can be cooled.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in a 1st embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is a front perspective view of an operation unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of a vertical displacement unit. It is a rear view of a vertical displacement unit. It is a front perspective view of a vertical displacement unit. It is a back perspective view of an up-and-down displacement unit. It is a front perspective view of a vertical displacement unit. It is a back perspective view of an up-and-down displacement unit. (A) is a front view of a vertical displacement unit, (b) is a rear view of the vertical displacement unit. (A) is a front view of a vertical displacement unit, (b) is a rear view of the vertical displacement unit. (A) is a front view of a vertical displacement unit, (b) is a rear view of the vertical displacement unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a control unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a roller member. (A) is a side view of a restriction unit, (b) is a rear view of the restriction unit, and (c) is a cross-sectional view of the restriction unit taken along line XXc-XXc in FIG. 20 (b). It is a front view of the up-and-down displacement unit in the 1st position. (A) is an enlarged view of the vertical displacement unit in the XXII part of FIG. 21, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the vertical displacement unit along the line XXIIb-XXIIb of FIG. 22 (a). (A) to (c) is a partially enlarged front view of the vertical displacement unit. (A) is sectional drawing of the vertical displacement unit in the XXIVa-XXIVa line of Fig.23 (a), (b) is sectional drawing of the vertical displacement unit in the XXIVb-XXIVb line of Fig.23 (b), (C) is sectional drawing of the vertical displacement unit in the XXIVc-XXIVc line | wire of FIG.23 (c). It is a disassembled front perspective view of a decorative member. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a decorative member. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a rotation unit. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a rotation unit. (A) is a top view of the rotation unit, (b) is a front view of the rotation unit in the XXIXb direction view of FIG. 29 (a), and (c) is XXIXc-XXIXc of FIG. 29 (a). It is sectional drawing of the rotation unit in a line. (A) is a top view of an intermediate member, (b) is sectional drawing of the intermediate member in the XXXb-XXXb line | wire of Fig.30 (a). (A) is a front view of a front cover, (b) is the elements on larger scale of the front cover in the XXXIB-XXXIb line | wire of Fig.31 (a). (A) is a top view of a reflector, (b) is the elements on larger scale of the reflector in the XXXIIb-XXXIIb line | wire of Fig.32 (a). (A) is a top view of a rotation unit, FIG.33 (b) is sectional drawing of the rotation unit in the XXXIIIb-XXXIIIb line | wire of (a). (A) And (b) is the elements on larger scale of the rotation unit in the XXXIV section of Drawing 33 (b). (A) And (b) is a front view of a rotation unit. (A) And (b) is a top view of a rotation unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a center frame. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a center frame. (A) is a front view of a center frame, (b) is sectional drawing of the center frame in the XXXIXb-XXXIXb line | wire of Fig.39 (a). (A) is sectional drawing of the center frame in the XLa-XLa line | wire of Fig.39 (a), (b) is sectional drawing of the center frame in the XLb-XLb line | wire of Fig.39 (a). (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of a rotation unit and a center frame. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a distribution apparatus. It is a partial expanded front view of a distribution apparatus. It is sectional drawing of the distribution apparatus in the XLIV-XLIV line | wire of FIG. (A) is sectional drawing of the distribution apparatus in the XLVa-XLVa line of FIG. 43, (b) is sectional drawing of the distribution apparatus in the XLVb-XLVb line of FIG. 45 (a), (c) is a figure. It is sectional drawing of the distribution apparatus in 43 XLVc-XLVc line, (d) is sectional drawing of the distribution apparatus in the XLVd-XLVd line of FIG. (A) is sectional drawing of a distribution apparatus, (b) is sectional drawing of a distribution apparatus. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a light emission decoration unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of the control unit in 2nd Embodiment. (A) is a side view of the regulation unit, (b) is a rear view of the regulation unit, and (c) is a cross-sectional view of the regulation unit along the XLIXc-XLIXc line in FIG. 49 (b). (A) to (c) are cross-sectional views of the vertical displacement unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of the distribution apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. It is a partial expanded front view of a distribution apparatus. (A) is sectional drawing of the distribution apparatus in the LIIIa-LIIIa line of FIG. 52, (b) is sectional drawing of the distribution apparatus in the LIIIb-LIIIb line of FIG.52 (b). (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of a distribution apparatus. (A) is a front view of the distribution apparatus in 4th Embodiment, (b) is sectional drawing of the distribution apparatus in the LVb-LVb line | wire of FIG. 55 (a), (c) is FIG. It is sectional drawing of the distribution apparatus in the LVc-LVc line | wire of b). It is sectional drawing of the center frame 600 as a modification.

  Embodiments of the present invention will be described below with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIGS. 1 to 47, as a first embodiment, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 1 will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 1 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 1, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 1.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 1 includes an outer frame 2 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer shape 2 that is formed in substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 2. And an inner frame 4 supported to be openable and closable. In order to support the inner frame 4, the outer frame 2 is provided with metal hinges 18 at two positions on the left and right of the front view (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinges 18 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 4 is supported so as to be openable and closable to the front front side.

  A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63, 64, and the like is detachably mounted on the inner frame 4 from the back side. A ball ball game is played when a ball (game ball) flows down the front of the game board 13. The inner frame 4 has a ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that launches a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launch unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 4, a front door 5 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower dish unit 15 that covers the lower side thereof are provided. In order to support the front door 5 and the lower tray unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to two places on the left and right sides of the front view (see FIG. 1), and the front door is provided with the side on which the hinges 19 are provided as an opening / closing axis. 5 and the lower pan unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front front side. The locking of the inner frame 4 and the locking of the front door 5 are respectively released by inserting a dedicated key into the key hole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front door 5 is an assembly of decorative resin parts, electrical parts, and the like, and a window portion 5c that is formed in an approximately elliptical shape is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two sheet glasses 8 is disposed on the back side of the front door 5, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 1 through the glass unit 16.

  On the front door 5, an upper plate 17 that stores balls is formed in a substantially box shape that protrudes forward and has an open upper surface, and prize balls and rental balls are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the sphere thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 4). A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player when, for example, changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or changing the contents of the effect of super reach. The

  The front door 5 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front door (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means play a role of enhancing the effect of the game during the game by changing or controlling the light emission mode by turning on or blinking according to the change of the gaming state at the time of big hit or predetermined reach. On the periphery of the window portion 5c, there are provided electric decoration portions 29 to 33 incorporating light emitting means such as LEDs. In the pachinko machine 1, these lighting parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and the lighting parts 29 to 33 are turned on by lighting or blinking of the built-in LEDs at the time of jackpots or reach effects. Alternatively, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is being hit or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left part of the front door 5 as viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), a light-emitting means such as an LED is incorporated, and a display lamp 34 is provided that can display when a prize ball is being paid out and when an error occurs.

  Further, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front door 5 can be visually recognized on the lower side of the right-side electric decoration part 32, and an adhering space K1 (see FIG. 2) can be viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 1. In addition, in the pachinko machine 1, a plated member 36 made of ABS resin that is chrome-plated is attached to the area around the electric decoration parts 29 to 33 in order to bring out more gorgeousness.

  A ball rental operation unit 40 is disposed below the window 5c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated in a state where a bill or a card is inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 1, Loans are made. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the remaining amount information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED is lit to display the remaining amount as the remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as there is a remaining amount on the card or the like. Is done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted into the card unit. In addition, in a pachinko machine in which a ball is lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without using a card unit, a so-called cash machine does not require the ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 It is also possible to add a decorative seal or the like to the installation portion of the parts so that the component configuration is common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower plate unit 15 located on the lower side of the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing a ball that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape having an open upper surface. Yes. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 that is operated by a player to drive a ball into the front surface of the game board 13 is disposed.

  Inside the operation handle 51, a touch sensor 51a for permitting driving of the ball launch unit 112a, a launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball during the pressing operation, and a rotation of the operation handle 51. A variable resistor (not shown) that detects the amount of movement (rotation position) based on a change in electrical resistance is incorporated. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the amount of rotation operation. The resistance value of the variable resistor A ball is fired with a strength corresponding to (shooting strength), and the ball is driven into the front surface of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the player's operation. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are turned off.

  In the lower part of the front of the lower plate 50, a ball removal lever 52 is provided for operating when the balls stored in the lower plate 50 are discharged downward. The ball removal lever 52 is always urged in the right direction. By sliding the ball release lever 52 in the left direction against the urge, the bottom opening formed in the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. A ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removal lever 52 is normally performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as “a thousand box”) for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. As described above, the operation handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 includes a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, a large number of nails (not shown) for ball guidance, a windmill, rails 76 and 77, and a general prize. The opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, the variable winning device 65, the first through gates 66 and 67, the variable display device unit 80, and the like are assembled, and the peripheral portion thereof is the inner frame 4 (FIG. 1). (See below). The base plate 60 is made of wood on which thin plate materials are laminated, and is formed so that various structures disposed on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side cannot be seen by the player. The general winning port 63, the first winning port 64, the second winning port 640, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are disposed in a through hole formed in the base plate 60 by router processing. It is fixed from the front side with a tapping screw or the like.

  The front center portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 4 through the window portion 5c (see FIG. 1) of the front door 5. The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below mainly with reference to FIG.

  An outer rail 77 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and the strip-shaped metal plate is located at an inner position of the outer rail 77 in the same manner as the outer rail 77. The arc-shaped inner rail 76 formed in the above is planted. The outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rail 76 and the outer rail 77, and the front and rear are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is an area formed on the front surface of the game board 13 and defined by two rails 76 and 77 and a resin outer edge member 73 that connects the rails (a winning opening is provided and fired). Area where the falling sphere flows).

  The two rails 76 and 77 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the front end portion of the inner rail 76 (the upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide path again. Is done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 77 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the sphere, and the ball launched at a predetermined momentum or more hits the return rubber 69 and gains momentum. Is bounced back to the center while being attenuated.

  A first symbol display device 37A, 37B including a plurality of LEDs serving as light emitting means and a 7-segment display is disposed in the lower left portion of the game area when viewed from the front (lower left portion in FIG. 2). The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the gaming state of the pachinko machine 1. In the present embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37 </ b> A and 37 </ b> B are configured to be selectively used depending on whether the ball has won the first prize opening 64 or the second prize opening 640. Specifically, when the ball wins the first winning opening 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, while when the ball wins the second winning opening 640, the first symbol display device 37A operates. The symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

  In addition, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B indicate, by means of LEDs, whether the pachinko machine 1 is in a certain change, in a short time, or in a normal state by a lighting state, or whether a pachinko machine 1 is changing or not by a lighting state. , Indicating whether the stop symbol is a symbol corresponding to a probable jackpot, a symbol corresponding to a normal jackpot, or a symbol that is out of place by a lighting state, indicating the number of held balls by a lighting state, and a 7-segment display device, Displays numbers and errors. The plurality of LEDs are configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of the respective LEDs are different, and the combination of the emission colors may suggest various gaming states of the pachinko machine 1 with a small number of LEDs. it can.

  In the present pachinko machine 1, a lottery is performed when there is a winning in either the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 640. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 1 determines whether or not it is a big hit (big hit lottery), and also determines the big hit type if it is determined to be a big hit. As the jackpot type determined here, 15R probability variation jackpot, 4R probability variation jackpot, and 15R normal jackpot are prepared. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B not only indicate whether or not the lottery result is a jackpot as a stop symbol after the end of the variation, but if it is a jackpot, a symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is displayed. .

  Here, the “15R probability variation jackpot” is a probability variation jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to a high probability state after a jackpot of 15 rounds, and “4R probability variation jackpot” is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of four. It is a probabilistic jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after. In addition, “15R normal jackpot” is a jackpot that shifts to a low probability state after the maximum number of rounds of 15 rounds and hits a short time during a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations). is there.

  In addition, the “high probability state” means a state in which the jackpot probability thereafter increases as an added value after the jackpot ends, that is, when the probability change is in progress (probability change), in other words, a game that easily shifts to the special game state. It is a state of. The high probability state (during probability change) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the hit probability of the second symbol, which will be described later, is increased and the ball is likely to win the second winning opening 640. The “low probability state” refers to a time when the probability of jackpot change is not occurring, and a state where the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state where the jackpot probability is lower than that at the time of probability change. The short time state (short time medium) of the “low probability state” means that the jackpot probability is a normal state, and the jackpot probability remains as it is, and only the hit probability of the second symbol is increased, and the second prize opening 640 is obtained. It means the state of the game where the ball is easy to win. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 1 is in a normal state, it is a game state in which neither the probability change nor the time is short (the state where neither the big hit probability nor the second symbol hit probability has been increased).

  During probability change and short time, not only does the probability of winning the second symbol increase, but also the time for opening the first electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is changed, which is longer than normal. Time is set. When the first electric combination 640a is in the opened state (open state), the second prize opening 640 is compared with the case where the first electric combination 640a is in the closed state (closed state). The ball is ready to win. Therefore, during the probability change or the short time, it becomes easy for the ball to win the second winning opening 640, and the number of jackpot lotteries can be increased.

  In addition, during the probability change or during the short time, instead of changing the opening time of the first electric accessory 640a attached to the second prize opening 640, or in addition to changing the opening time, Thus, the number of times the first electric accessory 640a is opened may be changed to be larger than normal. In addition, the probability of winning the second symbol is not changed during the probability change or in the short time, and the first electric accessory is determined at the time when the first electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is opened and once. It is good also as what changes at least one of the frequency | count that 640a opens. In addition, during the time of probability change or during a short time, the first electric combination 640a and the second electric combination 82 are opened at the time when the first electric combination 640a attached to the second prize opening 640 is opened or once. The number of hits may not be performed, and only the probability of hitting the second symbol may be changed so as to increase compared to the normal rate.

  The game area is provided with a plurality of general winning ports 63 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as winning balls when the balls win. In addition, a variable display device unit 80 is disposed in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is synchronized with the variable display on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, triggered by any one of the first winning port 64 and the second winning port 640 (starting winning) as a trigger. The 3rd symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply abbreviated as “display device”) for displaying the symbols in a variable manner, and the 2nd symbol in a variable manner with the passage of the first through gates 66 and 67 as a trigger. And a second symbol display device (not shown) composed of LEDs.

  The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a center frame 600 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81. The third symbol display device 81 can be visually recognized from the opening opened in the center of the center frame 600.

  The third symbol display device 81 is constituted by a large 9-inch liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4). One symbol row is displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbol). These third symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol column, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It is like that. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the game state is displayed on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B in accordance with the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4). The decorative display according to the display of the symbol display devices 37A and 37B is performed. Instead of the display device, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using, for example, a reel.

  Each time the sphere passes through the first through gates 66 and 67, the second symbol display device displays the symbol “◯” and the symbol “X” as a display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) for a predetermined time. The variable display is alternately turned on. In the pachinko machine 1, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the first through gates 66 and 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if the winning symbol is a winning symbol, the symbol “◯” is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation of the second symbol is displayed. Further, if the winning lottery results, the symbol of “x” is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation of the third symbol is displayed.

  In the pachinko machine 1, when the variable display on the second symbol display device stops at a predetermined symbol (in this embodiment, a symbol “◯”), the first electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is It is configured to be activated (opened) for a predetermined time.

  The time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set to be shorter during the probability change or during the shorter time than when the game state is normal. As a result, during the probability change and during the time reduction, since the variation display of the second symbol is performed in a short time, the winning lottery can be performed more than during normal. Therefore, since the chances for winning in the winning lottery increase, the player can be given many opportunities for the first electric accessory 640a of the second winning opening 640 to be in an open state. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the ball to win the second winning opening 640 during the probability change and during the short time.

  In addition, during the probability change or in the short time, the second winning a prize opening during the probability change or in the short time can also be achieved by other methods such as increasing the probability of winning during the time of the change or increasing the number of times the first electric accessory 640a is released per time. When it is in a state in which a ball is likely to enter the 640 and the third winning opening, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, when the time required for displaying the variation of the second symbol is set shorter than normal during probability change or short time, the winning probability may be constant regardless of the gaming state, The opening time and the number of opening times of the first electric accessory 640a may be constant regardless of the gaming state.

  The first through gates 66 and 67 are assembled to the game board in areas on both sides of the variable display device unit 80. The first through gates 66 and 67 are configured such that, of the balls launched on the game board, a part of the balls flowing down the game board can pass therethrough. When the ball passes through the first through gates 66 and 67, the second symbol winning lottery is performed. After winning the lottery, the 2nd symbol display device displays a variation, and if the winning lottery results, the symbol “○” is displayed as the variable display stop symbol, and the winning lottery result may be off For example, the symbol “x” is displayed as the stop symbol of the variable display.

  The total number of passes of the first through gates 66 and 67 of the sphere is reserved up to a total of four times, and the number of the reserved balls is displayed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B described above and the second symbol hold lamp (see FIG. (Not shown) is also lit. Four second symbol holding lamps are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

  In addition, the variable display of the second symbol is performed by switching on and off of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol. A part of the symbol display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. In addition, the maximum number of balls held for the passage of the first through gates 66 and 67 is not limited to 4 times, but is set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Also good. Further, the number of through gates to be assembled is not limited to two, and may be three or more. Further, the assembly position of the through gate is not limited to the left and right sides of the variable display device unit 80, and may be, for example, below the variable display device unit 80. In addition, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second symbol hold lamp may not perform lighting display.

  Below the variable display unit 80, a first winning port 64 through which a ball can win is disposed. When a ball wins the first winning port 64, a first winning port switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller 110 is caused by the first winning port switch being turned on. A jackpot lottery is made (see FIG. 4), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37A.

  On the other hand, a second winning port 640 through which a ball can win is disposed below the first winning port 64 in front view. When a ball wins the second winning port 640, a second winning port switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller 110 ( (See FIG. 4), the jackpot lottery is made, and the display corresponding to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37B.

  In addition, each of the first winning port 64 and the second winning port 640 is also one of the winning ports through which five balls are paid out as winning balls when a ball is won. In the present embodiment, the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball wins the first prize opening 64 and the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball wins the second prize slot 640 are configured to be the same. The number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball wins the first prize opening 64 is different from the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball wins to the second prize opening 640, for example, the ball to the first prize opening 64 The number of prize balls to be paid out when a prize is won may be three, and the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball wins the second prize opening 640 may be five.

  The first winning combination 640a is attached to the second winning opening 640. The first electric combination 640a is configured to be openable and closable. Normally, the first electric combination 640a is in a closed state (reduced state), and the ball is unlikely to win the second winning opening 640. Yes. On the other hand, when the symbol “◯” is displayed on the second symbol display device as a result of the variable symbol display of the second symbol that is triggered by the passage of the ball to the first through gates 66 and 67, the first electric accessory 640a is in the open state (enlarged state), and the ball is in a state where it is easy to win the second winning opening 640.

  As described above, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher than that during normal change during the probability change and the short time, and the time required for the variation display of the second symbol is short. "Is easily displayed, and the number of times that the first electric accessory 640a is opened (enlarged) is increased. Furthermore, during the time of probability change or time reduction, the time during which the first electric accessory 640a is opened also becomes longer than during normal time. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the ball to win the second winning opening 640 when the probability is changing or when the time is short.

  Here, the probability of winning a big hit is the same in both the low probability state and the high probability state when the ball wins the first winning port 64 and when the ball wins the second winning port 640. However, the probability that a 15R probability variation jackpot is selected as the jackpot type selected when the jackpot is won is higher when the ball wins the second winning slot 640 than when the ball wins the first winning slot 64. Is set. On the other hand, the first winning port 64 does not have the first electric accessory 640a as in the second winning port 640, and the ball is in a state where the ball can always be won.

  Therefore, during normal times, the electric winnings associated with the second winning opening 640 are often in a closed state, and it is difficult to win the second winning opening 640. The person who aimed to win a lot of opportunities to win a lottery by winning the first winning opening 64 by launching the ball so that the ball passes to the left of the variable display unit 80, It is advantageous for the player.

  On the other hand, during probability change and time reduction, by passing the ball through the first through gates 66 and 67, the first electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is easily opened, and the second winning opening 640 is opened. Since it is easy to win, the ball is fired toward the second winning port 640 so that the ball passes the right side of the variable display unit 80, and the first through gates 66 and 67 are passed through the first winning gate 640. It is advantageous for the player to open the electric accessory 640a and aim to win the 15R probability variation by winning the second winning opening 640.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment launches a ball to the player according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 1 (whether it is being prone to change, shorting, or normal). Can be changed. Thus, the player can be changed in the way the ball is hit, so that the game can be enjoyed.

  A variable winning device 65 is arranged below the first winning port 64, and a horizontally long specific winning port (large opening) 65a is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 1, when the jackpot lottery performed due to the winning of either the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 640 becomes a jackpot, the jackpot is stopped after a predetermined time (variation time) has elapsed. The first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is turned on so as to be a symbol, and a stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of a jackpot. Thereafter, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. In this special gaming state, the special winning opening 65a that is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed or ten balls have been won).

  The specific winning opening 65a is closed when a predetermined time elapses, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to 15 times (15 rounds), for example. The state in which the opening / closing operation is performed is a form of a special gaming state advantageous to the player, and the player is given out a larger amount of prize balls than usual in order to give a gaming value (game value). Is done.

  Specifically, the variable winning device 65 is a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate covering the specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening opening solenoid (not shown) for driving to open / close forward with the lower side of the opening / closing plate as an axis. And. The special winning opening 65a is normally closed so that the ball cannot win or is difficult to win. In the case of a big hit, the large opening opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate to the lower front side to temporarily form an open state in which the ball is likely to win the specific winning opening 65a. It operates to repeat the state and the state alternately.

  Note that the special gaming state is not limited to the above-described form. When the game area is provided with a large opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a, and the LED corresponding to the jackpot is turned on in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time, A special game in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning port 65a is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times when the ball wins into the specific winning port 65a while the specific winning port 65a is opened. You may make it form as a state. Further, the number of the specific winning opening 65a is not limited to one, and one or a plurality (for example, three) of two or more may be arranged, and the arrangement position is not limited to the right side of the first winning opening 64. The left side of the variable display unit 80 may be used.

  In the lower right corner of the game board 13, there is provided an adhering space K1 for adhering a certificate paper, an identification label, etc., and the certificate paper or the like affixed to the adhering space K1 is a small window of the front door 5. 35 (see FIG. 1).

  The game board 13 is provided with a first out port 71. Balls that flow down the game area and have not won any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a, 640, 82 are guided to the unillustrated ball discharge path through the first outlet 71. The The first out port 71 is disposed below the first winning port 64.

  A number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (acts) such as a windmill are arranged.

  As shown in FIG. 3, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control apparatus 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control apparatus 113), and a display control board (display control apparatus 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control apparatus 111), a firing control board (launching control apparatus 112), a power supply board (power supply apparatus 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

  The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 and a dispensing unit 93 that form a protective cover. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is mounted as necessary.

  The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other, and each control device and each board are accommodated.

  In addition, the substrate box 100 (main control device 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and launch control device 112) connect the box base and the box cover so that they cannot be opened by a sealing unit (not shown) (caulking structure). Consolidated). In addition, a seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover so as to cover the box base and the box cover. This seal seal is made of a brittle material. If the seal is to be peeled off in order to open the substrate boxes 100, 102, or if the substrate boxes 100, 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are removed. Cut to the side. Therefore, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal.

  The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 that is located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opens upward, a tank rail 131 that is connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and is gently inclined toward the downstream side, and downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 that is vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 that is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and that pays out a ball by a predetermined electrical configuration of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). ing. The tank 130 is successively replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and a required number of balls are paid out by the payout device 133 as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

  The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated, for example, to eliminate ball clogging (return to a normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as ball clogging in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 1 to the initial state.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 1.

  The main controller 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are incorporated. In the main controller 110, the main processing of the pachinko machine 1 such as jackpot lottery, setting of display in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display results in the second symbol display device are performed by the MPU 201. Execute.

  Various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller only in one direction.

  The RAM 203 stores various areas, counters, flags, a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and a return address of a control program executed by the MPU 201, various flags, counters, I / O, and the like. And a work area (work area) in which values are stored. Note that the RAM 203 is configured so that the backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 and the data can be held (backed up) even after the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer and the value of each register when the power is shut off (including when the power failure occurs, the same applies hereinafter) are stored in RAM 203. On the other hand, at the time of power-on (including power-on due to power failure cancellation, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 1 is restored to the state before power-off based on information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is shut off by a main process (not shown), and restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed in a start-up process (not shown) when the power is turned on. Note that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. Is input immediately, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 has a payout control device 111, an audio lamp control device 113, first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, a second symbol display device, a second symbol holding lamp, and a lower side of the opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 made up of a large opening solenoid for opening and closing the front side and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the MPU 201 via the input / output port 205. Send.

  The input / output port 205 includes a switch group (not shown), various switches 208 including a sensor group including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotation position detection sensor R, and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply device 115. Are connected, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to perform payout control of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, includes a ROM 212 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211, the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and various flags and counters. And a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to hold (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the power failure signal SG1 is also input to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the firing control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting a prize ball that has been paid out. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but is not connected to the main control device 110.

  The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launch strength of the ball according to the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 is obtained when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch a ball. . The ball launching unit 112a includes a launching solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on the condition that the launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball is off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited corresponding to the amount of rotation (rotation position) of the handle 51, and a ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The audio lamp control device 113 outputs audio in an audio output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing in a lamp display device (such as the illumination units 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34), and fluctuating effects (variation). The display mode setting of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114, such as display) and a notice effect, is controlled. The MPU 221 that is an arithmetic unit includes a ROM 222 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 including an address bus and a data bus. Main controller 110, display controller 114, audio output device 226, lamp display device 227, other device 228, frame button 22 and the like are connected to input / output port 225, respectively. Other devices 228 include drive motors 441 and 457.

  The sound lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and uses the determined display mode as a command. The display control device 114 is notified by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). The sound lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the player operates the frame button 22, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, or the super reach is performed. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the production contents at the time. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 so that the rear image corresponding to the changed stage is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to the command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113.

  Further, the sound lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) representing the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. The voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice corresponding to the display content from the voice output device 226 in accordance with the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display command received from the display control device 114, The lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled in accordance with the display contents.

  The display control device 114 is connected to the sound lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on a command received from the sound lamp control device 113, the third symbol display device 81 has a variation effect of the third symbol, etc. The display is controlled. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the sound lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice from the voice output device 226 in accordance with the display content indicated by the display command, thereby matching the display of the third symbol display device 81 with the voice output from the voice output device 226. be able to.

  The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 1, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 through a power supply path (not shown). As its outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in the voltage of AC 24 volts supplied from the outside, and drives various switches such as various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, motors, etc. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and the 12 volt voltage, the 5 volt voltage, and the backup voltage are supplied to the control devices 110 to 114 as necessary voltages.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power interruption, power interruption) occurs when this voltage falls below 22 volts. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. Based on the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. Note that the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is a drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, main controller 110 and payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

  The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data, and the payout control device 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. Transmit to device 111.

  Next, a schematic configuration of the operation unit 200 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 5 is a front perspective view of the operation unit 200, and FIG. 6 is an exploded front perspective view of the operation unit 200. 7 and 8 are front views of the operation unit 200. FIG.

  In FIG. 7, the displacement members 430 disposed at the left and right ends of the vertical displacement unit 400 are displaced to the retracted positions, respectively. In FIG. 8, the displacement members 430 disposed at the left and right ends of the vertical displacement unit 400 are illustrated. The state in which the members 430 are respectively displaced to the overhang positions is illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 5 to FIG. 8, the operation unit 200 includes a back case 300 formed in a box shape, and in the internal space of the back case 300, a vertical displacement unit 400 is disposed above and a light emitting decoration is disposed below. Each unit 800 is disposed.

  The back case 300 includes a bottom wall 301 having a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and an outer wall 302 standing from the outer edges of the four sides of the bottom wall 301 toward the front. It is formed in a box shape with one side (front side) open. The bottom wall 301 is formed with an opening 301a having a rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) disposed on the back of the bottom wall 301 is visually recognized through the opening 301a. It is possible.

  The vertical displacement unit 400 includes a rear base 420 formed in a substantially rectangular shape in front view disposed on the bottom wall portion 301 of the rear case 300, a displacement member 430 and a decorative member disposed on the rear base 420 so as to be displaceable. 450, and the displacement member 430 and the decorative member 450 are retracted to the upper side of the rear case 300 and the overhang projecting to the front side of the rear case opening 301a (that is, the third symbol display device 81). It can be displaced between positions (see FIGS. 7 and 8).

  In this case, the decorative member 450 is provided with a rotating unit 500, and the rotating unit 500 is rotated and the LED of the irradiation unit 530 disposed in the rotating unit 500 is caused to emit light, thereby causing a pattern with an afterimage of light. And symbols can be displayed. Details of this structure will be described later.

  The light emitting decoration unit 800 mainly includes a base body 810 and a light emitting device 820 disposed on the front side of the base body 810, and emits light emitted from a plurality of LEDs 821 disposed inside the light emitting device 820. By changing the mode (for example, the number of LEDs 821 to be irradiated), an effect by light emission is performed. Details will be described later.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 9 to 47, detailed configurations of the vertical displacement unit 400, the rotation unit 500, the center frame 600, the distribution device 700, and the light emitting decoration unit 800 will be described. First, the vertical displacement unit 400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 9 to 24.

  First, the overall configuration of the vertical displacement unit 400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 9 to 14. FIG. 9 is a front view of the vertical displacement unit 400, and FIG. 10 is a rear view of the vertical displacement unit 400. 11 and 13 are front perspective views of the vertical displacement unit 400, and FIGS. 12 and 14 are rear perspective views of the vertical displacement unit 400.

  As shown in FIGS. 9 to 14, the vertical displacement unit 400 includes a front base 410 that is substantially L-shaped in front view, a back base 420 that is superimposed on the back side of the front base 410, and the front side of the front base 410. , A displacement member 430 that is rotated by the driving force of the drive motor 441, and is connected to one end side of the displacement member 430 so that the displacement member 430 is displaced in the vertical direction (the vertical direction in FIG. 9). ), A front cover 460 disposed in front of one end of the front base 410, and a decorative member disposed in a gap between the front cover 460 and the front base 410 facing each other. A guide bar P1 that guides the sliding of the decorative member 450, a side wall member 470 that is disposed at the left and right ends of the decorative member 450 and restricts the displacement of the decorative member 450, and the front surface of the front base 410 A rotation regulating member 480 which is disposed are formed mainly includes.

  In the vertical displacement unit 400, a pair of all members excluding the decorative member 450 is disposed symmetrically, and the decorative member 450 is interposed between the pair of opposing members. In addition, the detailed description of the members disposed in a pair describes only the members disposed on the left side in the front view (left side in FIG. 9), and the members disposed on the right side in the front view (right side in FIG. 9) The same reference numerals as those in the left side of the front view are attached, and the description thereof is omitted.

  The front base 410 is formed from a substantially L-shaped plate-like body in front view, and includes a first piece 410X that forms a long side of a substantially L shape and a first side that forms a short side of a substantially L shape. It is mainly provided with two pieces 410Y.

  The extending direction of the first piece 410X is arranged in parallel with the vertical direction (the vertical direction in FIG. 9). Further, the first piece 410X includes a standing portion 412 that stands on the front side of the left and right outer end portion (left end portion), an upper groove 413 that is recessed in a circular arc shape in the upper portion, and a cross section in the lower portion. And a lower concave groove 414 formed in an arc shape.

  The standing portion 412 is a wall that abuts on a sliding portion 451 of a decoration member 450 described later and restricts the rearward displacement of the decoration member 450, and extends from the upper part to the lower part of the left edge of the first piece 410X. It is formed.

  The upper concave groove 413 and the lower concave groove 414 are grooves into which a guide rod P1 described later is fitted, and are recessed in a semicircular arc shape having an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the guide rod P1. Further, the upper concave groove 413 and the lower concave groove 414 are formed so that the axes formed in a semicircular cross section are positioned on the same straight line, and the lower concave groove 414 from the upper end portion of the upper concave groove 413. The distance between the opposite ends to the lower end of the guide bar P1 is set to be larger than the axial dimension of the guide rod P1. Thereby, both ends of the guide rod P1 can be fitted into the upper concave groove 413 and the lower concave groove 414.

  The second piece 410Y is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and has an opening 411 penetrating in the front-rear direction at the center thereof, an engaging portion 415 protruding to the back side, and a shaft support portion 416 protruding to a columnar shape on the back side. Formed mainly for the purpose.

  The opening 411 is an opening for inserting the shaft portion of the drive motor 441 attached to the front side of the front base 410 to the back side of the front base 410, and the transmission gear fitted to the shaft portion of the drive motor 441. The inner diameter is larger than the outer shape of 442. Thus, when the drive motor 441 fails due to deterioration or the like, the drive motor 441 can be removed from the front base 410 and the transmission gear 442 can be removed from the vertical displacement unit 400 from the opening 411. As a result, after the transmission gear 442 is attached to the shaft portion of the new drive motor 441, the transmission gear 442 can be disposed through the opening 411, so that the shaft portion of the drive motor 441 is connected to the front base 410 and the rear base 420. As compared with the case where the drive motor 441 is disposed on the front base 410 while being inserted through the shaft hole of the transmission gear 443 disposed between the two, the operation can be simplified and the number of man-hours for component replacement can be reduced. be able to. In this case, since the shaft hole of the transmission gear 443 can be reliably fitted to the shaft portion of the drive motor 441, the reliability when the parts are replaced can be improved.

  The engaging portion 415 is a protrusion for locking one end of a torsion spring SP1 to be described later, and protrudes from the back side of the second piece 410Y, and its protruding tip is bent toward the center in the left-right direction of the vertical displacement unit 400. The cross section is formed in a substantially L shape. Accordingly, the rotation of the torsion spring SP1 around the axis can be restricted by the protruding portion toward the back side, and the displacement of the torsion spring SP1 toward the back side can be restricted by the bent portion at the tip.

  The shaft support portion 416 is a cylindrical bar member made of a metal material, and one end side is fitted to the back side of the front base 410.

  The drive motor 441 is a motor that applies a driving force to the vertical displacement unit 400 and is disposed on the front base 410 as described above, and the transmission gear 442 disposed between the front base 410 and the rear base 420. , 443 can be transmitted with a driving force.

  As described above, the transmission gear 442 is a gear in which a shaft hole is externally fitted to the shaft portion of the drive motor 441 and is connected to the drive motor 441, and is arranged in mesh with the transmission gear 443.

  The transmission gear 443 is a gear that is rotatably disposed between the front base 410 and the rear base 420 with the shaft hole fitted into the protrusion 417 of the front base 410, and transmits as described above. The gear 442 is arranged in mesh with the gear 442. Therefore, the driving force of the drive motor 441 can be transmitted to the transmission gear 443 via the transmission gear 442.

  The transmission gear 443 includes a protrusion 443a that protrudes from the side surface on the back side. The protrusion 443a is a rod member made of a metal material and formed in a cylindrical shape, and is disposed on the outer peripheral edge of the transmission gear 443. Therefore, as described above, when the driving force is applied to the driving motor 441 and the transmission gear 443 is rotated, the protrusion 443a is displaced in an arc shape around the axis of the transmission gear 443.

  The back surface base 420 is a plate member that is formed in an outer shape substantially the same as the front view shape of the second piece 410Y of the front surface base 410, and includes a standing portion 421 that is erected on the front side on the outer edge portion.

  The standing portion 421 is a wall for forming a gap between the front base 410 and the back base 420 facing each other, and the standing distance is larger than the longitudinal dimension of the displacement member 430 and the transmission gear 443 combined. The size is set to a large size, and the front end surface is disposed in contact with the back side of the front base 410. As a result, it is possible to form a gap in which the transmission gears 442 and 443 and a displacement member 430 described later are disposed between the front base 410 and the back base 420.

  The displacement member 430 is formed in a substantially L shape when viewed from the front, and is formed in a substantially box shape whose outer edge protrudes toward the back side. Further, the displacement member 430 includes a through-hole 433 that is circularly formed through the bent portion in the front-rear direction, a decoration-side sliding hole 432 that is formed through one side of the long side in the front-rear direction, and a short side. The other side is mainly provided with a driving side sliding hole 431 formed penetrating in the front-rear direction, and a displacement side engaging portion 434 protruding from the protruding portion of the outer edge portion on one side of the long side.

  The through hole 433 is a hole into which the shaft support 416 of the front base 410 is inserted, and is formed with an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the shaft support 416. Therefore, after the through hole 433 is inserted through the shaft support portion 416 of the front base 410, the front base 410 and the rear base 420 are combined, so that the displacement member 430 can be displaced with respect to the front base 410. Can be arranged.

  The drive-side sliding hole 431 is a long hole through which the protrusion 443a of the transmission gear 443 is inserted, and the width dimension in the short direction is set larger than the outer diameter of the protrusion 443a. Further, the drive-side sliding hole 431 is formed in the same direction as the extending direction (longitudinal direction) on the short side of the displacement member 430, and the transmission gear 443 is driven by the drive motor 441 as described above. , The projection 443a of the transmission gear 443 slides inside the drive side sliding hole 431 in accordance with the displacement, thereby rotating the displacement member 430 around the through hole 433. That is, by driving the drive motor 441, the displacement member 430 can be displaced about the through hole 433.

  The decoration-side sliding hole 432 is a long hole that is disposed in a decoration member 450 to be described later and into which a support portion 452a formed in a columnar shape is inserted, and the width dimension in the short direction is the outer diameter of the support portion 452a. Is formed larger. Further, the decoration-side sliding hole 432 is formed in the same direction as the extending direction (longitudinal direction) on the long side of the displacement member 430 in the longitudinal direction. As described above, when the displacement member 430 is rotated about the through-hole 433, the decoration-side sliding hole 432 has an arcuate displacement locus centered on the through-hole 433.

  The displacement side engaging portion 434 is a protrusion that engages the other end side of the torsion spring SP <b> 1 described later, and is formed to protrude from the inner peripheral surface of the outer edge portion protruding from the rear surface side of the displacement member 430. Moreover, the displacement side engaging part 434 is formed in the side surface inside the bending of the displacement member 430 bent in the substantially L shape in the front view. Thereby, the displacement side engaging part 434 can engage the other end side of the torsion spring SP <b> 1 on the inner side of the rear surface side of the displacement member 430.

  The torsion spring SP1 has a torsional portion disposed around the through hole 433 (the shaft support portion 416 of the front base 410) of the displacement member 430, and rotates to the left around the rotation axis of the displacement member 430 (vertical displacement unit). The displacement member 430 that forms the right side of the front view 400 has a biasing force applied to the displacement member 430 around the rotation axis. The one end side is the engagement portion 415 of the front base 410 and the other end side is the displacement member. 430 is respectively engaged with the displacement side engaging portion 434. Accordingly, the displacement member 430 rotates counterclockwise around the axis of the through-hole 433 (the shaft support portion 416 of the front base 410) with respect to the front base 410 (the displacement member 430 constituting the right side of the vertical displacement unit 400 in the front view rotates clockwise). ) Is always energized in the direction.

  As described above, the decorative member 450 is a member interposed between a pair of opposing vertical displacement units 400 configured as a pair of left and right, and a front base in which the size in the left-right direction is symmetrically disposed. 410 is set to be the same as the distance between the outer ends in the left-right direction.

  The decorative member 450 is formed in a U-shape in front view with the lower side open, and includes a front base 452 constituting the central portion thereof, sliding portions 451 connected to both left and right ends of the front base 452, and a front base The back surface base 453 that covers the back surface of the front surface 452 and the rotation unit 500 that is rotatably disposed on the front surface side of the front surface base 452 are mainly provided.

  The front base 452 is formed of a plate-like body having a horizontally long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and is formed in a U-shaped cross section with upper and lower end surfaces bent to the back side. The front base 452 includes a support portion 452a that protrudes from the back side, an engagement portion 452b that protrudes from the both ends in the left-right direction to the front side, a contact surface 452h that is formed smoothly on the front side of both ends in the left-right direction, And an inclined surface 452g formed at the lower end of the contact surface 452h.

  As described above, the support portion 452a is a rod member that is inserted into the decoration-side sliding hole 432 of the displacement member 430, and is formed in a cylindrical rod-shaped body. Thus, when the displacement member 430 is displaced by the driving force of the motor 441 and the decoration side sliding hole 432 of the displacement member 430 is rotationally displaced about the through hole 433, the displacement member 430 is inserted into the decoration side sliding hole 432. The support portion 452 a is displaced with the displacement of the decoration side sliding hole 432. As a result, the decorative member 450 can be displaced by displacing the support portion 452a.

  The engaging portion 452b is a protrusion with which the other end of an urging spring SP2 to be described later is engaged, and protrudes in a hook shape from the front side of both end portions of the front base 452.

  The contact surface 452h is a smooth surface that contacts a roller 492a of a regulation unit 490, which will be described later, and is formed as a smooth surface on which the roller 492a can roll. The inclined surface 452g is a surface that is inclined downward from the front side to the back side at the lower end portion of the contact surface 452h. Thereby, the regulation unit 490 and the decorative member 450 described later can be easily brought into contact with each other. A detailed description of the contact between the restriction unit 490 and the decorative member 450 will be described later.

  The sliding portion 451 is a rod-shaped body having a rectangular cross section extending in the up-down direction, and is arranged to be connected to both left and right end portions of the front base 452. Moreover, the sliding part 451 is provided with the through-hole 451a opened to the up-down direction. The through hole 451a is an opening through which the guide rod P1 is inserted, and is formed in a circular shape having an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the guide rod P1.

  As a result, when the displacement member 430 is displaced by the driving force of the drive motor 441 and the decorative member 450 is displaced as described above, the direction of the displacement is changed by the sliding portions 451 disposed at both ends of the front base 452. Be regulated. As a result, the decorative member 450 is displaced along the axial direction (vertical direction) of the guide bar P1. In other words, the decorative member 450 can be slid and displaced in the vertical direction when a driving force is applied from the driving motor 441.

  The back surface base 453 is a plate member that covers the back side of the front base 452 at a substantially central position in the left-right direction, and is formed to have substantially the same size as the central portion of the front base 452 in front view. Thereby, the gears 454 to 456 can be rotatably arranged in the internal space between the front base 452 and the back base 453. A drive motor 457 that outputs a rotational driving force and a control signal to the rotation unit 500 is attached to the rear surface of the rear base 453. A detailed description of the gears 454 to 456 and the drive motor 457 will be described later.

  The front cover 460 is a member that is disposed to face the front side of the first piece 410X of the front base 410 and covers the front side of the first piece 410X. The front cover 460 is substantially the same as the outer shape of the first piece 410X in front view. It is formed in the same shape. The front cover 460 includes a standing wall 461 that stands on the back side from the outer edge thereof, and is formed in a box-like body that opens on the back side.

  The standing wall 461 includes an upper groove forming member 462 that protrudes upward from the side surface that forms the upper side, and a lower groove forming member 463 that protrudes downward from the side surface that forms the lower side.

  The upper groove forming member 462 is formed at a position facing the upper concave groove 413 of the front base 410, and a concave groove 462a is formed in a semicircular arc shape on the back side. On the other hand, the lower groove forming member 463 is formed at a position facing the lower groove 414 of the front base 410, and a groove 463a that is recessed in a semicircular arc shape is formed on the back surface side.

  The concave grooves 462a and 463a are grooves into which the guide rod P1 is fitted, and are recessed in a semicircular arc shape having an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the guide rod P1. The grooves 462a and 463a are formed on the same straight line with a semi-circular arc-shaped shaft, and the distance between the opposite ends from the upper end of the groove 462a to the lower end of the groove 463a is It is set to be larger than the axial dimension of the guide bar P1. Thereby, the both ends of the guide rod P1 can be internally fitted in the concave grooves 462a and 463a.

  Therefore, when the front cover 460 is disposed in front of the front base 410, the guide rod P can be sandwiched between the upper concave groove 413 and the concave groove 462a and the lower concave groove 414 and the concave groove 463a. The guide bar P1 can be disposed on the front base 410 in a state in which it cannot be dropped off. As a result, the sliding portion 451 of the decorative member 450 through which the guide rod P1 is inserted can be held against the front base 410 so as not to drop off.

  In addition, the distance between the front wall 461 of the front cover 460 formed on the outer side of the vertical displacement unit 400 and the upright portion 412 formed on the first piece 410X of the front base 410 in the front-rear direction. Is set to be substantially the same as or slightly larger than the thickness dimension in the front-rear direction of the sliding portion 451 of the decorative member 450, and the end portion on the outer side in the left-right direction of the sliding portion 451 is disposed between the opposing dimensions. Thereby, as described above, when the decorative member 450 is displaced in the vertical direction, the decorative member 450 can be prevented from rattling in the front-rear direction.

  The side wall member 470 is a member disposed at both ends of the vertical displacement unit 400 on the center side in the left-right direction, and is formed from a substantially L-shaped plate-like body bent to the back side in a side view. In addition, a wall surface that is bent outward in the left-right direction is formed on the end surface on the front side of the side wall member 470, and a regulation unit 490 described later is attached to the wall surface.

  Further, the side wall member 470 is provided with a pattern on the side surface in the center in the left-right direction (the left-right direction in FIG. 9) with respect to the vertical displacement unit 400 by unevenness, color, and the like. The pattern of the side wall member 470 is disposed so as to be visible through the central opening of FIG. Thereby, the vertical displacement unit 400 (for example, front cover 460 etc.) arrange | positioned in the left-right direction outer side from the side wall member 470 can be made invisible to a player.

  The rotation restricting member 480 is formed from a plate-like body that is horizontally long when viewed from the front, and an annular roller 481 having a shaft in the front-rear direction on the back side is rotatably attached. Further, the rotation restricting member 480 has an outer shape that is substantially half of the outer shape of the second piece 410Y of the front base 410 in a front view, and is disposed with a predetermined gap in front of the front base 410.

  The rotation restricting member 480 is a member that returns a later-described rotating unit 500 to an initial position, and the initial position of the rotating unit 500 can be defined by the roller 481 and the upper surface base 510 coming into contact with each other.

  The biasing spring SP2 is a coil spring that connects the front base 410 and the decorative member 450 and biases the decorative member 450 upward. One end is engaged with the engaging portion 418 of the front base 410, and the other. The end is engaged with the engaging portion 412 b of the decorative member 450. Thereby, the decorative member 450 is always urged upward with respect to the front base 410. Therefore, when the decorative member 450 is displaced from the second position to the first position due to the displacement described later, the decorative member 450 can be easily displaced to the second position. The biasing spring SP2 is bent along the outer peripheral surface of the roller 419 at the center. Thereby, it is possible to secure the length of the urging spring SP2 and to prevent the urging force from increasing excessively.

  Next, the operation of the vertical displacement unit 400 configured as described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 15 to 17.

  15A to 17A are front views of the vertical displacement unit 400. FIG. 15A shows a state where the vertical displacement unit 400 is arranged at the raised position, and FIG. 16A shows a position between the raised position and the lowered position. FIG. 17 (a) corresponds to the state of being arranged at the lowered position.

  15B corresponds to the rear view of the vertical displacement unit 400 in FIG. 15A, FIG. 16B corresponds to FIG. 16A, and FIG. 17B corresponds to FIG. 17A. . 15 (b), 16 (b) and 17 (b) show a state in which the back base 420 is removed for easy understanding.

  As shown in FIGS. 15A and 15B, in a state where the vertical displacement unit 400 is disposed at the raised position (hereinafter, this state is referred to as “second position”), the displacement member 430 is one of the members. The side (the long side on which the decoration side sliding hole 432 is formed) is swung upward, and the decoration member 450 is positioned at the top. The support portion 452 a of the decoration member 450 is positioned inside the decoration side sliding hole 432 of the displacement member 430 and close to the radially outer end from the axis of the through hole 433.

  In this state, the rotational direction on one side of the displacement member 430 (the short side where the drive-side sliding hole 431 is formed) is substantially the same as the direction of the straight line connecting the rotational shaft of the transmission gear 443 and the protrusion 443a. Match. That is, the extending direction of the drive side sliding hole 431 of the displacement member 430 and the direction of the straight line connecting the rotation shaft of the transmission gear 443 and the projection 443a are orthogonal (the displacement member 430 and the transmission gear 443 are dead points). In a state of forming a). Therefore, the displacement member 430 can no longer rotate about the through hole 433, and the displacement member 430 can be prevented from being rotationally displaced by the weight of the decorative member 450 connected to the displacement member 430.

  When the pair of drive motors 441 are driven to rotate from the state shown in FIG. 15A and FIG. 15B, and each transmission gear 443 is rotated, the projection 443 a of the transmission gear 443 is moved to the displacement member 430. The left and right displacement members 430 are respectively pushed downward by sliding along the drive side sliding hole 431.

  Accordingly, the left and right displacement members 430 are rotated about the axis of the through hole 433, and the decorative member 450 is displaced downward as shown in FIGS. 16 (a) and 16 (b). From this state, when the transmission gears 443 are further rotated by the rotational drive of the pair of drive motors 441, the left and right displacement members 430 are further pushed downward, as shown in FIGS. 17 (a) and 17 (b). As shown, the decorative member 450 is disposed at a lowered position (hereinafter, this state is referred to as “first position”).

  As shown in FIGS. 17A and 17B, in the state where the vertical displacement unit 400 is disposed at the first position, the left and right displacement members 430 are formed on one side thereof (the drive-side sliding hole 431 is formed). In this state, the decorative member 450 is located at the lowermost position and is projected from the front side of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2). .

  Further, in this case (when the vertical displacement unit 400 is disposed at the lowered position), the decoration-side sliding hole 432 of the displacement member 430 is inclined downward toward the central portion in the left-right direction of the vertical displacement unit 400, and the through hole 433. The side surface of the support portion 452a of the decorative member 450 is brought into contact with the radially outer end side. As a result, the weight of the decorative member 450 can be applied to the support portion 452a by the force that displaces in the direction of gravity and the force in the direction from the left-right direction of the vertical displacement unit 400 toward the center. As a result, the decorative member 450 can be prevented from rattling in the vertical and horizontal directions due to the displacement operation of the rotating unit 500 of the decorative member 450 described later.

  Further, the rotational direction of the other side of the displacement member 430 (the short side where the driving side sliding hole 431 is formed) is substantially coincident with the direction of the straight line connecting the rotational shaft of the transmission gear 443 and the protrusion 443a. That is, the extending direction of the drive side sliding hole 431 of the displacement member 430 and the direction of the straight line connecting the rotation shaft of the transmission gear 443 and the projection 443a are orthogonal (the displacement member 430 and the transmission gear 443 are dead points). In a state of forming a). Therefore, the displacement member 430 cannot rotate about the through-hole 433, and when the decorative member 450 rattles in the vertical direction due to the displacement operation of the rotation unit 500 described later, the displacement member 430 is displaced by the rattling. The displacement of the member 430 can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to suppress ltpp that the decorative member 450 rattles.

  In addition, restriction units 490 are disposed in front of both ends of the decorative member 450. Thereby, the displacement of the decorative member 450 in the front-rear direction can be restricted. A detailed description of the restriction unit 490 will be described later.

  Next, the restriction unit 490 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  First, the overall configuration of the restriction unit 490 will be described with reference to FIGS. 18 is an exploded front perspective view of the regulation unit 490, and FIG. 19 is an exploded front perspective view of the roller member 492. As shown in FIG. 20A is a side view of the restriction unit 490, FIG. 20B is a rear view of the restriction unit 490, and FIG. 20C is a cross-sectional view taken along line XXc-XXc in FIG. It is sectional drawing of the control unit 490. FIG.

  As shown in FIGS. 18 to 20, the regulation unit 490 includes a case member 491 formed in a box shape whose back side is open, a roller member 492 disposed inside the case member 491, and the case member 491. And an outer edge member 493 disposed on the opened outer edge (on the opening side).

  The case member 491 has a protruding portion 491a protruding from the side surface on the front side, a notch portion 491b cut out in a semicircular shape on both side surfaces in the left-right direction, and a bulge from the inner side surface facing the opening to the back side. And a bulging portion 491c.

  The projecting portion 491a is a projection for fastening the case member 491 to the side wall member 470 described above. A fastening hole is formed in the front side, and a screw is fastened to the fastening hole from the front side via the side wall member 470. By doing so, the restriction unit 490 can be disposed on the side wall member 470.

  The notch portions 491b are formed by being cut out in a semicircular shape by arranging two in the vertical direction on the side surfaces of the case member 491 on both sides in the left-right direction. The notch 491b is a notch for inserting the collar 492c of the roller member 492 therein, and the inner diameter thereof is set larger than the outer diameter of the collar 492c of the roller member 492.

  The bulging portion 491c is formed to bulge from the lower side of the center in the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 20 (c)) of the side surface (the back surface of the front wall) facing the open side of the case member 491. Further, the bulging portion 491c includes a predetermined gap between the roller member 492 and the roller 492a.

  The roller member 492 includes a roller 492a formed from an elastic member in an annular shape when viewed from the axial straight section, a shaft portion 492b inserted into the roller 492a, a shaft portion 492b, and both sides of the roller 492a. And a pair of retaining rings E1 that are fitted onto a shaft portion 492b outside the collar 492c.

  The shaft portion 492b is a member that is inserted into the inner periphery of the roller 492a. The shaft portion 492b is formed in a cylindrical shape that is substantially the same as the inner diameter of the inner periphery of the roller 492a, and the axial dimension is between the lateral side surfaces of the case member 491. It is set larger than the width dimension. Moreover, the recessed part 492b1 recessed in an axial direction is formed in the axial direction both ends of the axial part 492b. The concave portion 492b1 is formed over the entire circumference of the shaft portion 492b, and has an outer diameter in the axial direction smaller than an inner diameter of a retaining ring E1 described later.

  The collar 492c is formed in an annular shape when viewed from the front, and is formed in a substantially stepped cross section. The collar 492c includes a small-diameter cylindrical portion 492c1 and a large-diameter cylindrical portion 492c2 having a larger outer diameter than the small-diameter cylindrical portion 492c1. In addition, the inner diameter of the collar 492c (the inner diameter of the small-diameter cylindrical portion 492c1 and the large-diameter cylindrical portion 492c2) is formed smaller than the outer diameter of the shaft portion 492b, and the shaft portion 492b can be inserted into the inside.

  The small-diameter cylindrical portion 492c1 is a portion that is fitted into the notch 491b of the case member 491. As described above, the outer diameter of the small-diameter cylindrical portion 492c1 is larger than the inner diameter of the notch 491b of the case member 491. Is done.

  The large-diameter cylindrical portion 492c2 is a member for restricting the displacement in the left-right direction when the roller member 492 is disposed on the case member 491. The outer diameter of the large-diameter cylindrical portion 492c2 is the notch of the case member 491. It is set larger than the inner diameter of the portion 491b. Further, the distance dimension between the axially outer side surfaces of the pair of large-diameter cylindrical portions 492c2 disposed at both axial ends of the roller 492a is based on the distance dimension between the opposing left and right side surfaces on the inner side where the case member 491 opens. Is also formed small.

  The retaining ring E1 is an E-ring (E-type retaining ring), and is fitted around the recessed portion 492b1 with an opening being widened in the recessed portion 492b1 of the shaft portion 492b. That is, the inner diameter of the inner periphery of the retaining ring E1 is set to be substantially the same as the outer diameter of the recess 492b1.

  The roller member 492 configured as described above is assembled as follows. First, after retaining ring E1 is fitted into recess 492b1 on one end side of shaft part 492b, small diameter cylindrical part 492c1 is placed on one side (the side on which retaining ring E1 is fitted externally) from one end to collar 492c. ), The shaft portion 492b is inserted. Next, after the roller 492a is inserted into the shaft portion 492b from the other end, the shaft portion in a state where the first collar 492c is directed to the large diameter cylindrical portion 492c2 (side where the retaining ring E1 is externally fitted). 492b is inserted. Thereafter, one retaining ring E1 is externally fitted into the recess 492b1 on the other side of the shaft portion 492b.

  As a result, the displacement of the roller 492a and the pair of collars 492c, which are pivotally supported by the shaft portion 492b between the opposing ends of the pair of retaining rings E1, are restricted by the retaining ring E1. As a result, the roller 492a and the pair of collars 492c can be prevented from being detached from the shaft portion 492b.

  The outer edge member 493 is a member that is formed in a frame-like body having a vertically long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and is disposed on the back side (open side) of the case member 491. The outer edge member 493 is formed so that the inner peripheral shape in the front view is substantially the same as the inner peripheral shape of the opening in the rear view of the case member 491. Further, on the side surface of the outer edge member 493 on the front side (case member 491 side), a standing portion 493a is formed to stand on the front side around the inner edge portion.

  The standing portion 493a is formed with a recessed portion 493a1 that is recessed on the back side. The recessed portion 493a1 is formed at a position facing the notch 491b of the case member 491. Therefore, the roller member 492 can be disposed on the case member 491 by sandwiching the collar 492c of the roller member 492 between the notch portion 491b and the recessed portion 493a1 of the case member 491.

  The roller member 492 configured as described above is assembled as follows. First, two collars 492c disposed at both ends in the axial direction of the roller member 492 are vertically arranged in the notch 491b of the case member 491 so as to support the collar 492c. Next, the outer edge member 493 is fastened and fixed to the case member 491 from the back side of the case member 491 in a state where the standing portion 493a side is the front side (facing the case member 491 side). Thereby, the roller member 492 is rotatably arranged with respect to the case member 491, and can be prevented from falling from the case member 491.

  Next, the operation of the restriction unit 490 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 21 is a front view of the vertical displacement unit 400 in the first position. 22A is an enlarged view of the vertical displacement unit 400 in the XXII portion of FIG. 21, and FIG. 22B is a cross-sectional view of the vertical displacement unit 400 along the line XXIIb-XXIIb of FIG. . In FIG. 22A, the outer shapes of the roller 492a and the decorative member 450 are shown by broken lines.

  23A to 23C are partially enlarged front views of the vertical displacement unit 400, and FIG. 24A is a cross-sectional view of the vertical displacement unit 400 taken along the line XXIVa-XXIVa in FIG. 24B is a cross-sectional view of the vertical displacement unit 400 taken along the line XXIVb-XXIVb in FIG. 23B, and FIG. 24C is a vertical view taken along the line XXIVc-XXIVc in FIG. 4 is a cross-sectional view of a displacement unit 400. FIG. 23A to 23C illustrate the transition state of the vertical displacement unit 400, and the outer shapes of the roller 492a and the decorative member 450 are illustrated by broken lines.

  As shown in FIGS. 21 and 22, when the vertical displacement unit 400 is located at the first position, the decorative member 450 is located below. In this case, as described above, both ends of the decorative member 450 are located on the back side of the restriction unit 490.

  In this case, when the decorative member 450 is disposed at the first position and the rotation unit 500 described later is rotated, the decorative member 450 may rattle with respect to the front base 410 along with the rotational displacement. In view of this, there are some which provide engagement means for engaging the decorative member 450 and the front base 410 to suppress rattling. The engaging means is disposed on one of the decorative member 450 or the front base 410 and is urged by the urging means. The engaging means is formed to be engageable with the engaging member, and the decorative member 450 or the front base. And the engaged member disposed on the other side of 410, and using the displacement of the decorative member 450 relative to the front base 410 (displacement toward the first position), the engagement member is resisted against the urging force of the urging means. When the decorative member 450 is disposed in the first position, the engaging member is advanced by the urging force of the urging means and engaged with the engaged member. Thereby, the relative displacement of the main body member with respect to the front base 410 is restricted by the engagement of the engaging means, and rattling of the main body member with respect to the base member due to the displacement of the displacement member is suppressed.

  However, in such a conventional engaging means, in order to place the engaging means in the engaged state (the main body member is disposed at the first position), the engaging member is against the urging force of the urging means. Not only does it need to be retracted, but it also resists the urging force of the urging means when releasing the engaged state of the engaging means (displace the decorative member 450 from the first position to the second position). Therefore, there is a problem in that the engaging member needs to be retracted, and a driving force necessary to displace the decorative member 450 relative to the front base 410 increases.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, the contact surface 452h of the front base 452 of the decorative member 450 is in contact with the roller 492a of the restriction unit 490, so that the relative displacement of the front base 410 is restricted. Thus, rattling of the decorative member 450 with respect to the front base 410 due to the rotational displacement of the rotating unit 500 can be suppressed.

  In this case, since the displacement direction when the decoration member 450 is arranged at the first position and the rotation direction of the roller member 492 of the restriction unit 490 are set substantially parallel, the decoration member 450 is displaced to the first position. When doing so, the roller member 492 of the restriction unit 490 can be rotated in accordance with the displacement, so that the driving force required to displace the decorative member 450 relative to the front base 410 can be suppressed.

  In addition, since the roller 492a is formed of an elastic body that can be elastically deformed as described above, when the roller 492a of the restriction unit 490 comes into contact with the contact surface 452h of the front base 452, the outer periphery of the roller 492a. By elastically deforming the surface side, the front base 452 can easily hold the roller 492a. Thereby, it is difficult to rotate the roller 492a, and rattling of the decorative member 450 with respect to the front base 410 can be suppressed.

  The elastic body is preferably a viscoelastic body exemplified by rubber or urethane. In this case, due to the vibration control effect, a vibration damping function or a vibration insulating function for attenuating and insulating vibration input from the decorative member 450 to the front base 410 as the rotating unit 500 is displaced can be achieved. This is because wear and failure of various devices arranged on the 410 side, loosening of the fastening portion, and the like can be suppressed. In particular, when the rotating unit 500 is periodically displaced (for example, when it is rotated at a relatively high speed in order to function as a versatile writer), vibration with a relatively small amplitude and high frequency is generated from the decorative member 450. Since it is inputted to the front base 410, it is particularly effective to employ a viscoelastic body.

  Further, when the decorative member 450 and the regulation unit 490 (roller 492a) come into contact with each other, the product accuracy and assembly error of the vertical displacement unit 400 can be absorbed by the amount of elastic deformation of the roller 492a. Therefore, it is not necessary to increase the accuracy when molding the part, and the manufacturing cost of the part can be reduced. As a result, the manufacturing cost of the product can be reduced.

  Further, since the impact sound generated when the decorative member 450 and the regulating unit 490 (roller 492a) come into contact with each other can be absorbed by the elastic deformation of the roller 492a, the player can be prevented from hearing the sound when the decorative member 450 is displaced. It is possible to suppress damage to the player's interest. In addition, since the rotation axis direction of the roller 492a is orthogonal to the displacement direction of the decorative member 450, the roller 492a can be rotated in accordance with the displacement of the decorative member 450, and the decorative member 450 and the roller 492a contact each other. When they are displaced in contact with each other, it is possible to suppress the sound of rubbing each other's members. In other words, if the protrusion is brought into contact with the displacement member to prevent the displacement member from being stopped or rattling, the members are rubbed against each other when the displacement member is displaced in contact with the protrusion. Sound is generated.

  In contrast, in this embodiment, after the roller 492a and the decorative member 450 are brought into contact with each other, the roller 492a can be rotated along the displacement direction of the decorative member 450. Can be suppressed, and generation of a noise generated by rubbing between the decorative member 450 and the roller 492a can be suppressed.

  Further, since the regulation of the decoration member 450 with respect to the front base 410 is possible by the regulation unit 490 of the side wall member 470 fastened and fixed to the front base 410, the regulation unit 490 that is relatively heavy is disposed on the decoration member 450. When it is not necessary, the decorative member 450 can be reduced in weight to suppress the driving force necessary for the displacement of the decorative member 450, and when the rattling of the decorative member 450 with respect to the front base 410 due to the displacement of the rotating unit 500 is suppressed. In addition, since the decorative member 450 serving as a vibration source can be reduced in weight, rattling can be easily suppressed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 23 and FIG. 24, a contact state between the decorative member 450 and the restriction unit 490 when the decorative member 450 is displaced from the second position to the first position will be described.

  As shown in FIGS. 23A and 24A, when the decorative member 450 is positioned above the restriction unit 490, the outer peripheral surface of the roller 492a is in contact with the decorative member 450 and the case member 491. Arranged without touching.

  The decorative member 450 is displaced downward from the state shown in FIGS. 23 (a) and 24 (a), and the lower end surface of the decorative member 450 is the case as shown in FIGS. 23 (b) and 24 (b). When the member 491 is displaced to a substantially vertical position substantially the same as the vertical position of the member 491, the outer peripheral surface of the roller 492a disposed above the restriction unit 490 and the front surface of the decorative member 450 are in contact with each other. It is assumed that Thereby, it can suppress that the decoration member 450 rattles back and forth, right and left.

  That is, the roller 492a disposed on the upper side is pushed by the decorative member 450 and rotated while being displaced in the radial direction, and is in contact with the decorative member 450 in the front-rear direction (FIG. 24B, left-right direction). Therefore, it is suppressed that the decoration member 450 rattles in the front-back direction. Further, the roller 492a can rotate in one direction around the axis of the shaft portion 492b and cannot rotate in the direction in which the decorative member 450 moves to the left and right, so that the decorative member 450 is prevented from rattling in the left and right direction. be able to.

  On the other hand, since the roller 492a can rotate around the axis of the shaft portion 492b, the decorative member 450 is displaced in the vertical direction at the first position even when the roller 492a and the rotation unit 500 are in contact with each other. Can be made.

  Further, as described above, since the inclined surface 452g is formed at the lower end of the contact surface 452h of the front base 452, the inclined surface 452g is used when the decorative member 450 is disposed at the first position. The roller 492a can be guided to the front side of the contact surface 452h. Thereby, the driving force required when the decorative member 450 is disposed at the first position can be suppressed.

  When the decorative member 450 is further displaced downward from the state shown in FIGS. 23B and 24B and is positioned at the first position, the outer peripheral surfaces of the two rollers 492a disposed in the restriction unit 490 And the front surface of the decorative member 450 can be brought into contact with each other.

  Here, when the rotating member (roller 492a) that rotates along the displacement direction of the decorative member 450 suppresses rattling of the decorative member 450 that is displaced up and down, the rotating member (roller 492a) It is difficult to regulate the decorative member 450 along the displacement direction so that the decorative member 450 is not displaced with respect to shakiness in the vertical direction.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, the rotational direction of the other side of the displacement member 430 (the short side where the drive-side sliding hole 431 is formed) is the rotational axis of the transmission gear 443 and the protrusion 443a. Is substantially coincident with the direction of the straight line connecting the two, so that the decorative member 450 can be prevented from rattling in the vertical direction at the first position. That is, in the present embodiment, only the vertical displacement that displaces the decorative member 450 to the first position can be allowed by the restriction unit 490, and at the second position, the transmission gear 443 and the displacement member 430 are By forming the dead point, it is possible to prevent the decorative member 450 from rattling in the vertical direction. As a result, since the relative displacement of the decorative member 450 with respect to the front base 410 can be restricted, rattling of the decorative member 450 with respect to the front base 410 due to the displacement of the rotating unit 500 can be suppressed.

  In addition, the roller 492a disposed below the roller 492a disposed side by side in the vertical direction is in a state of contacting not only the decorative member 450 but also the bulging portion 491c of the case member 491.

  That is, when the roller 492a disposed on the lower side comes into contact with the decorative member 450, the rubber component of the roller 492a is pushed out (elastically deformed) to the front side (right side in FIG. 24C). Thus, the outer peripheral surface on the front side is brought into contact with the side surface of the bulging portion 491c of the case member 491, and the roller 492a is sandwiched between the contact surface 452h of the decorative member 450 and the bulging portion 491c of the case member 491. be able to. Thereby, the resistance when the roller 492a rotates around the shaft portion 492b is increased, and the roller 492a can be made difficult to rotate. Therefore, the resistance when the decorative member 450 is displaced in the vertical direction can be increased. As a result, since the relative displacement of the decorative member 450 with respect to the front base 410 can be restricted, rattling of the decorative member 450 with respect to the front base 410 due to the displacement of the rotating unit 500 can be suppressed.

  Here, as a state in which the roller 492a is sandwiched between the contact surface 452h of the decorative member 450 and the bulging portion 491c of the case member 491, the shaft portion 492b of the roller 492a is moved in the front-rear direction (FIG. 24C, left-right direction). It may be possible to form a state in which the roller 492a is sandwiched between the contact surface 452h of the decorative member and the bulging portion 491c of the case member 491. In this case, however, the shaft portion 492b of the roller 492a has a diameter. A structure that can be displaced in the direction is required.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the roller 492a is formed of an elastic body, and the roller 492a is formed between the contact surface 452h of the decorative member 450 and the bulging portion 491c of the case member 491 by utilizing the elastic deformation. Therefore, it is not necessary to form the shaft portion 492b of the roller 492a so as to be displaceable in the radial direction, and the shaft portion 492b can be formed as a shaft fixed to the front base 410. Thereby, the structure can be simplified, and the durability can be improved and the product cost can be reduced.

  Further, since the roller 492a is elastically displaced and is sandwiched between the contact surface 452h of the decorative member 450 and the bulging portion 491c of the case member 491, the decorative member 450 with respect to the front base 410 is displaced by the displacement of the rotating unit 500. When the roller 492a is sandwiched between the decorative member 450 and the bulging portion 491c of the case member 491 due to rattling, the elastic recovery force of the roller 492a is used to make the decorative member 450 and the case member 491 The bulging portion 491c can easily hold the roller 492a more firmly. This makes it difficult for the roller 492a to rotate, and the relative backlash of the decorative member 450 with respect to the front base 410 can be suppressed, so that the backlash of the decorative member 450 with respect to the front base 410 accompanying the rotational displacement of the rotary unit 500 can be suppressed. Can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, since the displacement resistance can be increased as the decorative member 450 is displaced from the upper position to the lower end position, when the decorative member 450 is stopped at the first position, other parts are damaged by the stopping operation. This can be suppressed.

  That is, in this embodiment, since the rotation unit is provided in the center of the decorative member 450, when the component is displaced in the direction of gravity and stopped, the kinetic energy at the time of displacement is added to each component in addition to the weight of the decorative member 450. Acting, parts are easily damaged.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when being displaced to the first position, the stopping operation can be assisted, so that the stopping operation in a direction that is more easily damaged can be assisted. As a result, it is possible to effectively prevent the parts from being damaged and improve the reliability of the product.

  Furthermore, since two rollers 492a are arranged in the vertical direction along the displacement direction of the decorative member 450, the contact surfaces 452h of the decorative member 450 are in contact with each other at a predetermined interval. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the decorative member 450 from being tilted, and it is possible to suppress rattling with respect to the upper surface base 510 of the rotation unit 500. As a result, rattling of the decorative member 450 with respect to the front base 410 accompanying the rotational displacement of the rotating unit 500 can be effectively suppressed.

  Further, the rotation plane of the rotation unit 500 described later is set to be substantially the same as the contact surface 452h of the front base 452 (that is, the surface with which the roller 492a contacts). That is, the rotation plane of the rotation unit 500 is arranged in parallel with each of the contact surface 452h of the front base 452 and the rotation axis of the roller 492a. Accordingly, the front base of the decorative member 450 accompanying the rotational displacement of the rotary unit 500 is suppressed while suppressing the driving force required when the decorative member 450 is arranged at the first position and when the decorative member 450 is displaced from the first position to the second position. The backlash with respect to 410 can be suppressed effectively.

  More specifically, since the displacement form of the rotation unit 500 is rotation, the decorative member 450 rotates due to the precession movement of the rotation unit 500 (movement that the rotation axis of the rotation unit 500 swings like a circle). The unit 500 is vibrated in a mode (mode) that tilts the plane of rotation of the unit 500. Therefore, the rotation plane of the rotation unit 500 is substantially parallel to the contact surface 452h of the front base 452 and the rotation axis of the rotation unit 500, so that the contact surface 452h (that is, the roller 492a of the front base 452 is Can be pressed against the outer peripheral surface of the roller 492a from the direction orthogonal to the rotation axis of the roller 492a. As a result, when the decorative member 450 is disposed at the first position and when the decorative member 450 is displaced from the first position to the second position, the roller 492a is rotated to suppress the driving force necessary for the displacement of the decorative member 450. However, the contact of the contact surface 452h of the front base 452 with the outer peripheral surface of the roller 492a can effectively suppress rattling of the decorative member 450 with respect to the front base 410 due to the displacement (rotation) of the rotation unit 500. .

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 25 to 36, the rotating unit 500 disposed on the decorative member 450 will be described.

  First, the entire configuration of the decorative member 450 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 25 and 26. FIG. 25 is an exploded front perspective view of the decorative member 450, and FIG. 26 is an exploded rear perspective view of the decorative member 450.

  As shown in FIGS. 25 and 26, the decorative member 450 includes gears 454 to 456 disposed between the front base 452 and the back base 453 facing each other, and a drive motor attached to the back side of the back base 453. 457 and a signal transmission mechanism 458 attached to the back side of the front base 452 are mainly provided.

  The front base 452 is formed with a recess 452c that is recessed in the back side at the center thereof. The recess 452c is formed in an annular shape when viewed from the front, and has an insertion hole 452f formed through the shaft portion in the front-rear direction and openings 452d and 452e opened in the left-right direction on the side surfaces of both ends in the left-right direction. The

  The back surface base 453 is formed from a horizontally long rectangular plate-like body in front view smaller than the front view shape of the front base 452, and has an opening 453b that opens in the front-rear direction at the center and a circular shape on the right side in front view. The insertion hole 453a that opens and the shaft support portions 453c and 453d that protrude in a columnar shape on the front side are mainly provided.

  The insertion hole 453a is an opening through which a shaft portion of a drive motor 457, which will be described later, is inserted. The insertion hole 453a is opened at a position facing the shaft portion of the drive motor 457 and has an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the shaft portion of the drive motor 457. Opened in a circular shape. The opening 453b is an opening through which a signal transmission mechanism 458 described later is inserted, and is formed in an inner hole shape larger than the shape of the signal transmission mechanism 458 when viewed from the front.

  The shaft support portions 453c and 453d are shaft portions that are inserted into shaft portions of gears 455 and 456, which will be described later, and are set in a columnar shape having an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of each gear 455 and 456.

  The drive motor 457 is a motor in which an encoder for position detection is incorporated, and can detect the rotation angle and rotation speed of the motor. The drive motor 457 is attached to the back surface of the back surface base 453 as described above, and the shaft portion of the drive motor 457 is inserted through the insertion hole 453a of the back surface base 453, and from the front side of the back surface base 453, screws, bolts, etc. It is fastened and fixed with.

  The gear 454 meshes with the gear 455 and is fixedly disposed on the shaft portion of the drive motor 457 inserted through the insertion hole 453a of the rear base 453. Further, the gear 454 is formed to have a thickness in the front-rear direction smaller than that between the back base 453 and the front base 452 facing each other, and when the back base 453 is disposed on the front base 452, the front base 452 and the back base 453 are arranged. It is possible to rotate without abutting against the side surface. When a rotational driving force is applied from the driving motor 457, the gear 454 is rotated, and the rotational driving force can be transmitted to the gear 455 meshed with the gear 454.

  The gear 455 is engaged with a back surface base 571 (see FIG. 26) of the rotation unit 500 to be described later, and the shaft hole is inserted through a shaft support portion 453c protruding forward of the back surface base 453, and rotates about the shaft support portion 453c. It is possible to arrange. Further, the gear 455 is formed to have a thickness in the front-rear direction smaller than that between the back base 453 and the front base 452, and when the back base 453 is disposed on the front base 452, the front base 452 and the back base 453 are disposed. It is possible to rotate without abutting against the side surface. When a rotational driving force is applied from the driving motor 457, the rotational driving force is transmitted from the gear 454 to the gear 455, and the rear base 571 is rotated. As a result, the rotation unit 500 is rotated.

  A part of the gear 455 is inserted through the first opening 452d of the front base 452, and meshed with the rear base 571 of the rotating unit 500 disposed in front of the front base 452.

  A gear 456 is engaged with the rear base 571 of the rotation unit 500. The gear 456 is a member in which a protrusion for detecting an initial position (reference position) is protruded on the side surface (end surface in the axial direction), and the shaft hole is externally fitted to the shaft support portion 453d of the back surface base 453 so that the back surface. It is disposed on the base 453. Further, a part of the gear 456 is inserted into the second opening 452 e and meshed with the back surface base 571. Further, the gear 456 is formed to have a thickness smaller in the front-rear direction than between the rear base 453 and the front base 452, and when the rear base 453 is disposed on the front base 452, the front base 452 and the rear base 453 are arranged. It is possible to rotate without abutting against the side surface. When a rotational driving force is applied from the driving motor 457 and the gear 454, the gear 455, and the rotating unit 500 (rear base 571) are rotated, the rotational driving force is transmitted from the rear base 571 and the gear 456 is rotated. . As a result, the initial position of the rotation unit 500 can be detected.

  In this case, the number of gear teeth engraved on the outer peripheral surface of the gear 456 and the number of gear teeth of the gear 571a1 engraved on the outer peripheral surface of the back base 571 of the rotary unit 500 are set to be the same. Thus, the gear 456 can be rotated once for each rotation of the rotation unit 500. Thereby, initial position detection (reference position) can be easily performed.

  The signal transmission mechanism 458 is a slip ring that transmits electric power and signals to the irradiation unit 530 of the rotating rotation unit 500, and is configured so that the shaft portion 458a protruding from the front can rotate. The shaft portion 458a is formed in a substantially D-shaped cross section, and a passage is opened inside the shaft portion 458a, and electric wiring is inserted through the passage.

  When the signal transmission mechanism 458 is attached to the back side of the front base 452 through the opening 453b of the back base 453, the electric wiring in which the shaft portion 458a of the signal transmission mechanism 458 is inserted into the shaft portion 458a. At the same time, the front base 452 protrudes from the front.

  Next, the overall configuration of the rotation unit 500 will be described with reference to FIGS. 27 is an exploded front perspective view of the rotating unit 500, and FIG. 28 is an exploded rear perspective view of the rotating unit 500. FIG. 29A is a top view of the rotation unit 500, FIG. 29B is a front view of the rotation unit 500 in the XXIXb direction view of FIG. 29A, and FIG. It is sectional drawing of the rotation unit 500 in the XXIXc-XXIXc line | wire of 29 (a). The rotation unit 500 will be described in a state at an initial position (reference position).

  As shown in FIGS. 27 to 29, the rotation unit 500 includes an upper surface base 510 that forms an upper side surface, a lower surface base 520 that forms a lower side surface, and an irradiation unit 530 disposed below the upper surface base 510. An intermediate member 540 disposed below the irradiation unit 530, a reflector 560 disposed below the intermediate member 540, a front cover 550 disposed in front of the reflector 560, and an upper surface A rotation transmission unit 570 disposed on the back side of the base 510 and the lower surface base 520 is mainly provided.

  The rotation transmission unit 570 is a unit for transmitting the rotation of the drive motor 457 to the upper surface base 510 and the lower surface base 520, and includes a rear surface base 571 disposed on the rear surface side and a front surface base 572 disposed on the front surface side. And a bearing BR sandwiched between the front base 572 and the rear base 571 facing each other, and a fastening member 573 disposed inside the bearing BR.

  The back surface base 571 is formed in an annular shape in front view, and a bulging portion 571a that bulges out in an annular shape in back view is formed on the back side from the inner peripheral edge thereof. A gear 571a1 is formed on the outer side surface of the bulging portion 571a. The gear 571a1 meshes with the gear 455 as described above. As a result, by applying a driving force to the driving motor 457, the driving force of the rotation is transmitted to the back base 571 (gear 571a1) via the gears 454 and 455, and the rotating unit 500 is rotated.

  The front base 572 is formed in an annular shape when viewed from the front, and is provided with an outer standing portion 572a that is erected from the outer peripheral edge portion, and an inner standing portion 572b that is erected in a U-shape when viewed from the inner circumferential circle portion. And comprising.

  The outer standing portion 572a is a wall portion for forming a gap between the front surface of the back surface base 571 and the back surface of the front surface base 572, and sandwiching the bearing BR and the fastening member 573 between the opposed surfaces. The height is set substantially the same as the axial width dimension of BR, and the inner shape is set substantially the same as the outer diameter of the bearing BR.

  Further, the side surface on the standing tip side of the outer standing portion 572a is brought into contact with the front surface of the back surface base 571, and the screw inserted from the back surface side of the back surface base 571 is fastened and fixed. As a result, the back base 571 and the front base 572 are fastened and fixed.

  The inner standing portion 572b is a member that prevents the wiring connecting the inside of the rotation unit 500 and the shaft portion 458a of the signal transmission mechanism 458 from being twisted when the shaft portion 458a of the signal transmission mechanism 458 described above is rotated. The inner shape of the shaft 458a of the signal transmission mechanism 458 is substantially the same as or slightly larger than the outer shape of the shaft portion 458a.

  Therefore, when the rotation unit 500 is disposed on the front base 452, the inner standing portion 572 b can be externally fitted to the shaft portion 458 a of the signal transmission mechanism 458. Therefore, when the rotation unit 500 is rotated, the planar portions of the inner standing portion 572b and the shaft portion 458a of the signal transmission mechanism 458 mesh with each other, and the shaft portion 458a of the signal transmission mechanism 458 can be rotated. As a result, the wiring connecting the rotation unit 500 and the signal transmission mechanism 458 can be prevented from being twisted.

  The bearing BR is a member that suppresses transmission of the rotation to the front base 452 when the rotary unit 500 is rotated with respect to the front base 452, and is an annular metal member having a different inner diameter and outer diameter. Are combined, and a spherical or cylindrical metal body is fitted between the two members.

  The outer diameter of the bearing BR is set to be substantially the same as the inner diameter of the outer standing portion 572a of the front base 572. As a result, the bearing BR can be fixedly disposed on the outer standing portion 572a of the front base 572. In this case, the inner diameter of the back surface base 571 is set smaller than the outer diameter of the bearing BR. Therefore, when the bearing BR is sandwiched between the front base 572 and the rear base 571, the bearing BR is prevented from being detached from the rotation transmission unit 570.

  The fastening member 573 is a member that fastens the rotary unit 500 to the front base 452. The fastening member 573 is formed in an annular shape when viewed from the front, and includes a protruding wall portion 573a that protrudes from the outer peripheral surface on the front side.

  The outer diameter of the fastening member 573 is formed substantially the same as the inner diameter of the bearing BR. On the other hand, the inner diameter of the fastening member 573 is formed larger than the outer shape of the inner standing portion 572b of the front base 572. Accordingly, the fastening member 573 is disposed in the rotation transmission unit 570 in such a manner that the outer edge portion thereof is fitted into the inner edge portion of the bearing BR and the inner edge portion 572b of the front base is inserted into the inner edge portion. .

  The protruding wall portion 573a is a protruding portion for suppressing the fastening member 573 from being detached from the assembled rotation transmission unit 570, and is formed to protrude from the outer peripheral surface of the fastening member 573 over the entire circumference with a fixed protruding dimension. The outer diameter is set larger than the inner diameter of the bearing BR. Therefore, the fastening member 573 can be prevented from being detached from the assembled rotation transmission unit 570 by fitting the fastening member 573 into the bearing BR from the front side of the bearing BR.

  More specifically, it is possible to restrict the fastening member 573 from moving rearward with respect to the bearing BR by fitting the fastening member 573 into the bearing BR from the front of the bearing BR. On the other hand, the movement of the fastening member 573 toward the front side is such that the bearing BR is disposed between the front base 572 and the back base 571 so that the front side surface of the fastening member 573 and the back side of the front base 572 are moved. The side surface of this is abutted and regulated. As a result, it is possible to prevent the fastening member 573 from coming off from the assembled rotation transmission unit 570.

  In addition, since the fastening member 573 that externally fits the bearing BR is fastened to the front base 452, it is possible to suppress transmission of the rotational motion when the rotary unit 500 is rotated to the front base 452.

  That is, when the rotation unit 500 is rotated, only the annular metal body disposed outside the bearing BR is rotated, and the rotation is performed on the annular metal body disposed inside. By not transmitting, it is possible to suppress the fastening member 573 from rotating. As a result, the rotation unit 500 can be rotated with respect to the decorative member 450.

The top surface base 510 is formed in an arc shape that curves to the back side (upper side in FIG. 29A) when viewed from above, and the front edge portion curves downward (to the back side in FIG. 29A). It is formed in a curved shape. The upper surface base 510 includes a horizontal direction (FIG. 29 (b) left-right direction) escutcheon 511 bulging front view semicircular in central, an air blowing hole 512 is penetrated in the vertical direction (thickness direction) The pressing portion 513 protruding in a columnar shape is mainly provided on the lower side.

  The decorative portion 511 is a portion that is fastened to the upper side of the front base 572 of the rotation transmission unit 570 described above, and a fastening hole that is fastened to the front base 572 is formed on the back side. The semicircular radius is formed larger than the radius of the outer diameter of the front base 572. Thereby, it is fastened with the front base 572 of the rotation transmission unit 570, and when viewed from the front, the upper side of the front base 572 can be made invisible.

  The ventilation hole 512 is a through-hole penetrating in the vertical direction (FIG. 29C, vertical direction), and is formed in a long hole shape that is opened long in the front-rear direction (FIG. 29A, vertical direction). A plurality of air holes 512 are formed in the left-right direction along the arc shape of the upper surface base 510.

  When the upper surface base 510 is combined with the lower surface base 520, the pressing unit 513 forms a gap between the irradiation unit 530 sandwiched between the upper surface base 510 and the upper surface base 510, and restricts the movement of the irradiation unit 530. The protrusion height is set to the height up to the side surface on the upper surface side of the irradiation unit 530 (see FIG. 29C). In addition, a plurality of pressing portions 513 are formed so as to protrude from the rear edge of the upper surface base 510.

The lower surface base 520 is formed in substantially the same shape as the upper surface base 510 and is disposed symmetrically with the upper surface base 510 about the axis of the rotation transmission unit 570. In addition, since the decoration part 521 and the ventilation hole 522 formed in the lower surface base 520 are the same shapes as the decoration part 511 and the ventilation hole 512 formed in the upper surface base 510, the detailed description is abbreviate | omitted.

  The decorative portion 521 of the lower surface base 520 is a portion fastened to the lower side of the front base 572 of the rotation transmission unit 570, and is fastened to the front base 572 of the rotation transmission unit 570 so that the front base when viewed from the front. The lower side of 572 can be made invisible. Therefore, by combining the upper surface base 510 and the lower surface base 520, it is possible to prevent the player from losing the interest of the player by visually observing the mechanism when the rotating unit 500 is rotated.

  The irradiation unit 530 is mainly provided with a base member 531 and an LED 532 disposed on the lower surface side of the base member 531.

  The base member 531 is formed of a plate-like body having an outer shape as viewed from above, which is slightly smaller than the shape of the upper surface base 510 as viewed from above. Thereby, when the upper surface base 510 and the lower surface base 520 are disposed in combination in the vertical direction, the base member 531 can be made invisible from the vertical direction.

  In addition, the base member 531 is formed with a through-hole 531a penetrating in the vertical direction at the front edge. The through-hole 531a is a member that suppresses displacement of the base member 531 and will be described in detail later. The base member 531 is connected to the wiring of the shaft portion 458b of the signal transmission mechanism 458 described above. Thereby, light can be irradiated from LED532 mentioned later via IC and a capacitor incorporated in the base member 531.

  The LED 532 is formed as a surface-mount type LED, and has a rectangular outer shape (outer shape of a cavity molded from a resin ceramic) in front view, and an irradiation surface (epoxy or silicon sealed in the cavity) that emits light. Etc.) is formed in a circular shape in front view. In addition, a plurality of LEDs 532 are arranged on the lower surface side of the base member 531, and a plurality of LEDs 532 are arranged in the left-right direction along the arc shape of the base member 531 when viewed from above. Thereby, LED532 can irradiate light to the reflecting plate 560 mentioned later.

  The intermediate member 540 is formed of a plate-like body whose outer shape in a top view is substantially the same as the top view shape of the upper surface base 510. Thereby, when the upper surface base 510 and the lower surface base 520 are disposed in combination in the vertical direction, the intermediate member 540 can be disposed between the opposing surfaces.

  The front cover 550 is formed of a transparent light-transmitting material and has an arc shape when viewed from above. The front cover 550 is disposed on the intermediate member 540 side.

  The reflection plate 560 is formed of a plate-like body having a silver decoration (plating) on the outer surface and having an outer shape in a top view substantially the same as a top view shape of the upper surface base 510. In addition, the reflection plate 560 includes a recessed portion 564 in which a front side surface is notched rearward.

  The concave notch 564 is arranged such that the front cover 550 is inserted into the cutout portion so that the front surface of the front cover 550 is positioned substantially the same as the front surfaces of the upper surface base 510, the lower surface base 520, and the intermediate member 540. Can be set. That is, the width dimension of the front cover 550 in the front-rear direction is set to the distance dimension from the front surface of the recessed portion 564 of the reflector 560 to the front surfaces of the upper surface base 510, the lower surface base 520, and the intermediate member 540. Thereby, it can suppress that the front cover 550 protrudes from the rotation unit 500, and is arrange | positioned. As a result, the rotary unit 500 can be assembled as an integrated unit with few irregularities, and when the rotary unit 500 is visually recognized, it is difficult to understand the outer shape of each part, and it is possible to suppress the player's interest from being impaired. .

  Next, the intermediate member 540 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 30A is a top view of the intermediate member 540, and FIG. 30B is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the intermediate member 540 taken along the line XXXb-XXXb in FIG. 30A.

  As shown in FIG. 30A and FIG. 30B, the intermediate member 540 has a first outer edge portion erected upward from the outer edge portion (a direction in which the upper surface base 510 is disposed) when viewed from above. 541 and the second outer edge portion 542, an irradiation hole 543 penetratingly formed in the vertical direction, an irradiation restricting portion 544 protruding from the periphery of the irradiation hole 543, and a protrusion protruding from the front edge It is mainly provided with a portion 545 and a groove 546 that is recessed in the outer peripheral edge of the irradiation restricting portion 544.

  The first outer edge portion 541 is formed on the outer edge portion on the front side of the intermediate member 540. The inner diameter dimension of the curved shape in the top view on the front side (lower side in FIG. 30A) of the first outer edge portion 541 is substantially the same as the outer diameter dimension of the curved shape on the front side in the top view of the base member 531 of the irradiation unit 530. Set the same. The standing dimension of the first outer edge portion 541 is set larger than the thickness dimension (vertical dimension) of the base member 531. Therefore, when the rotation unit 500 is assembled, the irradiation unit 530 can be shielded by the first outer edge portion 541 so that it cannot be seen from the front side.

  The second outer edge portion 542 is formed on the outer edge portion on the back side of the intermediate member 540. The shape of the second outer edge portion 542 in the top view on the back side (upper side in FIG. 30A) is formed substantially the same as the shape on the back side in the top view of the base member 531 of the irradiation unit 530. The standing dimension of the second outer edge portion 542 is set lower than that of the first outer edge portion 541. Therefore, when the rotating unit 500 is assembled, the lower side surface of the irradiation unit 530 is disposed in a state of being in contact with the standing front end surface of the second outer edge portion 542. Therefore, the introduced outside air can be smoothly discharged to the back surface.

  The irradiation hole 543 is a hole for individually dividing the light emitted from the plurality of LEDs 532 provided in the irradiation unit 530, and is opened at a position facing the LED 532 provided in the irradiation unit 530. . Thereby, it can suppress that the light of adjacent LED532 irradiates other range. Further, the inner diameter of the irradiation hole 543 on the irradiation unit 530 side is set to be substantially the same as the outer diameter of the irradiation surface of the LED 532, and their mutual axes are arranged coaxially. Thereby, the light emitted from the LED 532 can be efficiently incident on the reflection portion 563 of the reflection plate 560 described later via the irradiation hole 543.

  Further, the irradiation hole 543 has an inner diameter that increases from the upper surface side (the LED 532 side) toward the lower surface side. Thereby, the light emitted from the LED 532 can be efficiently incident on the reflecting portion 563 of the reflecting plate 560 through the irradiation hole 543.

  The irradiation restricting portion 544 is provided to protrude around the irradiation hole 543 described above. Thereby, since the gap between the LED 532 and the upper surface of the intermediate member 540 facing each other can be reduced, the light of the LED 532 can be easily incident on the irradiation hole 543 and can be prevented from leaking out of the irradiation hole 543. As a result, the intensity of the afterimage display light due to the afterimage effect can be increased.

  Further, the projection dimension of the irradiation restricting portion 544 is set to be substantially the same as the standing dimension of the second outer edge portion 542, and when the rotating unit 500 is assembled, the projection leading end surface of the irradiation restricting portion 544 and the irradiation unit 530 are set. The LED 532 is brought into contact with the LED 532. Thereby, since it can suppress that the light of adjacent LED enters into the irradiation hole 543, the outer diameter of the afterimage display by an afterimage effect can be clarified. In addition, since the inner diameter of the irradiation hole 543 on the irradiation unit 530 side is set to be substantially the same as the outer diameter of the irradiation surface of the LED 532, the area of the irradiation restricting portion 544 that contacts the LED 532 can be secured, so that the light of each LED 532 is emitted. Leakage to the outside of the irradiation hole 543 can be suppressed. As a result, the intensity of the afterimage display light due to the afterimage effect can be increased.

  Furthermore, since the irradiation restriction part 544 is connected to the adjacent irradiation restriction part 544 and the outer peripheral surfaces thereof, the rigidity of the intermediate member 540 can be increased. In this case, the irradiation restricting portion 544 has a circular outer peripheral surface, and the adjacent irradiation restricting portions 544 are connected to each other's outer peripheral surfaces. That is, the group in which the plurality of irradiation restricting portions 544 are connected is formed with an uneven outer shape (a shape in which a plurality of outwardly protruding arcs are connected), so that a space (surface area) is ensured and the heat dissipation effect is enhanced. However, the rigidity of the intermediate member 540 can be increased by utilizing the contour of the outer shape.

  The projecting portion 545 is a projection that restricts the irradiation unit 530 from moving back and forth and from side to side, and is formed at a position where the projection unit 530 is inserted into the through hole 531 a of the base member 531 when the rotation unit 500 is assembled. The projecting portion 545 is formed in a shape in which cylinders having different outer diameter shapes are vertically combined, and a large-diameter portion 545a on the base side and a small-diameter portion 545b on the distal end side having a smaller diameter than the large-diameter portion 545a. Formed from.

  The large-diameter portion 545 a is a protrusion for forming a predetermined gap between the intermediate member 540 and the base member 531 when the irradiation unit 530 is disposed on the intermediate member 540, and penetrates the base member 531. The outer shape is set to be larger than the inner diameter of the hole 531a, and the protruding dimension is set to be substantially the same as the standing dimension of the second outer edge portion 542.

  Thereby, when the irradiation unit 530 is disposed on the intermediate member 540, the facing distance between the intermediate member 540 on the front side and the base member 531 of the irradiation unit 530 is defined. On the other hand, the facing distance between the intermediate member 540 on the back side and the base member 531 of the irradiation unit 530 is defined by the second outer edge portion 542. In addition, since the protruding distance of the large-diameter portion 545a and the standing distance of the second outer edge portion 542 are set to be substantially the same, the vertical side surface of the base member 531 of the irradiation unit 530 is changed to the vertical side surface of the intermediate member 540. It can arrange | position in parallel with respect to.

  The small diameter portion 545b is a protrusion for positioning the irradiation unit 530 with respect to the intermediate member 540 when the irradiation unit 530 is disposed on the intermediate member 540, and is approximately the same as the inner diameter of the through hole 531a of the base member 531. Set to the same or slightly smaller outer diameter. Therefore, when the irradiation unit 530 is disposed on the intermediate member 540, the through-hole 531a of the base member 531 is externally fitted to the small diameter portion 545b of the intermediate member 540, whereby the irradiation unit 530 with respect to the intermediate member 540 is moved in the front-rear and left-right directions. Can be specified.

  The groove portion 546 is a groove that extends along the base of the irradiation restricting portion 544 and is recessed in a U-shaped cross section. Since the area of contact between the side surface of the intermediate member 540 and the outside air is increased by the recessed portion of the groove portion 546, the heat dissipation of the intermediate member 540 is improved. Moreover, the heat dissipation effect can be enhanced while ensuring the rigidity of the intermediate member 540. That is, by forming the groove-shaped groove portion 546 extending along the base of the irradiation restricting portion 544, while minimizing the region recessed in the intermediate member 540, while ensuring the rigidity of the intermediate member 540, By the operation of the LED 532, the space can be expanded to a portion where the generated heat is particularly concentrated, and the heat dissipation effect can be enhanced.

  The groove width of the groove portion 546 is set to be smaller than the distance dimension from the outer peripheral edge portion of the irradiation restricting portion 544 to the irradiation hole 543, and the recessed depth of the groove portion 546 is more than half the plate thickness of the intermediate member 540. Set small.

  Next, the front cover 550 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 31A is a front view of the front cover 550, and FIG. 31B is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the front cover 550 taken along the line XXXIB-XXXIb in FIG. In addition, in FIG.31 (b), the spreading | diffusion part 551 is typically illustrated.

  As shown in FIGS. 31 (a) and 31 (b), the front cover 550 has a diffusion portion 551 on the side surface on the inner edge side (upper side in FIG. 31 (b)) on the lower side (left side in FIG. 31 (b)). Formed in preparation.

  The diffuser 551 is a roughened portion, and can diffuse the light irradiated to the diffuser 551 by irregularly reflecting the rough surface. The rough surface processing is a processing mode in which irregularities are formed on the surface.

  Next, the reflector 560 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 32A is a top view of the reflecting plate 560, and FIG. 32B is a partially enlarged sectional view of the reflecting plate 560 taken along the line XXXIIb-XXXIIb in FIG. In addition, in FIG.32 (b), the reflection part 563 is typically illustrated.

  32A and 32B, the reflector 560 is surrounded by a partition wall 561 standing on the upper surface side (the front side of FIG. 32A) and the partition wall 561. The reflective portion 563 formed on the upper surface of the region and the standing wall 562 standing along the edge on the back surface side are mainly provided.

  The partition wall 561 is erected in a U shape with the front side (the lower side in FIG. 32 (a)) open in a top view, and a plurality of partition walls 561 are provided in the left-right direction along the front edge of the reflector 560. The pieces are formed side by side. Further, the adjacent standing walls 562 are combined into a wall portion extending in the front direction to serve as one wall portion. Thereby, the space which arranges the partition wall 561 in parallel can be made small. As a result, the number of partition walls 561 can be maximized.

  The reflection portion 563 is formed by roughening the upper surface of a region surrounded by the front edge of the reflection plate 560 and the partition wall 561 in a top view by laser processing or the like. The reflecting portion 563 has a horizontal portion 563a formed from side surfaces parallel to the upper surface and the lower surface of the reflecting plate 560, and the thickness of the reflecting plate 560 increases as the reflecting portion 563 is connected to the horizontal portion 563a and separated from the horizontal portion 563a. And an inclined surface 563b inclined in the direction.

  The horizontal portion 563a is formed on a side surface other than the front edge portion among the side surfaces parallel to the upper surface and the lower surface of the reflecting plate 560. That is, the horizontal portion 563a (reflecting portion 563) is not formed on the edge portion on the front side, and roughening is not performed. Thereby, the reflection part 563 can be formed while holding the front edge of the reflection plate 560. As a result, it is not necessary to separately form a holding portion for roughening the surface of the reflector 560, and the manufacturing cost can be reduced.

  The inclined surface 563b is a portion that mainly reflects light emitted from the LED 532 of the irradiation unit 530 disposed on the upper surface side to the front side, and is inclined by 45 degrees toward the front side with respect to the irradiation surface of the LED 532. Formed on the surface.

  The connecting position between the horizontal portion 563 a and the inclined surface 563 b is set to a position where the connecting straight line passes through the axis of the irradiation surface of the LED 532. Thereby, the light irradiated toward the back side among the light irradiated from LED532 can be effectively reflected to the front side by the inclined surface 563b. On the other hand, the light irradiated to the front side among the light irradiated from LED532 can be reflected to the front side by the horizontal part 563a.

  As described above, the standing wall 562 is erected along the edge on the back side of the reflector 560, and the erected height is set to the same height as that of the partition wall 561. . Thereby, when the rotation unit 500 is assembled (the intermediate member 540 is disposed above the reflection plate 560), a space can be formed between the standing wall 562 and the partition wall 561. That is, an air layer can be formed between the reflector 560 and the intermediate member 540. As a result, it is possible to suppress heat from being stored inside the reflector 560 and the intermediate member 540, and the rotation unit 500 stores heat so that the base member 531 of the irradiation unit 530 disposed in the rotation unit 500 It is possible to suppress damage.

  As described above, the configured rotating unit 500 is assembled as follows. First, the fastening member 573 is fitted on the inner circle portion of the bearing BR from the front side, and the inner circle portion of the fastening member 573 is fitted on the inner standing portion 572b of the front base 572. After integrating the front base 572, the bearing BR, and the fastening member 573, the rear base 571 is disposed on the rear side thereof, and the front base 572 and the rear base 571 are fastened to assemble the rotation transmission unit 570 as a unit.

  The lower surface base 520 is disposed below the reflecting plate 560 at the front portion of the rotating unit 500 (the portion excluding the rotation transmission unit 570), and the lower surface base 520 and the reflecting plate 560 are fastened. After the lower surface base 520 and the reflection plate 560 are fastened and fixed, the intermediate member 540 is superimposed on the upper surface side of the reflection plate 560 with the front cover 550 sandwiched between the front surface side and the front surface cover 550. The irradiation unit 530 is disposed on the upper surface of the intermediate member 540 in a state in which the through hole 531a is externally fitted to the small-diameter portion 545b of the projecting portion 545 of the intermediate member 540. In this state, the upper surface base 510 is disposed from above and fastened to the intermediate member 540, whereby the front portion of the rotation unit 500 (the portion excluding the rotation transmission unit 570) is assembled as a unit.

  Next, the rotation transmission unit 570 is disposed behind the front portion of the rotation unit 500, and the rotation unit 500 and the rotation transmission unit 570 are fastened to assemble the rotation unit 500 as one unit.

  Next, with reference to FIG.33 and FIG.34, the light irradiated from LED532 of the irradiation unit 530 is demonstrated. 33A is a top view of the rotation unit 500, and FIG. 33B is a cross-sectional view of the rotation unit 500 taken along the line XXXIIIb-XXXIIIb in FIG. 33A. 34A and 34B are partially enlarged cross-sectional views of the rotation unit 500 in the XXXIV part of FIG. 33B.

  FIG. 33A shows a state where the upper surface base 510 and the irradiation unit 530 are removed from the rotation unit 500. Further, in FIGS. 34A and 34B, the light emitted from the LED 532 is illustrated by a two-dot chain line.

  As shown in FIG. 33A and FIG. 33B, below the irradiation hole 543 of the intermediate member 540, a reflection portion 563 that is partitioned as one region by being surrounded by the partition wall 561 is disposed. . As described above, since each LED 532 is disposed above each irradiation hole 543, the light irradiated from each LED 532 can be irradiated to the reflecting portions 563 at different positions. That is, since the light emitted from each LED 532 can be emitted in a state of being partitioned by each reflecting portion 563, the separation of the light of each LED 532 can be clarified. As a result, the light emitted from each LED 532 can be emitted only from the corresponding reflecting portion 563, and the external appearance of the afterimage display by the afterimage effect can be clarified.

  Further, the structure in which the light of the LED 532 is incident on the reflecting portion 563 of the corresponding reflecting plate 560 through the irradiation hole 543 of the intermediate member 540 is formed from the two members of the reflecting plate 560 and the intermediate member 540. The structure can be simplified as compared with the case where the body is composed of one member. Therefore, the product cost can be reduced.

  As shown in FIG. 34 (a), the light emitted from the LED 532 of the irradiation unit 530 to the inclined surface 563b of the reflecting plate 560 is irregularly reflected by the rough surface of the inclined surface 563b, and the front side (below FIG. 34 (a)). Side), is transmitted through the front cover 550, and is emitted to the front side of the gaming machine. That is, the light emitted from the LED 532 can be emitted to the front (front side) of the rotation unit 500. Therefore, even when the surface of the base member 531 is set so that the surface on which the LED 532 is mounted is substantially parallel to the rotation axis of the rotary unit 500, the player can visually recognize the light (flashing) of the LED 532 and display an afterimage by the afterimage effect. be able to.

  Moreover, the light irradiated from LED532 can be efficiently radiate | emitted to the player side by the inclined surface 563b of the reflecting plate 560. FIG. Therefore, stronger light can be emitted to the front side of the rotary unit 500. Therefore, it is possible to increase the intensity of the afterimage display light due to the afterimage effect.

  Among the light emitted from the LED 532 to the inclined surface 563b of the reflecting portion 563, there is light that is irregularly reflected by the rough surface of the inclined surface 563b and reflected by the surfaces facing the intermediate member 540 and the reflecting plate 560. . The light reflected by the opposing surfaces of the intermediate member 540 and the reflecting plate 560 is reflected again by the surfaces (the opposing surfaces of the intermediate member 540 and the reflecting plate 560), and is irradiated on the front cover 550.

  In this case, as described above, the intermediate member 540 is formed in white having a light absorption rate lower than that of black, so that the light reflected by the intermediate member 540 can be easily reflected again. On the other hand, as described above, the reflecting plate 560 has a silver decoration on the outer surface, and can easily reflect light reflected by the reflecting plate 560 again.

  Therefore, the light irradiated from the LED 532 to the reflecting portion 563 can be emitted from the front side (to the player side) of the rotating unit 500 in a state where the light is irregularly reflected by the rough surface and is uniformly dispersed. That is, it can suppress that the light radiate | emitted from opening of the reflection part 563 is visually recognized in the state biased to a part of the opening.

  As shown in FIG. 34 (b), the light emitted from the LED 532 of the irradiation unit 530 to the horizontal portion 563a of the reflector 560 is irregularly reflected by the rough surface of the horizontal portion 563a, and the front side (below FIG. 34 (b)). Reflected to the side). Therefore, the light emitted from the LED 532 can be emitted through the front cover 550 to the front side.

  In addition, since the rough surface of the horizontal part 563a is not formed at the front side end of the reflection plate 560, light can be easily emitted toward the front side (player side) of the rotary unit 500. In addition, the intensity of the afterimage display light due to the afterimage effect can be increased. That is, when the rough surface processing is performed on the front surface side end portion of the rotating unit 500 among the inner surfaces of the reflecting plate 560, light is irregularly reflected by the rough surface, and the front surface side (player side) of the rotating unit 500 is reflected. ), The front-side end of the reflector 560 is not formed, and at least a smooth surface that is flatter than the rough surface processed into the reflector 563 is diffusely reflected. Can be suppressed, and the light traveling toward the front side (player side) of the rotary unit 500 can be increased.

  Further, the partition wall 561 has a front side (recessed portion 564) formed at an end portion on the front side of the horizontal portion 563a (a portion where the rough surface processing of the reflection portion 563 is not formed (smooth surface)). Since the surface of the horizontal portion 563a is not formed with the roughened surface, the cross-sectional area of the inner surface of the portion of the horizontal portion 563a that is not formed is increased toward the end on the front side of the rotary unit 500. Increased (expanded diameter). Therefore, the light emitted toward the front side of the rotation unit 500 can be spread. That is, the area visually recognized as the light emitting region can be expanded more than the area of the light emitting surface of the LED 532. Therefore, the LED 532 can be downsized.

  Further, the front side of the reflecting plate 560 (the rotating unit 500) is formed so as to bend toward the rear side toward the end with the central portion (rotating axis) in the left-right direction as the center. The front end (recessed portion 564) in each region partitioned by the partition wall 561 is formed at the end portion on the side where the notched portion 564 is formed, as the end portion is radially separated from the rotation axis of the rotating unit 500. The length of the end of the side) is increased. Thereby, the visually recognized brightness (light brightness) of each of the plurality of reflecting portions 563 can be made uniform.

  That is, in the rotation unit 500, the displacement speed (circumferential speed) increases from the rotation axis (rotation center) toward the outer side in the radial direction. Therefore, when the LEDs 532 arranged in a row emit light with the same brightness, the rotation axis The light from the LED 532 closer to is more bright (brighter) than the light from the LED 532 farther from the rotation axis (outward in the radial direction).

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the front side (recessed notch) in each region partitioned by the partition wall 561 as the end portion on the front side of the reflecting plate 560 is separated from the rotation axis of the rotary unit 500 in the radial direction. Since the length dimension of the end portion on the side where the portion 564 is formed is increased, the reflection portion 563 (LED 532) that is spaced radially outward from the rotation axis of the rotation unit 500 increases the irregular reflection due to the rough surface. (I.e., by reducing the proportion of light directly visible to the player from the LED 532), it can be viewed as light with high brightness. As a result, it is possible to suppress the difference in brightness as viewed with eyes at the radial positions, and to make the brightness (light brightness) uniform.

  Further, the length dimension of the horizontal portion 563a of the reflecting plate 560 in the direction parallel to the axial direction of the rotating unit 500 is increased as the distance from the rotating shaft of the rotating unit 500 in the radial direction increases. Each visually recognized brightness (light brightness) can be made uniform.

  The light irradiating the front cover 550 can diffuse the traveling direction of the light by the diffusion portion 551 formed on the inner peripheral surface of the front cover 550. That is, due to the rough surface of the diffusion portion 551 of the front cover 550, the traveling direction of the light irradiated to the diffusion portion 551 can be bent in a plurality of different directions. As a result, the light emitted toward the front side of the rotating unit 500 can be spread. That is, the area visually recognized as the light emitting region can be expanded more than the area of the light emitting surface of the LED 532. Therefore, the LED 532 can be downsized.

  Also, here, if the light of the LED 532 is directly visible to the player (without allowing the light-transmissive material member to pass through), the light of the LED 532 has high directivity to the front, so the player is dazzling. There was a fear.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, since the surface which diffuses the light irradiated from LED532 is formed in two places, the reflecting plate 560 and the front cover 550, the directivity of the light irradiated from LED532 can be weakened. Thereby, it can suppress that a player visually recognizes the irradiated light and feels dazzling.

  Here, what has a plurality of light emitting means (LEDs 532) and performs display by an afterimage effect by blinking the light emitting means according to the rotational position is known. However, in the conventional light emitting means, the posture of the base (base member 531) is such that the surface on which the light emitting means is mounted is orthogonal to the rotation axis (that is, the irradiation direction of the light emitting means is directed to the front side (player side). Therefore, the outer shape in front view (viewed in the direction of the rotation axis) is increased. For this reason, there is a problem in that the visibility on the back side of the rotary unit 500 is hindered in a state where the rotation of the rotary display device (the rotary unit 500) is stopped.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the rotating unit 500 is configured such that the base member 531 on which the plurality of LEDs 532 are arranged is in a posture in which the surface on which the LEDs 532 are mounted is substantially parallel to the rotating shaft of the rotating unit 500. Since it is disposed between 510 and the lower surface base 520, the outer shapes of the upper surface base 510 and the lower surface base 520 in a front view (viewed in the rotation axis direction) can be suppressed. As a result, in the state where the rotation of the rotation unit 500 is stopped, it is possible to improve the visibility on the back side of the upper surface base 510 and the lower surface base 520.

  Next, the rotation of the rotation unit 500 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 35A and FIG. 35B are front views of the rotation unit 500. 36A and 36B are top views of the rotation unit 500. FIG.

  35 (a) to 36 (b), the flow of air generated by the rotating unit 500 is illustrated by a two-dot chain line, and the code of the airflow K is given. Further, the air holes 512 and 522 of the upper surface base 510 and the lower surface base 520 are illustrated by broken lines.

  Further, in the present embodiment, only the description when the rotation unit 500 is rotated counterclockwise in the front view is used. Since there is, explanation is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 35A and FIG. 35B, when the rotating unit 500 is rotated by the driving force of the driving motor 457 described above, external air enters through the air holes 512 and 522 by the rotation. An air flow K is generated inside the rotation unit 500.

  In this case, since the air holes 512 and 522 are opened in a tangential direction with respect to the rotation direction of the rotary unit 500, when the rotary unit 500 rotates, the air holes 512 and 522 pass through the air holes 512 and 522. External air can easily enter the inside of the rotary unit 500.

  More specifically, when the rotating unit 500 is rotated in the left direction when viewed from the front, at the initial position, the blow hole 512 of the upper surface base 510 formed on the right side of the front view and the blow hole of the lower surface base 520 formed on the left side of the front view. 522 is displaced in a direction in which air is taken into (inserted through) the air holes 512 and 522. As a result, when the rotating unit 500 rotates, air outside the rotating unit 500 can easily enter the rotating unit 500. Therefore, the heat generated when the LED 532 operates can be cooled.

  In addition, since the ventilation hole 512 of the upper surface base 510 and the ventilation hole 522 of the lower surface base 520 are formed to be pointed with respect to the rotation axis, when the rotation unit 500 rotates in the right direction when viewed from the front, the rotation at the initial position is performed. External air can be easily taken into the rotary unit 500 by the blower holes 512 of the upper surface base 510 formed on the left side of the unit 500 in front view and the blower holes 522 of the lower surface base 520 formed on the right side of front view. That is, even when the rotation unit 500 rotates in the right direction, the same effects as those described above (when the rotation unit 500 rotates to the left in front view) are obtained.

  Here, when the base (base member 531) on which the LED (LED 532) is mounted is arranged inside the rotating body (rotating unit 500), the LED emits light while rotating the rotating body. If the heat generated during the operation of the IC / capacitor cannot be sufficiently cooled, the soldering of the LED soldered to the substrate and the IC / capacitor for controlling the LED may melt, leading to poor contact.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the air holes 512 and 522 are opened in a tangential direction with respect to the rotation direction of the rotation unit 500, the outside air is taken into the rotation unit 500 by the rotation of the rotation unit 500. be able to. Therefore, the heat generated when the LED operates can be cooled.

  The air taken into the rotary unit 500 from the blow holes 512 and 522 mainly collides with the irradiation unit 530 or the reflection plate 560 and is dispersed. The airflow K dispersed on the back side of the rotating unit 500 (FIG. 35A, the back side of the paper surface) is moved to the outside of the rotating unit 500 from the back side opening (gap between the opposing surfaces) of the upper surface base 510 and the lower surface base 520. It is blown and released into the atmosphere.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 36 (a), the airflow K dispersed on the front side of the rotating unit 500 (FIG. 35 (a) on the front side of the paper surface) is radial from the rotating shaft by the centrifugal force of rotation of the rotating unit 500. The air is blown to the outside, and is blown to the outside of the rotating unit 500 to be released into the atmosphere (see FIG. 35A).

  That is, the rotating unit 500 is formed in a container-like shape with the back side opened by combining the upper surface base 510 and the lower surface base 520, so that the outside air taken in from the blow holes 512 and 522 is efficiently taken from the back side. Can be exhausted automatically, so that the heat generation can be cooled when the LED 532 operates. Further, by exhausting from the back side of the upper surface base 510 and the lower surface base 520 in this way, it is possible to suppress the exhaust from affecting the sphere flowing down the game area (or rolling the stage).

  Further, in the present embodiment, the upper surface base 510 and the lower surface base 520 have a rectangular shape when viewed from the front (that is, viewed in the direction of the rotation axis) that is elongated along the diameter direction in the rotation plane of the upper surface base 510 and the lower surface base 520. Therefore, the centrifugal force accompanying the rotation of the upper surface base 510 and the lower surface base 520 is utilized to move the air inside the upper surface base 510 and the lower surface base 520 to the longitudinal direction end side (radially outward during rotation). It can be made to flow and exhaust from the back side. Therefore, along with the flow of air, outside air can be taken into the upper surface base 510 and the lower surface base 520 from the back surface side in the vicinity of the rotation transmission unit 570.

  That is, in the vicinity of the rotation transmission unit 570, since the rotation speed is low, the efficiency of taking in the outside air from the air blowing holes 512 and 522 on the side wall is poor (or cannot be taken in), but air circulation using the centrifugal force (rotation transmission unit 570). The outside air is taken in from the back side in the vicinity, and the taken outside air is made to flow to the longitudinal end side (radially outward during rotation) by centrifugal force, and the air exhausted from the back side on the radially outward side) Can be formed. As a result, the heat generated when the LED 532 operates can be cooled. In particular, cooling of the LED 532 disposed in the vicinity of the rotation transmission unit 570 can be achieved.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 36B, when the air inside the rotation unit 500 is pushed outward in the radial direction by the rotation of the rotation unit 500, the internal pressure on the center side of the rotation unit 500 is reduced. External air is taken in through a gap on the back side between the rotation transmission unit 570 of 500 and the upper surface base 510 and the lower surface base 520. As a result, cooling of the LED 532 disposed in the vicinity of the rotation transmission unit 570 can be achieved more reliably.

  In this case, the front wall that forms the front side of the upper surface base 510 and the lower surface base 520 (the front edge portion of the upper surface base 510 is downward (FIG. 29A, the back side of the paper surface) (the lower edge of the lower surface base 520 is upward). The curved portion) has a shape parallel to the rotation planes of the upper surface base 510 and the lower surface base 520 (that is, the shape of the upper surface base 510 and the lower surface base 520 viewed in the direction perpendicular to the rotation axis is a rectangular parallelepiped shape). The angle of the portion where the air that has flowed to the longitudinal end portion (radially outward at the time of rotation) due to centrifugal force changes direction toward the back side becomes substantially a right angle, so that vortices are likely to be formed at this portion. . Therefore, the air flow is hindered, and smooth exhaust from the back side becomes difficult.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, the front side of the upper surface base 510 and the lower surface base 520 (the front edge of the upper surface base 510 is downward (FIG. 29 (a) the back side of the paper surface) (the lower edge of the lower surface base 520 is upward)). The shape of the curved portion is curved outward from the central portion in the left-right direction, so that the air flowing toward the longitudinal end side (radially outward during rotation) by the centrifugal force is gradually increased. The angle of the portion where the air that has flowed to the longitudinal end (radially outward) changes direction toward the back side can be made larger than a substantially right angle. The flow of air can be made smooth by suppressing the formation of vortices. Therefore, exhaust from the back side can be performed more smoothly. As a result, cooling of the LED 532 disposed in the vicinity of the rotation transmission unit 570 can be achieved more reliably.

  Further, the distance dimension between the opposite sides of the upper surface base 510 and the lower surface base 520 on the back surface side (FIG. 35 (a) vertical dimension) is the distance dimension on the back surface side in the vicinity of the rotation transmission unit 570. Since the distance is larger than the distance on the back side, the air inside the upper surface base 510 and the lower surface base 520 flows to the longitudinal end side (radially outward during rotation) by utilizing the centrifugal force accompanying rotation. By exhausting from the rear side on the radially outer side, the intake can be efficiently performed when the outside air is taken in from the rear side in the vicinity of the rotation transmission unit 570.

  In addition, the open portion on the back side in the vicinity of the rotation transmission unit 570 (the inner periphery of the decorative portion 511 of the upper surface base 510 and the decorative portion 521 of the lower surface base 520) is formed in a circular shape concentric with the rotation shaft. As the lower surface base 520 rotates, the outside air on the back side in the vicinity of the rotation transmission unit 570 can be prevented from being disturbed (flow in the rotational direction is formed). As a result, outside air can be efficiently taken in from the back side in the vicinity of the rotation transmission unit 570.

  Further, since the outer peripheral surface of the outer standing portion 572a of the front base 572 is formed so as to be narrowed from the back side to the front side, the rotating unit 500 has the decorative portion 511 of the upper surface base 510 and the decorative portion of the lower surface base 520. It is possible to suppress the generation of vortices in the airflow K when air is taken in from the gap between 521 and the rotation transmission unit 570. Therefore, the flow of the airflow K flowing through the central portion in the left-right direction of the rotation unit 500 can be made smooth, and when outside air is taken in from the back side in the vicinity of the rotation transmission unit 570, the intake can be efficiently performed. .

  Next, the center frame 600 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  First, the overall configuration of the center frame 600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 37 and 38. FIG. 37 is an exploded front perspective view of the center frame 600, and FIG. 38 is an exploded rear perspective view of the center frame 600.

  As shown in FIGS. 37 and 38, the center frame 600 includes a frame 610 formed in an annular shape when viewed from the front, a center cover 620 disposed so as to cover an inner peripheral portion of the frame 610, The sensor 630 attached to the frame 610 is mainly provided.

  The frame body 610 includes a stage 611 protruding from the lower part of the inner peripheral edge in the front view to the center cover 620 side (rear side), a wall 612 protruding radially outward from the outer peripheral side surface, and the rear side. A fastening hole 613 that is recessed in a circular shape toward the front side and an opening 614 that opens on the front side of the irradiation surface 631 of the sensor 630 that is disposed on the back side. The

  The frame 610 is a member that is disposed in the center of the game board 13 so as to surround the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2), and is visible to the player through the glass 8. Patterns and pictures are drawn on the front side.

  The stage 611 is formed by bending from the inner edge on the lower side of the frame body 610 to the back side. The top surface has a first recessed portion 611a at the front end and a second recess at the back end. The installation portions 611b are recessed.

  The stage 611 rolls the sphere on the upper surface thereof, and drops the sphere from the upper surface of the stage 611 using the inclination of either the first recessed portion 611a or the second recessed portion 612b, thereby causing the first It is possible to form a state in which a ball can easily win a prize at the winning opening 64. Accordingly, a plurality of flow paths of the spheres flowing down the game area can be formed, so that the player can be provided with interest.

  The first recessed portion 611a is a groove for dropping a ball rolling on the upper portion of the stage 611 to the front side of the game board 13 (the front side of the base plate 60), and has a recessed depth toward the front side. Is deeply formed. The second recessed portion 611b is a groove for sending a sphere to an opening formed in the back surface portion at the center in the left-right direction of the stage 611, and the recessed depth is formed deeper toward the back surface side.

  The wall portion 612 is a portion that is positioned in the front-rear direction with respect to the base plate 60 when the assembled center frame 600 is disposed on the base plate 60 (see FIG. 2). The outer shape is larger than the inner shape of the opening penetrating in the direction. As a result, when the center frame 600 is inserted into the opening of the base plate 60 from the front side, the side surface on the back side of the wall portion 612 contacts the side surface on the front side of the base plate 60, so The center frame 600 can be positioned.

  The fastening holes 613 are a plurality of holes provided on the back side of the frame 610, and are formed at positions facing through holes 623a of the center cover 620, which will be described later. The opening 614 is an opening for irradiating the sensor light emitted from the sensor 630 described later to the front side, and is formed at a position facing the irradiation surface 631 irradiated with the sensor light of the sensor 630.

  The center cover 620 is formed of a resin material of a light transmissive material, is formed in a substantially circular shape when viewed from the front, and is disposed on the inner peripheral side of the frame body 610, and left and right edges of the cover member 621 Side wall part 622 erected on the front side from the front side, and a mounting part 623 projecting outward from the erected tip surface of the side wall part 622 and the lower edge of the cover member 621. The

  The cover member 621 is formed in a plate-like body having a constant thickness that curves toward the back side (from the front side becomes a convex curved surface) as it goes outward from the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. The upper peripheral edge (hereinafter referred to as “first portion 621a”) of the central portion in the left-right direction is formed in front of the left and right ends and the peripheral edge of the lower end (hereinafter referred to as “second portion”).

  Since the cover member 621 is formed of a plate-like body having a constant thickness, it can be prevented from acting as a convex lens, and the visibility of the third symbol display device 81 disposed on the back side can be ensured.

  Further, since the cover member 621 is formed of a plate-like body having a constant thickness, the cover member 621 and the third symbol display device 81 are opposed to each other by the amount that the central portion in the left-right direction is curved toward the front side when viewed from the front. A space can be formed between them. Thereby, the space which the decoration member 450 of the vertical displacement unit 400 mentioned above displaces and produces can be ensured.

  The side wall portion 622 is a wall portion so that the center cover 620 can be attached to the frame body 610, and the cover member 621 is curved to the back side as described above. Where the distance between the front face of 620 increases and the side wall 622 increases, the distance between the back face of the frame 610 and the front face of the center cover 620 can be reduced (eliminated).

  That is, the standing dimension on the front side of the side wall 622 is set to the distance between the rear surface of the frame body 610 and the front surface of the center cover 620 when the center cover 620 is disposed on the frame body 610. Thus, when the frame body 610 and the center cover 620 are combined, it is possible to prevent the first portion 621a of the cover member 621 from being projected too far to the front side of the frame body 610.

  The attachment portion 623 is a protruding portion for attaching the center cover 620 to the frame body 610, and a plurality of through holes 623a that are formed to penetrate in the front-rear direction are formed. As described above, the fastening hole 613 is formed in the back surface of the frame body 610 at a position facing the through hole 623a, and a screw or the like (not shown) is inserted through the through hole 623a and fastened to the fastening hole 613. Thus, the frame body 610 and the center cover 620 are fastened and fixed.

  The sensor 630 is a motion sensor for detecting a player's motion, and is a light emitting unit that emits light such as infrared rays, and a light receiving unit that receives reflected light that is reflected from the light emitted from the light emitting unit. And an irradiation surface 631 having the following.

  The sensor 630 is disposed at a height of about 2/3 from the bottom when the frame 610 is divided into three equal parts in the vertical direction, and is disposed on the right side of the frame 610. The sensor 630 is disposed in a state where the irradiation surface 631 is inclined toward the center front side of the center frame 600. Thereby, the light irradiated from the irradiation surface 631 of the sensor 630 is emitted from the front side central portion of the game board 13 to the player side through the glass 8.

  Next, sensor light emitted from the sensor 630 will be described with reference to FIGS. 39 and 40.

  39A is a front view of the center frame 600, and FIG. 39B is a cross-sectional view of the center frame 600 taken along the line XXXIXb-XXXIXb of FIG. 39A. 40A is a cross-sectional view of the center frame 600 taken along the line XLa-XLa of FIG. 39A, and FIG. 40B is a cross-sectional view of the center frame 600 taken along the line XLb-XLb of FIG. FIG.

  In FIGS. 39A and 40B, the light irradiation area of the sensor 630 irradiated in front of the center frame 600 is illustrated by two-dot chain lines, and is illustrated as irradiation areas R1 and R2. Further, in FIG. 39B, the sensor 630 is illustrated by a broken line. 40 (b) and 40 (b), the sensor 630 and the light emitted from the sensor 630 are illustrated by two-dot chain lines, and are disposed in front of the center frame 600 (in front of the game board 13). The glass 8 to be formed is shown by a two-dot chain line.

  As shown in FIGS. 39 and 40, the sensor 630 is disposed in front of the second portion 621 b of the cover member 621. Accordingly, the light emitted from the sensor 630 is not emitted to the front side of the gaming machine via the cover member 621 (transmitted), and the light emitted from the sensor 630 is blocked by the cover member 621. This can be suppressed. In addition, the sensor 630 has a decorative portion of the frame 610 disposed on the front side. Thereby, it is possible to make it difficult to visually recognize the sensor 630 from the player side (front side).

  The light emitted from the sensor 630 is emitted directly from the irradiation surface 631 of the sensor 630 to the irradiation region R1 that is emitted from the front side of the glass 8 and the front surface of the cover member 621 of the center cover 620. The reflected light is reflected and emitted to the region of the irradiation region R2 that is emitted from the front side of the glass 8.

  Here, a motion sensor is exposed in a gaming machine in which a motion sensor (sensor 630) is disposed in the gaming machine and detects the player's operation on the front side of the liquid crystal device (the third symbol display device 81). There was a problem of detracting from interest.

  Therefore, the sensor 630 is disposed on the back side of the decorative member (frame body 610). In this case, if the sensor 630 is retracted from the inner edge side (opening 614 of the frame body 610) to the back side (outside) of the decorative member, the sensor 630 can be more difficult to see, but the light emitting unit and the light receiving unit (irradiation surface 631) are in front. The detection range becomes narrower. On the other hand, if the sensor 630 is positioned close to the inner edge side (opening of the frame body 610) of the decorative member, the light emitting part and the light receiving part can be easily directed to the front, so that the detection range can be widened in the front-rear direction. It becomes easy to be visually recognized. That is, there is a problem that it is difficult to secure a range in which an object can be detected while making the sensor 630 difficult to be visually recognized by the player.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, a part of the light irradiated from the irradiation surface 631 of the sensor 630 is irradiated to the cover member 621 of the center cover 620, so that the curved shape of the cover member 621 causes the front side ( Reflected by the player side). Accordingly, the sensor 630 can be retracted to the back of the opening 614 of the frame body 610, and a range in which an object can be detected can be ensured while being difficult to be visually recognized by the player. Since the cover member 621 is made of a light transmissive material, the visibility of the symbols displayed on the liquid crystal display device can be ensured.

  Further, since the front surface side of the cover member 621 is a convex curved surface, when the light emitted from the sensor 630 is reflected on the front surface of the cover member 621, the angle of reflection (reflection angle) is close to the sensor 630. The angle of reflection (reflection angle) can be made more obtuse at a position far from the sensor 630, and the range in which an object can be detected can be easily expanded accordingly.

  Furthermore, the light irradiated to the irradiation region R2 (light reflected by the cover member 621) is reflected to the cover member 621 side when the object is irradiated and reflected. In this case, the traveling direction of the reflected light differs depending on the surface shape of the object to be reflected, but the light reflected in a plurality of directions is reflected on the front surface of the cover member 621, so that the light reflected in the different directions progresses. The direction can be a traveling direction toward the sensor 630 side. That is, by increasing the amount of light reflected to the sensor 630 side, the light receiving detection operation of the sensor 630 can be reliably performed.

  The first portion 621a of the cover member 621 is positioned on the front side of the wall portion 612 of the frame body 610, and the second portion 621b is positioned on the back side of the wall portion 612 of the frame body 610 (FIG. 39 ( b)). That is, the first portion 621a is disposed substantially at the same position as the back surface of the base plate 60 or at a position closer to the front side than the back surface of the base plate 60 (see FIG. 2), and the second portion 621b is the back surface of the base plate 60. It is arrange | positioned in the position which becomes the back side rather than.

  Thereby, the distance dimension between the cover member 621 of the center cover 620 and the third symbol display device 81 at the upper part of the center frame 600 can be secured. As a result, the dimension in the front-rear direction when the decorative member 450 of the vertical displacement unit 400 described above is displaced in the vertical direction can be secured, and the decorative member 450 can be displaced. Further, the curvature of the cover member 621 can be increased in a limited space between the rear space where the decorative member 450 is displaced and the front space where the glass 8 is disposed.

  Further, since the first portion 621a is disposed substantially at the same position as the back surface of the base plate 60 or at the front side of the back surface of the base plate 60 (see FIG. 2), the decorative member 450 ( It can suppress more reliably that the rotation unit 500) interferes with the 1st part 621a, and the size of a displacement member can be aimed at by that much.

  Further, since the second portion 621b is disposed at a position closer to the back side than the back side of the base plate 60, the curvature of the cover member 621 can be increased, and the front side of the cover member 621 is used as a light reflecting surface. Easy to do. That is, it is possible to secure a range in which an object can be detected while disposing the sensor 630 on the back side so that it is difficult for the player to visually recognize it.

  In addition, since the first portion 621a is located above the cover member 621, in a store where the gaming machine 10 is installed, the illumination of the fluorescent lamp of the store is reflected by the cover member 621 and the front side (player side) Can be suppressed from being irradiated.

  That is, if the upper part of the cover member 621 is curved to the back side, the light of the fluorescent lamp of the store irradiated from obliquely above becomes a shape that easily reflects to the front side. Since the normal line direction is formed as a curved surface that is directed at least below the horizontal direction, the light incident on the front surface of the cover member 621 can be reflected downward. That is, when light from a fluorescent lamp or other gaming machine installed on the ceiling in the store is incident on the front surface of the cover member 621, the light can be prevented from being reflected toward the player. As a result, it can be suppressed that the player feels dazzled and the visibility of the third symbol display device 81 deteriorates.

  Next, the relationship between the center frame 600 and the rotation unit 500 of the vertical displacement unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG.

  41A and 41B are sectional views of the rotation unit 500 and the center frame 600. FIG. 41A shows the initial position (reference position) (position where the extending direction is horizontally oriented) of the rotating unit 500, and FIG. 41B shows the rotating unit 500 centered on the rotation axis. The state rotated 90 degrees is illustrated.

  41 (a) and 41 (b), the decorative member 450 of the vertical displacement unit 400 is displaced, and the front side of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) and the back side of the center frame 600 are displayed. When positioned at the position, a predetermined gap is formed between the rotating unit 500 of the decorative member 450 and the cover member 621 of the center frame 600. Thereby, the rotation unit 500 can rotate without colliding with the cover member 621.

  In this case, if the rotating member (rotating unit 500) is a rotating object in front of the third symbol display device 81, a wind flow is generated by the rotation of the rotating member, and a sphere flowing down due to the wind is generated. There was a problem of moving.

  In particular, in the present embodiment, since the rotation unit 500 is positioned above the stage 611 on which the ball rolls, the ball rolling on the top of the stage 611 is easily affected by the wind due to the rotation of the rotation unit 500.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the attachment portion 623 connected from the second portion 621b of the cover member 621 is fastened to the fastening hole 613 that is recessed below the stage 611 of the frame 610 (that is, Since the lower end portion of the center cover 620 is connected to the lower end of the frame body 610), the flow area of the sphere and the displacement area of the rotary unit 500 can be partitioned. Therefore, the wind generated by the rotation of the rotary unit 500 can be blocked by the cover member 621 (second portion 621b). As a result, it is possible to suppress the flow of the sphere from being affected by the action of the wind. Further, even when wind is generated by the rotation of the rotary unit 500 and dust or dust is blown off by the wind, the second portion 621b (cover member 621) can block the wind, so that the blown-off dust or dust is detected by the sensor. It is possible to suppress a rise in the light emission / light reception route and a decrease in detection accuracy.

  Here, it is conventionally known that the stage 611 of the center frame 600 is provided with a back wall so that a ball rolling on the stage 611 does not fall to the back side. However, in such a conventional product, the wind generated by the rotation of the rotary unit 500 wraps around from the standing front end on the back side standing from the stage 611 to the front side, or the glass 8 on the front side of the game board 13. And the ball that rolls on the stage 611 is affected. On the other hand, in order to prevent the sphere rolling on the stage 611 from being affected by wind, the back wall is curved to the front side so as to cover the periphery of the stage sphere (that is, a closed passage is formed). ), It is difficult for the player to visually recognize the ball that rolls on the upper part of the stage 611, and the interest of the player is impaired.

  On the other hand, since the second portion 621b of the cover member 621 is connected to the range including the stage 611 of the frame 610, the second portion 621b (cover member 621) generates wind generated by the rotation of the rotation unit 500. Can be blocked by. As a result, since it is not necessary to cover the periphery of the stage 611, it is possible to make the ball rolling on the upper portion of the stage 611 easily visible to the player, and to suppress the influence of the flow of the ball due to the action of the wind.

  Here, if the displacement region where the displacement member (vertical displacement unit 400) is displaced and the flow-down region where the sphere flows down are partitioned by the partition plate (center cover 620), the back surface disposed on the back side of the game board 13 Since the case 300 is provided with many members that generate heat, such as a drive motor 441 that drives the 3rd symbol display device 81 and the vertical displacement unit 400, the heat is placed inside the displacement area (the back side of the game board 13). ) There is a problem that the board for controlling the gaming machine 1 and the third symbol display device 81 are damaged.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the first portion 621a of the cover member 621 is not connected to the frame body 610 but is disposed at a predetermined interval from the inner peripheral edge of the frame body 610. The back side and the front side of the game board 13 and the cover member 621 can be communicated with each other through a predetermined interval. Accordingly, it is possible to suppress the heat generated from the vertical displacement unit 400 from being trapped on the back side of the game board 13 and the cover member 621. As a result, cold air on the front side of the game board 13 (rather than the rear side) can be sent to the back side of the game board 13, so that the base for controlling the gaming machine 1 and the third symbol display device 81 are damaged. Can be suppressed.

  In addition, since the predetermined interval between the first portion 621a and the inner periphery of the frame 610 is formed at the upper part of the center frame 600, the warm air is passed through the predetermined distance from the front side of the game board 13 It can be easily washed. That is, since the heated air on the back side of the game board 13 is raised by the heat, the predetermined distance between the first portion 621a formed above and the inner peripheral edge of the frame 610 is moved to the front side. Easy to flow. As a result, it is possible to suppress heat from being accumulated on the back side of the game board 13 and the cover member 621.

  In this case, when the rotation unit 500 is rotated and wind is generated, the wind flows out from the predetermined interval between the first portion 621a and the inner periphery of the frame body 610 and flows down the front of the game board 13. May affect the sphere.

  In contrast, the wind generated by the rotation of the rotary unit 500 can flow toward the upper area of the game area (the upper area of the opening of the game board 13). It is possible to prevent the flow of water from being affected. That is, the sphere that flows down the upper area of the game area is an initial sphere that is launched from the ball launch unit 112a and flows into the game area, and its speed is relatively high. For example, the stage of the center frame 600 Compared to a ball rolling on 611, it is less susceptible to wind. In other words, it is possible to flow the wind toward an area where the sphere is not easily affected by the wind. Therefore, the rotation speed of the rotating member can be increased correspondingly, and the production effect can be improved.

  Next, the distribution device 700 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  First, the overall configuration of the distribution device 700 will be described with reference to FIGS. 42 to 45. 42 is an exploded front perspective view of the sorting apparatus 700, and FIG. 43 is a partially enlarged front view of the sorting apparatus 700. FIG. 44 is a cross-sectional view of the sorting apparatus 700 taken along line XLIV-XLIV in FIG. 45 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the distribution device 700 along the XLVa-XLVa line in FIG. 43, and FIG. 45 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the distribution device 700 along the XLVb-XLVb line in FIG. 45 (a). 45 (c) is a cross-sectional view of the distribution device 700 along the XLVc-XLVc line in FIG. 43, and FIG. 45 (d) is a cross-sectional view of the distribution device 700 along the XLVd-XLVd line in FIG.

  In FIG. 43, outer shapes of the inner peripheral surface of the sorting member 760, the seesaw member 762, the communication hole 751, and the recovery hole 752 are shown by broken lines. In FIG. 45D, the path of the sphere paid out from the opening 744 is shown by a two-dot chain line.

  As shown in FIGS. 42 to 45, the distribution device 700 is disposed on the lower side of the center frame 600 of the game board 13 and is disposed on the front side (the front side in FIG. 43) with respect to the base plate 60. A side forming portion 710 and a back side forming portion 720 disposed on the back side (the back side in FIG. 43) with respect to the base plate 60 are mainly provided.

  The front side forming part 710 is mainly formed with a winning member 730 attached to the front side of the base plate 60 and a bending member 740 disposed on the front side of the winning member 730.

  The back side forming part 720 is mainly formed with an interposed member 750 attached to the back side of the base plate 60 and a distribution member 760 disposed on the back side of the interposed member 750. .

  The winning member 730 is formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and includes the above-described first winning port 64 located at the upper center in the left-right direction, and the first electric accessory 640a positioned below the first winning port 64. A through hole 731 which is located on both sides in the left-right direction of the first electric accessory 640a and is formed to penetrate in the front-rear direction; and a lower insertion hole 732 which is located below the through-hole 731 and is formed to penetrate in the front-rear direction. Are mainly provided.

  The through-hole 731 is a member into which an upper protrusion 741 of a bending member 740 described later is inserted, and is formed in a substantially rectangular shape in front view that opens slightly larger than the outer shape of the upper protrusion 741 in a rear view. . A projecting wall 731a is formed on the lower surface of the through hole 731 so as to project upward from the back surface to the front surface.

  The projecting wall 731a is provided with two symmetrical center lines in the left-right direction of the through-hole 731 when viewed from the front, and the projecting distance is set smaller from the back side toward the front side. Therefore, a sphere that passes (rolls) through the inside of the through-hole 731 by an interposition member 750 and a distribution member 760, which will be described later, is guided to the center position in the left-right direction of the two protruding walls 731a, and is also front-facing from the back side. Rolled to the side.

  The lower insertion hole 732 is a hole that communicates with the recovery hole 752 of the interposed member 750 disposed on the back surface side, and is formed at a position facing the recovery hole 752 of the interposed member 750. Further, the lower insertion hole 732 is opened in a substantially D shape in front view with the lower surface side curved, and protrudes upward from the lower surface at a first projecting portion 732a projecting downward from the upper surface at the center position in the left-right direction in front view. Second projecting portion 732b.

  The first projecting portion 732a has a projecting distance that increases from the front side (the right side in FIG. 45 (a)) to the back side (the left side in FIG. 45 (a)). The second projecting portion 732b is formed such that the projecting distance decreases from the front side toward the back side. In addition, the distance between the first protrusion 732a and the second protrusion 732b is slightly larger than the diameter of the sphere. Therefore, when the sphere passes through the inside of the lower insertion hole 732, the sphere can be rolled to the back side by the inclination of the second protrusion 732b from the front side to the back side. On the other hand, when the sphere bounces up and down when being inserted through the lower insertion hole 732, the first protrusion 732a can suppress upward displacement.

  On the back surface of the lower insertion hole 732, a sensor SE that detects the passage of a sphere is disposed. The sensor SE is a member that is formed in a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and a through hole having a diameter slightly larger than the diameter of the sphere is formed on a side surface of the sensor SE. Can be detected. The sensor SE is disposed such that the axis of the through hole is located coaxially with the arc axis on the lower surface side of the lower insertion hole 732. Thereby, since it can be set as the state which inclines a little downward as the opening direction of a through-hole goes to a back side, it can suppress that the ball | bowl which passes the inside of the through-hole of sensor SE stays inside a through-hole.

  The bending member 740 is a member disposed on the front side of the through hole 731 and the lower insertion hole 732 of the winning member 730 described above, and is substantially at the center in the left-right direction of the base plate 60 (see FIG. 2) in front view. Are arranged symmetrically, and the outer shape is formed symmetrically.

  In addition, the bending member 740 is disposed at a position where a gap of a size through which a sphere can pass is formed between the bending member 740 and the inner rail 61 (see FIG. 2) that forms the game area in a front view. Thereby, it is suppressed that the ball flowing down the game area below the bending member 740 is sandwiched between the bending member 740 and the inner rail 61 and stays in the game area.

  The bending member 740 is formed from a plate-like body having a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and includes an upper protrusion 741 protruding from the back surface thereof, a lower protrusion 743 protruding from below the upper protrusion 741, and an upper protrusion 741. And an opening 744 formed between the lower protrusions 743 facing each other.

  The upper projecting portion 741 is formed in a substantially U shape with the lower side opened in a rear view, and its outer shape is set slightly smaller than the inner shape of the through hole 731 of the winning member 730. Accordingly, when the bending member 740 is disposed on the winning member 730, the upper protruding portion 741 can be inserted and disposed inside the through hole 731. Therefore, when the bending member 740 is disposed on the winning member 730, the upper protruding portion 741 can be inserted and positioned, so that the assembling process can be simplified.

  Further, since the upper protruding portion 741 is formed in a substantially U shape with the lower side opened in a rear view, when the ball passes through the through hole 731 of the winning member 730 and rolls to the bending member 740 side, A connecting portion between the winning member 730 and the bending member 740 is not formed on the rolling surface (lower surface) on which the ball moves. Therefore, since the rolling of the sphere can be made constant, it is possible to suppress the sphere from stopping inside the through hole 731. That is, when the connecting portion between the winning member 730 and the bending member 740 is formed on the rolling surface of the sphere, resistance increases when the sphere rolls on the connecting portion, and the sphere jumps in steps. By eliminating the connecting portion on the rolling surface, it is possible to stabilize the rolling of the sphere and suppress clogging of the sphere.

  In this case, even if the upper protrusion 741 is formed in an annular shape when viewed from the back and the sphere passes through the inside of the ring, the winning member 730 and the bending member are similarly formed on the rolling surface on which the sphere rolls. Although the connecting portion with 740 is not formed, the part shape of the bending member 740 is complicated because the upper protrusion 741 is formed in an annular shape, which increases the manufacturing cost. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the upper protrusion 741 has a substantially U shape when viewed from the back, the shape of the component can be simplified and an increase in manufacturing cost can be suppressed.

  The lower protrusion 743 is formed on the lower side of the upper protrusion 741 and has a substantially U-shape in rear view with the upper side opened. That is, when viewed from the back, the open portions of the upper protruding portion 741 and the lower protruding portion 743 are formed so as to face each other in the vertical direction.

  The lower protruding portion 743 is a path (hereinafter referred to as “second pitching path KR2”) for feeding a ball that is sent from the through hole 731 of the winning member 730 to the bending member 740 side to the lower insertion hole 732 of the winning member 730. And is formed at a position facing the lower insertion hole 732 in the front-rear direction.

  The protrusion distance of the lower protrusion 743 to the back side is set to a dimension larger than the diameter of the sphere. Further, the bending member 740 is arranged on the winning member 730 in a state where the protruding front end surface of the lower protruding portion 743 is in contact with the winning member 730. Therefore, the distance dimension between the facing of the bending member 740 and the winning member 730 is made larger than the diameter of the sphere, and the ball passing path (hereinafter referred to as the ball) is sent in the vertical direction between the bending member 740 and the winning member 730. (Referred to as “first pitching route KR1”).

  The bending member 740 is formed with a guide portion 742 that protrudes from the upper inner surface of the upper protruding portion 741 to the lower inner surface of the lower protruding portion 743. The guide part 742 protrudes in a substantially U shape whose rear side is opened in a side view.

  The guide portion 742 is a projecting wall that sends a ball that is sent from the through hole 731 of the winning member 730 to the bending member 740 (first pitching route KR1) in the vertical direction and then sends it to the lower insertion hole 732 of the winning member 730. The vertical height of the lower inner edge is formed to be slightly smaller than the height of the lower inner edge of the lower insertion hole 732 arranged on the back surface.

  The guide part 742 is formed with two symmetrical center lines in the left-right direction in the front view of the through hole 731 arranged on the back side. Thereby, since it contacts and guides (turns back to the back side) with two guide parts 742, it can control that a ball shifts in the horizontal direction.

  Note that the protruding front end surfaces of the guide portions 742 arranged side by side are formed so as to be inclined toward the base side as they come closer to the opposing surfaces (see FIG. 45B). Thereby, it is possible to effectively suppress the displacement of the sphere, which is in contact with the two guide portions 742 and guided (turned back to the back side), in the left-right direction.

  The upper protruding portion 741 is formed with a side wall 741a that protrudes to the inside of the left and right side surfaces in the rear view. A plurality of (three in this embodiment) side walls 741a are arranged in parallel in the vertical direction with a predetermined interval. As a result, when the ball to be sent inside the upper protrusion 741 in the normal state rolls in the left-right direction, it can be brought into contact with the tip surface of the side wall 741a to stabilize the sent ball. On the other hand, when two spheres flow continuously inside the upper protrusion 741 and the sphere flowing behind collides with the sphere flowing forward, the previous sphere enters between the side walls 741a, so that It is possible to secure a distance to escape in the direction and to prevent the sphere from clogging inside the upper protrusion 741. That is, the side wall 741a can stabilize the ball that is sent inside the upper protrusion 741.

  The opening 744 is a predetermined gap formed between the upper protrusion 741 and the lower protrusion 743 facing each other, and is formed on both sides in the left-right direction in the rear view. In addition, the opening 744 is formed in a substantially U shape that opens on the back side in a side view.

  The upper end of the opening 744 is set to substantially the same height in the vertical direction as the lower surface of the through hole 731 of the winning member 730, and the height of the lower end is a substantially intermediate position in the vertical direction of the lower insertion hole 732 of the winning member 730. Set to the height of. Thereby, when a sphere is continuously sent into the bending member 740, it is possible to prevent the previous sphere from escaping to the opening 744 and clogging of the sphere into the bending member 740. That is, the opening 744 is formed to open on the side surface in the left-right direction of the connecting portion between the first pitching path KR1 and the second pitching path KR2.

  The distribution member 760 is formed in a box-like body that is formed in a horizontally long rectangle when viewed from the front and whose front side is open. In addition, the sorting member 760 is bent at a substantially central position in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, and is formed so as to be inclined downward from the substantially center position in the left-right direction toward the outside in the left-right direction. Further, both end portions of the distribution member 760 in the left-right direction are set at positions facing the through holes 731 of the winning member 730 described above.

  The distribution member 760 includes a pair of inclined surfaces 761 inclined downward from the center position in the left-right direction in the front view toward the left and right sides, a seesaw member 762 disposed at the center of each inclined surface 761, and above the seesaw member 762. It is mainly provided with a ball outlet 763.

  The ball sending port 763 is a member for forming an opening on the front side of the distribution member 760, and is formed at a position facing the first winning port 64 of the winning member 730. As a result, when the distribution member 760 is disposed on the interposition member 750 described later, a space A can be formed between the ball feeding port 763 and the interposition member 750.

  The space A is formed in a space larger than the outer diameter of the sphere (that is, a gap through which the sphere can pass), and the first prize opening of the winning member 730 through a through hole formed in the base plate 60. It connects with 64 internal space (refer FIG. 44). As a result, it is possible to send a ball to the first prize opening 64 to the inside of the space A and to send the inside of the space A.

  The seesaw member 762 is formed in an annular shape, and has three projections 762a projecting outward from the outer edge portion at an interval of 90 degrees around the axis, and a shaft inserted into the annular shape inside Part 762b.

  The shaft portion 762 b is a shaft support portion for rotating the seesaw member 762 around the axis, and is formed in a columnar shape and is inserted inside the annular shape of the seesaw member 762. In this state, the shaft portion 762b is sandwiched between the interposed member 750 and the distribution member 760, so that the seesaw member 762 is disposed so as to be rotatable about the shaft portion 762b.

  The protrusion 762a is a protrusion for alternately distributing the spheres to the left and right inclined surfaces 761 when the sphere is sent from the space A described above. A ball is sent to the opposite side. That is, the ball sent from the space A by the central protrusion 762a can be sent in the left-right direction. The protrusions 762a provided at both ends regulate the displacement of the seesaw member 762 and displace the direction in which the tip of the center protrusion 762a is positioned by the weight applied when the sphere passes (the seesaw member 762 is displaced). The rotation of the seesaw member 762 is restricted when the tip surface of the protrusion 762a and the inclined surface 761 come into contact with each other. On the other hand, when the sphere is guided by the central projection 762a, the guided sphere collides with the projection 762a and is pushed downward. As a result, the protrusion 762a on the opposite side is displaced upward, and the tip of the protrusion 762a displaced downward comes into contact with the inclined surface 761 to restrict the displacement.

  The inclined surface 761 is a rolling surface of a path (hereinafter referred to as “third pitching path KR3”) in which the balls distributed to the left and right by the seesaw member 762 roll and are sent. It is formed so as to incline downward from the center position in the left-right direction. As a result, the balls distributed right and left by the seesaw member 762 of the distribution member 760 roll on the inclined surface 761 and are sent (rolled) to the lower end of the inclined surface 761.

  The end of the inclined surface 761 on the descending side is formed so as to incline in the direction approaching the interposed member 750 so that the thickness of the back side increases toward the end. Thereby, the ball that rolls on the inclined surface 761 and is sent to the end thereof can be sent to the communication hole 751 of the interposed member 750 disposed in front of the sorting member 760.

  The interposition member 750 is formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, the variable winning device 65 described above at the center lower portion in the left-right direction in the front view, a communication hole 751 penetrating in the front-rear direction on both left and right sides, and its communication The recovery hole 752 opened to the lower side of the hole 751 is mainly provided and formed.

  The communication hole 751 is formed on the front side of the left and right ends of the distribution member 760 and is formed on the back side of the through hole 731 of the winning member 730. Therefore, the space at both left and right end portions of the distribution member 760 and the internal space of the through hole 731 of the winning member 730 are connected via the communication hole 751. Therefore, a path (hereinafter referred to as “fourth pitching path KR4”) in which the ball rolling on the upper portion of the inclined surface 761 of the sorting member 760 is passed through the communication hole 751 and sent to the through hole 731 of the winning member 730. Can be formed.

  As described above, the collection hole 752 is an opening formed on the back side of the lower insertion hole 732 of the winning member 730. That is, the collection hole 752 is connected to the back side of the sensor SE, and a ball passing through the sensor SE is sent to the opening of the collection hole 752. The collection hole 752 is connected to a device that circulates a sphere installed in the store, and the sphere collected in the collection hole 752 is circulated by the circulation device and is again launched from the ball launch unit 112a as a game ball. .

  The sorting apparatus 700 configured as described above is sent as follows. A ball entering from the first winning port 64 is sent to the sorting member 760 and sent to the third pitching path KR3 in either the left or right direction by the seesaw member 762 of the sorting member 760. When the ball sent through the third pitching route KR3 is sent to the end of the third pitching route KR3, the ball is sent to the fourth pitching route KR4 inside the communication hole 751 of the interposed member 750 arranged on the front side. The ball is sent. A ball that is sent through the fourth pitching route KR4 is sent to the first pitching route KR1 on the back side of the bending member 740. A ball that is sent through the first pitching route KR1 is guided by the lower protrusion 743 of the bending member 740 and is sent to the second pitching route KR2. A ball sent through the second pitching route KR2 passes through the lower insertion hole 732 of the winning member 730 and passes through the inside of the sensor SE, and is then sent to the collection hole 752 of the interposed member 3750.

  Here, as described above, the through hole 731 and the lower insertion hole 732 of the winning member 730 are formed on the left and right sides of the first electric accessory 640a, and the bending members 740 are arranged in a pair on the left and right. The first electric combination 640a is positioned between the lower protrusions 743 of the bending member 740.

  In this case, when the downward inclination angle of the third ball-sending path KR3 is made small (the inclined surface is gentle), the flow speed of the sphere becomes low, and it becomes easy to cause a clogging of the ball at the lower protrusion 743. On the other hand, if the angle of the downward slope of the third pitch KR3 is increased (the downward slope is steep), the flow speed of the sphere can be increased, and it is difficult to generate a ball clogging in the lower insertion hole 732. The space in the height direction (vertical direction) necessary for the arrangement of the third ball feeding path KR3 (the distribution member 760) increases, and the arrangement of the first electric accessory 640a becomes difficult.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, since the opening 744 is formed in the side wall of the lower protrusion 743, it is difficult for the ball clogging in the lower protrusion 743 to occur, and accordingly, the third pitching path KR3. It is possible to reduce the angle of the downward inclination of (a gentle downward inclination). As a result, the space in the height direction required for the arrangement of the third pitching path KR3 (the distribution member 760) can be suppressed, and the arrangement of the first electric accessory 640a can be made possible. That is, the arrangement of the bending member 740 and the first electric accessory 640a is impossible with the conventional product, and is possible only by forming the opening 744 on the side wall of the lower protrusion 743 as described above. It is a thing.

  Here, in the present embodiment, an opening is formed in the center of the game board 13 (a center frame 600 is disposed), and the player can visually recognize the third symbol display device 81 through the opening. In recent years, the opening of the center of the game board 13 (the inner peripheral edge of the frame 610 of the center frame 600) has increased with the demand for an increase in the size of the 3rd symbol display device 81. The space between the edge and the lower edge of the game area (the lower inner edge of the inner rail 61) is narrowed. Therefore, in the conventional product, members corresponding to the third pitching path KR3 and the first electric accessory 640a are arranged in a space between the lower edge of the central opening of the game board 13 and the lower edge of the game area. It was difficult.

  In other words, as described above, when the angle of the downward slope of the third ball-sending path KR3 is reduced (the downward slope is gentle), the flow speed of the sphere is reduced, and it is easy to cause clogging of the ball at the lower protrusion 743. Become. On the other hand, if the angle of the downward slope of the third pitch KR3 is increased (the downward slope is steep), it is possible to increase the flow speed of the sphere and make it difficult to cause clogging in the lower protrusion 743. The space in the height direction necessary for the arrangement of the third ball feeding path KR3 is increased, and the arrangement of the first electric accessory 640a becomes difficult. Further, since the position of the lower projection 743 (bending member 740) in the vertical direction is lowered (lowered), the lower projection 743 (bending member 740) and the lower edge of the game area (inner rail 61) It is difficult to secure a gap through which the sphere can pass, and it is necessary to provide the first out ports 71 on both sides of the lower protrusion 743 (bending member 740).

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, since the opening is formed in the side wall of the lower protruding portion 743, it is difficult for the lower protruding portion 743 to be clogged with balls. The angle of the downward slope of the three-sending path KR3 can be reduced (the downward slope is gentle). As a result, the lower projecting portion 743 (bending member 740) can be raised (increased) in the height direction (vertical direction), so the lower projecting portion 743 (bending member 740) and the game area A gap through which the sphere can pass can be ensured between the lower edge of the inner rail 61 (the lower inner edge of the inner rail 61). Therefore, it is not necessary to provide the first out ports 71 on both sides of the lower protrusion 743 (bending member 740).

  That is, in the arrangement of the bending member 740 and the first electric accessory 640a, the arrangement in which a gap through which a sphere can pass is formed between the lower protruding portion 743 (the bending member 740) and the lower edge of the game area, This arrangement is not possible with the conventional product, and as described above, it is possible for the first time by forming an opening in the side wall of the lower protrusion 743.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 46, the pitching of the guide portion 742 of the bending member 740 will be described. 46 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the game board 13, and FIG. 46 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the game board 13. 46A corresponds to FIG. 45A, and FIG. 46B corresponds to FIG. 45B.

  As shown in FIG. 46, when two balls are sent from the through hole 731 of the winning member 730 to the bending member 740 in a state where there is almost no gap (that is, two balls are connected), the previous (preceding) A part of the sphere enters the opening 744 and is sent to the back side, and is guided to the lower insertion hole 732 of the winning member 730.

  Here, when a passage having a cross-sectional area slightly larger than the outer diameter of the sphere is formed and the passage is bent, the two spheres are substantially free of gaps in the passage (two spheres are connected in series). ) When a ball is sent, the following ball touches the preceding ball, and the following ball presses the preceding ball against the side wall, so that they cannot roll and the ball is clogged. It was.

  On the other hand, in the present application, since the opening 744 is formed in the connection portion between the first ball feeding path KR1 and the second ball feeding path KR2, when passing through the lower protrusion 743 in a state where a plurality of balls are connected, Even if the following sphere catches up with the preceding sphere, it is difficult to press the preceding sphere against the side wall, and the rolling of both can be easily continued. As a result, the occurrence of ball clogging can be suppressed.

  Further, since the opening 744 is formed at a position where the first pitching path KR1 and the second pitching path KR2 have a tolerance, it is possible to make it difficult to block the sphere at a bent portion where the sphere is likely to be blocked. In other words, in the region where the first pitching route KR1 and the second pitching route KR2 intersect, the ball that has flowed down (dropped) along the first pitching route KR1 changes direction and rolls in the extending direction of the second pitching route KR2. This is the position where the movement starts, and it is easy for the sphere following the preceding sphere to catch up. For this reason, when the sphere following the preceding sphere presses against the side wall, both cannot roll and the ball is likely to be clogged.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the opening 744 is formed at a position where the first pitching route KR1 and the second pitching route KR2 intersect, so that even if the following ball catches up with the leading ball, it leads. It is possible to make it difficult for the ball to escape between the openings 744 (a part of the preceding ball is accommodated in the opening 744) and to be pressed against the side wall, and to keep both rolling. As a result, the occurrence of ball clogging can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, as described above, the height of the lower end of the opening 744 is set to the height of the substantially intermediate position in the vertical direction of the lower insertion hole 732 of the winning member 730, so that the first ball path KR1 falls (flows down). When the ball to be reached reaches the bottom wall of the second pitching path KR2 (lower projecting portion 743), the ball can be easily received in the opening. Therefore, even when a succeeding sphere catches up with the preceding sphere, the preceding sphere can escape between the openings 744 and be hardly pressed against the side wall, and the rolling of both can be easily continued. As a result, the occurrence of ball clogging can be suppressed.

  Further, the lower protruding portion 743 is formed in a substantially U shape in a side view, and is installed at a position where the height of the lower end of the opening 744 is separated from the bottom wall of the lower protruding portion 743 by a predetermined distance. A side wall can be left (formed) between the lower end of the opening 744 and the second pitching path KR2 (lower projecting portion 743). Therefore, even when the opening is formed in such a size that the ball can pass, the ball unnecessarily flows out from the bending member 740 to the outside (the game area on the front side of the game board 13) through the opening. Can be suppressed.

  In this case, when the size of the opening 744 is set so that the sphere cannot pass, it is usually difficult to press the preceding sphere against the side wall using the opening 744. A form in which the sphere to be pushed presses the preceding sphere against the center of the opening 744 is formed, and the preceding sphere may be fitted into (inserted into) the opening 744 in some cases. In this case, the subsequent rolling of the sphere is inhibited by the sphere fitted in the opening 744, and a sphere clogging occurs.

  On the other hand, since the opening 744 is opened larger than the outer shape of the sphere (the sphere is formed in a size that allows the passage of the sphere), a form in which the following sphere presses the preceding sphere against the center of the opening 744 is formed. Even in the case, the preceding sphere can be discharged from the opening 744 to the outside of the bending member 740 (the game area on the front side of the game board 13), and the preceding sphere is fitted into (inserted into) the opening 744. You can avoid that. Thereby, the rolling of the succeeding ball can be continued, so that the occurrence of the clogging of the ball can be suppressed.

  In addition, the opening 744 is formed in such a size that the ball can pass through, and the opening 744 is disposed on the front side of the game board 13 (that is, the game area), so that the game area flows down. A sphere to be made can flow into the bending member 740 from the opening 744. Therefore, the interest of the game can be improved. For example, when a sensor for detecting a winning ball is disposed downstream of the lower protrusion 743, in addition to the sphere that has flowed into the bending member 740 from the upstream of the lower protrusion 743, the bending member from the opening 744 The ball that has flowed into 740 can also be detected as a winning ball. In particular, in this case, the opening 744 (a region where the first pitching path KR1 and the second pitching path KR2 intersect) is disposed on the front side of the game board 13, and therefore flows into the bending member 740 from the opening 744. The player can visually recognize the ball to be played. Therefore, from this point, the interest of the game can be enhanced.

  In a region where the first pitching route KR1 and the second pitching route KR2 are within tolerance, a lower portion of the guide portion 742 (that is, a portion inclined downward while being curved toward the recovery hole 752) is disposed. As a result, when the sphere that flows down (falls) along the first pitching path KR1 changes its direction and starts rolling in the extending direction of the second pitching path KR2, the sphere is inclined downward by the guide portion 742. Can be used to quickly roll. This facilitates the rolling of the preceding ball before the following ball catches up, and the preceding ball follows the back side (the ball is moved along the extending direction of the second pitching path KR2). Since it can suppress that it presses against the side wall of the back surface at the time of rolling, both rolling can be made easy to continue. As a result, the occurrence of ball clogging can be suppressed.

  Further, since the opening 744 is formed at a position on the front side (game area side) of the base plate 60 (see FIG. 2), a ball clogging occurs at the bent portion of the first pitching path KR1 and the second pitching path KR2. When doing so, the store operator can access the opening 744 from the front side by opening the glass 8. Therefore, it is possible to improve the workability of the work for eliminating the ball clogging.

  Furthermore, when dust or dirt accumulates at the bent portion of the first pitch route KR1 and the second pitch route KR2, the store operator opens the glass 8 to access the opening 744 from the front side. Thus, the bent portion can be cleaned through the opening 744. Therefore, it is possible to improve the cleanability when cleaning the first pitching route KR1 and the second pitching route KR2.

  Next, the light emitting decoration unit 800 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 47 is an exploded front perspective view of the light emitting decoration unit 800.

  As shown in FIG. 47, the light emitting decoration unit 800 includes a base body 810 having a horizontally long rectangular shape in front view disposed on the bottom wall portion 301 (see FIG. 6) of the back case 300, and a front side of the base body 810. The light emitting device 820 is mainly provided, and a cover member 830 that covers the front surface of the light emitting device 820 and is made of a light transmissive material.

  On the front side of the light emitting device 820, a plurality of light emitters (LEDs 821) are distributed over the entire surface. Therefore, the light emitted from the LED 821 is emitted from the entire surface of the cover member 830 to the front side of the gaming machine.

  Next, the restriction unit 2490 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 48 to 50. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as the said 1st Embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  First, the overall configuration of the restriction unit 2490 will be described with reference to FIGS. 48 and 49. FIG. 48 is an exploded front perspective view of the restriction unit 2490 in the second embodiment. FIG. 49A is a side view of the restriction unit 2490, FIG. 49B is a rear view of the restriction unit 2490, and FIG. 49C is a line XLIXc-XLIXc in FIG. 49B. It is sectional drawing of the control unit 2490. FIG.

  As shown in FIGS. 48 and 49, in the restriction unit 2490 in the second embodiment, the roller member 492 is pivotally supported by the rotating member 2494, and the position of the roller member 492 can be adjusted by the rotation of the rotating member 2494. The

  The restriction unit 2490 includes a case member 2491 formed in a box-like body, an outer edge member 2493 disposed on an outer edge portion on the opening side of the case member 2491, and the case member 2491 and the outer edge member 2493 facing each other. The rotating member 2494 that is pinched and rotatably supported by a shaft, and a roller member 492 that is supported by the rotating member 2494 are mainly provided.

  The case member 2491 is formed in a box shape having an opening on the back side, and has a width dimension in the left-right direction (FIG. 49B, left-right direction) larger than that of the case member 491 in the first embodiment. Further, the case member 2491 is mainly provided with a projecting portion 491a projecting from the side surface on the front side and a notch portion 2491b cut out in a semicircular shape on both side surfaces in the left-right direction.

  The notch portion 2491b is formed by being cut out in a semicircular shape at a substantially central position in the vertical direction (FIG. 49 (b) vertical direction) on both side surfaces of the case member 2491 in the horizontal direction (FIG. 49 (b) horizontal direction). The The notch portion 2491b is a notch for rotatably supporting a shaft portion 2494b of a rotating member 2494, which will be described later, and has an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the rotating member 2494.

  The outer edge member 2493 is a member that is formed in a vertically long rectangular frame-like body when viewed from the front, and is disposed on the back side (open side) of the case member 2491. The outer edge member 2493 has an inner shape that is substantially the same as the opening of the case member 2491. Further, on the side surface of the outer edge member 2493 on the front side (case member 491 side), a standing portion 2493a is formed around the inner edge portion so as to stand on the front side.

  The standing portion 2493a is formed with a recessed portion 2493a1 that is recessed on the back side. The recessed portion 2493a1 is formed at a position facing the notch portion 2491b of the case member 2492. Therefore, the rotating member 2494 described later can be disposed in a rotatable state on the case member 2491 by sandwiching the rotating member 2494 described later between the notch portion 2491b and the recessed portion 2493a1 of the case member 2491.

  The rotating member 2494 is formed from a plate-like body having an oval shape when viewed from the side, and the longitudinal dimension is set smaller than the vertical dimension of the inner portion of the case member 2491. The rotating member 2494 has a shaft portion 2494b that protrudes in a columnar shape outward in the left-right direction with respect to the case member 2491 at the center in the longitudinal direction, a shaft support hole 2494a that is formed through both sides of the shaft portion 2494b, and a shaft And a restricting portion 2494c that bulges radially outward from the protruding tip of the portion 2494b.

  The shaft portion 2494b protrudes longer than the plate thickness of the case member 2491 formed in the box-like body, and a restricting portion 2494c that bulges in the radial direction is formed at the protruding tip portion. Thus, the rotating member 2494 can be rotated with respect to the case member 2491 by fitting the shaft portion 2494b into the notch portion 2491b of the case member 2491 and disposing the recessed portion 2493a1 of the outer edge member 2493 from the back side. In addition, the rotating member 2494 can be restricted from being displaced in the left-right direction with respect to the case member 2491 by the restricting portion 2494c.

  The shaft support hole 2494a is an opening through which the shaft portion 492b of the roller member 492 is inserted. The shaft support hole 2494a is formed in a circular shape and has an inner diameter dimension larger than the outer diameter of the shaft portion 492b. Thus, the roller member 492 can be rotated by inserting the shaft portion 492b of the roller member 492 with the retaining ring E1 removed into the shaft support hole 2494a and then fitting the retaining ring E1 into the shaft portion 492b. Can be disposed on the rotating member 2494.

  The restriction unit 2490 configured as described above is assembled as follows.

  First, the shaft portion 492 b of the roller member 492 is inserted into the shaft support hole 2494 a of the pair of rotating members 2494, and the roller member 492 is pivotally supported by the rotating member 2494. As a result, two roller members 492 can be arranged side by side between the pair of rotating members 2494 arranged in a pair.

  Next, a torsion spring (not shown) is disposed on the shaft portion 2494b of the rotating member 2494, and after being fitted into the notch portion 2491b of the case member 2491, an outer edge member 2493 is disposed from the back side, thereby rotating. The member 2494 can be disposed so as to be rotatable with respect to the case member 2491 about the shaft portion 2494b. Accordingly, the position of the roller member 492 disposed on the rotating member 2494 can be displaced by rotating and rotating the rotating member 2494. In addition, the torsion spring disposed on the shaft portion 2494b biases the roller member 492 disposed above the roller member 492 disposed side by side to the front side (left side in FIG. 49C). It can be.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 50, a contact state between the decorative member 450 and the regulation unit 2490 when the decorative member 450 is displaced from the second position to the first position will be described. 50A to 50C are cross-sectional views of the vertical displacement unit 400. FIG. 50A corresponds to FIG. 24A, FIG. 50 corresponds to FIG. 24B, and FIG. 21C corresponds to FIG. 18C.

  As shown in FIG. 50A, when the decorative member 450 is positioned above the restriction unit 2490, the rotating member 2494 is provided by a torsion spring (not shown) disposed on the shaft portion 2494b of the rotating member 2494. Is rotated, and the roller member 492 disposed on the upper side of the roller member 492 disposed on the lower side is positioned on the front side.

  Accordingly, the decorative member 450 is displaced downward from the state shown in FIG. 21A, and the lower end surface of the decorative member 450 shown in FIG. 50B is substantially the same as the substantially vertical middle position of the case member 2491. When the roller 492a of the roller member 492 disposed on the upper side is displaced to a position in the vertical direction, the pressure at which the roller 492a abuts on the decoration member 450 and suppresses the decoration member 450 is higher than that of the restriction unit 2490 of the first embodiment. Can be small. In this case, the rotation member 2494 is in contact with a projection (not shown) formed inside the case member 2491, and the roller member 492 disposed on the upper side does not displace to the front side (the rotation member 2494 The upper side is not rotationally displaced to the front side).

  Accordingly, when the decorative member 450 is further displaced downward from the state shown in FIG. 21B and is displaced to the first position shown in FIG. 50C, a driving force is applied to the decorative member 450. It is possible to suppress an increase in energy consumption of the driving motor 441.

  When the decorative member 450 shown in FIG. 50C is displaced to the first position, the roller 492a disposed on the lower side comes into contact with the decorative member 450. As a result, the lower roller member 492 is pressed to the rear side and displaced to the rear side, and the upper roller 492a is displaced to the front side. Thereby, the pressing force with respect to the decoration member 450 of the roller 492a arrange | positioned above can be raised. As a result, when the decorative member 450 is disposed at the first position, the decorative member 450 can be firmly held by the pressing force of the roller member 492 disposed above and below. On the other hand, when the decorative member 450 is positioned in the middle of the displacement, the pressing force acting on the decorative member 450 can be reduced so that the decorative member 450 can be easily displaced. That is, with the displacement of the decorative member 450, the pressing force applied to the decorative member 450 from the restriction unit 2490 can be changed.

  Next, a distribution device 700 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  First, the overall configuration of the distribution device 3700 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 51 is an exploded front perspective view of a sorting apparatus 3700 according to the third embodiment. FIG. 52 is a partially enlarged front view of the sorting apparatus 3700. FIG. 53A is a cross-sectional view of the distribution device 3700 along the line LIIIa-LIIIa in FIG. 52, and FIG. 53B is a cross-sectional view of the distribution device 3700 along the line LIIIb-LIIIb in FIG. .

  As shown in FIGS. 51 to 53, in the distribution device 3700 in the third embodiment, the opening of the second winning prize opening 640 is connected to the distribution device 3700.

  The distribution device 3700 is disposed below the center frame 600 of the game board 13 and is disposed on the front side with respect to the base plate 60 and on the back side with respect to the base plate 60. And a front side forming portion 3710 to be formed.

  The front side forming portion 3710 is mainly formed with a winning member 3730 attached to the base plate 60 and a bending member 3740 disposed on the front side of the winning member 3730.

  The back surface forming portion 3720 includes an interposed member 3750 attached to the base plate 60, a distribution member 760 disposed on the back side of the interposed member 3750, and an interposed member positioned below the distribution member 760. And a second pitching path 3770 disposed on the back side of 3750.

  The prize-winning member 3730 is formed in a horizontally long rectangle when viewed from the front, and includes the first prize-winning port 64 described above at the upper center in the left-right direction, the first electric accessory 640a below the first prize-winning slot 64, and the first electric motor. A through hole 731 that is formed in the front-rear direction on both sides of the accessory 640a in the front-rear direction, a second through-hole 3733 that is formed in the front-rear direction below the through-hole 731, and a lower side of the second through-hole 3733 And a lower insertion hole 732 that is formed to penetrate in the front-rear direction.

  The second through-hole 3733 is an opening through which a sphere passes, and is formed in a substantially rectangular shape in front view that opens slightly larger than the outer diameter of the sphere. In addition, the second through hole 3733 is formed below the second winning opening 640, and a second projecting wall 3733a is formed on the lower surface and protrudes upward as seen from the back side to the front side. .

  The second projecting wall 3733a is provided with two symmetrical center lines in the left-right direction of the second through hole 3733 in a front view, and the projecting distance is set to be smaller from the back side to the front side. Therefore, when the sphere passes through the second through hole 3733 by the interposition member 3750 and the second pitching path, which will be described later, the sphere can be guided to the center in the left-right direction of the two second projecting walls 3733a. It can be rolled from the back side to the front side.

  The bending member 3740 is a member disposed on the front side of the through hole 731, the second through hole 3733, and the lower insertion hole 732 of the winning member 3730 described above, and on the left and right sides of the second winning port 640 described above. The pair of outer shapes are symmetrically formed.

  The bending member 3740 is formed from a plate-like body having a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and includes an upper protruding portion 741 protruding from the back side, an intermediate protruding portion 3745 protruding from below the upper protruding portion 741, and an intermediate protruding portion thereof. And a lower protrusion 743 protruding from below from 3745.

  The intermediate projecting portion 3745 is a wall portion that is long in the vertical direction (the vertical direction in FIG. 53 (b)) in the rear view, and is formed at positions on the left and right sides of the second through hole 3733. The two through holes 3733 are formed at the same height as the substantially middle position in the vertical direction. On the other hand, the lower side surface of the intermediate protrusion 3745 is formed below the bottom surface of the second through hole 3733.

  Further, a second opening 3746 having a predetermined gap is formed between the intermediate projecting portion 3745 and the upper projecting portion 741. On the other hand, an opening 744 having a predetermined gap is formed between the intermediate projecting portion 3745 and the lower projecting portion 743 facing each other.

  The second opening 3746 opens in a substantially U shape with the back side opened in a side view, and has an inner shape larger than the outer shape of the sphere. That is, the second opening 3746 is set to a size through which a sphere can pass. The detailed description of the second opening 3746 will be described later.

  The second pitching path 3770 is formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape when viewed from the front and is formed in a substantially box shape having a constant thickness with the front side opened. The second pitching path 3770 is a pitching path for feeding a ball that enters the second winning opening 640 to the second through hole 3733 of the winning member 3730, and is disposed on the back side of the interposed member 3750. In addition, a ball feeding path for sending a ball can be formed between the inside of the second ball feeding path 3770 and the interposed member 3750.

  In addition, the second pitching path 3770 is disposed such that the left end is located on the back side of the second winning opening 640 of the winning member 3730 in the front view, and the right end is the second through hole of the winning member 3730. It is disposed on the back side of 3733. That is, the second pitching path 3770 is disposed on the interposed member 3750 in such a manner that the left end portion in front view is located above the right end portion and tilts downward toward the right end portion.

  Further, the second pitching path 3770 is connected to the second winning opening 640 at the left end portion in front view and is connected to the second connection hole 3753 of the interposed member 3750 at the right end portion. As a result, after the ball that has entered the second prize opening 640 is sent to the inside of the second pitching path 3770, the ball inside the second pitching path 3770 rolls from the left end to the right end. The ball is sent to the second connection hole 3753 of the installation member 3750.

  The interposition member 3750 is formed in a horizontally long rectangle when viewed from the front, and the above-described variable winning device 65 at the lower center in the left-right direction, and a communication hole 751 that is located on both the left and right sides of the variable winning device 65 and is formed to penetrate therethrough. A recovery hole 752 positioned below the communication hole 751 and penetratingly formed in the front-rear direction, and a second connection hole 3753 positioned between the right communication hole 751 and the recovery hole 752 and penetratingly formed in the front-rear direction. And formed.

  The second connection hole 3753 is formed so as to penetrate in a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and the inner shape thereof is set to be larger than the outer shape of the sphere, and is formed at a position on the back side of the second through hole 3733 of the winning member 730. . As a result, the ball that rolls on the inner side of the second pitching path 3770 described above passes through the inside of the second connection hole 3753 and is sent to the second through hole 3733 of the interposed member 750.

  The sorting apparatus 3700 configured as described above is sent as follows. A ball entering from the first winning port 64 is sent to the distribution member 760 and is alternately transferred to one of the inclined surfaces 761 in the left-right direction by the seesaw member 762 of the distribution member 760. When the ball that rolls on the inclined surface 761 is sent to the end of the inclined surface 761, it passes through the inside of the communication hole 751 of the interposed member 3750 arranged on the front side, and on the back side of the bending member 740. The ball is sent. The balls sent to the back side of the bending members 740 and 3740 are guided along the protruding front end surface of the guide portion 742 of the bending members 740 and 3740 and fall downward, and the lower insertion hole 732 of the winning member 3730 is inserted. After passing through the inside of the sensor SE, the ball is sent to the collection hole 752 of the interposed member 3750.

  A ball entering from the second winning opening 640 is sent to the second pitching path 3770 and is sent from the left end to the right end inside the second pitching path 3770. The ball sent to the right end portion of the second pitching path 3770 is passed through the second connection hole 3753 of the interposed member 3750 arranged on the front side, and passed through the second through hole 3733 of the winning member 3730. Later, after being guided along the protruding front end surface of the guide portion 742 of the bending member 3740 and falling downward, after passing through the inside of the lower insertion hole 732 of the winning member 3730 and passing through the inside of the sensor SE, The ball is sent to the collection hole 752 of the installation member 3750.

  Therefore, in the sorting device 3700, a ball entering from the second winning port 640 can be detected by the sensor SE arranged on the right side of the winning member 3730 as viewed from the front, so that a new ball feeding path from the second winning port 640 is newly provided. There is no need to dispose the sensor SE. In other words, the sensor SE that detects the ball entering from the first winning port 64 can also serve as the sensor SE that detects the ball entering the second winning port 640, thereby reducing the cost of the product. it can.

  Next, the second opening 3746 of the bending member 3740 will be described with reference to FIG. 54A and 54B are cross-sectional views of the distribution device 3700. FIG. 54 (a) corresponds to FIG. 53 (a), and FIG. 54 (b) corresponds to FIG. 53 (b).

  As shown in FIG. 54, a ball enters from the first winning opening 64 and is sent to the back side of the bending member 3740, and a ball enters from the second winning opening 640 and is sent to the bending member 3740. If the balls sent to the back side are sent to the back side of the bending member 3740 at substantially the same timing, the balls on the back side of the bending member 740 may come into contact with each other to clog the balls.

  That is, a ball (hereinafter referred to as a “lower ball”) sent from the second winning opening 640 and sent from the second through hole 3733 of the winning member 3730 to the bending member 3740 is sent from the first winning opening 64. The ball is sent to the rear side of the bending member 3740 from the through-hole 731 of the winning member 3730 and collides with a ball that falls from the upper side to the lower side of the bending member 3740 (hereinafter referred to as “upper ball”). By catching on the front side end of the second through hole 3733, there is a possibility that the ball cannot be moved and clogged.

  On the other hand, in the third embodiment, since the second opening 3746 is formed in the bending member 3740, the lower sphere can be discharged by discharging the upper sphere from the second opening 3746 or facing the second opening 3746. It is possible to eliminate the balanced state between the sphere and the upper sphere and to prevent the sphere from clogging in the pitching path of the bending member 3740.

  That is, when the upper sphere rides on the lower sphere and a balanced state is formed, the second opening 3746 is formed on the side surface in the left-right direction where the upper sphere is located, and the upper sphere Since either the left or right is leaned depending on the spherical shape, the upper sphere is sent into the left or right second opening 3744. Thereby, the balanced body of the lower sphere and the upper sphere can be eliminated. Therefore, it is possible to suppress clogging of the ball in the pitching path of the bending member 3740.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 55, a distribution device 4700 according to the fourth embodiment will be described. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 55A is a front view of a distribution device 4700 according to the fourth embodiment, and FIG. 55B is a cross-sectional view of the distribution device 4700 along the line LVb-LVb in FIG. 55A. FIG. 55C is a cross-sectional view of the sorting device 4700 along the line LVc-LVc in FIG. In FIGS. 55 (a) to 55 (c), a passing path through which a sphere passes is schematically illustrated by a broken line.

  As shown in FIGS. 55 (a) to 55 (c), in the distribution device 4700 according to the fourth embodiment, a winning opening is formed on the outer side of the opening 744 of the bending member 740 in the lateral direction (FIG. 55 (a) lateral direction). 4063 is disposed.

  The winning opening 4063 is an opening through which a ball flowing down the game area can pass and is disposed on the front side of the game board 13. The back side of the winning opening 4063 is connected to a third connecting hole 4752a of an interposed member 4750 described later, and the ball that has entered the winning opening 4063 is guided to the third communicating hole 54752a.

  The collection hole 752 of the interposed member 4750 is formed to be bent downward at the tip of the second pitching path KR2, and a path (sixth pitching path KR6) in which the sphere passes through and is sent downward is formed. The That is, the sixth pitching route KR6 and the second pitching route KR2 are connected.

  In the sixth pitching path KR6, third connection holes 4752a projecting on both the left and right sides are formed, and a sensor SE that detects the passage of a sphere is disposed below the third connection hole 4752a.

  The third connection hole 4752a is connected to an open portion on the back side of the winning opening 4063. As a result, the ball that has entered the winning opening 4063 is sent to the inside of the third connection hole 4752a and is sent to the sixth pitching path.

  In addition, a sensor SE2 different from the sensor SE disposed in the sixth pitching path KR6 is disposed on the passage of the third connection hole 4752a. Thereby, the sphere that has entered the third connection hole 4752a can be detected.

  Thereby, the ball discharged from the opening 744 of the bending member 740 can be awarded to the winning opening 4063. In other words, the ball guided by the bending member 740 passes not only through the sensor SE but also from the opening 744 into the game area, and the flowed ball enters the winning opening 4063 and moves the sensor SE2. The form which passes can be formed and an interest can be given to a game.

  The winning opening 4063 may be arranged at a position where all the balls that have flowed out from the opening 744 to the gaming area can be received, or a part of the winning opening 4063 depending on the state of the ball that has flowed out from the opening 744 into the gaming area. These spheres may be received and some of the spheres may be arranged at positions where they cannot be received.

  In addition, since the opening 744 is formed at a connection portion between the first ball-sending passage KR1 and the second ball-sending passage KR2, the first ball-sending route KR1 can be obtained by paying out a ball that is likely to be clogged from the opening to the game area. And the ball can be prevented from being clogged at the connecting portion between the second pitching path KR2.

  Further, since the bending member 740 in which the winning opening 4063 and the opening 744 are formed is disposed on the front side of the game board 13, the player can visually recognize the state in which the ball is paid out from the opening 744 and enters the winning opening 4063. Yes, it can be easily given to players.

  Since the third connecting hole 4752a is connected to the upper side of the sensor SE arranged in the sixth pitching path KR6, the ball entering from the winning opening 4063 only passes the sensor SE2 arranged in the third connecting hole 4752a. Without passing through the sensor SE arranged on the sixth pitching path KR6. Therefore, since the two sensors can be passed by the ball entering from the winning opening 4063, the player can be provided with interest.

  Further, since the balls sent to the bending member 740 are distributed to the right and left by the seesaw member 762 of the distributing member 760, the balls are continuously connected to the connecting portion between the first ball feeding path KR1 and the second ball feeding path KR2. And can be prevented from being thrown. Therefore, it can suppress that a ball | bowl is blocked in the connection part of the 1st pitching path | route KR1 and the 2nd pitching path | route KR2.

  The present invention has been described based on the above embodiment, but the present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications can be easily made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. It can be guessed.

  In each of the above embodiments, a gaming machine may be configured by replacing or combining part or all of one embodiment with part or all of another one or more embodiments.

  In the first embodiment, the case where one sensor 630 is disposed in the center frame 600 has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the two sensors 630 may be arranged symmetrically with respect to the center line 600 in the left-right direction. Three or more sensors 630 may be provided.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the sensor 630 is disposed on the frame body 610 of the center frame 600 has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the sensor 630 may be disposed on the front cover 460 of the vertical displacement unit 400. In this case, since the irradiation range of the sensor 630 can be widened, the detection area of the sensor 630 can be expanded.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the cover member 621 of the center cover 620 is formed as a curved surface having a convex front surface is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, it may be bent in a substantially V-shaped cross section at the front center. Moreover, you may form as a curved surface convex on the back side. In addition, a curved surface may be partially formed. It is sufficient that at least light emitted from the sensor 630 is reflected by the cover member 630 and an object in front of the game board 13 can be detected.

  In the first embodiment, the cover member 621 of the center cover 620 is used for both the role of allowing the player to visually recognize the third symbol display device 81 disposed on the back side and the light emitted from the sensor 630. Although described above, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the area of the cover member 621 is an area that allows the player to visually recognize the third symbol display device 81 and an area that reflects light emitted from the sensor 630. The area may be divided into This modification will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 56 is a cross-sectional view of a center frame 600 as a modified example. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as said each embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted. FIG. 56 corresponds to the cross-sectional view of FIG. 40B, and only the cross section of the center cover 620 is schematically illustrated. Further, in FIG. 56, the outer shape of the third symbol display device 81 arranged on the back side of the center frame 600 is illustrated by a two-dot chain line.

  As shown in FIG. 56, the cover member 621 of the center frame 600 has a second region R2 at both ends in the left-right direction (left-right direction in FIG. 56) and the center side of the second region R2 at the both ends (third symbol display device). 81) and the first region R1.

  1st area | region R1 is an area | region which makes the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 arrange | positioned at the back side of the cover member 621 visually recognizable from a player, and is formed from the amount of light-transmitting materials with comparatively high transparency. The second region R <b> 2 is a region that reflects light emitted from the sensor 630 to the front side (player side) of the gaming machine 13. Note that the boundary position between the first region R1 and the second region R2 only needs to be visible from the player located on the front side of the gaming machine 13, and therefore is substantially the same as the outer shape of the third symbol display device 81 in the front view. The same position is preferred. In this modification, the sensor 630 will be described in a state where it is disposed at both left and right ends for easy understanding.

  In this case, for example, a member having a high reflectance such as silver may be coated on the back side or the front side of the second region R2. Alternatively, a silver seal may be attached to the back side or the front side of the second region R2. In this case, the light emitted from the sensor 630 can be easily reflected, so that the object on the front side of the game board 13 can be detected more reliably.

  Alternatively, the second region R2 may be curved so as to protrude toward the back surface, or the second region R2 may be flat. In this case, since the light emitted from the sensor 630 is reflected by the second region R2 and can be emitted to the front side, the detection range of the sensor 630 can be expanded.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where the sensor 630 is disposed in front of the cover member 621 has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the sensor 630 is disposed behind the cover member 621. You may set up. In this case, the light emitted from the sensor 630 is transmitted through the cover member 621, so that an object on the front side of the game board 13 can be detected. Further, in this case, the cover member 620 has a convex curved shape on the front side, so that when the light emitted from the sensor 630 is incident on the cover member 630, the irradiation angle can be changed. That is, the irradiation range of the sensor 630 emitted to the front side of the game board 13 can be widened by transmitting the cover member 630 having a convex curved shape on the front side.

  In each of the embodiments described above, the case where the two inclined surfaces 761 (third pitching path KR3) of the sorting member 760 are formed with the same length has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and two inclined surfaces are provided. The length of 761 (third pitching route KR3) may be different from each other. In this case, it is possible to make the player entertained because the time until the respective balls distributed to the right and left by the seesaw member 762 of the distribution member 720 are detected by the sensor SE can be made different on the left and right paths.

  In the first and second embodiments, the case where the roller 492a is formed of an elastic body has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the roller 492a may be formed of a material having a lower elastic modulus than rubber or urethane, and an elastic member such as rubber or urethane may be externally fitted to the outer peripheral surface of the roller 492a. In this case, since the volume of the elastic body can be reduced, the manufacturing cost of the roller member 492 can be suppressed.

  Although the case where the thickness of the cover member 621 of the center frame 600 is formed constant has been described in the first embodiment, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the thickness of the cover member 621 may be changed. For example, the cross-sectional shape of the cover member 621 may be formed in a substantially D shape. In this case, since the cover member 621 becomes a convex lens, the third symbol display device 81 and the decorative member 450 arranged on the back side of the cover member 621 can be displayed in a large size.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the roller 492a is sandwiched between the contact surface 452h of the front base 452 and the bulging portion 491c of the case member 491 using the elastic deformation of the roller 492a has been described. The present invention is not limited to this, and the displacement of the roller 492a may be used. For example, the shaft portion 492b of the roller 492a is formed to be displaceable, and the roller 492a is displaced so as to be sandwiched between the contact surface 452h of the front base 452 and the bulging portion 491c of the case member 491. Good.

  In this case, the roller 492a can be sandwiched between the contact surface 452h of the front base 452 and the bulging portion 491c of the case member 491 without using elastic deformation of the roller 492a. It is not necessary to form with a material with a high elastic modulus, and for example, it can be formed with a resin having a lower elastic modulus than rubber or urethane, so that the manufacturing cost can be reduced accordingly.

  In the third embodiment, the case has been described in which the roller 492a disposed in the upper part comes into contact with the decorative member 450 prior to the roller 492a disposed in the lower part. The roller 492a to be in contact with the decorative member 450 may be abutted after the roller 492a disposed at the lower portion.

  For example, the roller 492a disposed on the upper portion of the restriction unit 490 at the initial position (position where the contact surface 452h of the front base 452 and the roller 492a are separated) is in the front-rear direction (see FIG. 50). (A) You may comprise so that a predetermined clearance may be provided in the left-right direction). In this case, when the decorative member 450 is displaced to the first position, the time until it comes into contact with the roller 492a is delayed as compared with the first and third embodiments. Therefore, the drive motor 441 that drives the decorative member 450 The time during which the load (resistance) increases can be shortened.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the irradiation restricting portion 544 and the LED 532 are arranged in contact with each other has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and a predetermined interval is provided between the irradiation restricting portion 544 and the LED. A gap may be formed. In this case, since both ends of the irradiation hole 543 can be opened, it is possible to suppress air from staying (stagnation) in the irradiation hole 543. That is, since an air flow can be created inside the irradiation hole 543, the heat generated by the operation of the LED 532 can be efficiently cooled.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the rough surface processing is formed in the uneven shape has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the rough surface processing may be a surface made only of projections (projections). The surface which consists only of a dent (dent) may be sufficient. Further, the rough surface processing may be extended as a strip or a groove. Furthermore, the concave and convex cross-sectional shapes may be any of a circle, a keystroke, a polygonal diameter, or a combination of these. That is, as long as a portion higher than the reference position and a portion lower than the reference position are formed, a plurality of portions (surfaces) that can reflect light are formed, and irregular reflection is possible, the shape of the unevenness is arbitrary.

  In each of the above embodiments, a smoke generating device (smoke generating means) for generating smoke is provided on the back side of the game board 13 (base plate 60), and the smoke generated from the smoke generating device is converted into a displacement region of the rotary unit 500. You may make it introduce | transduce into (rotation area | region). That is, an atmosphere filled with smoke may be formed in the space between the third symbol display device 81 and the center frame 600 (center cover 620). Thereby, the player can visually recognize the light emitted from the LED 532 while passing the smoke, and the blinking of the LED 532 can be highlighted. Further, only the blinking of the LED 532 can be visually recognized while hiding the rotating unit 500 or the member on the back side thereof with smoke (making it difficult to be visually recognized by the player). Therefore, the production effect by LED532 (light) can be heightened.

  In addition, with the conventional product, smoke is pushed out to the outer peripheral side with the rotation of the rotating unit, and it is difficult to fill the space with the smoke. Therefore, it was difficult to obtain the effect of smoke. On the other hand, according to the rotation unit 500 in each embodiment described above, the air holes 512 and 522 are opened in the upper surface base 510 and the lower surface base 520, and the back surface of the structure in which the upper surface base 510 and the lower surface base 520 are assembled. Since the side is opened, the outside air taken in from the blow holes 512 and 522 can be exhausted from the back side and circulated. Therefore, it is possible to fill the above-described space with smoke (ie, to stay around the rotation unit 500). As a result, the LED 532 can be blinked in an atmosphere filled with smoke, and the above-described effects can be achieved.

  You may implement this invention in the pachinko machine etc. of a different type from said each embodiment. For example, once a big hit, a pachinko machine that raises the expected value of the big hit until a big hit state occurs (for example, two times or three times) including that (for example, a two-time right item, a three-time right item) May also be implemented. Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, the present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine that has a special area such as a V-zone and has a special gaming state as a necessary condition for winning a ball in the special area. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, the game machine may be implemented as various game machines such as an alepatchi, a sparrow ball, a slot machine, a game machine in which a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated.

  In the slot machine, for example, a symbol is changed by operating a control lever in a state where a symbol effective line is determined by inserting coins, and a symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating a stop button. Is. Accordingly, the basic concept of the slot machine is that it is provided with a display device for confirming and displaying the identification information after variably displaying the identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and resulting from the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever). The variation display of the identification information is started, and the variation display of the identification information is stopped and fixedly displayed due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. It is a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that the combination of identification information at the time is a specific condition. In this case, the game medium is typically a coin, medal, etc. Take as an example.

  In addition, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device is provided that displays a symbol after a symbol string composed of a plurality of symbols is variably displayed, and has a handle for launching a ball. What is not. In this case, after throwing a predetermined amount of spheres based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the change of the symbol is started due to the operation of the operation lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or With the passage of time, the variation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player is generated on the condition that the determined symbol at the time of stoppage is a so-called jackpot symbol. In this case, a large amount of balls are paid out to the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only a ball can be handled as a gaming value in the gaming hall. Therefore, the gaming value seen in the current gaming hall in which pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed is used. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the location of the gaming machine can be solved.

  The concept of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention is shown below.

<About the concept of the invention using the center cover 620 as an example>
A game board having an opening in the center, a liquid crystal display device disposed so as to be visible through the opening of the game board, and the liquid crystal display device by emitting light and receiving reflected light from the light object And a sensor device that detects the presence of the object on the front side of the liquid crystal display device, the liquid crystal display device being disposed on the front side of the liquid crystal display device, at least the front surface being formed as a convex curved surface, and a light transmissive material A gaming machine A1 comprising a front member made of

  Here, a game board having an opening in the center, a liquid crystal display device disposed so as to be visible through the opening of the game board, and a light object and an object of the light (for example, a player's hand) A gaming machine including a sensor device (motion sensor) that detects the presence of an object on the front side of a liquid crystal display device by receiving reflected light is known (for example, JP-A-2014-208139). In this case, if the sensor device is exposed so as to be visible from the player, the player's interest is impaired. Therefore, the sensor device is disposed on the back side of the decorative member and is difficult to be visually recognized by the player. The sensor device emits light through the open part on the side of the decorative member and receives the reflected light from the object of the light to detect the presence of the object, and the sensor device opens the side of the decorative member. The farther it is arranged from the part (retracted to the back side), the harder it is to be seen by the player, but the range in which the object can be detected becomes narrower, and the sensor device is open on the side of the decorative member. The closer it is to the player, the wider the range in which the object can be detected, but the player can easily see it. That is, there is a problem that it is difficult to secure a range in which an object can be detected while making it difficult for the player to visually recognize the sensor device.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A1, since it is disposed on the front side of the liquid crystal display device and at least the front surface is formed as a convex curved surface and includes a front member made of a light transmissive material, the sensor device emits light. The reflected light can be reflected by the front member to reach the object, and the reflected light from the object can be reflected by the front member to reach the sensor device. Therefore, since the sensor device can be disposed away from the opening portion on the side of the decorative member (retracted to the back side), the sensor device is less visible to the player, A detectable range can be secured. Since the front member is made of a light transmissive material, it is possible to ensure the visibility of the symbols displayed on the liquid crystal display device.

  Further, since the front surface is a convex curved surface, when the light emitted from the sensor device is reflected by the front surface of the front member, the reflection angle (reflection angle) is set to a more acute angle near the sensor device. On the other hand, at a position far from the sensor device, the angle of reflection (each of the reflections) can be made more obtuse, and the range in which the object can be detected can be easily expanded accordingly. The same applies to the case where the reflected light from the object is reflected by the front surface of the front member.

  In the gaming machine A1, the gaming machine A2 is characterized in that a thickness dimension of at least a portion of the front member formed as the curved surface is set to a substantially constant value.

  According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A1, the front member is set to a substantially constant thickness dimension of at least a portion formed as a curved surface, so that the front member acts as a convex lens. And the visibility of the symbols displayed on the liquid crystal display device can be secured. Moreover, since a space can be formed on the back side of the front member, a space for displacing other members (displaceable members formed so as to be displaceable) can be secured accordingly.

  The gaming machine A2 includes a displacement member formed so as to be displaceable between the liquid crystal display device and the front member, and the front member has a first portion of the periphery of the front member on the front side of the second portion. A gaming machine A3, which is arranged at a position where

  According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A2, the front member is disposed at a position where the first part of the peripheral edge of the front member is on the front side of the second part. The first portion can be used as a passage when the displacement member is displaced between the back side of the board and the back side of the front member. On the other hand, since the 2nd part of the periphery of a front member is located in the back side rather than a 1st part, the curvature of a front member can be enlarged in the limited space by that much.

  The first part of the front member is disposed at a position that is substantially the same as the back of the game board or on the front side of the back of the game board, and the second part of the front member is more than the back of the game board. A gaming machine A4, which is disposed at a position on the back side.

  According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine A3, the first portion of the front member is disposed at a position that is substantially the same as the back of the game board or at the front side of the back of the game board. It can suppress more reliably that a displacement member interferes with a 1st part, and can enlarge the displacement member by that much. In addition, since the second portion of the front member is disposed at a position on the back side of the back of the game board, the curvature of the front member can be increased, and the front of the front member can be made light accordingly. Easy to use as a reflective surface. That is, it is possible to ensure a range in which an object can be detected while making it difficult for the player to visually recognize the sensor device.

  The gaming machine A3 or A4 includes a center frame disposed at an inner edge of the opening of the gaming board, and the displacement member is formed to be displaceable between the back side of the gaming board and the back side of the front member. A gaming machine A5, comprising: a main body member to be rotated; and a rotating member rotatably disposed on the main body member, wherein the second portion of the front member is coupled to the center frame.

  According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A3 or A4, the second portion is connected to the center frame, so that the displacement member (main body member) is displaced to the back side of the front member and the rotating member is rotated. The wind generated by this can be blocked by the second portion (front member). As a result, it is possible to suppress the flow of the sphere from being affected by the action of the wind. Further, even when wind is generated by the rotation of the rotating member and dust or dust is blown off by the wind, the second part (front member) can block it, so that the blown-off dust or dust is emitted from the sensor device. -It is possible to suppress a rise in the light receiving optical path and a decrease in detection accuracy.

  In the gaming machine A5, the center frame includes a stage on which a ball can roll, and the second portion of the front member is connected to a range including at least the stage of the center frame. A gaming machine A6.

  Here, in the center frame stage, it is conventionally known that a back wall is erected so that a ball rolling on the stage does not fall to the back side. However, in such a conventional product, the wind generated by the rotation of the rotating member wraps around from the standing front end of the back wall standing from the stage to the front side or is folded by the glass plate on the front side of the game board. Affects the ball rolling on the stage. On the other hand, in order to prevent the sphere rolling on the stage from being affected by the wind, the back wall is curved to the front side to cover the periphery of the stage sphere (that is, a closed passage is formed). Since it becomes difficult for the player to visually recognize the ball rolling on the stage, the interest of the game is impaired.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A5, the second portion of the front member is connected to a range including at least the stage of the center frame, so that the rotating member is rotated. The wind generated by this can be blocked by the second portion (front member). As a result, since it is not necessary to cover the periphery of the stage, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the ball that rolls on the stage, and it is possible to suppress the flow of the ball from being affected by the action of the wind.

  In the gaming machine A5 or A6, the first portion of the front member is disposed at a predetermined distance from an inner edge or a center frame in the opening of the gaming board.

  According to the gaming machine A7, in either the gaming machine A5 or A6, the first portion of the front member is disposed at a predetermined interval between the inner edge of the opening of the gaming board or the center frame. The back side and the front side of the game board and the front member can be communicated with each other through the predetermined interval. As a result, it is possible to suppress the heat generated from the displacement member (main body member or rotating member) from being trapped on the back side of the game board and the front member.

  In the gaming machine A7, the first portion of the front member is formed in a vertically upper region of the periphery of the front member.

  According to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A7, the first portion of the front member is formed in the vertical upper region of the periphery of the front member, so that the rotating member is rotated. Can flow toward the upper area of the game area (the upper area of the opening of the game board), and the influence of the wind can be suppressed from being affected by the action of the wind. That is, the sphere that flows down the upper area of the game area is an initial sphere that is launched from the launcher and flows into the game area, and its speed is relatively fast. Compared to a moving sphere, it is less susceptible to wind. In other words, it is possible to flow the wind toward an area where the sphere is not easily affected by the wind. Therefore, the rotation speed of the rotating member can be increased correspondingly, and the production effect can be improved.

  Here, when heat is generated from the displacement member (the main body member or the rotating member), the air warmed by the heat is raised, and the first portion of the front member is located on the upper side in the vertical direction of the periphery of the front member. A gap (predetermined interval) formed in the region, that is, the communication between the back side and the front side of the game board and the front member can be formed on the upper side. As a result, heat generated from the displacement member (main body member or rotating member) can be easily flowed to the front side of the game board and the front member through the gap, and heat is trapped on the back side of the game board and the front member. Can be suppressed.

  The gaming machine A9 according to any one of the gaming machines A1 to A8, wherein the front surface of the front member is formed as a curved surface whose normal direction is directed at least downward from the horizontal direction.

  Here, since the front member is disposed on the front side of the liquid crystal display device, the front member substantially faces the player's face (facing directly in front). Therefore, when the front surface of the front member is formed as a convex curved surface, the light from the fluorescent lamp and other gaming machines installed on the ceiling in the store is reflected toward the player, and the player feels dazzling, The visibility of the liquid crystal display device may be deteriorated (the light of a fluorescent lamp or other game machine is reflected on the front member, making it difficult to see the liquid crystal display device).

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A9, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines A1 to A8, the front surface of the front member is formed as a curved surface whose normal direction points at least below the horizontal direction. Light incident on the front surface of the front member can be reflected downward. In other words, when light from a fluorescent lamp or other gaming machine installed on the ceiling in the store is incident on the front of the front member, it can be suppressed that such light is reflected toward the player. It can be suppressed that the player feels dazzled and the visibility of the liquid crystal display device deteriorates.

  In the gaming machine A9, the first portion of the front member is formed in a vertically upper region of the periphery of the front member, and the front member has a thickness dimension of at least a portion formed as the curved surface. The gaming machine A10 is characterized in that the horizontal component increases as the front face is set to a constant value and is located upward in the vertical direction.

  According to the gaming machine A10, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A9, the first portion of the front member is formed in the vertical upper region of the periphery of the front member, and the front member is formed as at least a curved surface. The air is heated by the heat generated from the displacement member (main body member or rotating member) because the horizontal component increases as the front surface located in the vertical direction increases. Can be raised along the rear surface of the front member, and the raised air (heat) is communicated between the first portion of the front member (the gap between the game board and the rear side of the front member and the front side (predetermined). ))) To the front side of the game board and the front member. As a result, it is possible to suppress heat from being accumulated on the back side of the game board and the front member.

<Concept of Invention with Distribution Device 700 as an Example>
In a gaming machine that includes a passage member that forms a passage through which a ball can pass and in which a bent portion is formed in a part of the passage member, the passage member includes an opening that is formed in a side wall of the bent portion. A gaming machine B1 characterized by

  Here, a gaming machine including a passage member that forms a passage through which a ball can pass is known (for example, JP-A-2015-97764). In this case, a bent portion is also formed in a part of the passage member. By forming the bent portion, the pitching direction of the ball (position where the ball flows out from the passage to the game area) can be changed, so that the degree of freedom in layout can be increased. However, when the bent portion is formed in a part of the passage member as in the conventional gaming machine described above, the flow of the sphere in the bent portion tends to be stagnant. Therefore, when passing through the bent part in a state where a plurality of spheres are connected, the sphere following the preceding sphere catches up, and the sphere following the preceding sphere presses against the side wall so that both cannot roll. There was a problem that ball clogging may occur.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B1, the passage member has an opening formed in the side wall of the bent portion, so that when passing through the bent portion in a state where a plurality of spheres are connected, the passage member is behind the preceding sphere. Even if the moving ball catches up, it is difficult to press the preceding ball against the side wall, and the rolling of both can be easily continued. As a result, the occurrence of ball clogging can be suppressed.

  The bent portion is formed by a first portion of the passage member and a second portion that is connected to the downstream side of the first portion and has a direction in which the passing direction of the sphere is different. Means the range. In this case, each of the first portion and the second portion may be a linearly extending passage, a curvedly extending passage, or these. It may be a passage with a combination of

  In the gaming machine B1, the bent portion of the passage member includes a vertical passage that extends in a substantially vertical direction, and an extended passage that extends while being inclined downward from the vertical passage. A gaming machine B2 formed in a region where the passage and the extended passage intersect.

  According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B1, the bent portion of the passage member includes a vertical passage extending in a substantially vertical direction, and an extending passage extending while being inclined downward from the vertical passage. And the opening is formed in a region where the vertical passage and the extending passage intersect with each other.

  That is, the region where the vertical passage and the extension passage intersect is a position where the sphere flowing down (falling) down the vertical passage changes its direction and starts rolling in the extension direction of the extension passage. A ball following the ball is easy to catch up. For this reason, when the sphere following the preceding sphere presses against the side wall, both cannot roll and the ball is likely to be clogged. On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B2, since an opening is formed in a region where the vertical passage and the extension passage intersect, even if the following ball catches up with the preceding ball, the preceding ball is used as the side wall. It can be difficult to press, and it is easy to keep both rolling. As a result, the occurrence of ball clogging can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine B2, the opening is an area where the vertical passage and the extension passage intersect, and is formed on the left and right side walls when the ball rolls along the extension direction of the extension passage. A gaming machine B3 characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B2, the opening is an area where the vertical passage and the extending passage intersect, and the ball rolls along the extending direction of the extending passage. Therefore, even when a sphere following the preceding sphere catches up with the preceding sphere, it is difficult to press the preceding sphere against the left and right sidewalls, and the rolling of both can be continued easily. As a result, the occurrence of ball clogging can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine B3, an area where the vertical passage and the extending passage intersect, and a back side when a ball rolls along a bottom wall serving as a rolling surface and an extending direction of the extending passage. The gaming machine B4 is characterized in that an inclined surface that is inclined downward at an angle larger than the downward inclination of the extending passage is formed on the side wall of the extended passage.

  According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B3, the vertical passage and the extending passage intersect with each other along the bottom wall serving as a rolling surface and the extending direction of the extending passage. An inclined surface is formed on the side wall on the back side when the sphere rolls, and is inclined downward at an angle larger than the downward inclination of the extending passage, so that the sphere flowing down (falling) in the vertical passage changes direction. Thus, when starting rolling in the extending direction of the extending passage, such a sphere can be quickly rolled using the downward inclination of the inclined surface. This makes it easier to roll the preceding sphere before the following ball catches up, and the sphere rolls along the extending direction of the extension passage by the following ball. Since it can be suppressed from being pressed against the side wall on the back side), the rolling of both can be easily continued. As a result, the occurrence of ball clogging can be suppressed.

  In addition, the inclination of the inclined surface may be any of a linear inclination, a curved inclination, or a combination of these. Further, the downward slope angle of the inclined surface does not need to be larger than the downward inclination angle of the extending passage over the entire inclined surface, and the downward slope angle at least at a part of the inclined surface is extended. If the angle is larger than the downward inclination angle of the passage, it is sufficient.

  In any one of the gaming machines B2 to B4, a game board having a game area formed on the front side is provided, and an area where at least the vertical path and the extension path intersect among the bent portions of the path member is the game. A gaming machine B5, which is arranged on the front side of the board.

  According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines B2 to B4, at least a region of the bent portion of the passage member where the vertical passage and the extended passage intersect (that is, a portion where an opening is formed) ) Is arranged on the front side of the game board, so if a ball clog occurs at the bent part of the passage member, the ball clogged in the bent part on the front side of the game board by opening the glass plate Can be accessed from the opening. Therefore, it is possible to improve the workability of the work for eliminating the ball clogging.

  In any one of the gaming machines B2 to B5, the opening is a side wall in a region where the vertical passage and the extension passage intersect, and a height position corresponding to a radius of a sphere from a bottom wall serving as a rolling surface A gaming machine B6 that is formed in a range including

  According to the gaming machine B6, in any of the gaming machines B2 to B5, the opening is a side wall in a region where the vertical passage and the extension passage intersect, and corresponds to the radius of the sphere from the bottom wall serving as a rolling surface. Therefore, when the sphere that flows down (falls) down the vertical passage reaches the bottom wall of the extension passage, the sphere can be easily received in the opening. Therefore, even when a succeeding sphere catches up with the preceding sphere, it is difficult to press the preceding sphere against the side wall, and the rolling of both can be easily continued. As a result, the occurrence of ball clogging can be suppressed.

  In any one of the gaming machines B2 to B6, a game board having a game area formed on the front side is provided, and an area where at least the vertical path and the extension path intersect among the bent portions of the path member is the game. A gaming machine B7, which is disposed on the front side of the board, and wherein the opening is formed to have a size through which a ball can pass.

  According to the gaming machine B7, in any of the gaming machines B2 to B6, a region where at least the vertical passage intersects the extended passage (that is, a portion where the opening is formed) among the bent portions of the passage member is a game. Since the opening is formed on the front side of the board and has a size that allows the passage of the sphere, the occurrence of clogging of the sphere can be easily suppressed.

  That is, when the size of the opening is such that the sphere cannot pass, it is usually difficult to press the preceding sphere against the side wall using the opening. A form in which the preceding sphere is pressed against the center of the opening is formed, and the preceding sphere may be fitted into (inserted into) the opening. In this case, the subsequent rolling of the sphere is inhibited by the sphere fitted in the opening, and the clogging occurs.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B7, even when a form in which the following ball pushes the leading ball against the center of the opening is formed, the leading ball is moved from the opening to the outside of the passage member (on the front side of the game board). The game area can be discharged, and the preceding ball can be prevented from being fitted into the opening. Thereby, the rolling of the succeeding ball can be continued, so that the occurrence of the clogging of the ball can be suppressed.

  In addition, in this way, an opening is formed with a size that allows passage of the ball, and the opening is arranged on the front side of the game board (that is, the game area), so that the ball flowing down the game area can be reduced. It can be made to flow into the passage member from the opening. Therefore, the interest of the game can be improved. For example, when a sensor for detecting a winning ball is disposed downstream of the bent portion, in addition to the ball flowing from the upstream to the passage member from the bent portion, the ball flowing from the opening to the passage member is also used as the winning opening. Can be detected. In particular, in this case, the opening (a region where the vertical passage and the extended passage intersect) is disposed on the front side of the game board, so that the player can visually recognize the ball flowing into the passage member from the opening. be able to.

  In the gaming machine 7, a lower end of the inner edge of the opening is set at a position separated from the bottom wall of the extended passage by a predetermined distance.

  According to the gaming machine B8, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine B7, the lower end of the inner edge of the opening is set at a position separated from the bottom wall of the extending passage by a predetermined distance. A side wall can be left (formed) between the bottom wall and the bottom wall. Therefore, even when the opening is formed in such a size that the ball can pass through, it is possible to prevent the ball from flowing out from the passage member to the outside (game area) through the opening.

  In the gaming machines B1 to B8, the passage member is formed to be inclined downward toward the bent portion, is connected to the upstream side of the bent portion, and extends substantially linearly along the width direction of the game area. A pair of passage members arranged in such a posture that the upstream side of the inclined passage is positioned at the center in the width direction of the game area and the bent portion is positioned outside in the width direction of the game area. A gaming machine B9, wherein a winning device is positioned between the bent portions of the passage member.

  According to the gaming machine B9, the passage member is formed so as to be inclined downward toward the bent portion, and is connected to the upstream side of the bent portion and extends substantially linearly along the width direction of the gaming area. A pair of passage members are arranged in such a posture that the upstream side of the inclined passage is positioned at the center in the width direction of the game area and the bent portion is positioned on the outer side in the width direction of the game area, and the bent portions in the pair of passage members A winning device is positioned between the two.

  In this case, if the angle of the downward inclination of the inclined passage is made small (the downward inclination is gentle), the flow velocity of the sphere becomes low, and it becomes easy to generate a sphere clogging at the bent portion. On the other hand, when the downward inclination angle of the inclined passage is increased (the downward inclination is steep), it is possible to increase the flow speed of the sphere and to prevent the clogging of the bent portion. The necessary space in the height direction increases, making it difficult to arrange the winning device.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B9, since the opening is formed in the side wall of the bent portion, it is difficult for the ball clogging to occur in the bent portion. The downward slope can be made gentle). As a result, the space in the height direction necessary for the arrangement of the inclined passage can be suppressed, and the arrangement of the winning device can be made possible. That is, the arrangement of the passage member and the winning device described in the gaming machine B9 is impossible with the conventional product, and as described above, it is only possible by forming an opening in the side wall of the bent portion. .

  The gaming machine B9 is provided with a game board in which a game area is formed on the front side, and an area where at least the vertical path and the extension path intersect among the bent portions of the path member is on the front side of the game board. A gap that allows at least a ball to pass is formed between a portion of the bent portion of the passage member that is disposed on the front side of the game board and a lower edge of the game area. A gaming machine B10 characterized by this.

  Here, an opening is formed in the center of the game board, and the player can visually recognize the liquid crystal display device through the opening. In recent years, with an increase in the size of liquid crystal display devices, the opening at the center of the game board is also enlarged, so that the space between the lower edge of the opening at the center of the game board and the lower edge of the game area is narrowed. Therefore, in the conventional product, it is difficult to arrange the members corresponding to the passage member and the winning device described in the gaming machine 9 in the space between the lower edge of the opening at the center of the game board and the lower edge of the game area. there were. That is, as described above, when the downward inclination angle of the inclined passage is made small (the downward inclination is gentle), the flow speed of the sphere is lowered, and it becomes easy to generate a sphere clogging at the bent portion. On the other hand, when the downward inclination angle of the inclined passage is increased (the downward inclination is steep), it is possible to increase the flow speed of the sphere and to prevent the clogging of the bent portion. The necessary space in the height direction increases, making it difficult to arrange the winning device. In addition, since the position of the bent portion in the vertical direction is lowered (lowered), it becomes difficult to secure a gap through which the ball can pass between the bent portion and the lower edge of the game area. It is necessary to provide an outlet on each side.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B10, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine B9, since the opening is formed in the side wall of the bent portion, it is difficult to cause ball clogging in the bent portion. The angle of the downward inclination of the passage can be reduced (the downward inclination is gentle). As a result, it is possible to raise (increase) the position of the bent portion in the vertical direction, so that it is possible to secure a gap through which the sphere can pass between the bent portion and the lower edge of the game area. Therefore, it is not necessary to provide out openings on both sides of the bent portion. That is, in the arrangement of the passage member and the winning device described in the gaming machine B9, the arrangement described in the gaming machine B10 (an arrangement in which a gap through which a ball can pass is formed between the bent portion and the lower edge of the gaming area). This is an arrangement that is impossible with the conventional product, and as described above, can only be achieved by forming an opening in the side wall of the bent portion.

<About the concept of the invention taking the rotation unit 500 as an example>
A gaming machine having a rotating display device that has a plurality of light emitting means and performs afterimage display by an afterimage effect by blinking the light emitting means according to a rotation position, wherein the rotation display device includes the plurality of light emitting means. Are arranged, a main body member that accommodates the substrate, and a base member that rotatably supports the main body member, and the main body member transmits a light from the light emitting means, A gaming machine C1 comprising a plurality of through-holes formed through a side wall facing in the rotational direction.

  Here, there is known a gaming machine including a rotation display device that has a plurality of light emitting means (LEDs) and performs afterimage display by an afterimage effect by blinking the light emitting means according to the rotation position (for example, JP, 2015-100385, JP, 2015-053968, etc.).

  In this case, in the technique disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-100385, since the light emitting unit is exposed, the appearance is impaired. On the other hand, in the technique disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-053968, the light emitted from the light-emitting means is visually recognized through a translucent member (push button). Therefore, the light emitting means is not exposed. However, in this case, even if the member (reel) provided with the light emitting means is rotated, the rotation is not visually recognized, so there is no point in performing afterimage display by the afterimage effect. That is, the same display can be performed by arranging a plurality of light emitting means vertically and horizontally in a matrix and controlling the blinking of each light emitting means.

  Accordingly, the applicant of the present application has devised a rotary display device in which a substrate on which a plurality of light emitting means are arranged is housed in a main body member, and the main body member is rotatably supported on a base member (not yet filed at the time of filing this application). Known). According to this, since the light emitting means is accommodated in the main body member, the light emitting means is hardly visible and the appearance is not impaired. Moreover, since the afterimage display by blinking of the light emitting means is visually recognized in a state where the rotation of the main body member is visible, the interest is enhanced. However, in this case, since the light emitting means is accommodated in the main body member, a new problem has been found that it is difficult to cool the light emitting means. The light emitting means (LED) and the IC / capacitor that controls them are soldered to the board. If the heat generated when these light emitting means, IC / capacitors operate cannot be cooled sufficiently, the solder will melt. There is a risk of poor contact.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C1, the main body member includes a plurality of through holes formed through the side wall facing in the rotation direction, so that when the main body member is rotated, the main body member is removed from the plurality of through holes. Outside air can be taken into the interior of the. Therefore, the heat generated when the light emitting means operates can be cooled.

  In the gaming machine C1, the main body member is formed in a container-like shape with an open back side, the gaming machine C2.

  According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C1, the main body member is formed in a container shape with the back side open, so that the outside air taken in from the through hole in the side wall can be efficiently removed from the back side. Can be exhausted. Therefore, the heat generated when the light emitting means operates can be cooled. In addition, by exhausting from the back side of the main body member in this way, it is possible to suppress the exhaust from affecting the ball flowing down the game area (or rolling the stage).

  In the gaming machine C2, the main body member is formed in a rectangular shape when viewed from the front along the diametrical direction in the rotation plane of the main body member, and the front wall forming the front side is closer to the end in the longitudinal direction. A gaming machine C3 that is formed in a curved shape that recedes to the side.

  According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C2, the main body member is formed in a rectangular shape when viewed from the front (that is, viewed in the direction of the rotation axis) that is a long shape along the diameter direction on the rotation plane of the main body member. Therefore, using the centrifugal force accompanying the rotation of the main body member, the air inside the main body member can flow to the longitudinal end side (outward in the radial direction during rotation) and exhaust from the back side. Therefore, along with the flow of air, outside air can be taken into the main body member from the back side at and around the rotation shaft. That is, since the rotational speed is low at and around the rotating shaft, the efficiency of taking in outside air from the through hole in the side wall is poor (or cannot be taken in), but the circulation of air using centrifugal force (the rear surface at and around the rotating shaft) The outside air is taken in from the side, and the outside air taken in is made to flow to the longitudinal direction end side (radially outward at the time of rotation) by centrifugal force to form a flow of air exhausted from the back side on the radially outward side) be able to. As a result, the heat generated when the light emitting means operates can be cooled. In particular, it is possible to achieve cooling of the light emitting means disposed in the vicinity of the rotating shaft.

  In this case, when the front wall that forms the front side of the main body member has a shape parallel to the rotation plane of the main body member (that is, the main body member has a rectangular parallelepiped shape), the longitudinal end portion (when rotating) Since the angle of the portion where the air that has flowed to the outside in the radial direction changes direction toward the back side is substantially a right angle, vortices are likely to be formed at this portion. Therefore, the air flow is hindered, and smooth exhaust from the back side becomes difficult.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C3, the front wall that forms the front side is formed in a curved shape that recedes toward the back side toward the end in the longitudinal direction. The angle of the portion where the air flowing toward the outer side (radially outward) can gradually flow toward the back side and the direction of the air flowing toward the end in the longitudinal direction (outward in the radial direction) changes toward the rear side. Can be made larger than a substantially right angle, so that the formation of vortices in such a portion can be suppressed, and the flow of air can be made smooth. Therefore, exhaust from the back side can be performed more smoothly. As a result, the cooling of the light emitting means disposed in the vicinity of the rotation shaft can be achieved more reliably.

  In the gaming machine C2 or C3, the main body member has a rotating shaft and an open area on the back side in the vicinity of the rotating shaft larger than an open area on the back side on the longitudinal end side. Machine C4.

  According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C2 or C3, the main body member has an opening area on the back side in the vicinity of the rotating shaft and the rotating shaft is larger than an opening area on the back side on the longitudinal end side. Therefore, using the centrifugal force that accompanies the rotation, the air inside the main body member flows to the longitudinal end side (outward in the radial direction during rotation), and from the back side on the radially outward side. By exhausting, when the outside air is taken in from the rotating shaft and the back side in the vicinity thereof, the taking-in can be performed efficiently.

  In the gaming machine C4, the main body member has a rotating shaft and an open portion on the back side in the vicinity of the rotating shaft formed in a circular shape concentric with the rotating shaft.

  According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C4, the main body member has a rotating shaft and an open portion on the back side in the vicinity of the rotating shaft formed in a circular shape concentric with the rotating shaft. As a result of the rotation, it is possible to suppress disturbance of the outside air on the rear side of the rotating shaft and its vicinity (formation of a flow in the rotating direction). As a result, it is possible to efficiently take in outside air from the rotating shaft and the back side in the vicinity thereof.

  In any of the gaming machines C2 to C5, the base member includes a shaft member that rotatably supports the main body member, and the shaft member is reduced in diameter from the back surface side to the back surface side of the main body member. A gaming machine C6 characterized by this.

  According to the gaming machine C6, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines C2 to C5, the shaft member that rotatably supports the main body member on the base member has a diameter reduced from the back side to the back side of the main body member. Therefore, when the outside air is taken in from the rear side of the rotating shaft and the vicinity thereof with the rotation of the main body member, the flow of the outside air along the outer peripheral surface of the shaft member can be smoothed, and the flow resistance can be reduced. As a result, since it is possible to efficiently take in outside air from the back side in the vicinity of the rotation shaft, it is possible to more reliably achieve cooling of the light emitting means disposed in the vicinity of the rotation shaft.

  In any one of the gaming machines C1 to C6, the board is accommodated in the main body member in a posture in which a surface on which the light emitting means is mounted or a surface opposite to the surface faces the side wall of the main body member. Characteristic gaming machine C7.

  According to the gaming machine C7, in addition to the effects exerted by any of the gaming machines C1 to C6, the board has a posture in which the surface on which the light emitting means is mounted or the surface opposite to the surface faces the side wall of the body member. Since it is housed in the member, the outside air introduced from the through-hole formed through the side wall can be efficiently sprayed onto the light emitting means or the IC / capacitor to enhance the heat radiation effect. As a result, it is possible to effectively cool the heat generated when the light emitting means or the IC / capacitor operates. Further, the posture in which the substrate is accommodated in the main body member is the posture in which the front surface or the back surface of the substrate faces the side wall of the main body member, so that the width dimension in the front view of the main body member (dimension in the direction perpendicular to the longitudinal direction). ) Can be reduced. As a result, in a state where the main body member (rotary display device) is stopped, it is possible to ensure the visibility of the members and devices disposed on the back side.

  Any of the gaming machines C1 to C7, comprising a smoke generating means for generating smoke in a displacement region of the main body member of the rotary display device.

  According to the gaming machine C8, in addition to the effects exerted by any of the gaming machines C1 to C7, since the smoke generating means for generating smoke is provided in the displacement region of the main body member of the rotary display device, the flashing of the light emitting means is made to stand out. Can do. Moreover, only the blinking of the light emitting means can be visually recognized while hiding the rotary display device with smoke, and the effect effect by light can be enhanced.

  In the conventional rotary display device, smoke is pushed out to the outer peripheral side as the main body member rotates, and it is difficult to obtain the effect of smoke. Is formed and the outside air can be circulated, so that the smoke can remain around the body member. As a result, the light emitting means can be blinked in an atmosphere filled with smoke, and the above-described effects can be achieved.

  As a smoke generator, for example, a type in which aqueous or oily oil (liquid) is heated and vaporized to generate smoke (smoke), and liquid (aqueous or oily) is pressurized and diffused by a compressor in the air. Examples include a type in which fine particles are retained and a type in which carbon dioxide gas is ejected.

  In the gaming machine C8, a game board having an opening in the center, a liquid crystal display device disposed so as to be visible through the opening of the game board, and disposed on the front side of the liquid crystal display device and projecting to the front side And a front member made of a light-transmitting material, and at least a main body member of the rotary display member is positioned between the liquid crystal display device and the front member. Machine C9.

  According to the gaming machine C9, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine C8, a gaming board having an opening in the center, a liquid crystal display device disposed so as to be visible through the opening of the gaming board, and the front of the liquid crystal display device And a front member made of a light-transmitting material, and at least a main body member of the rotary display member is positioned between the liquid crystal display device and the front member. Therefore, the smoke generated from the smoke generating device can be easily retained (contained easily) in the displacement region of the main body member. Therefore, it is easy to make the light emitting means blink in an atmosphere filled with smoke and make the blinking stand out, or to make only the blinking of the light emitting means visible while hiding the rotary display device with smoke. As a result, it is possible to enhance the production effect by light. In particular, since the front member is convexly curved toward the front, smoke can be easily retained in the space on the back side of the front member. As a result, it is possible to easily enhance the light effect using the smoke described above.

<About the concept of the invention taking the rotation unit 500 as an example>
A base member; a main body member that is displaced between the first position and the second position with respect to the base member; and a displacement member that is displaceably disposed on the main body member, wherein the main body member is at least the In the gaming machine in which the displacement member is displaced in the state of being disposed at the first position, the rotation member that is rotatably supported on one of the base member or the body member and the body member are disposed at the first position. And a contact member disposed on the other of the base member and the main body member so that the main body member is disposed at the first position. The gaming machine D1 is characterized in that the displacement direction at the time and the rotation direction of the rotating member are set substantially parallel to each other.

  Here, a base member, a main body member that is displaced between the first position and the second position with respect to the base member, and a displacement member that is displaceably disposed on the main body member, the main body member includes: There is known a gaming machine in which a displacement member is formed so as to be displaceable in a state of being arranged at a first position (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-162990).

  In this case, when the main body member is disposed at the first position and the displacement member is displaced, the main body member may rattle against the base member as the displacement member is displaced. In view of this, there are some which provide engagement means for engaging the main body member and the base member to suppress the rattling. The engaging means is disposed on one of the main body member and the base member and is urged by the urging means, and is formed so as to be engageable with the engaging member and on the other of the main body member or the base member. An engagement member disposed, and utilizing the displacement of the main body member relative to the base member (displacement toward the first position), the engagement member is retracted against the urging force of the urging means, and the main body When the member is disposed at the first position, the engaging member is advanced by the urging force of the urging means and engaged with the engaged member. Thereby, the relative displacement of the main body member with respect to the base member is restricted by the engagement of the engaging means, and rattling of the main body member with respect to the base member accompanying the displacement of the displacement member is suppressed.

  However, in such a conventional engaging means, in order to place the engaging means in the engaged state (the main body member is disposed at the first position), the engaging member is resisted against the urging force of the urging means. Not only does it need to be retracted, it also resists the urging force of the urging means when releasing the engagement state of the engaging means (displace the main body member from the first position toward the second position). There is a problem in that it is necessary to retract the engaging member, and a driving force necessary for displacing the main body member with respect to the base member increases.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D1, the rotating member that is pivotally supported by one of the base member and the main body member, and the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member in contact with the main body member in the first position. And a contact member disposed on the other of the base member and the main body member, so that the contact of the contact member with the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member makes it possible to It is possible to suppress the rattling of the main body member with respect to the base member accompanying the displacement of the displacement member by restricting the general displacement. In this case, since the displacement direction when the main body member is arranged at the first position and the rotation direction of the rotating member are set substantially parallel to each other, the main body member is arranged at the first position and the second position from the first position. When displacing to the position, the rotating member can be rotated along with the displacement, so that it is possible to suppress the driving force required when displacing the main body member with respect to the base member.

  In the gaming machine D1, the rotating member is formed of an elastic body that is elastically deformable at least on the outer peripheral surface side.

  According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine D1, the rotating member is formed of an elastic body that can be elastically deformed at least on the outer peripheral surface side, so that the abutting member contacts the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member. In this case, the outer peripheral surface side of the rotating member can be elastically deformed, and the rotating member can be easily held by the contact member. Thereby, it is difficult to rotate the rotating member and the relative displacement of the main body member with respect to the base member can be restricted, so that rattling of the main body member with respect to the base member accompanying the displacement of the displacement member can be suppressed.

  The elastic body is preferably a viscoelastic body exemplified by rubber or urethane. In this case, the vibration damping function can perform a vibration damping function or a vibration insulating function for attenuating and insulating vibration input from the main body member to the base member as the displacement member is displaced. This is because wear and failure of various devices installed, loosening of the fastening portion, and the like can be suppressed. In particular, when the displacement member is periodically displaced (for example, when it is rotated at a relatively high speed in order to function as a versatile writer), vibration with a relatively small amplitude and high frequency is generated from the main body member to the base member. Therefore, it is particularly effective to employ a viscoelastic body.

  In the gaming machine D1 or D2, the rotating member is formed so as to be displaceable in a radial direction, and one of the base member and the main body member has the main body member disposed at the first position. A gaming machine D3 comprising a facing member that is opposed to the abutting member and is opposed to the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member so as to be able to abut.

  According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D1 or D2, the rotating member is formed to be displaceable in the radial direction, and one of the base member and the main body member has the main body member disposed at the first position. In this state, since the counter member is disposed so as to face the abutting member with the rotating member interposed therebetween, and opposed to the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member so as to come into contact with the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member, When the abutting member is brought into contact with the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member due to rattling, the outer peripheral surface on the opposite side of the rotating member can be brought into contact with the opposing member. That is, the rotating member can be sandwiched between the contact member and the opposing member. Thereby, it is difficult to rotate the rotating member and the relative displacement of the main body member with respect to the base member can be restricted, so that rattling of the main body member with respect to the base member accompanying the displacement of the displacement member can be suppressed.

  In addition, as a form which can displace the rotating member in the radial direction, for example, a form in which a shaft that rotatably supports the rotating member is formed to be displaceable in a radial direction, and a shaft that rotatably supports the rotating member. The outer diameter of the shaft is smaller than the inner diameter of the insertion hole of the rotating member that receives the shaft, and the outer diameter of the shaft fixed to the rotating member is smaller than one of the insertion holes of the main body member or the base member that receives the shaft. The form etc. which are made are illustrated.

  The gaming machine D3 includes a shaft fixed to one of the base member or the main body member, and the rotating member is formed from an elastic body in a cross-sectional annular shape having a shaft support hole through which the shaft is inserted on the inner peripheral side. The gaming machine D4 is characterized in that the radial displacement of the rotating member is formed by elastic deformation of the elastic body.

  According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine D3, the radial displacement of the rotating member is formed by elastic deformation of the elastic body, so that the base of the main body member accompanying the displacement of the displacement member When the rotating member is sandwiched between the abutting member and the opposing member due to rattling with respect to the member, the contact member and the opposing member are rotated using the elastic recovery force of the rotating member (elastic body). It is possible to easily hold the member more firmly. Thereby, it is difficult to rotate the rotating member and the relative displacement of the main body member with respect to the base member can be restricted, so that rattling of the main body member with respect to the base member accompanying the displacement of the displacement member can be suppressed.

  In addition, as described above, the radial displacement of the rotating member is performed using the elastic deformation of the elastic body, so that the shaft inserted through the shaft support hole of the rotating member can be moved in the radial direction. There is no need to form the shaft, and the shaft can be formed as a shaft fixed to one of the base member and the main body member. Thereby, the structure can be simplified, and the durability can be improved and the product cost can be reduced.

  In any one of the gaming machines D1 to D4, one of the base member and the main body member is provided with a pair of the rotating members, and the pair of rotating members is used when the main body member is disposed at the first position. A gaming machine D5, wherein the gaming machines D5 are arranged side by side at a predetermined interval in the displacement direction.

  According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines D1 to D4, a pair of rotating members are disposed on one of the base member or the main body member, and the main body member of the pair of rotating members is the first one. Since they are arranged side by side with a predetermined interval in the displacement direction when they are arranged at one position, the main body accompanying the displacement of the displacement member while suppressing the driving force required to displace the main body member relative to the base member Shaking of the member with respect to the base member can be effectively suppressed.

  That is, when the contact member is brought into contact with the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member, the relative displacement of the main body member with respect to the base member is restricted, and only one rotating member is contacted with the contact member. If the rotating member rotates, the abutting member may tilt, and the tilting of the abutting member accompanying the rotation of the rotating member is a cause of rattling of the main body member with respect to the base member due to the displacement of the displacing member. Become.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D5, the pair of rotating members are arranged side by side with a predetermined interval, so that the abutting member contacts the pair of rotating members at two positions with a predetermined interval. Therefore, it can contact | abut without rotating a rotation member, and it can suppress that a contact member inclines. As a result, rattling of the main body member with respect to the base member due to the displacement of the displacement member can be effectively suppressed.

  In any one of the gaming machines D1 to D5, the contact member is on the side that receives the rotating member when the main body member is disposed at the first position on the contact surface with which the rotating member is contacted. The gaming machine D6 is characterized in that an inclined surface that is inclined downward as the distance from the contact surface is formed at the end.

  According to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effect exerted by any of the gaming machines D1 to D5, the contact member is arranged when the main body member of the contact surface with which the rotating member is contacted is disposed at the first position. Since an inclined surface that is inclined downward as the distance from the abutment surface is formed at the end portion on the side that receives the rotating member, when the main body member is disposed at the first position, the inclined surface is used, The rotating member can be guided to the contact surface of the contact member. Thereby, the driving force required when arranging the main body member at the first position can be suppressed.

  In any one of the gaming machines D1 to D6, the rotating member is disposed on the base member, and the abutting member is disposed on the main body member.

  According to the gaming machine D7, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines D1 to D6, the rotating member is disposed on the base member and the abutting member is disposed on the main body member, so that the weight is relatively high. Since it is not necessary to dispose a bulky rotating member, the main body member can be reduced in weight, and the driving force required for the displacement of the main body member can be suppressed. Moreover, when suppressing the shakiness with respect to the base member of the main body member accompanying the displacement of the displacement member, the shading can be easily suppressed by reducing the weight of the main body member on the vibration source side.

  In any one of the gaming machines D1 to D7, the displacement member is rotatably disposed on the main body member, and a rotation surface of the displacement member is in contact with the rotation member of the contact member And a rotation axis of the rotating member, respectively, and a gaming machine D8.

  According to the gaming machine D8, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines D1 to D7, the displacement member is rotatably disposed on the main body member, and the rotation plane of the displacement member is the rotation member of the contact member. The driving force required for disposing the main body member at the first position and displacing from the first position to the second position is substantially parallel to the contact surface to be contacted and the rotation axis of the rotating member. It is possible to effectively suppress rattling of the main body member with respect to the base member due to displacement (rotation) of the displacement member.

  That is, since the displacement form of the displacement member is rotation, the main body member tilts the rotation plane of the displacement member due to the precession of the displacement member (movement in which the rotation shaft of the displacement member swings like a circle). It is vibrated in the mode (mode) to be made. Therefore, the rotation plane of the displacement member is substantially parallel to the contact surface of the contact member and the rotation axis of the rotation member, so that the contact surface of the contact member is orthogonal to the rotation axis of the rotation member. It can be pressed against the outer peripheral surface of the rotating member from the direction. As a result, when the main body member is arranged at the first position and when the main body member is displaced from the first position to the second position, the rotation member is rotated, thereby suppressing the driving force necessary for the displacement of the main body member. By the contact of the contact member with the outer peripheral surface of the rotation member, it is possible to effectively suppress rattling of the main body member with respect to the base member accompanying the displacement (rotation) of the displacement member.

  In any one of the gaming machines D1 to D8, the driving device includes a driving unit that generates a driving force, and a transmission unit that transmits the driving force to the main body member and displaces between the first position and the second position, The transmission means includes a rotating member that is rotated about the first axis by the driving force of the driving means, and a crank member having a pin portion that is eccentric from the first axis of the rotating body and protrudes from the rotating body; The pin portion of the crank member has a guide groove for sliding, and the pin portion slides along the guide groove so that the second shaft is rotated about the center of rotation and the main body member is moved along with the rotation. In a state where the main body member is disposed at the first position, a straight line connecting the first shaft of the crank member and the axis of the pin portion is connected to the second shaft of the arm member. Pin of the crank member Gaming machine D9, characterized in that it is substantially orthogonal to the straight line connecting the axis of.

  According to the gaming machine D9, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines D1 to D8, the shakiness of the main body member can be effectively suppressed.

  Here, in the present invention, the displacement direction when the main body member is arranged at the first position and the rotation direction of the rotating member are set to be substantially parallel. Therefore, if the shaky direction of the main body member at the first position is a direction from the first position to the second position or vice versa, the rotating member is likely to rotate with respect to such a direction. The effect of suppressing rattling by the rotating member is hardly exhibited.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D9, in a state where the main body member is disposed at the first position, a straight line connecting the first shaft of the crank member and the axis of the pin portion is connected to the second shaft of the arm member and the crank. Since it is substantially orthogonal to a straight line connecting the axis of the pin portion of the member, even if the main body member attempts to rotate the arm member by the displacement, a force component in the direction of rotating the crank member is not formed ( That is, a dead point) can be formed. That is, shakiness of the main body member in the direction from the first position to the second position or vice versa can be suppressed. Thereby, even if the direction of rattling of the main body member is the direction from the first position to the second position or vice versa (that is, the direction in which the rotating member is easy to rotate), the crank member and the arm member are dead points. By forming, rattling of the main body member can be effectively suppressed.

<About the concept of the invention taking the restriction unit 490 as an example>
A gaming machine having a rotating display device that has a plurality of light emitting means and performs afterimage display by an afterimage effect by blinking the light emitting means according to a rotation position, wherein the rotation display device includes the plurality of light emitting means. Are arranged, a main body member that accommodates the substrate, and a base member that rotatably supports the main body member, and the substrate has a surface on which the light emitting means is mounted on the surface of the main body member. The gaming machine E1 is housed in the main body member in a posture substantially parallel to the rotation axis.

  Here, there is known a gaming machine including a rotation display device that has a plurality of light emitting means (LEDs) and performs afterimage display by an afterimage effect by blinking the light emitting means according to the rotation position (for example, JP, 2015-100385, JP, 2015-053968, etc.). However, in the above-described conventional technology, the posture of the substrate is a posture in which the surface on which the light emitting unit is mounted is orthogonal to the rotation axis (that is, a rotation plane in which the irradiation direction of the light emitting unit is directed to the front side (player side)). Therefore, the outer shape in the front view (viewed in the rotation axis direction) is increased. For this reason, there is a problem in that the visibility on the back side of the rotary display device is hindered in a state where the rotation of the rotary display device is stopped.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E1, the rotary display device includes a substrate on which a plurality of light emitting means are arranged, a main body member that accommodates the substrate, and a base member that rotatably supports the main body member. And the substrate is housed in the main body member in a posture in which the surface on which the light emitting means is mounted is substantially parallel to the rotation axis of the main body member, and thus suppresses the outer shape of the main body member in a front view (viewed in the rotation axis direction) be able to. As a result, in the state where the rotation of the rotary display device (main body member) is stopped, the visibility on the back side of the main body member can be improved.

  In the gaming machine E1, the rotary display device includes a facing member disposed to face a surface of the substrate on which the light emitting means is mounted.

  According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine E1, the rotary display device includes a facing member disposed to face the surface on which the light emitting means of the substrate is mounted, so that the light emitted from the light emitting means is opposed. It can be reflected by the member and emitted to the front side (player side) of the rotary display device. Therefore, even when the substrate is positioned so that the surface on which the light emitting means is mounted is substantially parallel to the rotation axis, the player can visually recognize the light (flashing) of the light emitting means and display an afterimage by the afterimage effect. Can do.

  In the gaming machine E2, the facing member includes a plurality of recesses that are recessed in a surface facing the substrate and extend in a groove shape substantially parallel to the rotation axis of the main body member. The gaming machine E3, wherein the plurality of light emitting means are faced each other.

  According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine E2, the opposing member is recessed on the surface facing the substrate and extends in a groove shape substantially parallel to the rotation axis of the main body member. Since the plurality of light emitting means face each of the plurality of concave portions, the light emitted from the plurality of light emitting means respectively passes through the plurality of concave portions of the opposing member, and the front side of the rotary display device (game) To the person side). That is, since the light emitted from each light emitting means can be emitted in a state of being partitioned by the respective concave portions, it is possible to clearly define the light separation of each light emitting means. As a result, the outline of the afterimage display by the afterimage effect can be clarified.

  In the gaming machine E3, the concave portion of the facing member includes an end partition wall that partitions an end portion opposite to the front side of the rotary display device.

  According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E3, the concave portion of the facing member includes the end partition wall that partitions the end opposite to the front side of the rotary display device, so that light is emitted from the light emitting means. The light applied to the concave portion of the opposing member can be reflected by the end partition wall and emitted to the front side (player side) of the rotary display device. Therefore, the intensity of afterimage display light due to the afterimage effect can be increased.

  In the gaming machine E4, the end partition wall of the recess is inclined in a direction away from the light emitting means toward the front side of the rotary display device, and the light emitting means is at a position facing the end partition wall of the recess. A gaming machine E5 that is arranged.

  According to the gaming machine E5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E4, the end partition wall of the recess is inclined in a direction away from the light emitting means toward the front side of the rotary display device. Since it is disposed at a position facing the wall, the light emitted from the light emitting means can be applied to the end partition wall, so that stronger light can be emitted to the front side (player side) of the rotary display device. it can. Therefore, the intensity of afterimage display light due to the afterimage effect can be increased.

  In any one of the gaming machines E3 to E5, a gaming machine E6 is characterized in that a part of the inner surface of the concave portion of the facing member is formed as an uneven surface.

  According to the gaming machine E6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines E3 to E5, the concave portion of the opposing member is formed with a part of its inner surface as an uneven surface, so that the light emitted from the light emitting means is The light can be emitted to the front side (player side) of the rotary display device in a state of being irregularly reflected by the uneven surface and uniformly dispersed. That is, it can suppress that the light radiate | emitted from the opening of a recessed part is visually recognized in the state biased to a part of the opening.

  In addition, the unevenness | corrugation of an uneven surface may be a surface which consists only of a convex (protrusion), and may be a surface which consists only of a concave (dent). The convex or concave may be extended as a strip or a groove. Further, the convex and concave cross-sectional shapes may be any of a circle, an ellipse, a polygon, and a combination of these. That is, as long as a portion higher than the reference position and a portion lower than the reference position are formed, a plurality of portions (surfaces) capable of reflecting light are formed, and irregular reflection is possible, the shape of the unevenness is arbitrary.

  In the gaming machine E6, the uneven surface is not formed in a predetermined range from an end portion on the front side of the rotary display device among the inner surfaces of the concave portions of the opposing member, and the inner surface of the predetermined range is The gaming machine E7 is formed as a smoother surface than the uneven surface.

  According to the gaming machine E7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E6, the uneven surface is not formed in a predetermined range from the front side end of the rotary display device among the inner surfaces of the recesses of the opposing member, Since the inner surface of the predetermined range is formed as a smoother surface than the concavo-convex surface, light can be easily emitted toward the front side (player side) of the rotary display device, and afterimage display by the afterimage effect can be achieved. The intensity of light can be increased. That is, when a concavo-convex surface is formed within a predetermined range from the front side end of the concave portion of the opposing member, light is irregularly reflected by the concavo-convex surface, and the front side of the rotary display device ( The amount of light emitted toward the player side) is reduced, and the inner surface of the predetermined range is made smoother than the concavo-convex surface, thereby suppressing irregular reflection and the front side of the rotary display device. The light toward (player side) can be increased.

  In the gaming machine E7, the predetermined range in which the uneven surface is not formed has a cross-sectional area of the inner surface that increases toward the front end of the rotary display device. E8.

  According to the gaming machine E8, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine E7, the predetermined area where the uneven surface is not formed increases the cross-sectional area of the inner surface toward the front end of the rotary display device. Therefore, the light emitted toward the front side (player side) of the rotary display device can be widened. That is, the area visually recognized as the light emitting region can be larger than the area of the light emitting surface (irradiation surface) of the light emitting means. Therefore, the light emitting means can be reduced in size.

  In any one of the gaming machines E6 to E8, the concave portions of the facing members are arranged in a row, and the concave and convex surfaces arranged radially away from the rotation axis of the main body member, The gaming machine E9 is characterized in that the length of the main body member in the direction along the rotation axis is increased.

  According to the gaming machine E9, in addition to the effects exerted by any of the gaming machines E6 to E8, the concave portion of the opposing member is closer to the concave and convex surface disposed radially outward from the rotation axis of the main body member. Since the length dimension in the direction along the rotation axis of the member is increased, the lightness (light brightness) of each of the plurality of recesses can be made uniform.

  That is, in the rotary display device, the displacement speed (peripheral speed) increases from the rotation axis (rotation center) to the outer side in the radial direction. Therefore, when the light emitting means arranged in a row emit light with the same brightness, The light emitted from the light emitting means closer to the axis appears to be brighter (brighter) than the light emitted from the light emitting means farther from the rotation axis (outward in the radial direction).

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E9, the concave and convex surfaces disposed away from the rotation axis of the main body member in the radial direction increase the length dimension along the rotation axis of the main body member. The concave portion (light emitting means) that is spaced radially outward from the rotation axis of the main body member increases the irregular reflection by the uneven surface (that is, reduces the proportion of light directly visible to the player from the light emitting means). It can be visually recognized as light with high brightness. As a result, it is possible to suppress the difference in brightness as viewed with eyes at the radial positions, and to make the brightness (light brightness) uniform.

  In any one of the gaming machines E3 to E9, a cover member that is covered with a front end portion of the rotary display device in the concave portion of the facing member and that is formed of a light transmissive material is provided. The gaming machine E10 is characterized in that an uneven surface is formed at least in a region facing the end of the recess.

  According to the gaming machine E10, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines E3 to E9, a cover that is formed on the front end of the rotary display device in the concave portion of the opposing member and is formed from a light transmissive material. The cover member is provided with a concavo-convex surface at least in a region facing the end of the concave portion, and after irregularly reflecting light by the concavo-convex surface, the front side (player side) of the rotary display device ). That is, since the emitted light can be broadened, the area visually recognized as the light emitting region can be made larger than the area of the light emitting surface (irradiated surface) of the light emitting means. Therefore, the light emitting means can be reduced in size.

  In any one of the gaming machines E3 to E10, a plate-like interposed member is provided between the substrate and the opposing member, and the interposed member includes the plurality of light emitting means, the plurality of recessed portions, and the like. A gaming machine E11, comprising a through-hole formed at a position to pass through.

  According to the gaming machine E11, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines E3 to E10, the gaming machine E11 includes a plate-like interposed member interposed between the substrate and the opposing member, and the interposed member includes a plurality of interposed members. Since a through-hole is formed at a position where the light emitting means and the plurality of concave portions are passed through, the light of each light emitting means is reliably incident on the corresponding concave portion, and is prevented from entering (leaking) adjacent concave portions. it can. As a result, the light emitted from each light emitting means can be emitted only from the corresponding concave portion, and the outer shape of the afterimage display by the afterimage effect can be clarified.

  In addition, according to the gaming machine E11, the structure that allows the light of the light emitting means to enter the corresponding recess through the through hole is formed from the two members of the opposing member and the interposed member. The structure can be simplified as compared with the case where it is constituted by members. Therefore, the product cost can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine E11, the intervention member includes a seat portion that contacts the light emitting means, and the through hole is formed in the seat portion.

  According to the gaming machine E12, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine E11, the interposed member includes a seat portion that comes into contact with the light emitting means, and the through hole is formed in the seat portion. Can be easily incident on the through hole, and leakage from the through hole can be suppressed. As a result, the intensity of the afterimage display light due to the afterimage effect can be increased. Further, since the seat portion is brought into contact with the light emitting means, it is possible to suppress the light of the adjacent light emitting means from being incident on the through-hole, so that the outer shape of the afterimage display by the afterimage effect can be clarified.

  In the gaming machine E12, the irradiation surface of the light emitting means is formed in a circular shape when viewed from the front, and the through hole is formed in a cross-sectional circle having an inner diameter substantially the same as the outer diameter of the irradiation surface. Are arranged concentrically, a gaming machine E13.

  According to the gaming machine E13, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E12, the irradiation surface of the light emitting means is formed in a circular shape when viewed from the front, and the through hole is formed in a circular cross section having an inner diameter substantially the same as the outer diameter of the irradiation surface. Since the irradiation surface and the through hole are formed concentrically, the light emitted from the light emitting means can be efficiently incident on the recess through the through hole.

  In the gaming machine E13, the inner diameter of the through hole is increased from the substrate side toward the opposing member.

  According to the gaming machine E14, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E13, the inner diameter of the through hole is increased from the substrate side toward the opposing member, so that the light emitted from the light emitting means is passed through the through hole. It can be made to enter efficiently into a crevice via. Moreover, since the area contact | abutted to the light emission means can be ensured, it can suppress that the light of each light emission means leaks out of a through-hole. As a result, the intensity of the afterimage display light due to the afterimage effect can be increased.

  In any one of the gaming machines E12 to E14, the seat portion is formed so as to protrude from a surface of the interposed member facing the substrate.

  According to the gaming machine E15, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines E12 to E14, the seat portion is formed to protrude from the surface of the interposed member that faces the substrate. A space can be formed between the member and the heat generated by the operation of the light emitting means can be radiated.

  In the gaming machine E15, the interposition member includes a groove-like groove portion that is recessed in a surface facing the substrate and extends along a base portion of the seat portion.

  According to the gaming machine E16, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E15, the opposing member includes a groove-like groove that is recessed in the surface facing the substrate and extends along the base of the seat. The heat dissipation effect can be enhanced while ensuring the rigidity of the interposed member. That is, by forming a groove-like groove portion extending along the base portion of the seat portion, the region recessed in the interposed member is minimized, and the rigidity of the interposed member is ensured while the light emitting means is secured. The space can be expanded to a portion where heat generated by the operation is particularly concentrated, and the heat dissipation effect can be enhanced.

  In the gaming machine E15 or E16, the seat is connected to the adjacent seat and the outer peripheral surfaces of each other.

  According to the gaming machine E17, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E15 or E16, the seat portion is connected to the adjacent seat portion and the outer peripheral surfaces of each other, so that the rigidity of the interposed member can be increased.

  In this case, the outer peripheral surface of the seat part may be circular, and the adjacent seat part and the outer peripheral surfaces may be connected to each other. As a result, since the outer shape of the group in which the plurality of seats are connected is formed in an uneven shape, the rigidity of the interposed member is increased by using the unevenness of the outer shape while securing a space and enhancing the heat dissipation effect. Can increase.

<Concept of Invention with Distribution Device 4700 as an Example>
In a gaming machine comprising: a passage member that forms a passage through which a ball can pass; and first privilege granting means that is disposed downstream of the passage member and that grants a predetermined privilege as the ball passes. An opening is formed in the side wall of the passage member on the upstream side of the first privilege granting unit so that a ball can pass through the opening, and a ball that has flowed out of the opening into the game area is formed so as to pass therethrough. A gaming machine F1, comprising: a second privilege granting means for granting a predetermined privilege as the game passes.

  Here, a gaming machine including a passage member that forms a passage through which a ball can pass is known (for example, JP-A-2015-97764). A sensor device that detects the passage of the sphere of the passage member is disposed on the downstream side of the passage member. When the passage of the sphere is detected by the sensor device, a predetermined privilege is given. However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the passage member only has a function of guiding the sphere toward the downstream side (sensor device), and the space required for the arrangement is increased, while the game is provided with interest. There was a problem that it was difficult to do.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine F1, when the ball guided by the passage member passes through the first privilege granting means, a predetermined privilege is given by the first privilege granting means. In this case, an opening is formed in the side wall of the passage member on the upstream side of the first privilege granting unit so that the ball can pass through, and a ball that has flowed out from the opening to the game area is formed to be able to pass through. And a second privilege granting means for granting a predetermined privilege as the ball passes, so that a form in which the ball flows out from the opening to the game area can be formed in the middle of guiding the passage member. Can pass a 2nd privilege provision means, a 2nd privilege provision means can provide a predetermined | prescribed privilege. Thereby, not only the form in which the ball guided by the passage member passes through the first privilege giving means, but also the form that flows out from the opening to the game area, and further, the outflowed ball passes through the second privilege giving means. Forms can be formed and entertainment can be given to games.

  The second privilege granting means may be disposed at a position where all of the balls that have flowed out from the opening to the gaming area can be received, or depending on the state of the balls that have flowed out from the opening into the gaming area. Some spheres may be received and some spheres may not be received.

  Further, the privilege granted by the first privilege granting unit and the privilege granted by the second privilege granting unit may be the same privilege or different privileges.

  In the gaming machine F1, the passage member includes a bent portion formed in a part of the passage member, and the opening is formed in a side wall of the bent portion.

  Here, by forming the bent portion in a part of the passage member, the direction in which the sphere is sent can be changed, so that the degree of freedom in layout can be increased. However, if a bent portion is formed in a part of the passage member, the flow of the sphere in the bent portion is likely to stagnate. Therefore, when passing through the bent part in a state where a plurality of spheres are connected, the sphere following the preceding sphere catches up, and the sphere following the preceding sphere presses against the side wall so that both cannot roll. There was a problem that ball clogging occurred.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine F2, since the passage member has an opening formed in the side wall of the bent portion, when passing through the bent portion in a state where a plurality of spheres are connected, the passage member is behind the preceding sphere. Even if the moving ball catches up, it is difficult to press the preceding ball against the side wall, and the rolling of both can be easily continued. As a result, the occurrence of ball clogging can be suppressed.

  The bent portion is formed by a first portion of the passage member and a second portion that is connected to the downstream side of the first portion and has a direction in which the passing direction of the sphere is different. Means the range. In this case, each of the first portion and the second portion may be a linearly extending passage, a curvedly extending passage, or these. It may be a passage with a combination of

  The gaming machine F2 includes a game board in which a game area is formed on the front side, and at least a portion of the bent portion of the passage member in which the opening is formed is disposed on the front side of the game board. Characteristic gaming machine F3.

  According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F2, at least a portion of the bent portion of the passage member where the opening is formed is disposed on the front side of the game board. When a ball clogging occurs, by opening the glass plate, the ball clogged in the bent portion can be accessed from the opening on the front side of the game board. Therefore, it is possible to improve the workability of the work for eliminating the ball clogging. Further, when the game ball flows out from the opening of the passage member to the game area, it is possible to make the player visually recognize the outflow mode, so that the interest of the game can be enhanced.

  In gaming machine F3, gaming machine F4 is characterized in that at least the entrance for the second privilege grant means is arranged on the front side of the gaming board.

  According to the gaming machine F4, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine F3, at least the entrance of the second privilege means is arranged on the front side of the gaming board, so that the gaming ball flows out from the opening of the passage member to the gaming area. In doing so, the player can visually recognize the manner in which the spilled ball enters the entrance of the second privilege granting means, so that the interest of the game can be enhanced.

  In any one of the gaming machines F1 to F4, the second privilege granting means is connected to the passage member, and a connection passage is provided for guiding the ball that has passed through the second privilege granting means to the passage member. The gaming machine F5 is connected to the passage member on the upstream side of the first privilege granting means.

  According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines F1 to F4, the second privilege granting means is connected to the passage member, and a connection passage is provided for guiding the ball that has passed through the second privilege granting means to the passage member. The connecting passage is connected to the passage member on the upstream side of the first privilege giving means, so that the ball flows out from the opening to the game area while the passage member is being guided, When the 2 privilege grant means passes, the ball can be guided to the passage member through the connection passage, and the first privilege grant means can be passed. Therefore, in addition to the grant of the privilege by the 2nd privilege grant means, the grant of the privilege by a 1st privilege grant means can also be performed, and the interest of a game can be raised.

  In any one of the gaming machines F1 to F5, there is provided a distribution unit that alternately distributes the balls that have entered the ball into one and the other, and the passage members are provided in a pair, and one of the pair of passage members is the vibration member. A gaming machine F6 connected to one of the distribution means and the other connected to the other of the distribution means.

  According to the gaming machine F6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines F1 to F5, the gaming machine F6 includes sorting means that alternately distributes the balls that have entered the ball to one and the other, and a pair of passage members are provided, Since one of the passage members is connected to one of the distribution means and the other is connected to the other of the distribution means, it is possible to make the balls enter the passage member one by one. That is, since it is possible to suppress a plurality of balls from entering the passage member in a row, clogging of the balls in the passage member can be suppressed.

  One of the gaming machines A1 to A10, B1 to B10, C1 to C9, D1 to D9, E1 to E17, and F1 to F6, the gaming machine is a slot machine. Above all, the basic configuration of the slot machine is “equipped with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and for operating the starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. The game machine is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the confirmed identification information is specific identification information. In this case, examples of the game media include coins and medals.

  One of the gaming machines A1 to A10, B1 to B10, C1 to C9, D1 to D9, E1 to E17, and F1 to F6, the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Above all, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and a ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in an operation port disposed at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning (or passing through the operating port), the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is determined and stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) disposed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner so that a ball can be won, and a value corresponding to the number of winnings is obtained. Examples include those to which values (including data written on magnetic cards as well as premium balls) are given.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A10, B1 to B10, C1 to C9, D1 to D9, E1 to E17, and F1 to F6, the gaming machine is a fusion of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Characteristic gaming machine K3. Among them, the basic configuration of the merged gaming machine includes “a variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to the operation of the identification information, the change of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. Special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stoppage is specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium, and the identification information The game machine is configured such that a predetermined number of balls are required at the start of the dynamic display, and a large number of balls are paid out when the special gaming state occurs.
<Others>
In gaming machines such as pachinko machines, gaming machines having a plurality of light emitting means (LEDs) and having a rotation display device that displays an afterimage by an afterimage effect by blinking the light emitting means according to the rotation position are known. (Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication Nos. 2015-100385 and 2015-053968).
However, the gaming machine described above has a problem that it is difficult to cool the light emitting means when the light emitting means is accommodated in the main body member.
The present technical idea has been made to solve the above-described problems, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of cooling the heat generated when the light emitting means operates.
<Means>
In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1 includes a rotating display device that has a plurality of light emitting means and performs afterimage display by an afterimage effect by blinking the light emitting means according to the rotation position. The rotary display device includes a substrate on which the plurality of light emitting units are arranged, a main body member that accommodates the substrate, and a base member that pivotally supports the main body member, The main body member includes a transmission part that transmits light of the light emitting means, and a plurality of through holes that are formed through a side wall facing the rotation direction.
The gaming machine described in the technical idea 2 is the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, wherein the main body member is formed in a container-like shape with an open back side.
The gaming machine described in the technical idea 3 is the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, wherein the main body member is formed in a rectangular shape in a front view that is a long shape along a diameter direction in a rotation plane of the main body member, The front wall that forms the front side is formed in a curved shape that recedes toward the back side toward the end in the longitudinal direction.
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, the heat generated when the light emitting means operates can be cooled.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, it is possible to cool the heat generated when the light emitting means operates.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 3, in addition to the effect exhibited by the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, it is possible to cool the heat generated when the light emitting unit operates.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
13 game board 81 3rd symbol display device (liquid crystal display device)
416 Shaft support (second shaft)
417 Protrusion (first axis)
430 Displacement member (arm member)
431 Drive side sliding hole (sliding groove)
441 Drive motor (drive means)
443 Transmission gear (crank member)
443a Protrusion (pin part)
450 Decoration member (displacement member)
452 Front base (main body member)
452h Contact surface (contact member)
491c bulging part (opposing member)
492 Roller member (Rotating member)
492b Shaft (shaft)
500 Rotating unit (Rotating display device)
510 Upper surface base (part of main body member , side wall )
512, 522 Ventilation hole (through hole)
520 Lower surface base (part of main body member , side wall )
531 base member (base plate)
532 LED (light emitting means)
540 Intermediate plate (intermediate member)
543 Irradiation hole (through hole)
544 Irradiation Restriction Department (seat)
546 Groove 550 Front cover ( part of main body member, transmission part, cover member)
560 Reflector (opposing member)
563a Inclined surface (opposing member)
570 Rotation transmission unit (base member, shaft member)
610 frame (center frame)
621 Cover member (front member)
621a First part 621b Second part 630 Sensor (sensor device)
640a Second winning device (winning device)
740 Passage member (bending member)
742 Guide part (inclined surface)
743 Lower protrusion (bent part)
744 opening KR1 first pitching path (vertical passage)
KR2 Second pitching path (extended path)
KR3 3rd pitching route (part of inclined passage)
KR4 4th pitching route (part of inclined passage)

Claims (3)

In a gaming machine having a rotation display device that has a plurality of light emitting means and performs afterimage display by an afterimage effect by blinking the light emitting means according to the rotation position.
The rotary display device includes a substrate on which the plurality of light emitting units are arranged, a main body member that accommodates the substrate, and a base member that pivotally supports the main body member,
The game machine according to claim 1, wherein the main body member includes a transmission portion that transmits light of the light emitting means, and a plurality of through holes formed through the side wall facing the rotation direction.   The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the main body member is formed in a container shape having an open back side.   The main body member is formed in a rectangular shape in front view that is a long shape along the diametrical direction in the rotation plane of the main body member, and the front wall that forms the front side is curved so as to recede toward the back side toward the end in the longitudinal direction. The gaming machine according to claim 2, wherein the gaming machine is formed in a shape.

Images